Manual Mitsubishi fx3g

FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
USER'S MANUAL
Analog Control Edition
Voltage / Current Input

FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3UC-4AD
Voltage / Current Output
FX3G-1DA-BD
FX3U-4DA
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Voltage / Current
Input / Output Mixture
FX3U-3A-ADP
Temperature Sensor Input
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
Safety Precautions
(Read these precautions before use.)
Before installation, operation, maintenance or inspection of this product, thoroughly read through and
understand this manual and all of the associated manuals. Also, take care to handle the module properly and
safely.
This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories: and .
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Depending on the circumstances, procedures indicated by may also cause severe injury.
It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety.
Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary. Always forward it
to the end user.
1. DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during
external power supply problems or PLC failure.
Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents.
1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for
opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the
equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits).
2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all
outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output
control block, output control may be disabled.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply for sensors varies depending on the model
and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs
in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or
off.
For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to
ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
• Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line.
As a guideline, lay the control line 100mm(3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line.
Noise may cause malfunctions.
• Make sure to ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable connected to an analog input expansion board,
special analog input adapter, or special function block at one point on the PLC.
However, do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.
• Make sure to ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable connected to an analog output expansion
board, special analog output adapter, or special function block at one point on the analog device side.
• Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to the power connectors or terminal blocks.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.
(1)
Safety Precautions
2. WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
• Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.
If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn
out.
• Do not wire vacant terminals externally.
Doing so may damage the product.
• Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100Ω or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit.
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.
• When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits.
Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
• Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise:
- Do not bundle the power line or shield of the analog input/output cable together with or lay it close to the main
circuit, high-voltage line, or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit, high-voltage line, or load line.
- Ground the shield of the analog input/output cable at one point on the signal receiving side.
• Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
• Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less).
Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
(2)
Safety Precautions
3. STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
• Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.

Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions.
• Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
• Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual
and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.
An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.
• Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time. (i.e. from
a programming tool and a GOT)
Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program.
• Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.

Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
• Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
• Turn of the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the peripheral devices, expansion boards, special
adapters, and extension blocks.
(3)
Safety Precautions
MEMO
(4)
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series
Programmable Controllers
User's Manual [Analog Control Edition]
Manual number JY997D16701

Manual revision P
Date 8/2016
Foreword
This manual describes the "analog" function of the MELSEC-F FX Series programmable controllers and
should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
1
Outline Precautions
• This manual provides information for the use of the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable
Controllers. The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel. The definition of
such a person or persons is as follows;
1) Any engineer who is responsible for the planning, design and construction of automatic equipment
using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature, trained and qualified
to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role. These engineers should be fully aware of
all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment.
2) Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to the
local and national standards required to fulfill that job. These engineers should also be trained in the
use and maintenance of the completed product. This includes being completely familiar with all
associated documentation for the said product. All maintenance should be carried out in accordance
with established safety practices.
3) All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and
coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices. The operators should also be
familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment.
Note: The term 'completed equipment' refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses
the product associated with this manual
• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been
designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
• Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine
or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product
where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe
functions in the system.
• When combining this product with other products, please confirm the standard and the code, or regulations
with which the user should follow. Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system,
machine, and apparatus with which a user is using.
• If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical
engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards. If in doubt about the operation or
use, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
• Since the examples indicated by this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as a reference,
please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will
accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples.
• This manual content, specification etc. may be changed without a notice for improvement.
• The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you
have noticed a doubtful point, a doubtful error, etc., please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric
representative.
Registration
• Phillips is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company.
• The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or
trademarks of each company.
2
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents
Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................. (1)
A. Common Items
1. Introduction A-1
1.1 Outline and Features of Analog Control.......................................................................................A-1

1.1.1 Analog input control......................................................................................................................A-2
1.1.2 Analog output control....................................................................................................................A-3
1.1.3 Temperature sensor input control.................................................................................................A-4
2. Description of Analog Products A-5
2.1 Types of Analog Products ............................................................................................................A-5

2.1.1 Expansion board...........................................................................................................................A-5
2.1.2 Special adapter.............................................................................................................................A-6
2.1.3 Special function block...................................................................................................................A-9
2.2 List of Analog Product Models ...................................................................................................A-11
2.2.1 Expansion board.........................................................................................................................A-11
2.2.2 Special adapter...........................................................................................................................A-11
2.2.3 Special function block.................................................................................................................A-12
3. System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products A-15
3.1 FX3S Series PLC .......................................................................................................................A-15

3.1.1 Connection of expansion boards, special adapters...................................................................A-15
3.2 FX3G Series PLC .......................................................................................................................A-16
3.2.1 Connection of expansion boards, special adapters...................................................................A-16
3.2.2 Connection of special function blocks ........................................................................................A-18
3.3 FX3GC Series PLC.....................................................................................................................A-19
3.3.1 Connection of special adapters ..................................................................................................A-19
3.4 FX3U Series PLC .......................................................................................................................A-21
3.5 FX3UC Series PLC .....................................................................................................................A-23
4. Comparison of Performance Specifications A-27
4.1 Analog Input ...............................................................................................................................A-27

4.1.1 FX3U-4AD-ADP ..........................................................................................................................A-27
4.1.2 FX2N-2AD...................................................................................................................................A-28
4.1.3 FX3U-4AD...................................................................................................................................A-29
4.1.4 FX2N-4AD...................................................................................................................................A-30
4.1.5 FX3UC-4AD ................................................................................................................................A-31
4.1.6 FX2NC-4AD ................................................................................................................................A-32
4.1.7 FX2N-8AD...................................................................................................................................A-33
4.1.8 FX3G-2AD-BD ............................................................................................................................A-34
4.2 Analog Output ............................................................................................................................A-35
4.2.1 FX3U-4DA-ADP ..........................................................................................................................A-35
4.2.2 FX2N-2DA...................................................................................................................................A-36
4.2.3 FX3U-4DA...................................................................................................................................A-37
4.2.4 FX2N-4DA...................................................................................................................................A-38
4.2.5 FX2NC-4DA ................................................................................................................................A-39
3
4.2.6 FX3G-1DA-BD ............................................................................................................................A-40

4.3 Mixed Analog Input/Output.........................................................................................................A-41
4.3.1 FX3U-3A-ADP.............................................................................................................................A-41
4.3.2 FX2N-5A .....................................................................................................................................A-42
4.3.3 FX0N-3A .....................................................................................................................................A-44
4.4 Temperature Sensor Input .........................................................................................................A-45
4.4.1 FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP ....................................................................................................................A-45
4.4.2 FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP.................................................................................................................A-46
4.4.3 FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP .................................................................................................................A-47
4.4.4 FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP ....................................................................................................................A-48
4.4.5 FX2N-4AD-PT.............................................................................................................................A-49
4.4.6 FX2N-4AD-TC.............................................................................................................................A-50
4.4.7 FX2N-8AD...................................................................................................................................A-51
4.4.8 FX2N-2LC ...................................................................................................................................A-52
4.4.9 FX3U-4LC ...................................................................................................................................A-53
5. Version Number A-54
5.1 PLC Main Unit ............................................................................................................................A-54

5.1.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method..............................................................................A-54
5.1.2 Version check .............................................................................................................................A-55
5.2 Special adapter ..........................................................................................................................A-56
5.2.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method..............................................................................A-56
6. Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment) A-57
6.1 How to Use the Manuals ............................................................................................................A-57

6.2 Description of Related Manuals .................................................................................................A-58
6.2.1 Analog control manuals ..............................................................................................................A-58
6.2.2 Manuals related to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC main unit ........................A-58
6.2.3 Manuals of analog units..............................................................................................................A-60
7. Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual A-62
4
B. FX3U-4AD (4-channel Analog Input)

FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input)
1. Outline B-3
1.1 Outline of Functions .....................................................................................................................B-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ................................................................................B-4
1.3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers .....................................................................................B-5
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number .........................................................................B-5
2. Specifications B-6
2.1 Generic Specifications .................................................................................................................B-6

2.2 Power Supply Specifications........................................................................................................B-7
2.3 Performance Specifications .........................................................................................................B-7
2.4 Input Mode (Characteristics) BFM#0 ...........................................................................................B-8
3. Wiring B-9
3.1 Terminal Layout .........................................................................................................................B-10

3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque......................................................................................B-11
3.2.1 Power cable (FX3UC-4AD) .........................................................................................................B-11
3.2.2 Cable (FX3U-4AD) ......................................................................................................................B-11
3.2.3 Cable (FX3UC-4AD)....................................................................................................................B-12
3.3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit .............................................................................................B-13
3.3.1 FX3U-4AD...................................................................................................................................B-13
3.3.2 FX3UC-4AD ................................................................................................................................B-14
3.3.3 Cautions regarding connection of power cables.........................................................................B-14
3.4 Analog Input Line .......................................................................................................................B-15
3.4.1 FX3U-4AD...................................................................................................................................B-15
3.4.2 FX3UC-4AD ................................................................................................................................B-16
3.5 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................B-16
4. Analog Input B-17
4.1 Analog Input Procedures............................................................................................................B-17
5. Buffer Memory (BFM) B-19
5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory .....................................................B-19

5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method ....................................................................................B-21
5.2.1 Buffer memory direct specification (FX3U/FX3UC PLC only)......................................................B-21
5.2.2 FROM/TO instruction (FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC) ...........................................................B-21
5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM) ..........................................................................................................B-22
5.4 Buffer Memory Details................................................................................................................B-26
5.4.1 BFM#0: Input mode specification ...............................................................................................B-26
5.4.2 BFM#2 to #5: Averaging time .....................................................................................................B-27
5.4.3 BFM#6 to #9: Digital filter setting................................................................................................B-28
5.4.4 BFM#10 to #13: Channel data....................................................................................................B-29
5.4.5 BFM#19: Data change disable ...................................................................................................B-30
5.4.6 BFM#20: Initialization function (resetting to factory default status) ............................................B-30
5.4.7 BFM#21: Input characteristics writing.........................................................................................B-30
5.4.8 BFM#22: Convenient function setting.........................................................................................B-31
5.4.9 BFM#26: Upper/lower limit error status ......................................................................................B-33
5.4.10 BFM#27: Abrupt change detection status ................................................................................B-34
5
5.4.11 BFM#28: Over-scale status ......................................................................................................B-35

5.4.12 BFM#29: Error status ...............................................................................................................B-36
5.4.13 BFM#30: Model code ...............................................................................................................B-37
5.4.14 BFM#41 to #44: Offset data / BFM#51 to #54: Gain data ........................................................B-37
5.4.15 BFM#61 to #64: Addition data ..................................................................................................B-38
5.4.16 BFM#71 to #74: Lower limit error setting / BFM#81 to #84: Upper limit error setting...............B-39
5.4.17 BFM#91 to #94: Abrupt change detection value setting...........................................................B-40
5.4.18 BFM#99: Clearance of upper/lower limit error data and abrupt change detection data ...........B-41
5.4.19 BFM#101 to #104: Minimum peak value / BFM#111 to #114: Maximum peak value ..............B-41
5.4.20 BFM#109: Minimum peak value resetting / BFM#119: Maximum peak value resetting...........B-42
5.4.21 BFM#125: Peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification............................B-42
5.4.22 BFM#126: Upper/lower error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification......B-43
5.4.23 BFM#127: Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer-to data register
specification..............................................................................................................................B-44
5.4.24 BFM#128: Over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register specification ................B-45
5.4.25 BFM#129: Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification..........................B-45
5.4.26 BFM#197: Selection of cyclic data update function (function for data history) .........................B-46
5.4.27 BFM#198: Data history sampling time setting ..........................................................................B-46
5.4.28 BFM#199: Data history resetting/stoppage ..............................................................................B-47
5.4.29 BFM#200 to #6999: Data history..............................................................................................B-48
6. Changing Input Characteristics B-49
6.1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics ...........................................................................B-49
7. Examples of Practical Programs B-52
7.1 Program That Uses Averaging Time..........................................................................................B-52

7.2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions ................................................................................B-54
7.3 Program That Uses Data History Function ................................................................................B-57
7.4 Initialization Program for 4AD (Factory Default).........................................................................B-60
8. Troubleshooting B-61
8.1 PLC Version Number Check ......................................................................................................B-61

8.2 Wiring Check..............................................................................................................................B-61
8.3 Program Check ..........................................................................................................................B-61
8.4 Error Status Check.....................................................................................................................B-62
8.5 4AD Initialization and Test Program...........................................................................................B-63
6
C. FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input)
1. Outline C-3
1.1 Outline of Functions .................................................................................................................... C-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ............................................................................... C-4
1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number .................................................................................... C-5
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ........................................................................ C-6
2. Specifications C-7
2.1 Generic Specifications ................................................................................................................ C-7

2.2 Power Supply Specifications....................................................................................................... C-8
2.3 Performance Specifications ........................................................................................................ C-8
2.4 A/D Conversion Time .................................................................................................................. C-9
2.4.1 When connected to a FX3S PLC ................................................................................................. C-9
2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G/FX3GC PLC .................................................................................. C-10
2.4.3 When connected to a FX3U/FX3UC PLC................................................................................... C-11
3. Wiring C-12
3.1 Terminal Layout ........................................................................................................................ C-13

3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ................................................................. C-14
3.3 Power Supply Line .................................................................................................................... C-15
3.3.1 To connect to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3U Series PLC ...................................................................... C-15
3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC ........................................................................... C-15
3.4 Analog Input Line ...................................................................................................................... C-16
3.5 Grounding ................................................................................................................................. C-16
4. Programming C-17
4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data............................................................................................... C-17

4.2 List of Special Devices .............................................................................................................. C-18
4.3 Switching of Input Mode............................................................................................................ C-20
4.4 Input Data.................................................................................................................................. C-21
4.5 Averaging Time ......................................................................................................................... C-22
4.6 Error Status ............................................................................................................................... C-23
4.7 Model Code............................................................................................................................... C-25
4.8 Basic Program Example............................................................................................................ C-26
5. Changing of Input Characteristics C-28
5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics................................................................ C-28
6. Troubleshooting C-31
6.1 PLC Version Number Check ..................................................................................................... C-31

6.2 Wiring Check............................................................................................................................. C-31
6.3 Special Device Check ............................................................................................................... C-32
6.4 Program Check ......................................................................................................................... C-32
6.5 Error Status Check.................................................................................................................... C-33
7
D. FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input)
1. Outline D-3
1.1 Outline of Functions .................................................................................................................... D-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ............................................................................... D-5
1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number .................................................................................... D-6
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ........................................................................ D-6
2. Specifications D-7
2.1 Generic Specifications ................................................................................................................ D-7

2.2 Performance Specifications ........................................................................................................ D-8
2.3 A/D Conversion Time .................................................................................................................. D-9
2.3.1 For FX3S Series PLC .................................................................................................................. D-9
2.3.2 For FX3G Series PLC ................................................................................................................ D-10
3. Wiring D-11
3.1 Terminal Layout ........................................................................................................................ D-12

3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ................................................................. D-13
3.3 Analog Input Line ...................................................................................................................... D-14
3.4 Grounding ................................................................................................................................. D-14
4. Programming D-15
4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data............................................................................................... D-15

4.2 List of Special Devices .............................................................................................................. D-16
4.3 Switching of Input Mode............................................................................................................ D-17
4.4 Input Data.................................................................................................................................. D-17
4.5 Averaging Time ......................................................................................................................... D-18
4.6 Error Status ............................................................................................................................... D-19
4.7 Model Code............................................................................................................................... D-21
4.8 Basic Program Example............................................................................................................ D-21
5. Changing of Input Characteristics D-22
5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics................................................................ D-22
6. Troubleshooting D-23
6.1 PLC Version Number Check ..................................................................................................... D-23

6.2 Checking Installation ................................................................................................................. D-23
6.3 Wiring Check............................................................................................................................. D-23
6.4 Special Device Check ............................................................................................................... D-23
6.5 Program Check ......................................................................................................................... D-24
6.6 Error Status Check.................................................................................................................... D-24
8
E. FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output)
1. Outline E-3
1.1 Outline of Functions .....................................................................................................................E-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ................................................................................E-4
1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number .....................................................................................E-5
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number .........................................................................E-5
2. Specifications E-6
2.1 Generic Specifications .................................................................................................................E-6

2.2 Power Supply Specifications........................................................................................................E-7
2.3 Performance Specifications .........................................................................................................E-7
2.4 Output Mode (Characteristics) BFM#0.........................................................................................E-8
3. Wiring E-9
3.1 Terminal Layout .........................................................................................................................E-10

3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque......................................................................................E-10
3.3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals .............................................................................................E-11
3.3.1 Examples of Power Supply Circuit .............................................................................................E-11
3.3.2 Cautions regarding wiring to the power supply terminals ...........................................................E-11
3.4 Analog Output Wiring .................................................................................................................E-12
3.5 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................E-12
4. Analog Output E-13
4.1 Analog Output Procedures.........................................................................................................E-13
5. Buffer Memory (BFM) E-15
5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory .....................................................E-15

5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method ....................................................................................E-17
5.2.1 Buffer memory direct specification (FX3U/FX3UC PLC only)......................................................E-17
5.2.2 FROM/TO instruction (FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC) ...........................................................E-17
5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM) ..........................................................................................................E-18
5.4 Buffer Memory Details................................................................................................................E-21
5.4.1 BFM#0: Output mode specification ............................................................................................E-21
5.4.2 BFM#1 to #4: Output data ..........................................................................................................E-22
5.4.3 BFM#5: Output setting upon PLC stop.......................................................................................E-22
5.4.4 BFM#6: Output status.................................................................................................................E-23
5.4.5 BFM#9: Offset/gain setting value write command ......................................................................E-24
5.4.6 BFM#10 to #13: Offset data/BFM#14 to #17: Gain data ............................................................E-25
5.4.7 BFM#19: Data change prohibition of setting change..................................................................E-26
5.4.8 BFM#20: Initialization function (resetting to factory default status) ............................................E-27
5.4.9 BFM#28: Disconnection detection status (only in current output mode) ....................................E-27
5.4.10 BFM#29: Error status ...............................................................................................................E-28
5.4.11 BFM#30: Model code ...............................................................................................................E-29
5.4.12 BFM#32 to #35: Data to be output upon PLC stop...................................................................E-29
5.4.13 BFM#38: Upper/lower limit function setting ..............................................................................E-30
5.4.14 BFM#39: Upper/lower limit function status ...............................................................................E-31
5.4.15 BFM#40: Clearance of upper/lower limit function status ..........................................................E-31
5.4.16 BFM#41 to #44: Lower limit values of upper/lower limit function
BFM#45 to #48: Upper limit values of upper/lower limit function..............................................E-32
9
5.4.17 BFM#50: Setting of output corrective function by load resistance

(only in voltage output mode)/BFM#51 to #54: Load resistance values...................................E-33
5.4.18 BFM#60: Status automatic transfer function setting.................................................................E-34
5.4.19 BFM#61: Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification............................E-35
5.4.20 BFM#62: Upper/lower limit function status data automatic transfer-to data register
specification.............................................................................................................................E-36
5.4.21 BFM#63: Specification of data register for automatic transfer at disconnection detection .......E-37
5.4.22 BFM#80 to #3098: Table output function .................................................................................E-37
6. Table Output Function E-38
6.1 Outline of Table Output Function ...............................................................................................E-38

6.2 Preparation of data table............................................................................................................E-39
6.3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory ...........................................................E-44
6.4 Procedures for executing table output function..........................................................................E-48
6.5 Details of table output error........................................................................................................E-50
6.6 Examples uses of table output function .....................................................................................E-52
7. Changing Output Characteristics E-53
7.1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics ........................................................................E-53
8. Examples of Practical Programs E-56
8.1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation (Regular Operation)....................................E-56

8.2 Example of Program using Useful Functions .............................................................................E-57
8.3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation (Pattern Output Operation) ...........................E-60
8.4 Program to Initialize FX3U-4DA (Factory Default)......................................................................E-63
9. Troubleshooting E-64
9.1 PLC Version Number Check ......................................................................................................E-64

9.2 Wiring Check..............................................................................................................................E-64
9.3 Program Check ..........................................................................................................................E-64
9.4 Error Status Check.....................................................................................................................E-65
9.5 FX3U-4DA Initialization and Test Program.................................................................................E-66
10
F. FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output)
1. Outline F-3
1.1 Outline of Functions .....................................................................................................................F-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ................................................................................F-4
1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number .....................................................................................F-5
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number .........................................................................F-6
2. Specifications F-7
2.1 Generic Specifications .................................................................................................................F-7

2.2 Power Supply Specifications........................................................................................................F-8
2.3 Performance Specifications .........................................................................................................F-8
2.4 D/A Conversion Time ...................................................................................................................F-9
2.4.1 When connected to a FX3S PLC ..................................................................................................F-9
2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G/FX3GC PLC ...................................................................................F-10
2.4.3 When connected to a FX3U/FX3UC PLC....................................................................................F-11
3. Wiring F-12
3.1 Terminal Layout .........................................................................................................................F-13

3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ..................................................................F-14
3.3 Power Supply Line .....................................................................................................................F-15
3.3.1 To connect to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3U Series PLC .......................................................................F-15
3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC ............................................................................F-15
3.4 Analog Output Line ....................................................................................................................F-16
3.5 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................F-16
4. Programming F-17
4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data .................................................................................................F-17

4.2 List of Special Devices ...............................................................................................................F-19
4.3 Switching of Output Mode ..........................................................................................................F-21
4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting ...........................................................................F-22
4.5 Output Setting Data....................................................................................................................F-23
4.6 Error Status ................................................................................................................................F-24
4.7 Model Code................................................................................................................................F-26
4.8 Basic Program Example.............................................................................................................F-26
5. Changing of Output Characteristics F-27
5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics ..............................................................F-27
6. Troubleshooting F-29
6.1 PLC Version Number Check ......................................................................................................F-29

6.2 Wiring Check..............................................................................................................................F-29
6.3 Special Device Check ................................................................................................................F-29
6.4 Program Check ..........................................................................................................................F-30
6.5 Error Status Check.....................................................................................................................F-30
11
G. FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output)
1. Outline G-3
1.1 Outline of Functions .................................................................................................................... G-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ............................................................................... G-5
1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number .................................................................................... G-6
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ........................................................................ G-6
2. Specifications G-7
2.1 Generic Specifications ................................................................................................................ G-7

2.2 Performance Specifications ........................................................................................................ G-8
2.3 D/A Conversion Time .................................................................................................................. G-9
2.3.1 For FX3S Series PLC .................................................................................................................. G-9
2.3.2 For FX3G Series PLC ................................................................................................................ G-10
3. Wiring G-11
3.1 Terminal Layout ........................................................................................................................ G-12

3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ................................................................. G-13
3.3 Analog Output Line ................................................................................................................... G-14
3.4 Grounding ................................................................................................................................. G-14
4. Programming G-15
4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data ................................................................................................ G-15

4.2 List of Special Devices .............................................................................................................. G-16
4.3 Switching of Output Mode ......................................................................................................... G-16
4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting .......................................................................... G-17
4.5 Output Setting Data................................................................................................................... G-17
4.6 Error Status ............................................................................................................................... G-18
4.7 Model Code............................................................................................................................... G-18
4.8 Basic Program Example............................................................................................................ G-19
5. Changing of Output Characteristics G-20
5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics ............................................................. G-20
6. Troubleshooting G-21
6.1 PLC Version Number Check ..................................................................................................... G-21

6.2 Checking installation ................................................................................................................. G-21
6.3 Wiring Check............................................................................................................................. G-21
6.4 Special Device Check ............................................................................................................... G-21
6.5 Program Check ......................................................................................................................... G-22
6.6 Error Status Check.................................................................................................................... G-22
12
H. FX3U-3A-ADP
(2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output)
1. Outline H-3
1.1 Outline of Functions .................................................................................................................... H-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ............................................................................... H-4
1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number .................................................................................... H-5
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ........................................................................ H-6
2. Specifications H-7
2.1 Generic Specifications ................................................................................................................ H-7

2.2 Power Supply Specifications....................................................................................................... H-7
2.3 Performance Specifications ........................................................................................................ H-8
2.4 Conversion Time ......................................................................................................................... H-9
2.4.1 When connected to a FX3S PLC ................................................................................................. H-9
2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G/FX3GC PLC .................................................................................. H-10
2.4.3 When connected to a FX3U/FX3UC PLC................................................................................... H-11
3. Wiring H-12
3.1 Terminal Layout ........................................................................................................................ H-13

3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ................................................................. H-14
3.3 Power Supply Line .................................................................................................................... H-15
3.3.1 To connect to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3U Series PLC ...................................................................... H-15
3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC ........................................................................... H-15
3.4 Analog Input / output Line ......................................................................................................... H-16
3.4.1 Analog Input Line....................................................................................................................... H-16
3.4.2 Analog Output Line.................................................................................................................... H-16
3.5 Grounding ................................................................................................................................. H-17
4. Programming H-18
4.1 Loading/Writing of Conversion Data ......................................................................................... H-18

4.2 List of Special Devices .............................................................................................................. H-19
4.3 Switching of Input Mode............................................................................................................ H-21
4.4 Switching of Output Mode ......................................................................................................... H-21
4.5 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting .......................................................................... H-22
4.6 Setting whether or not a channel is used .................................................................................. H-23
4.7 Input Data.................................................................................................................................. H-24
4.8 Output Setting Data................................................................................................................... H-25
4.9 Averaging Time ......................................................................................................................... H-26
4.10 Error Status ............................................................................................................................. H-27
4.11 Model Code............................................................................................................................. H-29
4.12 Basic Program Example.......................................................................................................... H-30
5. Changing of Input/output Characteristics H-32
5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics................................................................ H-32

5.2 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics ............................................................. H-35
13
6. Troubleshooting H-37
6.1 PLC Version Number Check ..................................................................................................... H-37

6.2 Wiring Check............................................................................................................................. H-37
6.3 Special Device Check ............................................................................................................... H-37
6.4 Program Check ......................................................................................................................... H-38
6.5 Error Status Check.................................................................................................................... H-38
14
I. FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
(4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input)
1. Outline I-3
1.1 Outline of Functions ...................................................................................................................... I-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ................................................................................. I-4
1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number ................................................................................... I-5
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number .......................................................................... I-6
2. Specifications I-7
2.1 Generic Specifications .................................................................................................................. I-7

2.2 Power Supply Specifications......................................................................................................... I-8
2.3 Performance Specifications .......................................................................................................... I-8
2.4 A/D Conversion Time .................................................................................................................... I-9
2.4.1 When connected to a FX3S PLC ................................................................................................... I-9
2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G/FX3GC PLC .................................................................................... I-10
2.4.3 When connected to a FX3U/FX3UC PLC..................................................................................... I-11
2.5 Temperature Measurement......................................................................................................... I-11
3. Wiring I-12
3.1 Terminal Layout .......................................................................................................................... I-13

3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque ..................................................................... I-14
3.3 Power Supply Line ...................................................................................................................... I-15
3.3.1 To connect to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3U Series PLC ........................................................................ I-15
3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC ............................................................................. I-15
3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor....................................................... I-16
3.5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor ........................................................... I-16
3.6 Grounding ................................................................................................................................... I-16
4. Programming I-17
4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data................................................................................................. I-17

4.2 List of Special Devices ................................................................................................................ I-18
4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit .................................................................................................... I-20
4.4 Temperature Measurement......................................................................................................... I-21
4.5 Averaging Time ........................................................................................................................... I-22
4.6 Error Status ................................................................................................................................. I-23
4.7 Model Code................................................................................................................................. I-25
4.8 Basic Program Example.............................................................................................................. I-26
5. Troubleshooting I-27
5.1 PLC Version Number Check ....................................................................................................... I-27

5.2 Wiring Check............................................................................................................................... I-27
5.3 Special Device Check ................................................................................................................. I-27
5.4 Program Check ........................................................................................................................... I-28
5.5 Error Status Check...................................................................................................................... I-28
15
J. FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
(4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input)
1. Outline J-3
1.1 Outline of Functions ..................................................................................................................... J-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ................................................................................ J-4
1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number .................................................................................. J-5
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ......................................................................... J-6
2. Specifications J-7
2.1 Generic Specifications ................................................................................................................. J-7

2.2 Power Supply Specifications........................................................................................................ J-8
2.3 Performance Specifications ......................................................................................................... J-8
2.4 A/D Conversion Time ................................................................................................................... J-9
2.4.1 When connected to a FX3S PLC .................................................................................................. J-9
2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G/FX3GC PLC ................................................................................... J-10
2.4.3 When connected to a FX3U/FX3UC PLC.................................................................................... J-11
2.5 Temperature Measurement........................................................................................................ J-11
3. Wiring J-12
3.1 Terminal Layout ......................................................................................................................... J-13

3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque .................................................................... J-14
3.3 Power Supply Line ..................................................................................................................... J-15
3.3.1 To connect to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3U Series PLC ....................................................................... J-15
3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC ............................................................................ J-15
3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor...................................................... J-16
3.5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor .......................................................... J-16
3.6 Grounding .................................................................................................................................. J-16
4. Programming J-17
4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data................................................................................................ J-17

4.2 List of Special Devices ............................................................................................................... J-18
4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit ................................................................................................... J-20
4.4 Temperature Measurement........................................................................................................ J-21
4.5 Averaging Time .......................................................................................................................... J-22
4.6 Error Status ................................................................................................................................ J-23
4.7 Model Code................................................................................................................................ J-25
4.8 Basic Program Example............................................................................................................. J-26
5. Troubleshooting J-27
5.1 PLC Version Number Check ...................................................................................................... J-27

5.2 Wiring Check.............................................................................................................................. J-27
5.3 Special Device Check ................................................................................................................ J-27
5.4 Program Check .......................................................................................................................... J-28
5.5 Error Status Check..................................................................................................................... J-28
16
K. FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
(4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input)
1. Outline K-3
1.1 Outline of Functions .....................................................................................................................K-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ................................................................................K-4
1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number ..................................................................................K-5
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number .........................................................................K-6
2. Specifications K-7
2.1 Generic Specifications .................................................................................................................K-7

2.2 Power Supply Specifications........................................................................................................K-7
2.3 Performance Specifications .........................................................................................................K-8
2.4 A/D Conversion Time ...................................................................................................................K-9
2.4.1 When connected to a FX3S PLC ..................................................................................................K-9
2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G/FX3GC PLC ...................................................................................K-10
2.4.3 When connected to a FX3U/FX3UC PLC....................................................................................K-11
2.5 Temperature Measurement........................................................................................................K-11
3. Wiring K-12
3.1 Terminal Layout .........................................................................................................................K-13

3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ..................................................................K-14
3.3 Power Supply Line .....................................................................................................................K-15
3.3.1 To connect to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3U Series PLC .......................................................................K-15
3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC ............................................................................K-15
3.4 Selection of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor.....................................................................K-16
3.5 Wiring of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor ........................................................................K-16
3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring ..........................................................................................................K-16
3.7 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................K-16
4. Programming K-17
4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data................................................................................................K-17

4.2 List of Special Devices ...............................................................................................................K-18
4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit ...................................................................................................K-20
4.4 Input sensor selection ................................................................................................................K-21
4.5 Temperature Measurement........................................................................................................K-22
4.6 Averaging Time ..........................................................................................................................K-23
4.7 Error Status ................................................................................................................................K-24
4.8 Model Code................................................................................................................................K-26
4.9 Basic Program Example.............................................................................................................K-27
5. Troubleshooting K-29
5.1 PLC Version Number Check ......................................................................................................K-29

5.2 Wiring Check..............................................................................................................................K-29
5.3 Special Device Check ................................................................................................................K-29
5.4 Program Check ..........................................................................................................................K-30
5.5 Error Status Check.....................................................................................................................K-30
17
L. FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input)
1. Outline L-3
1.1 Outline of Functions ..................................................................................................................... L-3

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ................................................................................ L-4
1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number .................................................................................. L-5
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ......................................................................... L-6
2. Specifications L-7
2.1 Generic Specifications ................................................................................................................. L-7

2.2 Power Supply Specifications........................................................................................................ L-7
2.3 Performance Specifications ......................................................................................................... L-8
2.4 A/D Conversion Time ................................................................................................................... L-9
2.4.1 When connected to a FX3S PLC .................................................................................................. L-9
2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G/FX3GC PLC ................................................................................... L-10
2.4.3 When connected to a FX3U/FX3UC PLC.................................................................................... L-11
2.5 Temperature Measurement........................................................................................................ L-11
3. Wiring L-12
3.1 Terminal Layout ......................................................................................................................... L-13

3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque .................................................................. L-14
3.3 Power Supply Line ..................................................................................................................... L-15
3.3.1 To connect to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3U Series PLC ....................................................................... L-15
3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC ............................................................................ L-15
3.4 Selection of the Thermocouple .................................................................................................. L-16
3.4.1 Thermocouple type..................................................................................................................... L-16
3.4.2 Compensating lead wire ............................................................................................................. L-16
3.5 Wiring of Thermocouple ............................................................................................................. L-16
3.5.1 Wiring of thermocouple type K ................................................................................................... L-16
3.5.2 Wiring of the thermocouple type J .............................................................................................. L-17
3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring .......................................................................................................... L-17
3.7 Grounding .................................................................................................................................. L-17
4. Programming L-18
4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data................................................................................................ L-18

4.2 List of Special Devices ............................................................................................................... L-19
4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit ................................................................................................... L-21
4.4 Selection of Type K or J ............................................................................................................. L-22
4.5 Temperature Measurement........................................................................................................ L-23
4.6 Averaging Time .......................................................................................................................... L-24
4.7 Error Status ................................................................................................................................ L-25
4.8 Model Code................................................................................................................................ L-27
4.9 Basic Program Example............................................................................................................. L-28
5. Troubleshooting L-30
5.1 PLC Version Number Check ...................................................................................................... L-30

5.2 Wiring Check.............................................................................................................................. L-30
5.3 Special Device Check ................................................................................................................ L-30
5.4 Program Check .......................................................................................................................... L-31
5.5 Error Status Check..................................................................................................................... L-31
18
M. PID Instruction (FNC 88)
1. Outline M-3
1.1 Outline of function ....................................................................................................................... M-3

1.2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction (Reference)...................................................... M-4
2. How to Use PID Instruction M-5
2.1 Explanation of function and operation......................................................................................... M-5

2.2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto-Tuning........................................................ M-6
3. Parameter M-7
3.1 Parameter List: (S3) to (S3) + 28 ................................................................................................ M-7

3.2 Details of Parameters.................................................................................................................. M-9
3.2.1 Sampling time (TS): (S3) ............................................................................................................. M-9
3.2.2 Operation setting (ACT):(S3)+1................................................................................................. M-10
3.2.3 Input filter (α): (S3)+2 ................................................................................................................ M-12
3.2.4 Proportional gain (KP): (S3)+3................................................................................................... M-13
3.2.5 Integral time (TI): (S3)+4 ........................................................................................................... M-13
3.2.6 Differential gain (KD): (S3)+5..................................................................................................... M-15
3.2.7 Differential time (TD): (S3)+6..................................................................................................... M-15
3.2.8 Alarm output flag: (S3)+24 ........................................................................................................ M-17
4. Auto-Tuning M-18
4.1 Limit Cycle Method.................................................................................................................... M-18

4.1.1 Parameters set in auto-tuning (of limit cycle method) ............................................................... M-18
4.1.2 Auto-tuning procedure ............................................................................................................... M-19
4.1.3 Reference: How to obtain three constants in PID control (limit cycle method).......................... M-20
4.2 Step Response Method............................................................................................................. M-21
4.2.1 Parameters to be set by auto-tuning (step response method) .................................................. M-21
4.2.2 Auto-tuning procedure ............................................................................................................... M-21
4.2.3 Reference: How to obtain three constants in PID control (step response method)................... M-22
4.3 Cautions on Auto-Tuning Execution.......................................................................................... M-22
5. Example of Practical Programs (for Step Response Method) M-23
5.1 Example: System and operation ............................................................................................... M-23

5.2 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method) and PID control .............................. M-24
5.3 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method)........................................................ M-26
6. Troubleshooting M-28
6.1 Error Codes............................................................................................................................... M-28
Warranty...................................................................................................................................... i
Revised History ......................................................................................................................... ii
19
20
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction
Common Items 1.1 Outline and Features of Analog Control
Common Items
1. Introduction
This manual describes the analog products for the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. B
This chapter describes the analog control methods and applications.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
1.1 Outline and Features of Analog Control
For the FX Series, there are 3 types of analog control: Voltage/Current input, Voltage/Current output, and
Temperature Sensor input.
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
It is important to select products that are optimum for the purpose of use.
FX3S Series FX3G Series FX3GC Series FX3U Series FX3UC Series
PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
Voltage/current input Voltage/current Temperature sensor
control type output control type input control type
 FX3U-4AD  FX3U-4DA  FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
 FX3UC-4AD  FX3U-4DA-ADP  FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
 FX3U-4AD-ADP  FX3U-3A-ADP  FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
 FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
F
 FX3U-3A-ADP  FX3G-1DA-BD
FX3U-4DA-ADP
 FX3G-2AD-BD
 Refer to Subsection  Refer to Subsection  Refer to Subsection
1.1.1. 1.1.2. 1.1.3.
FX3G-1DA-BD
Flowmeter, Inverter, etc. Thermocouple,
pressure sensor, etc. platinum resistance
thermometer
sensor
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
In addition to the above applications, the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC can be used for various
purposes.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-1
1.1.1 Analog input control

Input the voltage/current signal from a flowmeter, pressure sensor, etc. to the PLC to monitor the condition of
the workpiece or equipment.
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC
Voltage or A/D conversion
Analog input data
current
special function
block, special
adapter,
expansion board
Check the flux rate using

the PLC.
Output the current or voltage
data from the flux rate or the
pressure.
→ To determine whether or not a unit can be connected to the PLC,

refer to Chapter 3 "System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products."
FX3G Series Analog input products

• FX3G-2AD-BD
→ For detailed description, refer to Section D.
FX3U Series Analog input products

• FX3U-4AD
→ For detailed description, refer to Section B.
• FX3U-4AD-ADP
→ For detailed description, refer to Section C.
• FX3U-3A-ADP
→ For detailed description, refer to Section H.
FX3UC Series Analog input products

• FX3UC-4AD
→ For detailed description, refer to Section B.
Other Series Analog input products

• FX2NC-4AD • FX2N-4AD • FX2N-5A
• FX2N-8AD • FX2N-2AD • FX0N-3A
→ For a detailed description of the other analog input products,
refer to the corresponding manuals.
A-2
A
1.1.2 Analog output control
Common Items
Output the voltage/current signal from the PLC to an inverter, etc. to control the inverter frequency, etc.
Inverter, etc.
Series PLC
Analog output Voltage or
B
D/A conversion
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
data special function current
block, special
adapter,
expansion board
Output the frequency data The frequency will be C

from the PLC. changed depending on
FX3U-4AD-ADP
the input voltage/current.

Analog output products for FX3G Series D

• FX3G-1DA-BD
FX3G-2AD-BD
→ For detailed description, refer to Section G.
Analog output products for FX3U Series

• FX3U-4DA
→ For detailed description, refer to Section E. E
• FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3U-4DA
→ For detailed description, refer to Section F.
• FX3U-3A-ADP
→ For detailed description, refer to Section H.
Other Series Analog output products F

• FX2NC-4DA • FX2N-2DA • FX0N-3A
FX3U-4DA-ADP
• FX2N-4DA • FX2N-5A
→ For a detailed description of the other analog output products,
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-3
1.1.3 Temperature sensor input control

Use the PLC to check the workpiece/machine temperature measured with a thermocouple or platinum
resistance thermometer sensor.
Series PLC
Temperature data Temperature data
(Analog data) Temperature (Digital value)
sensor input,
special function
block or special
adapter
Measure the
temperature of the Check the temperature
equipment. using the PLC.

FX3U Series Temperature sensor input products

• FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
→ For detailed description, refer to Section I.
• FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
→ For detailed description, refer to Section J.
• FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
→ For detailed description, refer to Section K.
• FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
→ For detailed description, refer to Section L.
• FX3U-4LC
→ For detailed description, refer to the FX3U-4LC User’s Manual.
Other Series Temperature sensor input products

• FX2N-8AD • FX2N-2LC
• FX2N-4AD-TC • FX2N-4AD-PT
→ For a detailed description of the other temperature sensor input products,
A-4
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products
Common Items 2.1 Types of Analog Products
Common Items
2. Description of Analog Products
B
2.1 Types of Analog Products
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Analog input/output products are required to perform analog control using the FX Series PLC.
There are 3 types of input/output products: the expansion board, special adapter and the special function
block.
Subsequent subsections explain differences among analog products. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
2.1.1 Expansion board
The analog expansion board uses PLC devices to send/receive data to/from the PLC.
1. FX3S Series PLC

• Connect analog expansion boards to option connectors of an FX3S Series PLC.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
• Only 1*1 expansion board can be connected.
PLC
Expansion board E
FX3U-4DA
F
→ For a detailed description of the system configuration,
FX3U-4DA-ADP
refer to the FX3S Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
*1. When expansion board is connected to FX3S Series PLC, special adapters cannot be connected to
the main unit.
2. FX3G Series PLC G

• Connect analog expansion boards to option connectors of an FX3G Series PLC.
FX3G-1DA-BD
• Up to 2*2 expansion boards can be connected.
PLC
Expansion board
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT

refer to the FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
*2. Only 1 expansion board can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
-ADP
In this case, special adapters cannot be used.

When two expansion boards are connected to FX3G Series PLC (40-point or 60-point type), special
adapters cannot be connected to the main unit.
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-5
2.1.2 Special adapter

The analog special adapter uses PLC devices to send/receive data to/from the PLC.
1. FX3S Series PLC

• Connect the special adapter to the left side of the FX3S Series PLC.
• A connector conversion board is needed to connect the special adapter.
• Only 1*1 analog special adapter can be connected.
Analog Connector conversion adapter PLC
special adapter
FX3S-CNV-ADP
Only 1 analog adapter can be connected.

refer to the FX3S Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
*1. When special adapter is connected to FX3S Series PLC, expansion boards cannot be connected to
the main unit.
2. FX3G Series PLC

• Connect the special adapter(s) to the left side of the FX3G Series PLC.
• A connector conversion board is needed to connect the special adapter(s).
• Up to 2*2 analog special adapters can be connected.
Analog Connector conversion adapter PLC
special adapters
FX3G-CNV-ADP
Up to 2 analog adapters can be connected.

refer to the FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
*2. Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
In this case, expansion boards cannot be used.
When two analog special adapters are connected to FX3G Series PLC (40-point or 60-point type),
analog expansion boards cannot be connected to the main unit.
A-6
A
3. FX3GC Series PLC
Common Items
• Connect the special adapter(s) to the left side of the FX3GC Series PLC.
• Up to 2 analog special adapters can be connected.
Analog
PLC
special adapters
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
4. FX3U Series PLC

D
FX3G-2AD-BD
• Connect the special adapter(s) to the left side of the FX3U Series PLC.
• An expansion board is needed to connect the special adapter(s).
• When using the high-speed input/output special adapter(s), be sure to connect the high-speed input/output
special adapter(s) first, and then connect the analog special adapter(s). E
High-speed
FX3U-4DA
Analog input/output
special adapters Expansion board PLC
special adapters
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3U-***-BD

"***" represents "422", "232",
"485", "8AV", "CNV", or "USB." G
FX3G-1DA-BD
refer to the FX3U Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
5. FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC

• Connect the special adapter(s) to the left side of the FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC.
• Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected. H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Analog
special adapters PLC
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
Up to 4 analog adapters can be connected. J

FX3U-4AD-PTW
refer to the FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.

-ADP
A-7
6. FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC
• Connect the special adapter(s) to the left side of the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.
• An expansion board is needed to connect the special adapter(s).
Analog
special adapters Expansion board PLC
FX3U-***-BD
Up to 4 analog adapters can be connected. "***" represents "422", "232", "485", "8AV", "CNV", or "USB."

A-8
A
2.1.3 Special function block
Common Items
The special function block uses buffer memory (BFM) to send/receive data to/from the PLC.
1. FX3G Series PLC

• Connect the special function block(s) to the right side of the FX3G Series PLC.
• Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected.
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
PLC Analog special function block
for FX3U/FX2N
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Up to 8 special function units/blocks can be
connected (excluding the special adapters).
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
refer to the FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
2. FX3GC Series PLC

• Connect the special function block(s) to the right side of the FX3GC Series PLC.
• In some cases, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V may be needed for connection. E
FX3U-4DA
PLC Analog special function block Analog special function block
FX3UC-1PS-5V
for FX3UC/FX2NC or for FX3U/FX2N
FX2NC-CNV-IF
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Up to 8 special function units/blocks can be connected (excluding the special adapters).
Select either FX3UC-1PS-5V or FX2NC-CNV-IF considering the current components consumption.

refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
3. FX3U Series PLC

H
FX3U-3A-ADP
• Connect the special function block(s) to the right side of the FX3U Series PLC.
PLC Analog special function block
for FX3U/FX2N/FX0N
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
Up to 8 special function units/blocks can be

J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
connected (excluding the special adapters).

refer to the FX3U Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
-ADP
A-9
4. FX3UC Series PLC

• Connect the special function block(s) to the right side of the FX3UC Series PLC.
• In some cases, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V may be needed for connection.
• Up to 8*1 special function blocks can be connected.
PLC Analog special function block Analog special function block
FX3UC-1PS-5V
for FX3UC/FX2NC or for FX3U/FX2N/FX0N
FX2NC-CNV-IF
Up to 8*1 special function units/blocks can be connected (excluding the special adapters).
Select either FX3UC-1PS-5V or FX2NC-CNV-IF considering the current components consumption.
*1. Up to 7 special function units/blocks can be connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.
A-10
Common Items 2.2 List of Analog Product Models
A
2.2 List of Analog Product Models
Common Items
The analog input/output products compatible with the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC are
described below:
2.2.1 Expansion board B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• FX3S/FX3G Series PLC
No. of Refer-
Type Range Resolution Function
channels ence
Voltage/current input
Voltage: 0 V to 10 V DC 2.5 mV (12 bits) Combined use of voltage and C
FX3G-2AD-BD 2ch D
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Current: 4 mA to 20 mA DC 8 μA (11 bits) current inputs is possible.
Voltage/current output
Voltage: 0 V to 10 V DC 2.5 mV (12 bits)
FX3G-1DA-BD 1ch Voltage and current output. G
Current: 4 mA to 20 mA DC 8 μA (11 bits)
D
2.2.2 Special adapter
FX3G-2AD-BD
• FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC
No. of Refer-
channels ence
Voltage/current input E
Voltage: 0 V to 10 V DC 2.5 mV (12 bits) Combined use of voltage and
FX3U-4DA
FX3U-4AD-ADP 4ch C
Current: 4 mA to 20 mA DC 10 μA (11 bits) current inputs is possible.
Voltage: 0 V to 10 V DC 2.5 mV (12 bits) Combined use of voltage and
FX3U-4DA-ADP 4ch F
Current: 4 mA to 20 mA DC 4 μA (12 bits) current outputs is possible.
F
Voltage/current input/output mixture
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Input Voltage: 0 V to 10 V DC 2.5 mV (12 bits)
2ch Current: 4 mA to 20 mA DC 5 μA (12 bits) Combined use of voltage/
FX3U-3A-ADP current inputs and voltage/ H
Output Voltage: 0 V to 10 V DC 2.5 mV (12 bits) current output is possible.
1ch Current: 4 mA to 20 mA DC 4 μA (12 bits)
G
Temperature sensor input
FX3G-1DA-BD
Compatible with the platinum
resistance thermometer
sensor (Pt100).
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP 4ch Pt100: -50 °C to +250 °C 0.1 °C I
The product can be switched
between "Centigrade" and
"Fahrenheit." H
FX3U-3A-ADP

sensor (Pt100).
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP 4ch Pt100: -100 °C to +600 °C 0.2 °C to 0.3 °C J
The product can be switched
between "Centigrade" and
"Fahrenheit." I
Compatible with the input
FX3U-4AD-PT
Pt1000: -50 °C to +250 °C sensor (Pt1000 and Ni1000).

FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP 4ch 0.1 °C The product can be switched K
Ni1000: -45 °C to +115 °C between "Centigrade" and
-ADP
"Fahrenheit."
Type K: -100 °C to +1000 °C 0.4 °C

Compatible with
thermocouple types K and J.
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP 4ch The product can be switched L

Type J: -100 °C to +600 °C 0.3 °C between "Centigrade" and
"Fahrenheit."
-ADP
A-11
2.2.3 Special function block
• FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

No. of Refer-
channels ence
Voltage/current input
Voltage: 0.32 mV Combined use of voltage and
-10 V to +10 V DC (with sign, 16 bits) current inputs is possible. The
FX3U-4AD*1 4ch offset/gain can be adjusted.*3 B
Current: 1.25 μA
The sampling function is
-20 mA to +20 mA DC (with sign, 15 bits)
incorporated.
-10 V to +10 V DC (with sign, 16 bits) current inputs is possible. The
FX3UC-4AD*2 4ch offset/gain can be adjusted.*3 B
Current: 1.25 μA
The sampling function is
incorporated.
-10 V to +10 V DC (with sign, 16 bits) current inputs is possible.
The offset/gain can be
FX2NC-4AD*2 4ch *5
Current: 1.25 μA adjusted.*3
-20 mA to +20 mA DC (with sign, 15 bits) The sampling function is
incorporated.
Voltage: 0.63 mV Combined use of voltage,
-10 V to +10 V DC (with sign, 15 bits) current, and thermocouple is
possible. The offset/gain can be
FX2N-8AD*1 8ch *5
Current: 2.5 μA adjusted.*3
-20 mA to +20 mA DC (with sign, 14 bits) The sampling function is
incorporated.
Voltage: 5 mV
Combined use of voltage and
*1
-10 V to +10 V DC (with sign, 12 bits)
FX2N-4AD 4ch current inputs is possible. *5
Current: 10 μA
The offset/gain can be adjusted.
0 V to 10 V DC (12 bits) current inputs is impossible.
FX2N-2AD*1 2ch *5
Current: 4 μA The offset/gain can be adjusted.
4 mA to 20 mA DC (12 bits) (Common to 2 input channels)
Voltage: 0.32 mV
FX3U-4DA*1 4ch current outputs is possible.*4 E
Current: 0.63 μA
0 mA to 20 mA DC (15 bits)
Voltage: 5 mV
FX2NC-4DA*2 4ch current outputs is possible. *5
Current: 20 μA
Voltage: 5 mV
FX2N-4DA*1 4ch current outputs is possible. *5
Current: 20 μA
Voltage: 2.5 mV
0 V to 10 V DC (12 bits)
FX2N-2DA*1 2ch current outputs is possible. *5
Current: 4 μA
*1. To connect this block to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, either the FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is
required.
*2. Connectable with the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC only.
*3. The offset and gain of the FX3U-4AD, FX3UC-4AD, FX2NC-4AD and FX2N-8AD cannot be adjusted for
channels using the analog value direct indication mode.
*4. The offset and gain of the FX3U-4DA cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value mV (or μA)
specification mode.
*5. Refer to the instruction manual of the respective product.
A-12
A
No. of Refer-
Common Items
channels ence
Voltage/current input/output mixture
Voltage: 0.32 mV
Input -10 V to +10 V DC (with sign, 16 bits) Combined use of voltage and
4ch Current:
-20 mA to +20 mA DC
1.25 μA
(with sign, 15 bits)
current is possible.
The offset/gain can be
B
FX2N-5A*1 *2
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Voltage: 5 mV adjusted.*3
Output -10 V to +10 V DC (with sign, 12 bits) The scaling function is
1ch Current: 20 μA incorporated.
Voltage: 40 mV
Input 0 V to 10 V DC (8 bits) C
2ch Current: 64 μA
FX3U-4AD-ADP
The input format is common to 2
4 mA to 20 mA DC (8 bits) channels.
FX0N-3A*4 *5 *2
Voltage: 40 mV The offset/gain can be adjusted.
Output 0 V to 10 V DC (8 bits) (Common to 2 input channels)
1ch Current: 64 μA
4 mA to 20 mA DC (8 bits) D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Type K: Combined use of voltage,
-100 °C to +1200 °C current, and thermocouple is
Type J: possible.
-100 °C to +600 °C Compatible with thermocouple
FX2N-8AD*1 8ch 0.1 °C types K, J, and T. *2
Type T:
The unit can be switched between E
"Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit."
FX3U-4DA
-100 °C to +350 °C The sampling function is
incorporated.
Type K: Compatible with thermocouple
0.4 °C
-100 °C to +1200 °C types K and J.
FX2N-4AD-TC*1 4ch *2
Type J:
-100 °C to +600 °C
0.3 °C
The unit can be switched between
"Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
resistance thermometer sensor
Pt100:
FX2N-4AD-PT*1 4ch 0.2 °C to 0.3 °C (Pt100 or JPt100). *2
-100 °C to +600 °C
"Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit."
Compatible with thermocouple G
types K, J, R, S, E, T, B, N, PL II,
FX3G-1DA-BD
W5Re/W26Re, U, and L.
(Pt1000, Pt100, and JPt100).
Example:
Type K:
-100 °C to +1300 °C
0.1 °C or 1 °C "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." H
FX3U-4LC*1 4ch (Depends on the Compatible with the micro *2
FX3U-3A-ADP
Example:
sensor input range.) voltage input.
Pt100:
The temperature adjustment
-200 °C to +600 °C
function (PID operation, etc.) is
incorporated.
The peak disconnection
detection function is I
incorporated.
FX3U-4AD-PT
(A CT sensor is needed.)
required.
-ADP

*3. The offset and gain of the FX2N-5A cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value direct J
indication mode or analog value mV (or μA) specification mode.
FX3U-4AD-PTW
*4. The FX0N-3A cannot be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC.

*5. To connect this block to the FX3UC Series PLC, either the FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required.
-ADP
A-13
No. of Refer-
channels ence
Example: Compatible with thermocouple
Type K: types K, J, R, S, E, T, B, N, PL II,
-600 °C to +1300 °C W5Re/W26Re, U, and L.
(Pt100, JPt100).
0.1 °C or 1 °C The unit can be switched between
FX2N-2LC*1 2ch (Depends on the "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." *2
Example: sensor input range.) The temperature adjustment
Pt100: function (PID operation, etc.) is
-200 °C to +600 °C incorporated.
The peak disconnection
detection function is
incorporated.
(A CT sensor is needed.)
required.
A-14
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products
Common Items 3.1 FX3S Series PLC
Common Items
3. System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products
This section shows drawings to describe the configuration of analog units for the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/ B
FX3UC Series PLC.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
3.1 FX3S Series PLC
3.1.1 Connection of expansion boards, special adapters
FX3S Series PLC C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
and represent the connecting positions.
(For a detailed description of installation, refer to the
FX3S Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.)
D
Analog input
FX3G-2AD-BD
Flowmeter
European terminal block
Pressure sensor
Only one analog expansion board or one analog special adapter can be connected.
Signal converter, etc.

FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3U-4DA
European terminal block Analog output
Inverter, etc.
FX3G-1DA-BD
Analog input
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Flowmeter
Pressure sensor
FX3S-CNV-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3G-1DA-BD
Analog output
Inverter, etc.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Analog input
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Flowmeter
European terminal block Pressure sensor
FX3U-3A-ADP Analog output

Inverter, etc.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
Temperature sensor
input
Thermocouple
-ADP
(types K and J)
Resistance
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
thermometer sensor
(Pt1000 and Ni1000)
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP Platinum resistance

FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP thermometer
sensor (Pt100)
-ADP
A-15
Common Items 3.2 FX3G Series PLC
3.2 FX3G Series PLC
3.2.1 Connection of expansion boards, special adapters
1. FX3G Series PLC (14-point, 24-point type)
and represent the connecting positions.

FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.)
Board A
Analog input
Flowmeter
Pressure sensor
Only one analog expansion board or one analog special adapter can be connected.

FX3G-2AD-BD
Board A
European terminal block Analog output

Inverter, etc.
FX3G-1DA-BD
1st
adapter Analog input
Flowmeter
Pressure sensor
FX3G-CNV-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP
1st
adapter
Analog output
Inverter, etc.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
1st
Analog input
adapter
Flowmeter
European terminal block Pressure sensor

Inverter, etc.
Temperature sensor
1st
input
adapter
Thermocouple
European terminal block (types K and J)
Resistance
thermometer sensor
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (Pt1000 and Ni1000)
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
Platinum resistance
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
thermometer
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
sensor (Pt100)
A-16
A
2. FX3G Series PLC (40-point, 60-point type)
Common Items
A , B , and C represent the connecting positions.
A B C (For a detailed description of installation, refer to the
FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.)
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Only either A or C
can be used as 2nd.
European
B Board A terminal Analog input
C Board B block Flowmeter
European
Pressure sensor C
Signal converter,
terminal
FX3U-4AD-ADP
block etc.
FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3G-2AD-BD
B Board A European
terminal
Up to 2 analog expansion boards, analog special adapters can be connected.
C Board B
block
Analog output D
Inverter, etc.
FX3G-2AD-BD
European
terminal
FX3G-1DA-BD block
FX3G-1DA-BD
E
Any one can be
FX3U-4DA
selected.
A 2nd European
adapter terminal Analog input
B A 1st
block Flowmeter
adapter
European
Pressure sensor
Signal converter, F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3U-4AD-ADP terminal etc.
block
FX3G-CNV-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP A 2nd
adapter European
terminal
A 1st Analog output
adapter
block
Inverter, etc. G
European
FX3G-1DA-BD
FX3U-4DA-ADP terminal
block
FX3U-4DA-ADP Analog input
A 2nd Flowmeter
adapter European Pressure sensor
A 1st
terminal Signal converter, H
block etc.
FX3U-3A-ADP
adapter

European
terminal Inverter, etc.
block
FX3U-3A-ADP Temperature
A 2nd sensor input I
adapter Thermocouple
FX3U-4AD-PT
(types K and J)
A 1st
European Resistance
adapter
terminal thermometer
-ADP
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP block sensor (Pt1000

FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP and Ni1000)
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP European Platinum J
terminal resistance
FX3U-4AD-PTW
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP block thermometer
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
sensor (Pt100)
-ADP
A-17
3.2.2 Connection of special function blocks
FX3G Series PLC

A (For a detailed description of installation, refer to the
B C FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.)
To connect the special adapters A or the connector conversion

adapter B , refer to the previous page.
Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected.
Analog input
C  Flowmeter
 Pressure sensor
 Signal converter,
etc.
Terminal block
Analog output
Special function  Inverter, etc.
block for
FX3U/FX2N
Temperature sensor
input
 Thermocouple
• For a detailed description of the connectable special function blocks and system configuration:
→ Refer to the FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC:
FX Series Type
Analog special function blocks for
FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3U-4LC
the FX3U
Analog special function blocks for FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-2DA, FX2N-5A,
the FX2N FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC
A-18
Common Items 3.3 FX3GC Series PLC
A
3.3 FX3GC Series PLC
Common Items
3.3.1 Connection of special adapters
FX3GC Series PLC

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
C1 D C2 To connect the special function blocks C or the conversion adapters D ,
A refer to Subsection 3.3.2.
A , C represent the connecting positions.

FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.) C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
A
Analog input
 Flowmeter
 Pressure sensor
 Signal converter, etc. D
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3G-2AD-BD
A
Analog output
Up to 2 analog special adapters can be connected.

 Inverter, etc.
E
FX3U-4DA
FX3U-4DA-ADP
A
Analog input
Flowmeter
European terminal block Pressure sensor F
Signal converter, etc.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
 Inverter, etc.
A Temperature sensor
input
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
 Thermocouple
(types K and J)
 Resistance
thermometer
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP sensor (Pt1000 and
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
Ni1000)
 Platinum resistance H
FX3U-3A-ADP
sensor (Pt100)
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-19
Common Items 3.3 FX3GC Series PLC
FX3GC Series PLC

A , C , and D represent the connecting positions.
A C1 D C2 FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.)
To connect the special adapters A , refer to Subsection 3.3.1.
C1
FX3UC-4AD
C1

Analog input
Special function Flowmeter
block for FX2NC C1 Pressure sensor
Analog output
Inverter, etc.
FX3UC-4AD
Temperature sensor
C1 input
Thermocouple
D Platinum resistance
thermometer
sensor (Pt100)
C1 or C2
Special function
block for FX2NC
FX3UC-1PS-5V
C2
Terminal block
Special function
block for
FX2NC-CNV-IF FX3U/FX2N
• For a detailed description of special function block connectability and system configuration:
→ Refer to the FX3GC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
• Use the FX3UC-1PS-5V (extension power supply unit) if the capacity of the 5 V DC power supply unit
incorporated in the FX3GC Series PLC is deteriorated.
The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3GC Series PLC:
FX Series Type
Analog special function blocks for the FX3U FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3U-4LC
Analog special function blocks for the FX3UC FX3UC-4AD
FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-2DA,
Analog special function blocks for the FX2N
FX2N-5A, FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC
Analog special function blocks for the FX2NC FX2NC-4AD, FX2NC-4DA
A-20
Common Items 3.4 FX3U Series PLC
A
3.4 FX3U Series PLC
Common Items
FX3U Series PLC B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
A C To connect special function blocks C , refer to the next page.
B

(For a detailed installation description, refer to the
FX3U Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.)
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
B A
Analog input
RDA
• Flowmeter
RD

RDB
SDA
SD SDB
• Pressure sensor
SG
• Signal converter, etc.

FX3U-***-BD*1 FX3U-4AD-ADP D
FX3G-2AD-BD
A
Analog output
• Inverter, etc.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
E
FX3U-4DA
A Analog input
• Flowmeter
European terminal block • Pressure sensor
• Signal converter, etc.
Analog output
F
FX3U-3A-ADP
FX3U-4DA-ADP
• Inverter, etc.
input
• Thermocouple
(types K and J)
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
• Resistance
thermometer
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
sensor (Pt1000 and
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
Ni1000)
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP • Platinum resistance
sensor (Pt100) H
FX3U-3A-ADP
*1. An FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-USB-BD, FX3U-8AV-BD, or FX3U-CNV-BD is

needed to connect the special adapters.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-21
Common Items 3.4 FX3U Series PLC
FX3U Series PLC

A C FX3U Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.)
B
To connect the special adapters A or the expansion boards B ,

refer to the previous page.
Analog input
C  Flowmeter
 Pressure sensor
 Signal converter,
etc.
Terminal block
Analog output
Special function  Inverter, etc.
block for
FX3U/FX2N/FX0N
Temperature sensor
input
 Thermocouple
 Platinum resistance
thermometer
sensor (Pt100)
• For a detailed description of the connectable special function blocks and system configuration:
→ Refer to the FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3U Series PLC:
FX Series Type
FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3U-4LC
the FX3U
Analog special function blocks for FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-2DA, FX2N-5A,
the FX2N FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC
FX0N-3A
the FX0N
A-22
Common Items 3.5 FX3UC Series PLC
A
3.5 FX3UC Series PLC
Common Items

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
C1 D C2 To connect the special function blocks C or the conversion adapters D ,
A refer to Subsection 3.5.2-1.
A , C represent the connecting positions.

C
FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
A
Analog input
 Flowmeter
 Pressure sensor
 Signal converter, etc.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Analog output

 Inverter, etc. E
FX3U-4DA
FX3U-4DA-ADP
A
Analog input

 Flowmeter
 Pressure sensor
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
 Signal converter, etc.
 Inverter, etc.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
input
 Thermocouple
(types K and J)
 Resistance
thermometer
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
sensor (Pt1000 and
Ni1000) H
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP  Platinum resistance
FX3U-3A-ADP
sensor (Pt100)
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-23
To connect the special function blocks C or the conversion adapters D ,

A C1 D C2
refer to Subsection 3.5.2-2.
B

FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.)
B A
RD
RDA
Analog input
RDB
Flowmeter
SDA
SD SDB
SG
Pressure sensor
FX3U-***-BD*1 FX3U-4AD-ADP Signal converter, etc.
Analog output

Inverter, etc.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
A Analog input
Flowmeter
Pressure sensor
Analog output
FX3U-3A-ADP
Inverter, etc.
input
 Thermocouple
(types K and J)
 Resistance
thermometer
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP sensor (Pt1000 and
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Ni1000)
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP  Platinum resistance
sensor (Pt100)
*1. An FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-USB-BD, FX3U-8AV-BD, or FX3U-CNV-BD is

needed to connect the special adapters.
A-24
A
Common Items
A , C , and D represent the connecting positions.
A C1 D C2
FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.) B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
To connect the special adapters A , refer to Subsection 3.5.1-1.
C1
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3UC-4AD
D
C1
FX3G-2AD-BD

Analog input
Signal converter, etc. E
FX3U-4DA
Analog output
Inverter, etc.
FX3UC-4AD
Temperature sensor
C1 input
Thermocouple
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
thermometer
sensor (Pt100)
C1 or C2
Special function
block for FX2NC
FX3UC-1PS-5V G
FX3G-1DA-BD
C2
Terminal block
Special function H
block for
FX3U-3A-ADP
FX2NC-CNV-IF FX3U/FX2N/FX0N
→ Refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
incorporated in the FX3UC Series PLC is deteriorated.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3UC Series PLC:
FX Series Type
-ADP

FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-2DA, J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

Analog special function blocks for the FX0N FX0N-3A
-ADP
A-25
A , B , C , and D represent the connecting positions.
A C1 D C2 FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.)
B
To connect the special adapters A or the expansion boards B ,

refer to Subsection 3.5.1-2.
C1
FX3UC-4AD
C1

Analog input
Analog output
Inverter, etc.
FX3UC-4AD
Temperature sensor
C1 input
Thermocouple
thermometer
sensor (Pt100)
C1 or C2
Special function
block for FX2NC
FX3UC-1PS-5V
C2
Terminal block
Special function
block for
FX2NC-CNV-IF FX3U/FX2N/FX0N
incorporated in the FX3UC Series PLC is deteriorated.
The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3UC Series PLC:
FX Series Type
FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-2DA,
Analog special function blocks for the FX0N FX0N-3A
A-26
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications
Common Items 4.1 Analog Input
Common Items
4. Comparison of Performance Specifications
The analog product performance specifications are shown in the following tables. Select the optimal product B
for your equipment.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
4.1 Analog Input
4.1.1 FX3U-4AD-ADP C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Specifications
Voltage input Current input
Number of input points 4ch
Analog input range

0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC D
(Input resistance: 194 kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω)
FX3G-2AD-BD
Absolute maximum input -0.5V, +15V -2mA, +30mA
Offset
Impossible to change Impossible to change
Gain
Digital output 12 bits, binary 11 bits, binary
E
Resolution 2.5mV (10V × 1/4000) 10μA (16mA × 1/1600)
FX3U-4DA
Overall accuracy
Ambient temperature:
±0.5% (±50mV) for 10V full scale ±0.5% (±80μA) for 16mA full scale
25±5°C
0 to 55°C
±1.0% (±100mV) for 10V full scale ±1.0% (±160μA) for 16mA full scale F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Time required for A/D • FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (Data updated every scan time.)
conversion • FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (Data updated every scan time.)
4080 1640
4000 1600 G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Digital output
Digital output
Input characteristics
20.4mA
10.2V
0 10V
Analog input
0 4mA
Analog input
20mA H
FX3U-3A-ADP
• The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC.
Insulation method • The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs.
• Channels are not insulated from each other.
Number of I/O points
occupied
0 point (This number is not related to the maximum I/O points of the PLC.) I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-27
4.1.2 FX2N-2AD
FX2N-2AD
Specifications
0V to 5V DC
4mA to 20mA DC
Analog input range*1 0V to 10V DC
(Input resistance: 250 Ω)
(Input resistance: 200 kΩ)
*2*3
Offset If the digital value is "0": 0V to 1V If the digital value is "0": 0mA to 4mA*2*3
If the digital value is "4000":
Gain If the digital value is "4000": 20mA*2*3
5V to 10V*2*3
Digital output 12 bits, binary
*3
Resolution 2.5mV (10V × 1/4000) 4.00μA (16mA × 1/4000)*3
Overall accuracy
- -
25±5°C
0 to 55°C
Time required for A/D 2.5ms × number of selected channels

conversion (Operation synchronized with sequence program)
4095 4095
4000 4000
Digital output
Digital input
20.380mA
10.238V
0 10V 0 4mA 20mA

Analog input Analog input
Insulation method
8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.)
occupied
*1. For FX2N-2AD, combined use of the voltage and current inputs is not possible.
*2. Use the adjustment volume to adjust FX2N-2AD.
*3. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution.
A-28
A
4.1.3 FX3U-4AD
Common Items
FX3U-4AD
Specifications
-20mA to +20mA DC
B
-10V to +10V DC
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Analog input range 4mA to 20mA DC
Absolute maximum input ±15V ±30mA
Offset -10V to +9V*1*2 -20mA to +17mA*1*3
Gain -9V to +10V*1*2 -17mA to +30mA*1*3 C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Digital output With sign, 16 bits, binary With sign, 15 bits, binary
0.32mV (20V × 1/64000) 1.25μA (40mA × 1/32000)
Resolution*4 2.5mV (20V × 1/8000) 5.00μA (40mA × 1/8000)
Overall accuracy
Ambient temperature: ±0.5% (±200μA) for 40mA full scale

25±5°C
±0.3% (±60mV) for 20V full scale
Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input D
FX3G-2AD-BD
0 to 55°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input
Time required for A/D

conversion 500μs × number of selected channels*5
E
zWhen the input mode is set to "0": zWhen the input mode is set to "6":
FX3U-4DA
+32640 +16320
+32000 +16000
+20.4mA
+10.2V
-10V 0 -20mA 0
+10V +20mA F
-20.4mA
-10.2V
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Input characteristics*4 -32000 -16000
-32640 -16320
zWhen the input mode is set to "3":
16400
16000
G
20.4mA
FX3G-1DA-BD
0 4mA 20mA
Insulation method • The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. H
FX3U-3A-ADP

occupied
*1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. In the direct indication mode, however, the
*2.
offset/gain cannot be adjusted.
The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition:
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
1V ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 7.5V

*3. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition:
3mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 30mA
-ADP
*4. The resolution and the input/output characteristics depend on the selected mode.
*5. If 1 or more channels use the digital filter(s), the time required for A/D conversion will be
"5 ms × number of selected channels." J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-29
4.1.4 FX2N-4AD
FX2N-4AD
Specifications
-20mA to +20mA DC
-10V to +10V DC
*1*2
Offset -5V to +5V -20mA to +20mA*1*3
Gain -4V to +15V*1*2 -16mA to +32mA*1*3
*1
Resolution 5mV (20V × 1/4000) 20μA (40mA × 1/2000)*1
Overall accuracy
- -
25±5°C

Time required for A/D Normal conversion mode:15ms × number of selected channels
conversion High-speed conversion mode: 6ms × number of selected channels
+2047 zWhen the input is set from -20 mA to +20 mA:

+10.235V
+2000 +1600
+1000
+32mA
-10V 0
+10V -20mA 0
-10.240V
+20mA
-32mA
-2000
Input characteristics -2048 -1000
-1600
zWhen the input is set from 4 mA to 20 mA:
1750
1000
32mA
0 4mA 20mA
occupied
*1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution.
1V ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 15V
A-30
A
4.1.5 FX3UC-4AD
Common Items
FX3UC-4AD
Specifications
-20mA to +20mA DC
B
-10V to +10V DC
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Gain -9V to +10V*1*2 -17mA to +30mA*1*3 C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
0.32mV (20V × 1/64000) 1.25μA (40mA × 1/32000)
Overall accuracy

25±5°C
FX3G-2AD-BD

conversion 500μs × number of selected channels*5
E
FX3U-4DA
+32640 +16320
+32000 +16000
+20.4mA
+10.2V
-10V 0 -20mA 0
+10V +20mA F
-20.4mA
-10.2V
FX3U-4DA-ADP
-32640 -16320
16400
16000
G
20.4mA
FX3G-1DA-BD
0 4mA 20mA
Insulation method • The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. H
FX3U-3A-ADP

occupied
*2.
The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition:
I
FX3U-4AD-PT

-ADP
"5 ms × number of selected channels." J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-31
4.1.6 FX2NC-4AD
FX2NC-4AD
Specifications
-20mA to +20mA DC
-10V to +10V DC
Gain -9V to +10V*1*2 -17mA to +30mA*1*3
0.32mV (20V × 1/64000) 1.25μA (40mA × 1/32000)
Overall accuracy

25±5°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input


conversion 1ms × number of selected channels*5
+32640 +16320
+32000 +16000
+20.4mA
+10.2V
-10V 0 -20mA 0
+10V 20mA
-20.4mA
-10.2V

-32640 -16320
16400
16000
20.4mA
0 4mA 20mA
occupied
1V ≤ (Gain - Offset)
"5 ms × number of selected channels."
A-32
A
4.1.7 FX2N-8AD
Common Items
FX2N-8AD
Specifications
B
-20mA to +20mA DC
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
-10V to +10V DC
Gain -9V to +10V*1*2 -17mA to +30mA*1*3
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
0.63mV (20V × 1/32000) 2.50μA (40mA × 1/16000)
Overall accuracy

25±5°C
FX3G-2AD-BD

500μs × number of selected channels*5
conversion
E
FX3U-4DA
+16320 +8160
+16000 +8000
+20.4mA
+10.2V
-10V 0
+10V
-20mA 0
+20mA
F
-20.4mA
-10.2V
FX3U-4DA-ADP
-16320 Approx.-8160
8200
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
8000
20.4mA
0 4mA 20mA
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
occupied
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
1V ≤ (Gain - Offset)
-ADP

*4.
*5.
The resolution and the input/output characteristics depend on the selected mode.
If 1 or more channels use the thermocouple input(s), the input voltage/current data conversion speed will be
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
A-33
4.1.8 FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3G-2AD-BD
Specifications
0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC
Analog input range
(Input resistance: 198.7 kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω)
Offset
Gain
Overall accuracy
25±5°C
0 to 55°C

180μs (Data updated every scan time.)
conversion
4080 2040
4000
2000
Digital output
Digital output
0 10V 10.2V 0 4mA 20mA 20.32mA

• The analog input area is not insulated from the PLC.

Insulation method
0 point (This number is not related to the maximum I/O points of the PLC.)
occupied
A-34
Common Items 4.2 Analog Output
A
4.2 Analog Output
Common Items
4.2.1 FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3U-4DA-ADP
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Specifications
Voltage output Current output
Number of output points 4ch
Analog output range
(External load: 5 k to 1 MΩ) (External load: 500 Ω or less)
Offset C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Gain
Digital input 12 bits, binary
25±5°C D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Overall accuracy
0 to 55°C
If the external load resistance (Rs) is less than
5 kΩ, the accuracy increases as shown in the
following formula: (Increase: 100 mV per 1%)
Reference 47100
-0.9 %
-
E
Rs+47
FX3U-4DA
for 10 V full scale
Time required for D/A • FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (Data updated every scan time.)
F
10V 20mA
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Analog output
Analog output
Output characteristics
4080
4080
4mA G
0 4000 0 4000
FX3G-1DA-BD
Digital input Digital input
• The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
occupied
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-35
4.2.2 FX2N-2DA
FX2N-2DA
Specifications
0V to 10V DC
4mA to 20mA DC
Analog output range 0V to 5V DC
(External load: 400 Ω or less)
(External load: 2 k to 1 MΩ)
If the digital value is "0": If the digital value is "0":
Offset*1*2 0V to 1V 4mA
If the digital value is "4000": If the digital value is "4000":
Gain*1*2 5V to 10V 20mA
Digital output 12 bits, binary
Resolution 2.5mV (10V × 1/4000)*2 4μA (16mA × 1/4000)*2
±0.1V ±0.16mA
Overall accuracy
Does not include any load fluctuation. -
Time required for D/A 4ms × number of selected channels
conversion (Operation synchronized with sequence program)
10V 20mA
Analog output
Analog output
4095
4095
4mA
0 4000 0 4000
If the input data consists of 13 bits or more, only the lower 12 bits will be valid, and the other bits will
be ignored.
Insulation method
occupied
*1. Use the adjustment volume to adjust the FX2N-2DA.

A-36
A
4.2.3 FX3U-4DA
Common Items
FX3U-4DA
Specifications
Number of output points 4ch B
0mA to 20mA DC
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
-10V to +10V DC
Analog output range 4mA to 20mA DC
Offset -10V to +9V*1*2 0mA to 17mA*1*3
Gain -9V to +10V*1*2 3mA to 30mA*1*3
Digital input With sign, 16 bits, binary 15 bits, binary
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Resolution 0.32mV (20V × 1/64000)*4 0.63μA (20mA × 1/32000)*4
Overall accuracy

25±5°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output
0 to 55°C
Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Reference Includes corrective function by load fluctuation. -
Time required for D/A

1ms (The number of selected channels will not affect this value.)
conversion
zWhen the output mode is set to "0": zWhen the output mode is "2":
(The dotted line is for mode 3.) E
+10.2V
FX3U-4DA
20.4mA
+10V
+32640
20mA
Output characteristics -32000

Analog
0
output
+32000
F
-32640
32640
FX3U-4DA-ADP
4mA
-10V
-10.2V 0 32000
Digital input
Insulation method • The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
occupied
*1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. In the analog value specification
mode, however, the offset/gain cannot be adjusted.
*2. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-37
4.2.4 FX2N-4DA
FX2N-4DA
Specifications
0mA to 20mA DC
-10V to +10V DC
15 V or less, and 32 mA or less, and
Gain
Gain - Offset ≥ 1V Gain - Offset ≥ 4mA
Digital output With sign, 12 bits, binary 10 bits, binary
Resolution 5mV (10V × 1/2000)*1 20μA (20mA × 1/1000)*1
±1.0% (±200μA) for 20mA full scale
Overall accuracy Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output
Does not include any load fluctuation. -
2.1 ms (The number of selected channels will not affect this value.)
conversion
 When the output mode is set to "0": When the output mode is "2":
(The dotted line is for mode 1.)
+10V 20mA
Analog output
+2047
Output characteristics -2000 0

+2000
-2048
1023
4mA
-10V 0 1000
Digital input
occupied
A-38
A
4.2.5 FX2NC-4DA
Common Items
FX2NC-4DA
Specifications
Number of output points 4ch B
0mA to 20mA DC
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
-10V to +10V DC
Gain -4V to +15V*1*2 -16mA to +32mA*1*3
Digital input With sign, 12 bits, binary 10 bits, binary
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Resolution*1 5mV (20V × 1/4000) 20μA (20mA × 1/1000)
Overall accuracy

0 to 55°C
Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Reference Does not include any load fluctuation. -

2.1ms (The number of selected channels will not affect this value.)
conversion
(The dotted line is for mode 1.) E
FX3U-4DA
+10V
20mA
+2047
Output characteristics -2000

Analog
0
output
+2000
F
-2048
1023
FX3U-4DA-ADP
4mA
-10V
0 1000
Digital input
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
occupied
1V ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 15V H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-39
4.2.6 FX3G-1DA-BD
FX3G-1DA-BD
Specifications
Analog output range
(External load: 2 k to 1 MΩ) (External load: 500 Ω or less)
Offset
Gain
Digital input 12 bits, binary 11 bits, binary
25±5°C
Overall accuracy
0 to 55°C
Shipment adjustment is carried out by external
load resistance 2 kΩ.
If external load resistance becomes larger than
Reference -
2 kΩ, the output voltage will increase slightly.
When the load is 1 MΩ, the output voltage is
about 2% higher than the correct value.
60μs (Data updated every scan time.)
conversion
10V 20mA
Analog output
Analog output
4mA
0 4000 4080 0 2000 2040

Caution:
An area of dead band is located in the region of
0V. Therefore the output analog value may not
represent the digital value accurately.
Insulation method • The analog output area is not insulated from the PLC.
occupied
A-40
Common Items 4.3 Mixed Analog Input/Output
A
4.3 Mixed Analog Input/Output
Common Items
4.3.1 FX3U-3A-ADP
FX3U-3A-ADP B
Specifications
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output
Number of input/
2ch 1ch
output points
0V to 10V DC 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC
Analog input/ 4mA to 20mA DC
(Input resistance: (External load: (External load:
output range
198.7 kΩ)
5 k to 1 MΩ) 500 Ω or less) C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Absolute -0.5V, -2mA,
- -
maximum input +15V +30mA
Digital input/
12 bits, binary
output
Resolution 2.5mV (10V × 1/4000) 5μA (16mA × 1/3200) 2.5mV (10V × 1/4000) 4μA (16mA × 1/4000)
Ambient D
±0.5% (±50mV) ±0.5% (±80μA) ±0.5% (±50mV) ±0.5% (±80μA)
temperature:
FX3G-2AD-BD
for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale
25±5°C
Ambient
±1.0% (±100mV) ±1.0% (±160μA) ±1.0% (±100mV) ±1.0% (±160μA)
temperature:
for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale
0 to 55°C
Overall accuracy
If the external load E

resistance (Rs) is less
FX3U-4DA
than 5 kΩ, the accuracy
increases as shown in the
following formula:
Reference - - (Increase: 100 mV per -
1%)
47100
F
-0.9 %
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Rs+47
for 10 V full scale
• FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC :
80μs for each selected input channel + 40μs for each selected output channel
Time required (Operation synchronized with sequence program)
for conversion • FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : G
90μs for each selected input channel + 50μs for each selected output channel
FX3G-1DA-BD
(Operation synchronized with sequence program)
4080 3280
4000 3200 10V 20mA
H
Analog output
Analog output
Digital output
Digital output
I/O
FX3U-3A-ADP
characteristics
20.4mA
10.2V
4080
4080
4mA
0 10V 0 4mA 20mA 0 4000 0 4000
Analog input Analog input Digital input Digital input
I
• The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC.
FX3U-4AD-PT
Insulation
• The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input and output.
method
-ADP
Number of I/O 0 points

points occupied (This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-41
4.3.2 FX2N-5A
1. Analog input
FX2N-5A
Specifications
-10V to +10V DC -20mA to +20mA DC
Analog input range -100mV to +100mV DC 4mA to 20mA DC
• -10V to +10V DC:
-32V to +5V DC
Offset -32mA to +10mA
• -100mV to +100mV DC:
-320mV to +50mV DC
• -10V to +10V DC:
-5V to +32V, and Gain - Offset > 1V -10mA to +32mA, and
Gain
• -100mV to +100mV DC: Gain - Offset > 1 mA
-50mV to +320mV, and Gain - Offset > 10mA
• -10V to +10V DC:
With sign, 16 bits, binary
Digital input/output With sign, 15 bits, binary
• -100mV to +100mV DC:
With sign, 12 bits, binary
312.5μV (20V × 1/64000) 1.25μA (40mA × 1/32000)
Resolution
50μV (200mV × 1/4000) 10μA (40mA × 1/4000)
• -10V to +10V DC:
Ambient temperature: ±0.3% (±60mV) for 20V full scale ±0.3% (±120μA) for 40mA full scale
Overall accuracy
25±5°C • -100mV to +100mV DC: Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input
±0.5% (±1mV) for 200mV full scale
• -10V to +10V DC:
Ambient temperature: ±0.5% (±100mV) for 20V full scale ±0.5% (±200μA) for 40mA full scale
0±55°C • -100mV to +100mV DC: Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input
±1.0% (±2mV) for 200mV full scale
Time required for
1ms × number of selected channels
conversion
+32767 +32767 +20.480mA
+32000
+10.240V
+32000
-10V 0 -20mA 0
+20mA
-20.480mA
+10V
-10.240V
-32000 -32000
I/O characteristics
-32768 -32768
+32767
+32000
20.383mA
2mA
0 4mA 20mA
-4000
2. Analog output
FX2N-5A
Specifications
A-42
A
FX2N-5A
Common Items
Specifications
0mA to 20mA DC
-10V to +10V DC
Offset -10V to +5V 0mA to 10mA B
-9V to +10V, and 3 mA to 30 mA or less, and
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Gain
Gain - Offset ≥ 1V Gain - Offset ≥ 3mA
Digital input/output With sign, 12 bits, binary 10 bits, binary
Resolution 5mV (10V × 1/4000) 20μA (20mA × 1/1000)
C
Overall accuracy

FX3U-4AD-ADP
Time required for conversion 2ms
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
(The dotted line is for mode 2.)
+10V +32767 20mA
Analog output
-32000 0
I/O characteristics
+32000 E
-32768
32767
FX3U-4DA
4mA
-10V
0 32000
Digital input
3. Other
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Specifications FX2N-5A
• The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the
PLC.
Insulation method • The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input
and output.
• Channels are not insulated from each other. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
occupied
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-43
4.3.3 FX0N-3A
FX0N-3A
Specifications
Number of
input/output 2ch 1ch
points
0V to 10V DC 0V to 10V DC
Analog input/ 4mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC
0V to 5V DC 0V to 5V DC
output range*1 (Input resistance: 250 Ω) (External load: 500 Ω)
(Input resistance: 200 kΩ) (External load: 1 k to 1 MΩ)
Absolute
-0.5V, -2mA,
maximum - -
+15V +60mA
input
If the digital value is "0": If the digital value is "0": If the digital value is "0": If the digital value is "0":
Offset*2*3 0V to 1V 0mA to 4mA 0V to 1V 4mA
If the digital value is "250": If the digital value is "250": If the digital value is "250": If the digital value is "250":
Gain*2*3 5V to 10V 20mA 5V to 10V 20mA
Digital input/ 0 to 250 0 to 250
output 8 bits, binary 8 bits, binary
Resolution*3 40mV (10V × 1/250) 64μA (16mA × 1/250) 40mV (10V × 1/250) 64μA (16mA × 1/250)
Overall
±0.1V ±0.16mA ±0.1V ±0.16mA
accuracy
Time required TO instruction processing time × 2 + FROM instruction processing time
for conversion (operation synchronized with sequence program)
255 255
250 250 10V 20mA
Analog output
Digital output
Digital output
Analog output
20.320mA
10.200V
I/O
characteristics
255
255
4mA
0 10V 0 4mA 20mA 0 250 0 250
If the input data consists of 9 bits or more, only the

lower 8 bits will be valid, and the other bits will be
ignored.
Insulation • The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC.
method • Channels are not insulated from each other.
Number of I/O
points 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.)
occupied
*1. Combined use of voltage and current inputs is not possible.

*2. Adjustment of the volume (offset or gain) value will change the resolution.
A-44
Common Items 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input
A
4.4 Temperature Sensor Input
Common Items
4.4.1 FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
B
Specifications
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F)
3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor(s)
Input signal
JIS C 1604-1997
Rated temperature range -50°C to +250°C -58°F to +482°F C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Digital output -500 to +2500 -580 to +4820
Resolution 0.1°C 0.18°F
• Ambient temperature: 25°C±5°C ±0.5% for full scale
Overall accuracy
• Ambient temperature: 0°C to 55°C ±1.0% for full scale
Time required for
conversion
• FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (Data updated every scan time.) D
• FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (Data updated every scan time.)
FX3G-2AD-BD
+2550 +4910
+2500 +4820
Digital
output
Digital
output
+491°F
+255°C
FX3U-4DA
-50°C -58°F
0 0
-67°F
-55°C
+250°C +482°F
-500 Temperature -580 Temperature
-550 -670
• The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Number of I/O points 0 points
occupied (This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-45
4.4.2 FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
Specifications
Input signal
JIS C 1604-1997
Rated temperature range -100°C to +600°C -148°F to +1112°F
Resolution 0.2°C to 0.3°C 0.4°F to 0.5°F
• Ambient temperature: 25°C±5°C ±0.5% for full scale
Overall accuracy
• Ambient temperature: 0°C to 55°C ±1.0% for full scale
Time required for • FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (Data updated every scan time.)
+6150 +11390
+6000 +11120
Digital
output
Digital
output
+1139°F
+615°C
-100°C -148°F
-175°F
-115°C
0 +600°C 0 +1112°F
-1000Temperature -1480Temperature
-1150 -1750
A-46
A
4.4.3 FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
Common Items
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
Specifications
Number of input points 4ch B
Platinum resistance thermometer sensor (2-wire or 3-wire) Pt1000
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
JIS C 1604-1997
Input signal
Nickel resistance thermometer sensor (2-wire or 3-wire) Ni1000
DIN 43760-1987
Pt1000 -50°C to +250°C Pt1000 -58°F to +482°F
Rated temperature range
Ni1000 -40°C to +110°C Ni1000 -40°F to +230°F C
Pt1000 -500 to +2500 Pt1000 -580 to +4820
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Digital output
Ni1000 -400 to +1100 Ni1000 -400 to +2300
Pt1000 Pt1000
Ni1000 Ni1000
Overall accuracy
• Ambient temperature : 25°C±5°C ±0.5% for full scale D
• Ambient temperature : 0°C to 55°C ±1.0% for full scale
FX3G-2AD-BD
• Pt1000 • Pt1000
+2560 +4920
+2500 +4820 E
FX3U-4DA
+492.8F
Approx.
+256C
Approx.
-50C 0 -58F 0
Approx.
Approx.
+250C +482F
-55C
F
-67F
-500 -580
-550 -670
FX3U-4DA-ADP
• Ni1000 • Ni1000
+1150 +2390
+1100 +2300
G
Approx.
Approx.
+115C
+239F
FX3G-1DA-BD
-40C 0 -40F 0
Approx.
Approx.
+110C +230F
-45C
-49F
-400 -400
-450 -490
• The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. H
Insulation method • The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input area.
FX3U-3A-ADP

I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-47
4.4.4 FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
Specifications
Thermocouple type K or J
Input signal
JIS C 1602-1995
• Type K: -100°C to +1000°C • Type K: -148°F to +1832°F
• Type J: -100°C to +600°C • Type J: -148°F to +1112°F
• Type K: -1000 to +10000 • Type K: -1480 to +18320
Digital output
• Type J: -1000 to +6000 • Type J: -1480 to +11120
• Type K: 0.4°C • Type K: 0.72°F
Resolution
• Type J: 0.3°C • Type J: 0.54°F
Overall accuracy ± (0.5% for full scale +1°C)
• Type K • Type K
+10100 +18500
+10000 +18320
Digital
output
Digital
output
+1010°C
+1850°F
-110°C -148°F
0 -166°F 0
-110°C
+1000°C +1832°F
Temperature Temperature
-1000 -1480
-1100 -1660
• Type J • Type J
+6100
+6000 +11300
+11120
Digital
output
Digital
output
+1130°F
+610°C
-100°C -148°F
-110°C
0 0
-166°F
+600°C +1112°F
-1000 -1480
-1100 -1660
A-48
A
4.4.5 FX2N-4AD-PT
Common Items
FX2N-4AD-PT
Specifications
Number of input points 4ch B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
DIN43760
Input signal
Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997
JPt100 JIS C 1604-1981
Input signal current 1mA(Constant current system)
Rated temperature range -100°C to +600°C -148°F to +1112°F C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Resolution 0.2°C to 0.3°C 0.36°F to 0.54°F
Overall accuracy ±1.0% for full scale
Time required for
60ms (15ms × 4ch)
conversion
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
+6000 +11120
Digital
output
Digital
output
E
-100°C -148°F
FX3U-4DA
0 +600°C 0 +1112°F
-1000 -1480
Insulation method • The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
8 points (Count either the input or output points of the PLC.)
occupied
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-49
4.4.6 FX2N-4AD-TC
FX2N-4AD-TC
Specifications
Input signal
JIS C 1602-1995
• Type K: -100°C to +1200°C • Type K: -148°F to +2192°F
• Type J: -100°C to +600°C • Type J: -148°F to +1112°F
• Type K: -1000 to +12000 • Type K: -1480 to +21920
Digital output
• Type J: -1000 to +6000 • Type J: -1480 to +11120
• Type K: 0.4°C • Type K: 0.72°F
Resolution
• Type J: 0.3°C • Type J: 0.54°F
Overall accuracy ± (0.5% for full scale +1°C)
Time required for
(240ms±2%) × number of selected channels
conversion
+12000 +21920
(Type K) (Type K)
Digital
output
Digital
output
+6000 +11120
(Type J) (Type J)
-100°C -148°F
0 +600°C +1200°C 0 +1112°F +2192°F
(Type J) (Type K) (Type J) (Type K)
-1000 -1480
occupied
A-50
A
4.4.7 FX2N-8AD
Common Items
FX2N-8AD
Specifications
Thermocouple type K, J, and T
B
Input signal
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
JIS C 1602-1995
-100°C to +1200°C -148°F to +2192°F
-100°C to +600°C -148°F to +1112°F
• Type T • Type T C
-100°C to +350°C -148°F to +662°F
FX3U-4AD-ADP
-1000 to +12000 -1480 to +21920
Digital output
-1000 to +6000 -1480 to +11120
• Type T • Type T D
-1000 to +3500 -1480 to +6620
FX3G-2AD-BD
• Type K: • Type K:
Overall accuracy
±0.5% (±6.5°C) for full scale ±0.5% (±11.7°F) for full scale
Ambient temperature: • Type J: • Type J:
0 to 55°C ±0.5% (±3.5°C) for full scale ±0.5% (±6.3°F) for full scale E
• Type T: • Type T:
FX3U-4DA
±0.7% (±3.15°C) for full scale ±0.7% (±5.67°F) for full scale
Time required for
40ms × number of selected channels
conversion
+12000
(Type K)
+21920
(Type K) F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Digital
output
Digital
output
+6000 +11120
(Type J) (Type J)
+3500 +6620
Input characteristics (Type T) (Type T)
+600°C +1112°F
-100°C (Type J) -148°F (Type J)
0 +350°C +1200°C 0 +662°F
(Type T)
+2192°F
(Type K)
G
(Type T) (Type K)
FX3G-1DA-BD
-1000 -1480
• Channels are not insulated from each other. H
FX3U-3A-ADP

occupied
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-51
4.4.8 FX2N-2LC
FX2N-2LC*1*2
Specifications
Thermocouple type K, J, R, S, E, T, B, N, PL II, W5Re/W26Re, U, and L
JIS C 1602-1995
Input signal
Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997, JPt100 JIS C 1604-1981
Examples: Examples:
-100.0°C to +800.0°C -100°F to +2100°F
Examples: Examples:
-1000 to +8000 -100 to +2100
Resolution 1°C or 0.1°C 1°F or 0.1°F
Overall accuracy
±0.3°C (±1digit) for full scale
23±5°C
±0.7°C (±1digit) for full scale
0 to 55°C
±1.0°C
Cold junction temperature
±2.0°C if the input value is in the range from -150°C to -100°C
compensation error
Time required for
500ms (Sampling period)
conversion
zWhen type K (input mode 2) zWhen type K (input mode 4)

is set: is set:
+1300 +2400
Digital
output
Digital
output
-100°C -100°F
0 +1300°C 0 +2400°F
-100 -100
• Channels are insulated from each other.
occupied
*1. For FX2N-2LC, the rated temperature range, digital output value, and resolution depend on the selected sensor
and mode.
*2. Accuracy is not guaranteed for the temperature range of 0°C to 399°C (0°F to 799°F) of the thermocouple -B input
and for the temperature range of 0°F to 32°F of the PL II and WRe5-26 inputs.
A-52
A
4.4.9 FX3U-4LC
Common Items
FX3U-4LC*1*2
Specifications
Thermocouple type K, J, R, S, E, T, B, N JIS C 1602-1995
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
PL II, W5Re/W26Re, U, and L
Input signal Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997, JPt100 JIS C 1604-1981
2-wire/3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor(s)
Pt1000 JIS C 1604-1997
micro voltage input C
Examples: Examples:
FX3U-4AD-ADP
-100.0°C to +800.0°C -100°F to +2100°F
Examples: Examples: D
FX3G-2AD-BD
-1000 to +8000 -100 to +2100
Resolution 1°C or 0.1°C 1°F or 0.1°F
E
Overall accuracy
Ambient temperature: Measurement accuracy differs depending on the type of input, and the input range.
FX3U-4DA
25±5°C For specification details, refer to the FX3U-4LC User's Manual.
Ambient temperature: Measurement accuracy differs depending on the type of input, and the input range.
0 to 55°C For specification details, refer to the FX3U-4LC User's Manual.
Cold junction temperature

±1.0°C
F
compensation error
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Time required for
250ms (Sampling period)
conversion
zWhen type K (input mode 2) zWhen type K (input mode 4)

is set: is set: G
+1300 +2400
FX3G-1DA-BD
Digital
output
Digital
output
-100°C -100°F H
0 0
FX3U-3A-ADP
+1300°C +2400°F
-100 -100
• Channels are insulated from each other. I
FX3U-4AD-PT

occupied
*1. For FX3U-4LC, the rated temperature range, digital output value, and resolution depend on the selected sensor
-ADP
and mode.
*2. For a detailed description of the micro voltage input, refer to the FX3U-4LC User's Manual. J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-53
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Version Number
Common Items 5.1 PLC Main Unit
5. Version Number
5.1 PLC Main Unit
5.1.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method

The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT"
indicated on the front of the product.
1. Checking the nameplate

The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer's serial
number "S/N" indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product.
Example nameplate (manufacture's serial number : 1010001)
Right side
* Actual product nameplate differs

from the example shown above.
<Product during December, 2009 or earlier> <Product from January, 2010>
9 Z 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
Control number Control number

Month (Example: Dec.): Month (Example: Jan.):
1 to 9 = January to September, 1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December X = October, Y = November, Z = December
Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year Year (Example: 2010): Last two digit of year
A-54
Common Items 5.1 PLC Main Unit
A
2. Checking the front of the product
Common Items
The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer's serial
number "LOT" on the front (at the bottom) of the product.
The "LOT" indication is adopted for products manufactured at the following times.
Main unit "LOT" indication adoption time
FX3S Series PLC March 2013 and later (From first product) B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3G Series PLC October 2008 and later
FX3GC Series PLC January 2012 and later (From first product)
FX3U Series PLC January 2009 and later
FX3UC Series PLC January 2009 and later
C
Example: FX3U-48MR/ES
FX3U-4AD-ADP
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
9 Z 1 0 1
E
FX3U-4DA
5.1.2 Version check F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001 or D8101.
D8001/D8101 2 4 1 0 0
PLC type and
Version data (Example: Ver. 1.00)
version number
PLC type (Example: 24 = FX3U/FX3UC series)
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-55
Common Items 5.2 Special adapter
5.2 Special adapter
5.2.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method
1. Checking the nameplate

The year and month of production of the special adapter can be checked from the manufacturer's serial
number "S/N" indicated on the label adhered to the left side of the product.
Example nameplate
(manufacture's serial number: 1010001)
Left side
* Actual product nameplate differs

from the example shown above.
9 Z 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
Control number Control number

A-56
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment)
Common Items 6.1 How to Use the Manuals
Common Items
6. Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment)
This chapter describes the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC main unit instruction manual and the B
various manuals of analog products.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
6.1 How to Use the Manuals
Various analog products can be connected to the FX Series PLC to control the analog inputs and outputs.
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
PLC
For PLC wiring and installation:

HARDWARE MANUAL Supplied
(This manual is supplied with the product.)
User's Manual - Hardware Edition
D
Supplied separately
FX3G-2AD-BD
For sequence programs:
Programming manual Supplied separately
FX3U-4DA
Analog products
Depending on the product type, the "Installation Manual" or the "User's Manual" is supplied with the
product.
For a detailed description, refer to the separate manual "User's Manual - Analog Control Edition" as F
described below:
FX3U-4DA-ADP
For installation and parts identification:
Installation Manual Supplied

(For a detailed description of the programming method, refer to the
separate manual.)
For installation, parts identification, use, and examples of programs:

User's Manual Supplied
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
(Necessary information is in the user's manual, but for a detailed description,
refer to the separate manual.)
Analog control H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output Temperature input
For use of each analog control product:

This User's Manual - Analog Control Edition
manual Supplied separately
I
For each analog product, use this manual for details on wiring/setup details, example
FX3U-4AD-PT
programs, and troubleshooting methods.

-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-57
Common Items 6.2 Description of Related Manuals
6.2 Description of Related Manuals

The main manuals necessary for the use of analog products are described below.
These manuals are classified into two groups: manuals necessary for the PLC main unit, and manuals
necessary for analog products.
The manuals specified as "supplied separately" are not supplied with the products. Other manuals are
supplied with the corresponding products.
6.2.1 Analog control manuals

The following manuals are common manuals that can be used for any of the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Series analog products.
Supplied with
Document product or
Manual type Description
number supplied
separately
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/ Supplied
This manual describes the details of the FX3S/FX3G/
FX3UC Series User’s Manual JY997D16701 separately
FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC analog products.
- Analog Control Edition (This manual)
6.2.2 Manuals related to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC main unit

For a detailed description of the commands to be used for the sequence programs, refer to the programming
manual. For a detailed description of the hardware, such as wiring of the PLC main unit, refer to the User's
Manual - Hardware Edition.
Supplied with
Document product or
number supplied
separately
FX3S Series PLC
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the PLC main
FX3S Series Supplied with unit FX3S extracted from the FX3S Series User’s Manual -
JY997D48301
HARDWARE MANUAL product Hardware Edition. For detailed explanation, refer to the
FX3S Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
unit FX3S-30M/E-2AD extracted from the FX3S
FX3S-30M/E-2AD Supplied with
JY997D51701 Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. For detailed
HARDWARE MANUAL product
explanation, refer to the FX3S Series User’s Manual -
Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O specifications,
FX3S Series User’s Manual Supplied
JY997D48601 wiring, installation and maintenance of the FX3S PLC
- Hardware Edition separately
main unit.
FX3G Series PLC
FX3G Series Supplied with unit FX3G extracted from the FX3G Series User’s Manual
JY997D46001
HARDWARE MANUAL product - Hardware Edition. For detailed explanation, refer to the
FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
FX3G Series User’s Manual Supplied
JY997D31301 wiring, installation and maintenance of the FX3G PLC
main unit.
A-58
A
Supplied with
Common Items
Document product or
number supplied
separately
FX3GC Series PLC
unit FX3GC extracted from the FX3GC Series User’s
B
FX3GC Series Supplied with
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
JY997D45201 Manual - Hardware Edition. For detailed explanation,
refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware
Edition.
FX3GC Series User’s Manual Supplied
JY997D45401 wiring, installation and maintenance of the FX3GC PLC
main unit. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3U Series PLC
FX3U Series Supplied with unit FX3U extracted from the FX3U Series User’s Manual
JY997D50301
HARDWARE MANUAL product - Hardware Edition. For detailed explanation, refer to the
FX3U Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O specifications, D
FX3U Series User’s Manual Supplied
FX3G-2AD-BD
JY997D16501 wiring, installation and maintenance of the FX3U PLC
main unit.
FX3UC Series PLC
unit FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) extracted from the FX3UC
FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
JY997D50501
Supplied with
product
Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. For detailed E
explanation, refer to the FX3UC Series User’s Manual -
FX3U-4DA
Hardware Edition.
unit FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 extracted from the FX3UC Series
FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 Supplied with
JY997D31601 User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. For detailed
explanation, refer to the FX3UC Series User’s Manual -
Hardware Edition. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3UC Series User’s Manual Supplied
JY997D28701 wiring, installation and maintenance of the FX3UC PLC
main unit.
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/
FX3UC Series Programming Supplied
This manual describes the basic and application G
JY997D16601 commands necessary for the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/
FX3G-1DA-BD
Manual - Basic & Applied separately
FX3UC Series PLC.
Instruction Edition
MELSEC-Q/L/F
Supplied Programming methods, specifications, functions, etc.
Structured Programming SH-080782
separately required to create structured programs.
Manual (Fundamentals)
FXCPU Structured
Supplied Devices, parameters, etc. provided in structured projects
H
Programming Manual JY997D26001
FX3U-3A-ADP
separately of GX Works2.
[Device & Common]
FXCPU Structured
Supplied Sequence instructions provided in structured projects of
separately GX Works2.
[Basic & Applied Instruction]
FXCPU Structured
Supplied Application functions provided in structured projects of
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
separately GX Works2.
[Application Functions]
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-59
6.2.3 Manuals of analog units

The manuals of various analog units are described below:
Supplied with
Document product or
number supplied
separately
Analog input unit
This manual describes the FX3G-2AD-BD analog input
FX3G-2AD-BD Supplied with
JY997D33501 expansion board hardware, such as specifications and
INSTALLATION MANUAL product
installation.
This manual describes the FX3U-4AD analog input
FX3U-4AD Supplied with
JY997D20701 special function block hardware, such as specifications
and installation, and also describes various programs.
This manual describes the FX3U-4AD-ADP analog input
FX3U-4AD-ADP Supplied with
JY997D13901 special adapter hardware, such as specifications and
USER’S MANUAL product
installation.
This manual describes the FX2N-8AD analog input
FX2N-8AD Supplied with
USER’S GUIDE product
This manual describes the FX2NC-4AD analog input
FX2NC-4AD Supplied with
Analog output unit
This manual describes the FX3G-1DA-BD analog output
FX3G-1DA-BD Supplied with
JY997D33601 expansion board hardware, such as specifications and
installation.
This manual describes the FX3U-4DA analog output
FX3U-4DA Supplied with
and installation.
This manual describes the FX3U-4DA-ADP analog output
FX3U-4DA-ADP Supplied with
JY997D14001 special adapter hardware, such as specifications and
installation.
This manual describes the FX2NC-4DA analog output
FX2NC-4DA Supplied with
This manual describes the FX2N-4DA analog output
FX2N-4DA Supplied with
This manual describes the FX2N-2DA analog output
FX2N-2DA Supplied with
Analog input/output unit
This manual describes the FX3U-3A-ADP analog input/
FX3U-3A-ADP Supplied with
JY997D35601 output special adapter hardware, such as specifications
and installation.
This manual describes the FX2N-5A analog input/output
FX2N-5A Supplied with
This manual describes the FX0N-3A analog input/output
FX0N-3A Supplied with
A-60
Common Items
Supplied with
Document product or
number supplied
separately
Temperature sensor unit
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
This manual describes the FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP platinum
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP Supplied with
JY997D14701 resistance thermometer input special adapter hardware,
such as specifications and installation.
This manual describes the FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP Supplied with
JY997D29101 platinum resistance thermometer input special adapter
hardware, such as specifications and installation. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
This manual describes the FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Supplied with
JY997D29201 resistance thermometer input special adapter hardware,
such as specifications and installation.
This manual describes the FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP Supplied with
JY997D14801 thermocouple input special adapter hardware, such as
specifications and installation. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
This manual describes the FX3U-4LC temperature
FX3U-4LC Supplied with
JY997D38901 adjustment special function block hardware, such as
specifications and installation.
This manual describes the FX3U-4LC temperature
FX3U-4LC Supplied adjustment special function block hardware, such as
USER’S MANUAL
JY997D39101
separately specifications and installation, and also describes various E
programs.
FX3U-4DA
This manual describes the FX2N-4AD-PT platinum
FX2N-4AD-PT Supplied with resistance thermometer input special function block
JY992D65601
USER’S GUIDE product hardware, such as specifications and installation, and
also describes various programs.
FX2N-4AD-TC Supplied with

This manual describes the FX2N-4AD-TC thermocouple
input special function block hardware, such as
F
JY992D65501
FX3U-4DA-ADP
USER’S GUIDE product specifications and installation, and also describes various
programs.
This manual describes the FX2N-2LC temperature
FX2N-2LC Supplied with
JY992D85601 adjustment special function block hardware, such as
specifications and installation.
This manual describes the FX2N-2LC temperature
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
FX2N-2LC Supplied adjustment special function block hardware, such as
JY992D85801
USER’S MANUAL separately specifications and installation, and also describes various
programs.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-61
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual
7. Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual

1. Main unit
Abbreviation, generic name Description
PLC
Generic name for the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX1S,
FX Series PLC
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2(FX), FX1, FX0, FX0S, and FX0N Series PLC
FX3S Series Generic name for the FX3S Series PLC
FX3S Series PLC or main unit Generic name for the FX3S Series PLC main unit
FX3G Series Generic name for the FX3G Series PLC
FX3G Series PLC or main unit Generic name for the FX3G Series PLC main unit
FX3GC Series Generic name for the FX3GC Series PLC
FX3GC Series PLC or
Generic name for the FX3GC Series PLC main unit
main unit
FX3U Series Generic name for the FX3U Series PLC
FX3U Series PLC or main unit Generic name for the FX3U Series PLC main unit
FX3UC Series Generic name for the FX3UC Series PLC
FX3UC Series PLC or
Generic name for the FX3UC Series PLC main unit
main unit
2. Expansion board and special adapter

Expansion board
Generic name for analog expansion board, communication expansion board,
special adapter connection expansion board and variable analog
potentiometer expansion board.
Expansion board
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of the main
unit. To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User’s Manual -
Hardware Edition of the main unit to be used for your system.
Analog expansion board Generic name for 2AD-BD, 1DA-BD
2AD-BD FX3G-2AD-BD
1DA-BD FX3G-1DA-BD
Communication expansion board Generic name for 232BD, 422BD, 485BD, and USBBD.
232BD FX3G-232-BD, FX3U-232-BD, FX2N-232-BD, FX1N-232-BD
USBBD FX3U-USB-BD
Variable analog potentiometer
Generic name for 8AV-BD
expansion board
8AV-BD FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3U-8AV-BD
Special adapter connection board
Generic name for CNVBD.
or connector conversion board
CNVBD FX3U-CNV-BD, FX2N-CNV-BD, FX1N-CNV-BD
Special adapter
Generic name for high-speed input special adapter, high-speed output special
adapter, communication special adapter, CF card special adapter, and analog
special adapter.
Special adapter
A-62
A
Common Items
High-speed input/output special Generic name for high-speed input special adapter and high-speed output
adapter special adapter.
2HSY-ADP FX3U-2HSY-ADP
4HSX-ADP FX3U-4HSX-ADP
Communication special adapter Generic name for communication special adapter.
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
232ADP FX3U-232ADP(-MB), FX2NC-232ADP, FX0N-232ADP, FX-232ADP
485ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB), FX2NC-485ADP, FX0N-485ADP, FX-485ADP
ENET-ADP FX3U-ENET-ADP
CF card special adapter Generic name for CF card special adapter.
CF-ADP FX3U-CF-ADP C
Analog special adapter Generic name for analog special adapter.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP
4DA-ADP FX3U-4DA-ADP
3A-ADP FX3U-3A-ADP
PT-ADP FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
D
PTW-ADP FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
FX3G-2AD-BD
PNK-ADP FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
TC-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
Special adapter connection
conversion adapter or connection Generic name for CNVADP
conversion adapter E
CNVADP FX3S-CNV-ADP, FX3G-CNV-ADP
FX3U-4DA
3. Extension unit
Generic name for the FX3U Series extension unit, FX3UC Series extension unit,
FX2N Series extension unit, FX2NC Series extension unit, and FX0N Series F
extension unit.
Extension unit
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3U Series extension unit Generic name for FX3U Series special function block.
FX3UC Series extension unit Generic name for FX3UC Series special function block.
Generic name for FX2N Series input/output powered extension unit, FX2N Series
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
FX2N Series extension unit input/output extension block, FX2N Series special function unit, and FX2N Series
special function block.
Generic name for FX2NC Series input/output extension block and FX2NC Series
FX2NC Series extension unit
special function block.
Generic name for FX0N Series input/output extension block and FX0N Series
FX0N Series extension unit
special function block. H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Generic name for FX3U Series special function block, FX3UC Series special
function block, FX2N Series special function unit, FX2N Series special function
Special function unit/block
block, FX2NC Series special function block, and FX0N Series special function
block.
FX3U Series special FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3U-4LC, FX3U-2HC, FX3U-1PG, FX3U-20SSC-H,
function block FX3U-64CCL I
FX3UC Series special
FX3U-4AD-PT
FX3UC-4AD
function block
FX2N Series special
FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM, FX2N-1RM-E-SET, FX2N-1RM-SET
function unit
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
A-63

Generic name for FX3U Series special function block, FX3UC Series special
function block, FX2N Series special function unit, FX2N Series special function
Special function unit/block
block, FX2NC Series special function block, and FX0N Series special function
block.
FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-8AD, FX2N-2DA, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-5A,
FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC, FX2N-1HC, FX2N-1PG-E, FX2N-1PG,
FX2N-10PG, FX2N-232IF, FX2N-16CCL-M, FX2N-32CCL, FX2N-64CL-M,
FX2N Series special
FX2N-16LNK-M, FX2N-32ASI-M
function block
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User’s Manual -
FX2NC Series special
FX2NC-4AD, FX2NC-4DA, FX2NC-1HC
function block
FX0N Series special
FX0N-3A
function block
4. Peripheral unit
Peripheral unit
Generic name for programming software, handy programming panel,
Peripheral unit
and display units.
Programming tool
Programming tool Generic name for programming software, and handy programming panel.
Programming software Generic name for Programming software.
Generic name for SWDNC-GXW2-J and SWDNC-GXW2-E programming
GX Works2
software packages.
Generic name for SWD5C-GPPW-J and SWD5C-GPPW-E programming
GX Developer
software packages.
Handy programming panels Generic name for the following models
(HPP) FX-30P, FX-20P(-E)-SET0, FX-20P(-E), FX-10P-SET0, FX-10P(-E)
A-64
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input)
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Programmable Controllers C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
B. FX3U-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) D

FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input)
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD
special extension block (4-channel analog input) and should be read and understood before attempting to
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
install or use the unit.

it to the end user.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
B-1
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input)
B-2
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions
Common Items
1. Outline
This chapter outlines the FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD. B
For common descriptions of the FX3U-4AD and FX3UC-4AD, these model names are referred to as the 4AD.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
1.1 Outline of Functions
The FX3U-4AD is an analog special function block which is connectable with the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC used to capture 4-ch voltage/current data. The FX3UC-4AD cannot be connected to the FX3G/
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3U Series PLC.
1) Up to 8*1 units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
(including the other special function blocks).
2) Either "voltage input" or "current input" can be specified for each channel.
3) The A/D conversion values will be stored in the 4AD buffer memory (BFM). D
FX3G-2AD-BD
4) Set the digital filter to read out stable A/D conversion values.
5) For each channel, up to 1,700 A/D conversion values can be stored as history data.
Point and section to be

System referred to
Up to 8*1 units connect to the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

E
FX3U-4DA
(including other types of special function blocks)
 Number of connectable units
FX3G/FX3U Series PLC

To check the connectable PLC F
 model number, refer to
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Section 1.3.
FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC

Analog data  For a detailed description of
wiring, refer to Chapter 3.
Flowmeter, pressure sensor, etc. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
For a detailed description of
 analog data reading programs,
refer to Chapter 4, 6, and 7.
Program
Transmission direction Buffer memory  the buffer memory, refer to
Section 5.3, and Section 5.4. H
 FROM (FNC 78) BFM#0
FX3U-3A-ADP
 TO (FNC 79) To use FROM/TO instruction


 BFM direct  or to directly specify the BFM,

refer to Section 5.2.
specification (U\G)*2 BFM#6999
Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of
connectable units and to configure the entire system. I
FX3U-4AD-PT
*1. Up to 7 units can be connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.

*2. This function is only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-3
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation
1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting to use the 4AD, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD
Refer to Chapter 1.
Outline Outline of system:

• Version number of compatible PLC
• Version number of compatible
programming tool
Refer to Chapter 2.
Check of specifications Specifications:

• Operation environment
Refer to the common • Performance specifications
pages. • Input characteristics
System configuration and selection System configuration:

(Refer to the analog control common
pages.)
Refer to Chapter 3. • Selection of units
Wiring Wiring:
• Power supply line
• Analog input line
Refer to Chapter 4.
Analog data reading (test program) Input mode specification:

• Input mode specification program for
channel 1 to 4
Refer to Chapter 5.
Buffer memory (BFM) check Buffer memory:

• Buffer memory read/write method
• List of buffer memories
Refer to Chapter 6. • Details of buffer memory
Adjustment of input characteristics Adjustment of input characteristics:

• Input characteristics change procedure
Refer to Chapter 7.
Program edit Program edit:

• Basic program
• Convenient function program
If the error status data or the input analog value is

abnormal, refer to Chapter 8 "Troubleshooting."
B-4
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 1.3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers
A
1.3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers
Common Items
FX3U-4AD is compatible with the following PLC.
Compatible PLC Version number Date of production
FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After June 2008 (From first product)
FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product) B
FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later After May 2005 (From first product)
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later After August 2004
FX3UC-4AD is compatible with the following PLC.
FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product)
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
1. Version check
→ For a detailed description of the version check,
refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2.
2. How to check the manufacturer's serial number
The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate, and on the front of the
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
product.
→ For a detailed description of how to check the manufacturer's serial number,
1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

E
FX3U-4DA
The following programming tools and versions are applicable for the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series.
1. English versions
Model name Media model name Applicable version Remarks
FX3G PLC
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.08J or later F
GX Developer SWD5C-GPPW-E Ver. 8.72A or later -
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.77F or later
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs G
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.08J or later
FX3G-1DA-BD
GX Developer SWD5C-GPPW-E Ver. 8.18U or later -
2. Japanese versions
Model name
FX3G PLC
Media model name Applicable version Remarks
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-J Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer SWD5C-GPPW-J Ver. 8.72A or later -
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
FX-30P
SWDNC-GXW2-J Ver. 1.77F or later
Ver. 1.30 or later
- I
FX3U-4AD-PT
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Developer SWD5C-GPPW-J Ver. 8.13P or later -
-ADP

J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
Point
• It is possible to create programs in FX3GC PLC using programming tools of inapplicable versions by
-ADP
selecting "FX3G" as the alternative model.
B-5
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications
2. Specifications
This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the 4AD.
2.1 Generic Specifications
Item Specifications
Ambient 0 to 55 °C (32 to 131 °F) when operating
temperature -25 to 75 °C (-13 to 167 °F) when stored
Relative
5 to 95 %RH (no condensation) when operating
humidity
Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
10 times of testing in
Vibration 10 to 57 - 0.035 each direction (X-, Y-,
DIN Rail Mounting
resistance*1 57 to 150 4.9 - and Z-axis directions)
(Total: 80 min, each)
10 to 57 - 0.075
Direct Mounting*2
57 to 150 9.8 -
Shock
147 m/s2 Acceleration, Action time: 11 ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z
resistance*1
Noise Using noise simulator of:
resistance Noise voltage: 1,000 Vp-p / Noise width: 1 μs / Rise: 1 ns / Cycle: 30 to 100 Hz
Dielectric
withstand 500 V AC, for 1 min
voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal
Insulation 5 MΩ or more using 500 V DC
resistance insulation resistance meter
Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less)
Grounding
<Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed.>*3
Working
Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dust
atmosphere
Working
altitude < 2000 m*4
*1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2.

*2. The direct mounting method cannot be used with FX3UC-4AD.
When this block is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, the direct mounting method cannot be
used.
*3.
PLC Other PLC Other PLC Other
equipment equipment equipment
Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding

Best condition Good condition Not allowed
→ For a detailed description of grounding, refer to Section 3.5.

*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the 4AD; 4AD may malfunction.
B-6
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications
A
2.2 Power Supply Specifications
Common Items
FX3U-4AD
Item Specifications
A/D conversion 24V DC ±10%, 90mA B
circuit drive power (It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the terminal block.)
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
5V DC, 110mA
CPU drive power (Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit, it is not necessary to supply power
externally.)
FX3UC-4AD C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Item Specifications
A/D conversion 24V DC ±10%, 80mA
circuit drive power (It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the power connector.)
5V DC, 100mA
CPU drive power
(Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit, it is not necessary to supply the power.)
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
2.3 Performance Specifications
Specifications
Item
Voltage input Current input E
FX3U-4DA
-10V to +10V DC -20mA to +20mA DC, 4mA to 20mA DC
Analog input range
Offset*1 -10V to +9V*2 -20mA to +17mA*3
Gain*1 -9V to +10V*2 -17mA to +30mA*3
Absolute maximum
±15V ±30mA
F
input
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Digital output With sign, 16bits, binary With sign, 15bits, binary
0.32mV (20V × 1/ 64,000) 1.25μA (40mA × 1/ 32,000)
• Ambient temperature: 25°C±5°C
• Ambient temperature: 25°C±5°C ±0.5% (±200μA) for 40mA full scale G
±0.3% (±60mV) for 20V full scale Same accuracy (±200μA) for 4mA to 20mA input
FX3G-1DA-BD
Overall accuracy
• Ambient temperature: 0°C to 55°C • Ambient temperature: 0°C to 55°C
±0.5% (±100mV) for 20V full scale ±1% (±400μA) for 40mV full scale
Same accuracy (±400μA) for 4mA to 20mA input
Time required for 500μs × number of selected channels
A/D conversion (If 1 or more channels use the digital filter(s): 5ms × number of selected channels) H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Insulation method • The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the analog input area from the power supply unit.
Number of I/O
points occupied
*1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. In the direct indication mode,
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
however, the offset/gain cannot be adjusted.

-ADP
3 mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 30 mA J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
B-7
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 2.4 Input Mode (Characteristics) BFM#0
2.4 Input Mode (Characteristics) BFM#0

For the 4AD, there are two types of input characteristics: voltage (-10 to +10V) and current (4 to 20mA, -20 to
+20mA) input characteristics. The input characteristics depend on the set input mode as described below. For
each input range, there are 3 input modes.
1. Voltage input characteristics [-10 to +10V] (Input mode: 0 to 2)

Set input mode: 2
Set input mode: 0 Set input mode: 1
Input type: Voltage input
Input type: Voltage input Input type: Voltage input
(analog value direct indication)
Analog input range: -10 to +10V Analog input range: -10 to +10V
Analog input range: -10 to +10V
Digital output range: -32000 to +32000 Digital output range: -4000 to +4000
Digital output range: -10000 to +10000
Offset/gain adjustment: Possible Offset/gain adjustment: Possible
Offset/gain adjustment: Impossible
Digital value Digital value Digital value

+32640 +4080 +10200
+32000 +4000 +10000
+10.2V
+10.2V
+10.2V
Input Input Input
voltage -10V 0 voltage -10V 0 voltage -10V 0
+10V +10V +10V
-10.2V
-10.2V
-10.2V
-32000 -4000 -10000

-32640 -4080 -10200
2. Current input characteristics [4 to 20mA] (Input mode: 3 to 5)

Set input mode: 5
Input type: Current input
Input type: Current input Input type: Current input
Analog input range: 4 to 20 mA Analog input range: 4 to 20 mA
Analog input range: 4 to 20 mA
Digital output range: 0 to 16000 Digital output range: 0 to 4000
Digital output range: 4000 to 20000

16400 4100 20400
16000 4000 20000

20.4 mA
20.4 mA
20.4 mA
4000
0 4mA 20mA Current 0 4mA 20mA Current 0 4mA 20mA Current

input input input
3. Current input characteristics [-20 to +20mA] (Input mode: 6 to 8)

Set input mode: 8
Input type: Current input
Input type: Current input Input type: Current input
Analog input range: -20 to +20 mA Analog input range: -20 to +20 mA
Analog input range: -20 to +20 mA
Digital output range: -16000 to +16000 Digital output range: -4000 to +4000
Digital output range: -20000 to +20000

+16320 +4080 +20400
+16000 +4000 +20000
+20.4mA
+20.4mA
+20.4mA
Current Current Current

Input -20mA 0 Input -20mA 0 Input -20mA 0
+20mA +20mA +20mA
-20.4mA
-20.4mA
-20.4mA
-16000 -4000 -20000

-16320 -4080 -20400
B-8
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 2.4 Input Mode (Characteristics) BFM#0
Common Items
3. Wiring
This chapter describes the 4AD wiring. B
Observe the following cautions when wiring the 4AD.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions. E
FX3U-4DA
However, do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual. H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-9
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout
3.1 Terminal Layout
FX3U-4AD
Signal Application
24+
24V DC power supply
24-
Ground terminal
V+
VI- Channel-1 analog input
I+
FG
V+ Channel-2 analog input
VI-
I+
FG
VI-
I+
FG
VI-
I+
FX3UC-4AD
Signal Application
V1+
I1+
Channel-1 analog input
COM1
SLD
V2+
I2+
COM2
SLD
• Do not connect any lines.
•
V3+
I3+
COM3
SLD
V4+
I4+
COM4
SLD
Ground terminal
B-10
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque
A
3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque
Common Items
3.2.1 Power cable (FX3UC-4AD)
Supply the 24 V DC power to FX3UC-4AD via the power supply connector. B
The power crossover cable (type "C" shown in the following table) is supplied with the FX3UC-4AD.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
To connect the power cable, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit.
There are 3 types of power cables as shown in the following table. Types "A" and "B" are supplied with the
main unit, and type "C" is supplied with the input extension blocks for FX2NC Series or the special function
blocks for FX3UC/FX2NC Series.
Type Application Model Length Cable supplied with C
1m
FX3U-4AD-ADP
A Power cable for main unit FX2NC-100MPCB
(3’ 3")
FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC main unit
Input power cable for input 1m
B FX2NC-100BPCB
extension block (3’ 3")
Input power crossover cable 0.1 m • Input extension block for FX2NC Series
C FX2NC-10BPCB1
for input extension block (0’ 3") • Special function block for FX3UC/FX2NC Series D
FX3G-2AD-BD
The crossover cable (type "C") can skip up to 4 16-point output blocks to connect units.
If more blocks should be skipped to supply power to an input extension block, use cable type "B".
3.2.2 Cable (FX3U-4AD)

E
The FX3U-4AD terminal block is designed for M3 screws.
FX3U-4DA
The end disposal of the cable shows blow.
Tighten the terminal to a torque of 0.5 to 0.8 N•m.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
• When one wire is connected to one terminal F
Terminal Crimp
FX3U-4DA-ADP
3.2 (0.13") screw terminal
6.2 mm (0.24")
or less
3.2 (0.13")
6.2 mm (0.24") Terminal G
or less
FX3G-1DA-BD
• When two wires are connected to one terminal
3.2 (0.13")
6.2 mm (0.24") Terminal Crimp
screw terminal
or less
6.3 mm (0.25") H
or more
FX3U-3A-ADP
3.2 (0.13")
6.2 mm (0.24") Terminal
or less 6.3 mm (0.25")
or more I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-11
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque
3.2.3 Cable (FX3UC-4AD)

Use the following cables to connect with counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable end as shown below.
1. Cable
Applicable cable and tightening torque
Wire size Tightening
Termination
(stranded wire/solid wire) torque
0.3 mm2 to 0.5 mm2 • To connect a stranded cable, peel the cover off the cable
Single wire and then twist the core before connection.
(AWG22 to 20)
• To connect a single-wire cable, peel the cover off the
Double wire 0.3 mm2 (AWG22)×2 cable before connection.
0.22 to • Ferrule with insulation sleeve
0.3 mm2 to 0.5 mm2 0.25 N•m (recommended terminal)
Ferrule with (AWG22 to 20) AI 0.5-8WH : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact
insulation (Refer to the external • Caulking tool
sleeve view of ferrule shown in
CRIMPFOX 6*1 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact
the following figure.)
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact)
*1. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3

*2. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6
2. Termination of cable end

To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single-wire directly or use the ferrule with insulation sleeve.
Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25 N•m.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to do so may cause
equipment failures or malfunctions.
• To directly terminate end of stranded/single-wire cable: • Stranded wire/solid wire
- Terminate the end of the stranded cable so that the "barbed wires"
cannot protrude.
- Do not solder-plate the end of the cable.
9mm
(0.35")
• To terminate cable end using ferrule with insulation sleeve: • Ferrule with insulation sleeve
If the cable sheath is too thick, it may be difficult to insert the cable Insulation sleeve Contact area
into the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable (Crimp area)
while referring to the external view.
<Reference> 8mm (0.31")
Manufacturer Model Caulking tool 2.6mm 14mm
(0.1")
CRIMPFOX 6*3 (0.55")
Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4)

3. Tool
For tightening the terminal, use a commercially available small screwdriver
The head
having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as shown right. should be
straight.
Note:
If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not be
able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in 0.4mm 2.5mm
the table above, use the following screwdriver or an appropriate (0.01") (0.09")
replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25 mm (0.98")).
<Reference>
Manufacturer Model
Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4×2.5
B-12
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit
A
3.3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit
Common Items
3.3.1 FX3U-4AD
Below are shown examples of circuits for using the 24V DC service power supply of the FX3G/FX3U Series B
PLC.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
1) Sink input [- common] wiring
AC power
100 to 240 V
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Class-D
grounding
L N S/S 0V 24V 24+ 24-
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
+15V

(main unit) -15V
FX3U-4AD
E
Connect the "S/S" terminal of the main unit to the "24V" terminal.
FX3U-4DA
2) Source input [+ common] wiring
AC power
F
100 to 240 V
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Class-D
grounding G
FX3G-1DA-BD
L N S/S 0V 24V 24+ 24-
+15V

(main unit)
H
-15V
FX3U-3A-ADP
FX3U-4AD
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-13
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit
3.3.2 FX3UC-4AD
Wiring example of FX3UC Series PLC
Terminal block Terminal block
FX3UC Series PLC FX3UC-4AD FX2NC Series PLC FX3UC-4AD

(Main unit) (Input extension block*2)
+15V +15V
-15V -15V
Power
Power Power crossover Power
crossover crossover
connector connector connector connector
Power connector
24- 24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24+
Power Power
connector connector
Black Red Green Black Red Black Red
Black Red Black Red Black Red
Class-D FX2NC-10BPCB1 FX2NC-10BPCB1

grounding Power crossover cable Power crossover cable
24V DC
Fuse FX2NC-100BPCB
Power cable*1
For wiring example of FX3GC Series PLC, refer to the following manual.
→ Refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition
"Section 4.2 Example External wiring".
*1. The FX3UC-MT/D and FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) are supplied together with power cable.
*2. The FX2NC-EX-DS and FX2NC-16EX-T-DS do not have a power connector, and receive power
from the input connector.
3.3.3 Cautions regarding connection of power cables
• Ground the " " terminal and " " terminal to the Class - D grounding line (100 Ω or less) together
with the ground terminal of the main unit.
• To perform crossover wiring to connect the power line from FX3UC-4AD to a succeeding extension block,
remove the resin cover from the power crossover connector using nippers.
• For the timing of power-on/off when using an external power supply, see the following manual of the
connected PLC.
→ Refer to the FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
→ Refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
→ Refer to the FX3U Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
→ Refer to the FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
B-14
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.4 Analog Input Line
A
3.4 Analog Input Line
Common Items
The analog input type, "voltage input "or "current input", can be selected for each channel.
3.4.1 FX3U-4AD
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
External power supply FX3U-4AD
wiring
24+ +15V
24V DC
*1 24- -15V
Class-D grounding
C
*2
FX3U-4AD-ADP
If current input is
selected
ch 6.8kΩ
*3 ch
V+
*4 250Ω
I+ D
VI-
FX3G-2AD-BD
200kΩ
FG
If voltage input is *2
selected
ch
*3 6.8kΩ ch
V+
*5
I+
250Ω E
FX3U-4DA
VI-
200kΩ
FG
*2
ch :  represents the channel number.

F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
*1. For FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (AC power type), the 24V DC service power supply is also available.
*2. The [FG] terminal and the [ ] terminal are connected internally.
There is no “FG” terminal for ch1. When using ch1, connect directly to the [ ] terminal.
*3. Use a 2-core twisted shield wire for analog input line, and separate it from other power lines or
inductive lines.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
*4. For the current input, short-circuit the [V+] terminal and the [I+] terminal.
*5. If there is voltage ripple in the input voltage or there is noise in the external wiring, connect a capacitor
of approximately 0.1 to 0.47μF 25 V.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-15
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.5 Grounding
3.4.2 FX3UC-4AD
If current input is FX3UC-4AD

selected Terminal
*1 block
6.8kΩ ch
V+
*2 250Ω
I+
200kΩ
COM
SLD *3
If voltage input is
selected
*1 6.8kΩ ch
V+
250Ω
I+
200kΩ
COM
SLD
*4 •
Class-D
grounding
V+, I+, ch :  represents the channel number.
*1. Use the 2-core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines, and separate the analog input
lines from the other motive power lines or inductive lines.
*2. To use the current input, be sure to short circuit the line between the V + terminal and the I
+ terminal ( : channel number).
*3. The SLD and " " terminals are connected to each other inside.
*4. Do not connect any lines to the "•" terminal.
3.5 Grounding
Grounding should be performed as stated below.
• The grounding resistance should be 100 Ω or less.
• Independent grounding should be performed for best results.
When independent grounding is not performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
→ For details, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of each Series.


• Use the following grounding wire.
FX3U-4AD AWG14 (2mm2)

FX3UC-4AD AWG22-20 (0.3 to 0.5mm2)
• The PLC grounding point should be close, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.
B-16
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Input
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 4.1 Analog Input Procedures
Common Items
4. Analog Input
This chapter describes the minimum programming necessary to readout the 4AD analog data. B
Follow the procedure below to confirm that the analog data can be properly read out.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
4.1 Analog Input Procedures
1 Unit number check

C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units/blocks starting from the left.
When units/blocks are connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC, unit numbers from 1 to 7 are
assigned. Check the unit number assigned to the 4AD.
Unit
number: 0
Unit
number: 1
Unit
number: 2 D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Main unit Input/output Input/output
Special Special Special
(FX3U Series extension extension
function block function block function unit
PLC) block block
FX3U-4DA
2 Input mode (BFM#0) setting
Depending on the analog signal generator to be connected, set the input mode (BFM#0) for each
channel. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Use hexadecimal numbers for input mode setting. Set the corresponding channel digit to the input
mode setting value specified in the following table:
H
ch4
ch3
ch1
ch2
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Setting Analog input
Input mode Digital output range
value range
0 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V -32000 to +32000
1 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V -4000 to +4000 H
Voltage input
FX3U-3A-ADP
2 -10V to +10V -10000 to +10000

Analog value direct indication mode
3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000
5
Current input mode
4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 I
FX3U-4AD-PT
6 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA -16000 to +16000

-ADP
Current input mode

8 -20mA to +20mA -20000 to +20000
F Channel not used J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
→ For a detailed description of the standard input characteristics, refer to Section 2.4.
→ For a detailed description of the input mode (BFM#0), refer to Subsection 5.4.1.
-ADP
B-17
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Input
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 4.1 Analog Input Procedures
3 Creation of sequence program

Create the program as follows to read analog signals.
• While referring to step 2, set the input mode "H****".
• While referring to step 1, set the unit number in 
- Program Example (For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs)*1
Input mode (step 2)
Unit number (step 1)
Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 12 H**** U\G0 Specify the input mode (BFM#0) for channels
MOV P 1 to 4.
RUN monitor
M8000
T0 K50
T0 5 seconds after starting the PLC, the digital

FNC 15 U\G10 D0 K4 values of channels 1 to 4 (BFM#10 through
BMOV #13) will be read out to D0 to D3.
*1. Use the FROM and TO instructions in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
4 Sequence program transfer and data register check

1) Transfer the sequence program, and start the PLC.
2) The 4AD analog data input mode will be stored in data registers (D0 to D3) of the PLC.
3) Check that the data is stored in D0 to D3.
→ If the data is not properly stored, refer to Chapter 8 "Troubleshooting."
B-18
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM)
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory
Common Items
5. Buffer Memory (BFM)
This chapter describes the buffer memory incorporated in 4AD. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory
1. Assignment of unit numbers

Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units/blocks starting from the left. C
When the units/blocks are connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC, unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
When connected to the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC
Unit Unit Unit
number: 0 number: 1 number: 2
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Input/output Special Special Input/output Special
Main unit extension function block function block extension function unit
block block
E
When connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC
FX3U-4DA
Unit number: 0
(Incorporated Unit Unit Unit
CC-Link/LT) number: 1 number: 2 number: 3

F
Special Special Special
FX3U-4DA-ADP
(FX3UC-32MT extension extension
-LT(-2)) block function block function block block function unit
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-19
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory
2. Outline of buffer memory

The analog signals input into the 4AD will be converted into digital values and then stored in the 4AD buffer
memory.
To switch the input mode between voltage input and current input, or to adjust the offset or gain, numeric data
will be sent from the main unit and written/set in the 4AD buffer memory.
To read/write data from/to the 4AD buffer memory, the buffer memory can be directly specified using the
FROM/TO instruction or an applied instruction. Using this function, sequence programs can be easily created.
Main unit 4AD • BFM direct 4AD

specification*1
• TO instruction
Buffer
memory
• BFM direct
• BFM direct
specification*1
specification*1
• TO instruction
Sequence Buffer • FROM instruction
program memory
Digital
• BFM direct Digital value
specification*1 value
• FROM A/D A/D
instruction conversion conversion
Analog data Analog data
Flowmeter, pressure sensor, etc.
*1. Since buffer memory direct specification (U\G) can directly specify the buffer memory in the source or
destination area of an applied instruction, programs can be created efficiently. (This function is supported
only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.)
→ For a detailed description of buffer memory reading/writing, refer to Section 5.2.
→ For a detailed description of the buffer memory, refer to Section 5.4.
B-20
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method
A
5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method
Common Items
To read or write to the 4AD buffer memory, use the FROM/TO instructions or buffer memory direct
specifications*1.
However, to use buffer memory direct specification*1, software compatible with FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs is
required. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
→ For a detailed description of software compatible with the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC,
5.2.1 Buffer memory direct specification (FX3U/FX3UC PLC only)

C
When directly specifying the buffer memory, specify the following device in the source or destination area of
FX3U-4AD-ADP
the applied instruction as follows:
U\G Enter a numeric value in 

Unit number (0 to 7) Buffer memory number (0 to 32766)
D
1. Example 1
FX3G-2AD-BD
If the following program is created, data in buffer memory (BFM#10) of unit 1 will be multiplied by the data
(K10), and then the multiplication result will be output to data registers (D10, D11).
READ command
FNC 22 U1\G10 K10 D10
MUL
E
Multiplication result
FX3U-4DA
Unit number
Buffer memory number Multiplier
2. Example 2
If the following program is created, the value in data register (D20) is added to K10 and written to buffer
memory (BFM#6) of unit 1. F
WRITE command
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FNC 20 D20 K10 U1\G6
ADD
(
Addition Unit number
result Buffer memory number )
Augend Addend
G
5.2.2 FROM/TO instruction (FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC)
FX3G-1DA-BD
1. FROM instruction (Reading out BFM data to PLC)
Use the FROM instruction to read the data from the buffer memory.
In a sequence program, use this instruction as follows:
READ command
FNC 78
H
K1 K10 D10 K1
FX3U-3A-ADP
FROM
Number of transfer
Unit number data points
Buffer memory number Destination register
If the above program is created, 1 point of data will be read out from the buffer memory BFM#10 of unit No.1
to data register D10. I
FX3U-4AD-PT
2. TO instruction (Writing PLC data into BFM)

Use the TO instruction to write data to a buffer memory.
-ADP
WRITE command
FNC 79
TO
K1 K0 H3300 K1
J
Number of transfer
FX3U-4AD-PTW

Buffer memory number Transfer source
-ADP
If the above program is created, 1 point of data (H3300) will be written to buffer memory BFM#0 of unit No.1.
B-21
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM)
5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM)

4AD incorporates the following buffer memories.
→ For a detailed description of the buffer memory, refer to Section 5.4 and subsequent sections.
BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference
Hexadeci- Subsection
#0*1 Input mode setting for channels 1 to 4 *2 H0000 at delivery
mal 5.4.1
#1 Not used - - - -
#2 Averaging time units for channel 1 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal
#3 Averaging time units for channel 2 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal Subsection
#4 Averaging time units for channel 3 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal 5.4.2
#5 Averaging time units for channel 4 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal

#6 Channel-1 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 K0 Decimal
#7 Channel-2 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 K0 Decimal Subsection
#8 Channel-3 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 K0 Decimal 5.4.3
#9 Channel-4 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 K0 Decimal

#10 Channel-1 data (current data or average data) - - Decimal
#11 Channel-2 data (current data or average data) - - Decimal Subsection
#12 Channel-3 data (current data or average data) - - Decimal 5.4.4
#13 Channel-4 data (current data or average data) - - Decimal

#14 to #18 Not used - - - -
Data change disable
Disables adjustment of the following buffer
memory locations:
• Input mode specification (BFM#0)
To enable data
• Initialization function (BFM#20)
change: K2080
• Input characteristics writing (BFM#21) Subsection
#19*1 • Convenient functions (BFM#22)
To disable data K2080 at delivery Decimal
5.4.5
change: Value
• Offset data (BFM#41 to #44)
other than K2080
• Gain data (BFM#51 to #54)
• Automatic transfer-to data register
specification (BFM#125 to #129)
• Data history sampling time setting (BFM#198)
Initialization function:
Set "K1" in this buffer memory to perform
Subsection
#20 initialization. At the completion of initialization, K0 or K1 K0 Decimal
5.4.6
buffer memory will be automatically reset to
"K0".
Input characteristics writing:
Write the input characteristics offset/gain value.
#21 At the completion of writing, buffer memory will *3 H0000
mal 5.4.7
be automatically reset to "H0000" (b0 to b3:
OFF).
*1. If power failure occurs, the EEPROM will retain its data.
*2. To specify the input mode of each channel, set each digit using hexadecimal numbers 0 to 8 and F.
*3. Use b0 to b3.
B-22
Common Items
Convenient function setting:
Convenient functions: Automatic send
#22*1 function, data addition, upper/lower limit
detection, abrupt change detection, peak
*2 H0000 at delivery
mal 5.4.8 B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
value holding
#23 to #25 Not used - - - -
Upper/lower limit value error status (Valid if b1 Hexadeci- Subsection
#26 - H0000
of BFM#22 is set to ON) mal 5.4.9
#27
Abrupt change detection status (Valid if b2 of
BFM#22 is set to ON)
- H0000
Hexadeci-
mal
Subsection
5.4.10 C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
#28 Over-scale status - H0000
mal 5.4.11
#29 Error status - H0000
mal 5.4.12
Subsection
#30 Model code K2080 - K2080 Decimal
5.4.13 D
FX3G-2AD-BD
#31 to #40 Not used - - - -
#41*1 Channel-1 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) • Voltage input: K0 at delivery Decimal
BFM#21 -10000 to
#42*1 Channel-2 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) will be
+9000*3
K0 at delivery Decimal
Subsection
used for
#43 *1 Channel-3 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) • Current input: K0 at delivery Decimal 5.4.14
writing
#44*1 Channel-4 offset data (Unit: mV or μA)
data.
-20000 to
+17000*4 K0 at delivery Decimal
E
FX3U-4DA
#45 to #50 Not used - - - -
#51 *1 Channel-1 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) • Voltage input: K5000 at delivery Decimal
BFM#21 -9000 to
#52*1 Channel-2 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) will be
+10000*3
K5000 at delivery Decimal
Subsection
used for
#53*1 Channel-3 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) writing
data.
• Current input:
-17000 to
K5000 at delivery Decimal 5.4.14
F
#54*1 Channel-4 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) *4 K5000 at delivery Decimal
FX3U-4DA-ADP
+30000
#55 to #60 Not used - - - -
Channel-1 addition data (Valid if b0 of BFM#22
#61 -16000 to +16000 K0 Decimal
is set to ON)
#62
is set to ON)
-16000 to +16000 K0 Decimal
Subsection G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Channel-3 addition data (Valid if b0 of BFM#22 5.4.15
#63 -16000 to +16000 K0 Decimal
is set to ON)
#64 -16000 to +16000 K0 Decimal
is set to ON)
#65 to #70 Not used - - - -
Channel-1 lower limit value error setting (Valid if

Minimum digital H
#71 value in input Decimal
FX3U-3A-ADP
b1 of BFM#22 is set to ON)

range
Minimum digital
Channel-2 lower limit value error setting (Valid if From minimum
b1 of BFM#22 is set to ON) digital value in range Subsection
input range to
#73
Channel-3 lower limit value error setting (Valid if upper limit value
Minimum digital
value in input Decimal
5.4.16
I
b1 of BFM#22 is set to ON) error setting value
FX3U-4AD-PT
range
Minimum digital
Channel-4 lower limit value error setting (Valid if
b1 of BFM#22 is set to ON)
-ADP
range
#75 to #80 Not used - - - -
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
*2. Use b0 to b7.

*3. The offset and gain values should satisfy the following conditions: 7500 ≥ Gain value - Offset value ≥ 1000
*4. The offset and gain values should satisfy the following conditions: 30000 ≥ Gain value - Offset value ≥ 3000
-ADP
B-23
Channel-1 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital
#81 Decimal
(Valid if b1 of BFM#22 is set to ON) value in input range
Channel-2 upper limit value error setting From lower limit Maximum digital
#82 value error setting value in input range Decimal
(Valid if b1 of BFM#22 is set to ON) Subsection
value to maximum
Channel-3 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital 5.4.16
#83 digital value in Decimal
(Valid if b1 of BFM#22 is set to ON) input range value in input range
Channel-4 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital
#84 Decimal
(Valid if b1 of BFM#22 is set to ON) value in input range
#85 to #90 Not used - - - -
Channel-1 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50% of
#91 5% of full scale Decimal
(Valid if b2 of BFM#22 is set to ON) full scale
(Valid if b2 of BFM#22 is set to ON) full scale Subsection
Channel-3 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50% of 5.4.17
#95 to #98 Not used - - - -
Clear of upper/lower limit error data or abrupt Subsection
#99 *1 H0000 -
change error data 5.4.18
#100 Not used - - - -
Channel-1 minimum peak value (Valid if b3 of
#101 - - Decimal
#102 - - Decimal
BFM#22 is set to ON) Subsection
Channel-3 minimum peak value (Valid if b3 of 5.4.19
#103 - - Decimal
#104 - - Decimal
#105 to #108 Not used - - - -
#109 Minimum peak value resetting *3 H0000
mal 5.4.20
#110 Not used - - - -
Channel-1 maximum peak value (Valid if b3
#111 - - Decimal
of BFM#22 is set to ON)
#112 - - Decimal
of BFM#22 is set to ON) Subsection
Channel-3 maximum peak value (Valid if b3 5.4.19
#113 - - Decimal
#114 - - Decimal
#115 to #118 Not used - - - -
#119 Maximum peak value resetting *3 H0000
mal 5.4.20
#120 to #124 Not used - - - -
Peak values (Minimum: BFM#101 to #104 /
Maximum: #111 to #114) automatic transfer-
Subsection
#125*2 to first data register specification (Valid if b4 of 0 to 7992 K200 at delivery Decimal
5.4.21
BFM#22 is set to ON / Occupies of 8
consecutive points)
*1. Use b0 to b2.
*3. Use b0 to b3.
B-24
A
Common Items
Upper/lower limit error status data (BFM#26)
Subsection
#126*1 automatic transfer-to data register specification 0 to 7999 K208 at delivery Decimal
5.4.22
(Valid if b5 of BFM#22 is set to ON)
Abrupt change detection status data (BFM#27)
Subsection
#127*1 automatic transfer-to data register specification
0 to 7999 K209 at delivery Decimal
5.4.23 B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Over-scale status data (BFM#28) automatic
Subsection
#128*1 transfer-to data register specification (Valid if b7 0 to 7999 K210 at delivery Decimal
5.4.24
Error status data (BFM#29) automatic transfer-
Subsection
#129*1 to data register specification (Valid if b8 of 0 to 7999 K211 at delivery Decimal
5.4.25
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
#130 to #196 Not used - - - -
Selection of cyclic data update function (function Hexadeci- Subsection
#197 *2 H0000
for data history) mal 5.4.26
Subsection
#198*1 Data history sampling time setting (Unit: ms) 0 to 30000 K15000 Decimal
5.4.27
#199 Data history resetting/stoppage *3 H0000

Hexadeci- Subsection D
mal 5.4.28
FX3G-2AD-BD
#200 Channel-1 data history (initial value) - K0 Decimal
Decimal
~
~
#1899 Channel-1 data history (1,700th value) - K0 Decimal
#1900 Channel-2 data history (initial value) - K0 Decimal
Decimal
E
~
FX3U-4DA
#3599 Channel-2 data history (1,700th value) - K0 Decimal Subsection
#3600 Channel-3 data history (initial value) - K0 Decimal 5.4.29
Decimal
~

#5300 Channel-4 data history (initial value) - K0 Decimal F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Decimal
~

#7000 to #8063 System area - - - -
*2. Use b0 to b3. G
*3. Use b0 to b3 and b8 to b11.
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-25
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details
5.4 Buffer Memory Details
5.4.1 BFM#0: Input mode specification
Initial value (at delivery): H0000

Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H)
Specify the input modes of channel 1 to 4.

4 hexadecimal digits are assigned to specify the input modes of the 4 channels.
Change the value of each digit to change the input mode of each channel. 0 to 8 or F can be set for each digit.
H
ch4 ch1
ch3 ch2
The different types of input modes are shown in the following table:
→ For a detailed description of input characteristics, refer to Section 2.4.
Set value Analog input Digital output

Input mode
[HEX] range range
Voltage input
2*1 Analog value direct indication mode
-10V to +10V -10000 to +10000

Current input
4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000

Current input
-20mA to +20mA -20000 to +20000
9 to E Setting not possible - -

F Channel not used - -
*1. The offset/gain values cannot be changed.

1. Cautions regarding input mode setting
• If the input mode is set (changed), the analog input characteristics will be changed automatically.
Furthermore, when the offset/gain value is changed, the characteristics can be set to the desired values.
(The resolution cannot be changed.)
• If the analog value direct indication (*1) is specified, the offset/gain value cannot be changed.
• It takes approximately 5 seconds to determine the input mode. For this reason, after changing the input
mode, be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more before writing other data.
• HFFFF (no channels used) cannot be set.
2. Caution regarding EEPROM writing
If data is written to BFM#0, #19, #21, #22, #125 to #129, or #198, the data will also be written to the 4AD
EEPROM.
The maximum number of EEPROM rewrites is 10,000 times. Therefore, when creating a program, do not
frequently write data to the above buffer memories (BFM).
B-26
A
5.4.2 BFM#2 to #5: Averaging time
Common Items
Setting range: 1 to 4095
Initial value: K1
Numeric data type: Decimal (K)
To change the channel data type from the immediate data (channels 1 to 4: BFM#10 to #13) to the average B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
data, set the desired averaging time (channels 1 to 4 : BFM#2 to 5).
The relation between the set averaging time and the corresponding operation is shown in the following table.
→ For a detailed description of channel data update timing, refer to Subsection 5.4.4.
Averaging
time (BFM#2
to #5)
Channel data (BFM#10 to #13) type Error descriptions C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Immediate data K0 will be set, and the averaging time
0 or less (Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the channel setting error (b10 of BFM#29) will
data will be updated.) occur.
Immediate data
1 (initial
value)
(Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the channel
data will be updated.)
-
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Average data
(Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the average
2 to 400 -
value will be calculated and the channel data will be
updated.)
Average data
(Each time the A/D conversion data reaches the averaging E
401 to 4095 -
FX3U-4DA
time, the average data will be calculated and the channel
data will be updated.)
Average data
4096 will be set, and the averaging
(Each time the A/D conversion data reaches the averaging
4096 or more time setting error (b10 of BFM#29) will
time, the average data will be calculated and the channel
occur.
data will be updated.) F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
1. Application
If the measurement signal contains comparatively reduced ripple noise, such as supply voltage frequency,
averaging will result in obtaining of stable data.
2. Cautions regarding averaging time setting

G
FX3G-1DA-BD
• To use the averaging function, be sure to set the digital filter of the corresponding channel to "0". (Digital
filter setting: BFM#6 to #9 for channels 1 to 4)
To use the digital filter function, be sure to set the averaging time of the corresponding channel to "1".
(Averaging time: BFM#2 to #5 for channels 1 to 4)
If the averaging time is set to a value other than "1" and the digital filter (BFM#6 to #9 for channels 1 to 4)
is set to a value other than "0", the digital filter setting error (b11 of BFM#29) will occur. H
FX3U-3A-ADP
• If one of the channels uses the digital filter, the A/D conversion time will be set to 5 ms for all the channels.
• If the averaging time is out of the setting range, the averaging time setting error (b10 of BFM#29) will occur.
• If the averaging time is set, the data history function cannot be used.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-27
5.4.3 BFM#6 to #9: Digital filter setting

Initial value: K0
To use the digital filter for channel data (BFM#10 to #13 for channels 1 to 4), set the digital filter value in the
corresponding buffer memory (BFM#6 to #9 for channels 1 to 4).
→ For a detailed description of channel data update timing, refer to Subsection 5.4.4.
If the digital filter function is used, the relation between the analog input value and the set digital filter value or
the digital output value (channel data) will be as follows:
• Digital filter value (BFM#6 to #9 for channels 1 to 4) > Fluctuation of analog signal (fluctuation
width: less than 10 times of sampling)
If the fluctuation of the analog signal (input value) is less than the set digital filter value, the analog input
value will be converted into a stabilized digital output value and stored in the corresponding buffer memory
(BFM#10 to #13 for channels 1 to 4).
• Digital filter value (BFM#6 to #9 for channels 1 to 4) < Fluctuation of analog signal
If the fluctuation of the analog signal (input value) is more than the set digital filter value, the digital output
value will follow the analog input value, and the digital output value equal to the analog input value will be
stored in the corresponding buffer memory (BFM#10 to #13 for channels 1 to 4).
Analog input value The digital output value will

Digital output value follow the analog input value.
Analog input value
Set digital filter value
Set digital filter value
Converted into stabilized digital output value

(Fluctuation width is less than 10 times of sampling)
Time
The relation between the set value and the corresponding operation is shown in the following table:
Set value Operation

Less than 0 Disables the digital filter function. A setting error will occur (b11 of BFM#29 will be set to ON).
0 Disables the digital filter function.
1 to 1600 Enables the digital filter function.
1601 or more Disables the digital filter function. A setting error will occur (b11 of BFM#29 will be set to ON).
1. Application
If the measurement signal contains steep spike noise, use the digital filter instead of the averaging function.
The digital filter produces more stabilized data results.
2. Cautions regarding digital filter setting

• To use the digital filter function, be sure to set the averaging time of the corresponding channel to "1".
(Averaging time: BFM#2 to #5 for channels 1 to 4) If the averaging time is set to a value other than "1" and
the digital filter is set to a value other than "0", the digital filter setting error (b11 of BFM#29) will occur.
• If one of the channels uses the digital filter, the A/D conversion time will be set to 5 ms for all the channels.
• If the digital filter set value is not in the range from 0 to 1600, the digital filter setting error (b11 of BFM#29)
will occur.
B-28
A
5.4.4 BFM#10 to #13: Channel data
Common Items
Use these buffer memories to store the A/D converted digital values.
The channel data (BFM#10 to #13 for channels 1 to 4) and the data update timing will depend on the set
averaging time (BFM#2 to #5 for channels 1 to 4) or the digital filter setting condition (BFM#6 to #9 for B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
channels 1 to 4) as shown in the following table.
→ For a detailed description of the averaging time, refer to Subsection 5.4.2.
→ For a detailed description of digital filter functions, refer to Subsection 5.4.3.
Averaging Digital filter Channel data (BFM#10 to #13) update timing

time function C
(BFM#2 to #5) (BFM#6 to #9) Channel data type Update timing
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Immediate data Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the
0 (The digital filter "0" will be set, and the data will be updated.
0 or less
will not be used.) averaging time setting error The update timing will be as follows:
(b10 of BFM#29) will occur.
0 (The digital filter
Immediate data
Update time = 500μs*1 × Number of
selected channels
D
will not be used.)
FX3G-2AD-BD
Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the
1 1 to 1600 Immediate data data will be updated.
(The digital filter The digital filter function will The update timing will be as follows:
will be used.) be used. Update time = 5ms × Number of selected
channels E
FX3U-4DA
Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the
data will be updated.
2 to 400 Average data The update timing will be as follows:
Update time = 500μs*1× Number of

selected channels
401 to 4095
0 (The digital filter
will not be used.) Average data Each time the A/D conversion is performed for
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
the set averaging time, the data will be updated.
Average data
The update timing will be as follows:
"4096" will be set, and the
4096 or more
averaging time setting error Update time = 500μs*1 × Number of
(b10 of BFM#29) will occur. selected channels × Averaging time
*1. "500μs" represents the A/D conversion time. G

However, if one of the channels uses the digital filter function, the A/D conversion time will be 5 ms for
FX3G-1DA-BD
all the channels.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-29
5.4.5 BFM#19: Data change disable

Setting range: K2080, or value other than K2080
Initial value (at delivery): K2080
Disables adjustment of the following BFMs:
• Input mode specification (BFM#0) • Initialization function (BFM#20)
• Input characteristics writing (BFM#21) • Convenient functions (BFM#22)
• Offset data (BFM#41 to #44) • Gain data (BFM#51 to #54)
• Automatic transfer-to data register specification (BFM#125 to #129)
• Data history sampling time setting (BFM#198)
Set the value of BFM#19 (Data change disable) as follows:
Set value Description
K2080 Data change enabled.
Value other than K2080 Data change disabled.

EEPROM.
→ For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1.
5.4.6 BFM#20: Initialization function (resetting to factory default status)
Setting range: K0 or K1
Initial value: K0
Use this function to initialize all data in BFM#0 to #6999, to the factory default status.
K0 Normal
K1 Initializes all data
Set "K1" to initialize all data. When initialization is complete, "K0" will be set automatically.
1. Caution regarding initialization function setting

• It takes approximately 5 seconds to initialize all the data.
• Priority is given to BFM#19 which prevents a data from being changed. To initialize, set K2080 in BFM#19.
5.4.7 BFM#21: Input characteristics writing
Initial value: H0000

Channel numbers are assigned to the 4 lower bits of BFM#21. If any of these bits are turned on, the offset
data (BFM#41 to #44) and gain data (BFM#51 to #54) of the corresponding channel will be written to the
internal memory (EEPROM). When written to the internal memory, the data will become valid.
1. BFM#21 bits channel number assignment

Bit No. Description
b0 Channel-1 offset data (BFM#41) and gain data (BFM#51) writing
b4 to b15 Not used.
The WRITE command can be given to two or more channels at the same time. (Set "H000F" to write all
channel data to the EEPROM.) When writing is complete, "H0000" (b0 to b3: OFF) will be set automatically.
B-30
A
5.4.8 BFM#22: Convenient function setting
Common Items
Turn on each bit (b0 to b8) of BFM#22 to enable the function assigned to each bit (refer to the following table).
Turn off each bit to disable the function of each bit.
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
1. Function assigned to each bit of BFM#22
Bit No. Function Description Reference
The channel data (BFM#10 to #13), peak data (BFM#101 to
#104, #111 to #114), and data history (BFM#200 to #6999) will
be subject to change (the addition data (BFM#61 to #64) will be C
Subsection
b0 Data addition function added to the measurement data).
FX3U-4AD-ADP
5.4.15
When setting the lower limit error data (BFM#71 to #74) or the
upper limit error data (BFM#81 to #84), add the addition data
(BFM#61 to #64) to the error data to be set.
If the A/D conversion data of a channel is outside the range set
b1
Upper/lower limit
detection function
by the lower limit error data (BFM#71 to #74) and the upper limit
error data (BFM#81 to #84), the result will be written to BFM#26
Subsection
5.4.16
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
as the upper/lower limit error status data.
When channel data (BFM#10 to #13) is updated, if the
difference between the previous value and the new value is
Abrupt change Subsection
b2 larger than the set abrupt change detection value (value set in
detection function 5.4.17
BFM#91 to #94), the result will be written to BFM#27 as the
abrupt change detection status data. E
FX3U-4DA
The minimum value of channel data written to BFM#10 to #13
will be written to BFM#101 to #104 as the minimum peak value,
Peak value holding Subsection
b3 and the maximum value of channel data written to BFM#10 to
function 5.4.19
#13 will be written to BFM#111 to #114 as the maximum peak
value.
If the automatic transfer-to first data register is specified in
Subsection
F
BFM#125, the minimum peak value (BFM#101 to #104) and the
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Peak value automatic 5.4.19
b4 maximum peak value (BFM#111 to #114) will be automatically
transfer function Subsection
written to the specified data registers (8 points (registers)
5.4.21
starting from the first data register specified).
If the upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to Subsection
Upper/lower limit error
b5 status data automatic
data register is specified in BFM#126, the upper/lower limit error
status data (BFM#26) will be automatically written to the
5.4.16
Subsection
G
transfer function
FX3G-1DA-BD
specified data register. 5.4.22
Abrupt change If the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer-to Subsection
detection status data data register is specified in BFM#127, the abrupt change 5.4.17
b6
automatic transfer detection status data (BFM#27) will be automatically written to the Subsection
function specified data register. 5.4.23
Over-scale status If the over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register is
Subsection
H
b7 data automatic specified in BFM#128, the over-scale status data (BFM#28) will
FX3U-3A-ADP
5.4.24
transfer function be automatically written to the specified data register.
Error status data If the error status data automatic transfer to data register is
Subsection
b8 automatic transfer specified in BFM#129, the error status data (BFM#29) will be
5.4.25
function automatically written to the specified data register.
b9 to b15 - Not used. - I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-31
2. Caution regarding convenient function setting

• Even if the data addition function is used, the value before adding the addition data (BFM#61 to #64) will
be checked to detect the over-scale error.
• To use the peak value automatic transfer function (b4 of BFM#22), be sure to enable the peak value
holding function (b3 of BFM#22).
• To use the upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer function (b5 of BFM#22), be sure to
enable the upper/lower limit value detection function (b1 of BFM#22).
• To use the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function (b6 of BFM#22), be sure to
enable the abrupt change detection function (b2 of BFM#22).
• When connected and used with the FX5U or FX5UC CPU module, do not use the BFM#22 b4 to b8
automatic transfer functions.

EEPROM.
For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1.
B-32
A
5.4.9 BFM#26: Upper/lower limit error status
Common Items
If channel data (BFM#10 to #13) is out of the range set by the lower limit error data (BFM#71 to #74) and the
upper limit error data (BFM#81 to #84), the following operation will be performed: B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• If "channel data < lower limit error set value":
The lower limit error bit will turn on.
• If "channel data > upper limit error set value":
The upper limit error bit will turn on.
→ For a detailed description of upper/lower limit error status data resetting,
refer to Subsection 5.4.18. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
1. BFM#26 bit assignment
The upper and lower limit error values of each channel are assigned as shown in the following table:
Bit No. Channel number Description

b0
ch1
Lower limit error value D
b1 Upper limit error value
FX3G-2AD-BD
b2 Lower limit error value
ch2
ch3
b5 Upper limit error value E
FX3U-4DA
ch4
b8 to b15 Not used.
2. Cautions regarding use of upper/lower limit error status data

F
• To use the upper/lower limit error status data, be sure to turn on the upper/lower limit detection function (b1
FX3U-4DA-ADP
of BFM#22).
• Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit:
- Turn the power off and on.
- Turn on b0 or b1 of BFM#99 to reset the upper/lower limit error status.
- Write "H0000" in BFM#26 as the upper/lower limit error status data. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
• Even if an error is detected, channel data (BFM#10 to #13) will be continuously updated.
• The upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer function is not supported when connected and
used with the FX5U or FX5UC CPU module.
3. Upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer function (b5 of BFM#22)
If the upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to data register is specified in BFM#126, the data H
in BFM#26 can be transferred to the specified data register.
FX3U-3A-ADP
When the upper/lower error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For
this reason, the PLC does not need the program for reading data, and the scanning time of the PLC can be
shortened.
 : Represents a numeric value.
Convenient function
Automatic data transfer function
I
setting
FX3U-4AD-PT
Transfer-to data register specification

ON = Valid Transfer-from buffer memory
(BFM#126: K)
-ADP
BFM#22 b1:ON
BFM#26 → D
BFM#22 b5:ON
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-33
5.4.10 BFM#27: Abrupt change detection status

When channel data (BFM#10 to #13) is updated, if the difference between the previous value and the new
value is larger than the set abrupt change detection value (value set in BFM#91 to #94), the following
operation will be performed:
• If "(new value) - (previous value) > (abrupt change detection value)":
The "+" direction bit will turn on.
• If "(previous value) - (new value) > (abrupt change detection value)":
The "-" direction bit will turn on.
→ For a detailed description of abrupt change detection status data resetting,
refer to Subsection 5.4.18.
1. Assignment of each bit of BFM#27

For the abrupt change detection function of each channel, the "+" and "-" directions are assigned as shown in
the following table:

b0 "-" direction for abrupt change detection
ch1
b1 "+" direction for abrupt change detection
ch2
ch3
ch4
b8 to b15 Not used.
2. Caution regarding use of abrupt change detection status data

• To use the abrupt change status data, be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection function (b2 of
BFM#22).
- Turn on b2 of BFM#99 to reset the abrupt change detection error status.
- Write "H0000" in BFM#27 as the abrupt change detection status data.
• Even if abrupt change is detected, channel data (BFM#10 to #13) will be continuously updated.
• The abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function is not supported when connected and
used with the FX5U or FX5UC CPU module.
3. Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function (b6 of BFM#22)
If the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer-to data register is specified in BFM#127, the
data in BFM#27 can be transferred to the specified data register.
When abrupt change is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this
reason, the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be
shortened.
Convenient function
setting
ON = Valid Transfer-from memory
(BFM#127: K)
BFM#22 b2:ON
BFM#27 → D
BFM#22 b6:ON
B-34
A
5.4.11 BFM#28: Over-scale status
Common Items
If the input analog value is out of the A/D conversion range, the following operation will be performed:
• If "(analog input value) < (lower limit value in A/D conversion range)": B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
The over-scale lower limit bit will turn on.
• If "(analog input value) < (upper limit value in A/D conversion range)":
The over-scale upper limit bit will turn on.
1. A/D conversion range

C
Input type A/D conversion range
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Voltage input -10.2V to +10.2V
Current input -20.4mA to +20.4mA
2. Assignment of each bit of BFM#28

D
FX3G-2AD-BD
b0 Over-scale (lower limit)
ch1
b1 Over-scale (upper limit)
ch2
b3 Over-scale (upper limit) E
FX3U-4DA
ch3
ch4
b8 to b15 Not used. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
3. Caution regarding use of over-scale status data
- Write "H0000" in BFM#28 as the over-scale status data.
• Even if over scale is detected, channel data (BFM#10 to #13) will continuously be updated.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
• The over-scale status data automatic transfer function is not supported when connected and used with the
FX5U or FX5UC CPU module.
4. Over-scale status data automatic transfer function (b7 of BFM#22)

If the over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register is specified in BFM#128, the data in BFM#28
can be transferred to the specified data register.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
When over-scale is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this reason,
the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened.
Convenient function
setting
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
(BFM#128: K)
BFM#22 b7:ON BFM#28 → D
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-35
5.4.12 BFM#29: Error status

Error data is assigned to the bits of BFM#29.
1. BFM#29 Bit Assignment

Bit No. Item Description
b0 Error detection If any bits between b2 and b4 are turned on, b0 will turn on.
b1 - -
The 24 V power is not supplied properly. Check the wiring condition
b2 Power supply error
or the voltage supplied.
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD may be defective. Please contact your local
b3 Hardware error
Mitsubishi Electric representative.
The A/D conversion value is abnormal.
b4 A/D conversion error Check the over-scale status data (BFM#28) to localize the error
channel.
b5 - -
BFM reading/writing If change in the input characteristics is started, this bit will turn on. If
b6
impossible this bit (b6) is on, A/D conversion data cannot be read out correctly.
b7 - -
b8 Data setting error detection If any bits between b10 and b15 are turned on, b8 will turn on.
b9 - -
The averaging time (BFM#2 to #5) is not set correctly.
b10 Averaging time setting error
Set the averaging time again in the range from 1 to 4095.
The digital filter value (BFM#6 to #9) is not set correctly.
b11 Digital filter setting error
Set the digital filter value again in the range from 0 to 1600.
The abrupt change detection value (BFM#91 to #94) is not set
Abrupt change detection
b12 correctly.
value setting error
Correctly set the value again.
The lower limit error detection value (BFM#71 to #74) or the upper
Upper/lower limit error
b13 limit error detection value (BFM#81 to #84) is not set correctly.
detection value setting error
Correctly set the value again.
b14 - -
The addition data (BFM#61 to #64) is not set correctly.
b15 Addition data setting error
Set the addition data again in the range from -16000 to +16000.
2. Caution regarding error status

If the error cause is eliminated, the error bit will turn off.
Do not directly write "H0000" in BFM#29 using a sequence program.
The error status data automatic transfer function is not supported when connected and used with the FX5U or
FX5UC CPU module.
3. Error status data automatic transfer function (b8 of BFM#22)

If the error status data automatic transfer-to data register is specified in BFM#129, the data in BFM#29 can be
transferred to the specified data register.
When an error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC. For this reason, the
PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened.
Convenient function
setting
(BFM#129: K)
BFM#22 b8:ON BFM#29 → D
B-36
A
5.4.13 BFM#30: Model code
Common Items
Initial value: K2080
"K2080" (fixed value) is stored as the model code.

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
5.4.14 BFM#41 to #44: Offset data / BFM#51 to #54: Gain data
Setting range: See below.

Initial value: See below.
C
If the input mode is specified in BFM#0, the offset data and the gain data of each channel will be automatically
FX3U-4AD-ADP
stored. The initial offset data and gain data are set for each mode as shown in the following table:
• Offset data: Analog input value when the digital value is "0" (reference offset value)
• Gain data: Analog input value when the digital value is equal to the reference gain value (The
reference gain value depends on the set input mode.)
D
1. Reference offset/gain value and initial value set at delivery
FX3G-2AD-BD
Offset Gain
Input mode (BFM#0) (Channels 1 to 4: BFM#41 to (Channels 1 to 4: BFM#51 to
#44) #54)
Set Reference Reference
value
Description
value
Initial value
value
Initial value E
FX3U-4DA
Voltage input
0 0 0mV 16000 5000mV
(-10V to +10V: -32000 to +32000)
Voltage input
1 0 0mV 2000 5000mV
(-10V to +10V: -4000 to +4000)
2
Voltage input
0
(Data change
0mV
(Data change
5000
(Data change
5000mV
(Data change F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
(-10V to +10V: -10000 to +10000) impossible) impossible) impossible) impossible)
3 Current input (4mA to 20mA: 0 to 16000) 0 4000μA 16000 20000μA
4 Current input (4mA to 20mA: 0 to 4000) 0 4000μA 4000 20000μA
Current input 4000 4000μA 20000 20000μA
5 Analog value direct indication mode
(4mA to 20mA: 4000 to 20000)
(Data change
impossible)
(Data change
impossible)
(Data change
impossible)
(Data change
impossible)
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Current input
6 0 0μA 16000 20000μA
(-20mA to +20mA: -16000 to +16000)
Current input
7 0 0μA 4000 20000μA
(-20mA to +20mA: -4000 to +4000)
8
Current input
0
(Data change
0μA
(Data change
20000
(Data change
20000μA
(Data change
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
(-20mA to +20mA: -20000 to +20000) impossible) impossible) impossible) impossible)
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-37
2. Offset/gain data change

Set offset data and gain data to change the input characteristics.
The offset and gain data can be set for each channel. If the voltage input mode is set, write the offset and gain
data in mV. If the current input mode is set, write the offset and gain data in μA.
To change the offset data or gain data, turn on the corresponding bit of BFM#21 (buffer memory for input
characteristics writing).
The data setting range is shown in the following table:
Voltage input (mV) Current input (μA)

Offset data -10000 to +9000*1 -20000 to +17000*2
Gain data -9000 to +10000*1 -17000 to +30000*2
*1. The offset and gain values should meet the following condition:
7500 ≥ Gain value - Offset value ≥ 1000
*2. The offset and gain values should meet the following condition:
30000 ≥ Gain value - Offset value ≥ 3000
3. Cautions regarding offset/gain data change

• If the analog value direct indication mode is used, the input characteristics cannot be changed.
• Even if the input characteristics are changed, the actual valid input range will not be changed:
from -10V to +10V for the voltage input mode, and from -20mA to +20mA for the current input mode.
• Even if the input characteristics are changed, the resolution will not increase.
→ For a detailed description of input characteristics change, refer to Chapter 6.
5.4.15 BFM#61 to #64: Addition data
Setting range: -16000 to +16000

Initial value: K0
If the addition data (BFM#61 to #64) is set, the set data will be added before storing the channel data
(BFM#10 to #13), peak data (BFM#101 to #104, BFM#111 to #114), or data history (BFM#200 to #6999).
1. Cautions regarding addition data setting

• To use the addition data, be sure to turn on the data addition function (b0 of BFM#22).
• When setting the lower limit error data (BFM#71 to #74) or the upper limit error data (BFM#81 to #84), add
the addition data (BFM#61 to #64) to the error data to be set.
B-38
A
5.4.16 BFM#71 to #74: Lower limit error setting / BFM#81 to #84: Upper limit error setting
Common Items
Set the upper/lower limit error data so that the upper/lower limit error status (BFM#26) can be detected.
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
The data setting range depends on the input mode set in BFM#0.
The following table shows the data setting range for each input mode:
Input mode (BFM#0) Initial value

Setting range Lower limit value Upper limit value
Set
value
Description (Channels 1 to 4: (Channels 1 to 4: C
BFM#71 to #74) BFM#81 to #84)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Voltage input
0 -32768 to +32767 -32768 32767
(-10 V to +10 V: -32000 to +32000)
Voltage input
1 -4095 to +4095 -4095 4095
(-10 V to +10 V: -4000 to +4000)
Voltage input D
2 Analog value direct indication mode -10200 to +10200 -10200 10200
FX3G-2AD-BD
(-10 V to +10 V: -10000 to +10000)
Current input
3 -1 to +16383 -1 16383
(4 mA to 20 mA: 0 to 16000)
4 Current input (4 mA to 20 mA: 0 to 4000) -1 to +4095 -1 4095
Current input E
5 Analog value direct indication mode 3999 to 20400 3999 20400
FX3U-4DA
(4 mA to 20 mA: 4000 to 20000)
Current input
6 -16384 to +16383 -16384 16383
(-20 mA to +20 mA: -16000 to +16000)
Current input
7
(-20 mA to +20 mA: -4000 to +4000)
-4096 to +4095 -4096 4095
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Current input
8 Analog value direct indication mode -20400 to +20400 -20400 20400
(-20 mA to +20 mA: -20000 to +20000)
1. Cautions regarding upper/lower limit error setting

• To use the set upper/lower limit error data, be sure to turn on the upper/lower limit error detection function
(b1 of BFM#22).
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
• To use the data addition function (b0 of BFM#22) together with this function, be sure to add the addition
data (channels 1 to 4: BFM#61 to #64) to the upper/lower limit values to be set. In addition, observe the
data setting range.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-39
5.4.17 BFM#91 to #94: Abrupt change detection value setting

When channel data (BFM#10 to #13) is updated, if the difference between the previous value and the new
value is larger than the set abrupt change detection value (value set in BFM#91 to #94), the system will judge
that the channel data is changed abruptly.
The result of abrupt change detection will be written to BFM#27 as the abrupt change detection status data.
The abrupt change detection value setting range depends on the set input mode (BFM#0) as shown in the
following table:
Input mode (BFM#0)
Set Setting range Initial value
Description
value
Voltage input
0 1 to 32767 3200
(-10 V to +10 V: -32000 to +32000)
Voltage input
1 1 to 4095 400
(-10 V to +10 V: -4000 to +4000)
Voltage input
2 Analog value direct indication mode 1 to 10000 1000
(-10 V to +10 V: -10000 to +10000)
3 Current input (4 mA to 20 mA: 0 to 16000) 1 to 8191 800
4 Current input (4 mA to 20 mA: 0 to 4000) 1 to 2047 200
Current input
(4 mA to 20 mA: 4000 to 20000)
Current input
6 1 to 16383 1600
(-20 mA to +20 mA: -16000 to +16000)
Current input
7 1 to 4095 400
(-20 mA to +20 mA: -4000 to +4000)
Current input
(-20 mA to +20 mA: -20000 to +20000)
1. Caution regarding abrupt change detection value setting

To use the abrupt change detection value, be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection function (b2 of
BFM#22).
B-40
A
5.4.18 BFM#99: Clearance of upper/lower limit error data and abrupt change detection data
Common Items
Three error data clearance commands (lower limit error data clearance command, upper limit error data
clearance command, and abrupt change detection data clearance command) are respectively assigned to the B
3 lower bits of BFM#99.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Turning on each bit (batch turning on for all channels) will reset the corresponding error status flag (#26 or
#27 of BFM).
1. BFM#99 bits command assignment

Bit No. Description Buffer memory to be cleared C
b0 Lower limit error data clearance command
FX3U-4AD-ADP
BFM#26
b1 Upper limit error data clearance command
b2 Abrupt change detection data clearance command BFM#27
b3 to b15 Not used. -
Two or more data clearance commands can be turned on at the same time. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
2. Operation after resetting BFM#26, #27
Each bit will turn off automatically.
5.4.19 BFM#101 to #104: Minimum peak value / BFM#111 to #114: Maximum peak value E
FX3U-4DA
The minimum channel data (channels 1 to 4) value written to BFM#10 to #13 will be written to BFM#101 to
#104 as the minimum peak value, and the maximum channel data value will be written to BFM#111 to #114
as the maximum peak value.
F
1. Caution regarding peak value
FX3U-4DA-ADP
To use the minimum peak value and the maximum peak value, be sure to turn on the peak value holding
function (b3 of BFM#22).
Note:
• If the data addition function (b0 of BFM#22) is used together with this function, the addition data will be
added to the measurement data.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
• If the value holding function is not used, the peak value will be "K0".
• The peak value automatic transfer function is not supported when connected and used with the FX5U or
FX5UC CPU module.
2. Peak value automatic transfer function (b4 of BFM#22) H

If the automatic transfer-to first data register is specified in BFM#125, the minimum peak value and the
FX3U-3A-ADP
maximum peak value will be automatically written to the specified data registers (8 points (registers) starting
from the first data register specified).
When the peak value is updated, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this
shortened.
 : Represents a numeric value. I
Convenient function
FX3U-4AD-PT

setting
-ADP
(BFM#125: K)
ON = Valid Transfer-from buffer memory
(8 points (registers) starting from the
specified data register) J
BFM#22 b4: ON BFM#101 to 104 D to D+3
FX3U-4AD-PTW
→
BFM#22 b3: ON BFM#111 to 114 D+4 to D+7
-ADP
B-41
5.4.20 BFM#109: Minimum peak value resetting / BFM#119: Maximum peak value resetting

BFM#109 can reset the minimum peak value (BFM#101 to #104), and BFM#119 can reset the maximum
peak value (BFM#111 to #114).
Channel numbers are assigned to the bits of BFM#109 and #119 to specify the channel to be subject to peak
value resetting.
Turn on each bit to reset the peak value of the corresponding channel.
1. BFM#109/#119 bits Channel number assignment
Description
Bit No.
BFM#109 BFM#119
b0 Channel-1 minimum peak value (BFM#101) resetting Channel-1 maximum peak value (BFM#111) resetting
b4 to b15 Not used.
Two or more bits can be turned on at a time.
5.4.21 BFM#125: Peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification

Initial value (at delivery) : K200
If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM#125, the minimum peak value (BFM#101 to
#104) and the maximum peak value (BFM#111 to #114) will be automatically transferred to the specified data
registers (8 points (registers) starting from the first data register specified).
When the peak value is updated, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this
shortened.
→ For a detailed description of the minimum peak value (BFM#101 to #104) and the maximum peak
value (BFM#111 to #114), refer to Subsection 5.4.19.
1. If "BFM#125 = K200 (initial value)"

Data will be transferred to D200 to D207 (8 points).
Specified data register Description
D200 Channel-1 minimum peak value (BFM#101)
D204 Channel-1 maximum peak value (BFM#111)
2. Caution regarding peak value automatic transfer-to first data register specification
• If data registers are already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same
data registers.
• Be sure to turn on the peak value automatic transfer function (b4 of BFM#22) and the peak value holding
function (b3 of BFM#22).
• The data written to BFM#125 will be retained in the EEPROM.
B-42
A
Common Items
EEPROM.
5.4.22 BFM#126: Upper/lower error status data automatic transfer-to data register B
specification
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Use this function to automatically transfer the upper/lower limit error status data (BFM#26) to the data register
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
specified in BFM#126.
When the upper/lower limit error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC.
For this reason, the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scanning time of the PLC
can be shortened.
→ For a detailed description of the upper/lower limit error status data (BFM#26),
refer to Subsection 5.4.9. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
D208 Upper/lower limit error status data in BFM#26
2. Cautions regarding upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to data register E
specification
FX3U-4DA
• If a data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same
data register.
• Be sure to turn on the upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer function (b5 of BFM#22) and
the upper/lower limit detection function (b1 of BFM#22).
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
EEPROM.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-43
5.4.23 BFM#127: Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer-to data register
specification

Use this function to automatically transfer the abrupt change detection status data (BFM#27) to the data
register specified in BFM#127.
When abrupt change is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this
shortened.
→ For a detailed description of the abrupt change detection status data (BFM#27),

D209 Abrupt change detection status data in BFM#27
2. Caution regarding abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register
specification
data register.
• Be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function (b6 of BFM#22) and
the abrupt change detection function (b2 of BFM#22).

EEPROM.
B-44
A
5.4.24 BFM#128: Over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register specification
Common Items
Use this function to automatically transfer the over-scale status data (BFM#28) to the data register specified
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
in BFM#128.
When over-scale is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this reason,
the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened.
→ For a detailed description of the over-scale status data (BFM#28), refer to Subsection 5.4.11.
1. If "BFM#128 = K210 (initial value)" C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
D210 Over-scale status data in BFM#28
2. Cautions regarding over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register specification
data register.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
• Be sure to turn on the over-scale status data automatic transfer function (b7 of BFM#22).

EEPROM.
E
FX3U-4DA
5.4.25 BFM#129: Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification

F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Use this function to automatically transfer the error status data (BFM#29) to the data register specified in
BFM#129.
When an error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this reason,
the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. G
→ For a detailed description of the error status data (BFM#29), refer to Subsection 5.4.12.
FX3G-1DA-BD
D211 Error status data in BFM#29
H
2. Cautions regarding error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification
FX3U-3A-ADP
data register.
• Be sure to turn on the error status data automatic transfer function (b8 of BFM#22).
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
EEPROM.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-45
5.4.26 BFM#197: Selection of cyclic data update function (function for data history)

Use this function to update the data history in BFM#200 to #6999.
Channel numbers are respectively assigned to the 4 lower bits of BFM#197. Turn each bit on or off to select
the data history update function.
ON: If a bit is turned on, the corresponding data will be stored in the buffer memories in the order of the
smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number, but when 1,700 points of data are stored, data will be
then overwritten in the buffer memories starting from the smallest BFM numbers.
OFF: If a bit is turned off, the corresponding data will be stored in the buffer memories in the order of the
smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number, but when 1,700 points of data are stored, data
storage will stop.
1. Channel number assignment to each bit of BFM#197

Bit No. Description History data stored in
b0 Selection of channel-1 data update function BFM#200 to #1899, 1,700 points
b4 to b15 Not used. -
5.4.27 BFM#198: Data history sampling time setting

Use this function to set the data history sampling time.

If one of the channels uses the digital filter function, set a multiple of 5.
1. Sampling cycle
As shown in the following table, the sampling cycle depends on whether the digital filter function is used.
Value set in
Whether digital filter function is used Sampling cycle
BFM#198
0.5 ms × number of selected channels (number of
0
channels using the digital filter function)
None of the channels use the digital filter
function. Set value (ms) in BFM#198 × number of selected
1 or more channels (number of channels using the digital filter
function)
5 ms × number of selected channels (number of
9 or less
channels using the digital filter function)
One or more channels use the digital filter
function. Set value (ms)*1 in BFM#198 × number of selected
10 or more channels (number of channels using the digital filter
function)
*1. Only multiples of 5 are valid.

(If any value from 10 to 14 is set, the sampling cycle will be 10 ms. If any value from 15 to 19 is set, the
sampling cycle will be 15 ms.)
2. Caution regarding use of data history function

If the averaging time is set, the data history function cannot be used.

EEPROM.
→ For a detailed description of cautions regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1.
B-46
A
5.4.28 BFM#199: Data history resetting/stoppage
Common Items
The data history resetting function and the data history stoppage function are assigned to the bits of BFM#199.
B
1. Data history resetting function (b0 to b3)
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
The sampled history data can be reset for each channel.
Turn on a bit to reset all the history data (1st to 1,700th) of the corresponding channel. (Note that two or more
bits can be turned on at a time.)
When the data reset is complete, the corresponding bit will turn off automatically.
2. Data history stoppage function (b8 to b11) C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Data sampling can be temporarily stopped for each channel.
Turn on a bit to temporarily stop sampling history data for the corresponding channel. (Note that two or more
bits can be turned on at a time.)
Turn off the bit to restart sampling of history data.
3. Function assignment to each bit of BFM#199 D

FX3G-2AD-BD
b0 ch1
b1 ch2
Data history resetting function
b2 ch3
b3 ch4
E
b4 to b7 Not used.
FX3U-4DA
b8 ch1
b9 ch2
Data history stoppage function
b10 ch3
b11 ch4
b12 to b15 Not used. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
4. Caution regarding data history resetting
• When a bit is turned on, the corresponding data history will be reset.
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-47
5.4.29 BFM#200 to #6999: Data history

Initial value: K0
Use this function to sample the A/D conversion data of each channel and to write the sampled data to the
buffer memories.
The 4AD can sample up to 1,700 points of A/D conversion data of each channel at the sampling cycle
specified in BFM#198, and can store the sampled data as history data in the buffer memories as shown in the
following table. Buffer memories are assigned to the 4 channels as shown in the following table, and data is
stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number.
Use BFM#199 to stop or reset the data history.
Number of data BFM number
samples ch1 ch2 ch3 ch4
1st #200 #1900 #3600 #5300
2nd #201 #1901 #3601 #5301
3rd #202 #1902 #3602 #5302
…
…
1,700th #1899 #3599 #5299 #6999
1. Caution regarding data history reading

If a large amount of history data is collectively read out to the PLC main unit using the FROM instruction, the
watchdog timer error may occur in the PLC main unit. Therefore, when programming, separate the history
data and then read it out using the FROM instruction. Set WDT (watchdog timer refresh) instruction between
the separated data.
B-48
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Changing Input Characteristics
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 6.1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics
Common Items
6. Changing Input Characteristics
For the 4AD, the standard input characteristics are provided for each input mode (BFM#0) at the time of B
factory shipment.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Changing the offset data (BFM#41 to #44) or gain data (BFM#51 to #54), however, can change the input
characteristics of each channel. This chapter describes how to change the input characteristics.
6.1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics

C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
1 Determine the input mode (BFM#0)
Determine the optimum input mode (BFM#0) for the selected channels and the voltage/current
specifications.
D
Set value
FX3G-2AD-BD
Input mode Analog input range Digital output range
(HEX)
2
Voltage input analog value direct indication
mode
The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted. E
FX3U-4DA
Current input analog value direct indication
5 The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted.
mode
6 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA -16000 to +16000 F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Current input analog value direct indication
8 The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted.
mode
9 to E Not used. - -
F Channel not used - - G
Example: Enter "HFF00" in BFM#0 to set input mode 0 for channels 1 and 2 and prevent use channels 3 and
FX3G-1DA-BD
4.
Caution regarding data setting:

• If a channel is set to the value "2", "5", "8" or "F", the input characteristics of the channel cannot be
changed. H
• Set the optimum input mode for the analog signal to be input.
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-49
2 Determine the input characteristics to be changed.

Determine the digital value to be output according to the input voltage/current.
Example: To output digital values in the range from 0 to 32000 by inputting the voltage in the range
from 1V DC to 5V DC:
Input mode 0 Input characteristics provided at the time Input characteristics newly provided
of factory shipment
Digital value Digital value
+32640 +32000
+32000
Gain reference value

Gain reference value (+16000)
(+16000)
Input voltage -10V 0 +10.2 V

Offset reference value (0)
+5V +10V
-10.2 V
Input voltage +1V +3V +5V
-32000
-32640
3 Determine the offset data.

Determine the analog input value (offset data) for digital output value of "0".
Set the analog input value in mV for the voltage input mode, and set the analog input value in μA
for the current input mode.
Example: To set the offset value of 1 V, set 1,000 mV.
→ For a detailed description of offset data, refer to Subsection 5.4.14.
4 Determine the gain data.

Determine the analog input value so that the digital output value is equal to the gain reference
value of each input mode.
The following table shows the gain reference value of each input mode:
Numeric
Input mode Analog input range Gain standard value Initial value
value
0 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V 16000 5000mV
1 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V 2000 5000mV
3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 16000 20000μA
4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 4000 20000μA
6 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA 16000 20000μA
7 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA 4000 20000μA
Set the analog input value in mV for the voltage input mode, and set the analog input value in μA
for the current input mode.
Example: To set the gain value of 3 V, set 3000 mV.
→ For a detailed description of gain data, refer to Subsection 5.4.14.
B-50
A
5
Common Items
Create a sequence program.
To change the input characteristics, write the offset data (BFM#41 to #44) and the gain data
(BFM#51 to #54) in the sequence program, and then turn on the corresponding bit of BFM#21 for
the corresponding channel. The following example shows a program for the unit number 0.
B
Example: Program for changing the input characteristics of channels 1 and 2 (For FX3U/FX3UC Series
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
PLCs):
Command for writing input characteristics

X000
FNC 12 Input mode specification
MOV P
HFF00 U0\G0 for channels 1 to 4 C
M0
FX3U-4AD-ADP
SET M0
T0 K50 *1
T0
FNC 16 K1000 U0\G41 K2
Offset value of
channels 1 and 2
D
FMOV P
FX3G-2AD-BD
FNC 16 Gain value of
K3000 U0\G51 K2 channels 1 and 2
FMOV P
FNC 12 Batch writing of offset and gain

H0003 U0\G21 values of channels 1 and 2
MOV P
E
FX3U-4DA
RST M0
*1. It takes approximately 5 seconds to change the input mode (BFM#0). This is because all the set
values should be changed.
After changing the input mode, be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more before setting other data. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
The input characteristics of each channel can be written in BFM#21. It is also possible to perform
batch writing of input characteristics for two or more channels.
6 Transfer the sequence program to change the input characteristics.

Transfer the sequence program, and start the PLC.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Start the PLC, and turn on the command (X000) to write the input characteristics. In approx. 5 sec-
onds, the offset data and the gain data will be written.
Since the offset data and the gain data are stored in the 4AD EEPROM, it is possible to delete the
sequence program. H
7
FX3U-3A-ADP
Read out the analog data to check the data.

Create the following program to check the stored data (For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs):
RUN monitor
M8000 The digital values set for I
FNC 15 channels 1 to 4 will be read
U0\G10 D0 K4
FX3U-4AD-PT
BMOV out to D0 to D3.
→ If data is not stored properly, refer to Chapter 8 "Troubleshooting".

-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-51
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.1 Program That Uses Averaging Time
7. Examples of Practical Programs

Use the functions incorporated in the 4AD to create practical programs. This chapter describes the examples
of practical programs.
• Program that uses the averaging time
• Program that uses convenient functions
• Program that uses the data history function
• Program that initializes 4AD (to the factory default status)
7.1 Program That Uses Averaging Time

This section describes a program that uses the analog data averaging time input to the 4AD or the digital filter
function of the 4AD.
1. Conditions
The sequence program described in this section is created under the following conditions.
1) System configuration
The FX3U-4AD (unit No.0) should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC.
2) Input mode
Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 (voltage input, -10V to +10V → -32000 to +32000).
Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 (current input, 4mA to 20mA → 0 to 16000).
3) Averaging time
For channels 1 to 4, the averaging time should be set to "10".
4) Digital filter function
For channels 1 to 4, the digital filter function should be disabled (default).
5) Device assignment
Device Description
D0 A/D converted digital value for channel 1
2. Example of sequence program

• For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs
Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 12 Input modes of channels 1
H3300 U0\G0 to 4 will be specified.*1
RUN monitor MOV P
M8000
T0 K50 *1
T0
FNC 16 For channels 1 to 4, the averaging time
K10 U0\G2 K4 will be set to "10".
FMOV P
FNC 16 The digital filter function of channels 1

K0 U0\G6 K4 to 4 will be disabled.*2
FMOV P
FNC 15 The digital values set for channels

U0\G10 D0 K4 1 to 4 will be read out to D0 to D3.
BMOV
*1. After setting the input mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each
setting.
The specified input mode will be retained even if power failure occurs. After specifying the input mode,
if the same input mode is used, it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time (T0 K50).
*2. To use the default value set for the digital filter function, it is not necessary to set the digital filter
function in the sequence program.
B-52
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.1 Program That Uses Averaging Time
A
• For FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs
Common Items
Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 79 Input modes of channels 1
K0 K0 H3300 K1 to 4 will be specified.*1
RUN monitor TO P
M8000
T0 K50 *1
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
T0
FNC 79 For channels 1 to 4, the averaging time
K0 K2 K10 K4 will be set to "10".
TO P
FNC 79 The digital filter function of channels 1

K0 K6 K0 K4 to 4 will be disabled.*2
TO P
FNC 78 K0 K10 D0 K4
The digital values set for channels C
1 to 4 will be read out to D0 to D3.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FROM
setting.
The specified input mode will be retained even if power failure occurs. After specifying the input mode,
if the same input mode is used, it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time (T0 K50). D
*2. To use the default value set for the digital filter function, it is not necessary to set the digital filter
FX3G-2AD-BD
function in the sequence program.
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-53
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions
7.2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions

This section describes a program that uses the 4AD convenient functions (BFM#22).
1. Conditions
2) Input mode
3) Averaging time
For all the channels, the averaging time should be set to "1" (default).
(To use the default value, it is not necessary to set the averaging time in the sequence program.)
For all channels, the digital filter function should be disabled (default).
(To use the default value, it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program.)
5) Convenient functions
The upper/lower limit detection function, upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer function,
over-scale status data automatic transfer function, and error status data automatic transfer function
should be used.
Caution:
The upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer function, the over-scale status data automatic
transfer function, and the error status data automatic transfer function are not supported when connected
and used with the FX5U or FX5UC CPU module.
Device Description
X000 Clearance of upper/lower limit error data
Input
X001 Clearance of over-scale data
Y000 Output of channel-1 lower limit error data
Y001 Output of channel-1 upper limit error data
Y010 Output of channel-1 over-scale (lower limit) data
Y011 Output of channel-1 over-scale (upper limit) data
Output Y014 Output of channel-3 over-scale (lower limit) data
Y020 Output of error detection signal
Y021 Output of setting error detection signal
D0 A/D converted digital value of channel 1
D100 Upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to data register
D101 Over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register
D102 Error status data automatic transfer-to data register
B-54
A
Common Items
Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 12 Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be
RUN monitor MOV P
H3300 U0\G0 specified.*2 B
M8000
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
T0 K50 *1
T0
FNC 12 H01A2 U0\G22 The convenient functions will be set.*2
MOV P
FNC 12 K100 U0\G126

The upper/lower limit error status data automatic
transfer-to data register will be set to D100.*2
C
MOV P
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FNC 12 The over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data
K101 U0\G128 register will be set to D101.*2
MOV P
FNC 12 The error status data automatic transfer-to data register

K102 U0\G129 will be set to D102.*2
MOV P
D
FNC 15 U0\G10 D0 K4 Reads the digital values of channels 1 to 4 from BFM#10
FX3G-2AD-BD
BMOV to #13 into D0 to D3.
Clearance of upper/lower
limit error data
X000
FNC 12 H0003 U0\G99 Clearance of upper/lower limit error data
MOV P
Clearance of over-scale
data
E
FX3U-4DA
X001
FNC 12 K0 U0\G28 Clearance of over-scale data
MOV P
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 12
MOV
D100 K2Y000
The upper/lower limit error status data of each channel
will be output to Y000 to Y007. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FNC 12 The over-scale status data of each channel will be output
D101 K2Y010 to Y010 to Y017.
MOV
Error detection
D102.0
Setting error detection

Y020 The error detection signal will be output to Y020.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
D102.8
Y021 The setting error detection signal will be output to Y021.
setting.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
After this, if the same input mode is used, it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time
(T0 K50) again.
*2. The set input mode, convenient functions, upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to
data register number, over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register number, and error
status data automatic transfer-to data register number are retained in the 4AD EEPROM. For this
reason, even if the sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-55
Initial pulse
M8002
K0 K0 H3300 K1 specified.*2
RUN monitor TO P
M8000
T0 K50 *1
T0
FNC 79 K0 K22 H01A2 K1 The convenient functions will be set. *2
TO P
FNC 79 The upper/lower limit error status data automatic

K0 K126 K100 K1 transfer-to data register will be set to D100.*2
TO P
FNC 79 The over-scale status data automatic transfer-to

K0 K128 K101 K1 data register will be set to D101.*2
TO P
FNC 79 The error status data automatic transfer-to data

K0 K129 K102 K1 register will be set to D102.*2
TO P
FNC 78 K0 K10 D0 K4 Reads the digital values of channels 1 to 4 from

FROM P BFM#10 to #13 into D0 to D3.
Clearance of upper/
lower limit error data
X000
FNC 79 K0 K99 H0003 K1 Clearance of upper/lower limit error data
TO P
Clearance of over-scale
data
X001
FNC 79 K0 K28 K0 K1 Clearance of over-scale data
TO
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 12 The upper/lower limit error status data of each
D100 K2Y000 channel will be output to Y000 to Y007.
MOV
FNC 12 The over-scale status data of each channel will

D101 K2Y010 be output to Y010 to Y017.
MOV
FNC 12 D102 K4M0

MOV
Error detection
M0
Y020 The error detection signal will be output to Y020.
Setting error detection
M8
Y021 The setting error detection signal will be output
to Y021.
setting.
(T0 K50) again.
*2. The set input mode, convenient functions, upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to
data register number, over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register number, and error
status data automatic transfer-to data register number are retained in the 4AD EEPROM. For this
reason, even if the sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid.
B-56
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.3 Program That Uses Data History Function
A
7.3 Program That Uses Data History Function
Common Items
This section describes a program that uses the data history function of the 4AD.
1. Conditions
The sequence program described in this section is created under the following functions. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
2) Input mode
3) Averaging time C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
For all the channels, the averaging time should be set to "1" (default).
(To use the default value, it is not necessary to set the averaging time in the sequence program.)
For all channels, the digital filter function should be disabled (default).
(To use the default value, it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program.)
5) Data history function
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
For all channels, the data sampling time should be set to 100 ms.
The sampling cycle should be 100 ms × 4 (number of selected channels) = 400 ms.
For all channels, data will be sampled 100 times, and the sampled data will be stored as data history in
the data registers.
Device Description
E
FX3U-4DA
X000 Clearance of data history
Input
X001 Temporarily stoppage of data history
D2 A/D converted digital value of channel 3 F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Data register
D100 to D199 Channel-1 data history(100 data samples)
D400 to D499 Channel-4 data history(100 data samples) G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-57

Initial pulse
M8002
H3300 U0\G0 specified.*2
RUN monitor MOV P
M8000
T0 K50 *1
T0
FNC 12 K100 U0\G198 The sampling time will be set to 100 ms.*2
MOV P
FNC 15 The digital values set for channels 1

U0\G10 D0 K4 to 4 will be read out to D0 to D3.
Clear data BMOV
history
X000
FNC 12 Data history of all the channels will be
H000F U0\G199 erased.
MOV P
Temporarily stop
data history
X001
FNC 12 Data history of all the channels will be
H0F00 U0\G199 temporarily stopped.
MOV P
Temporarily stop
data history
X001
FNC 12 Temporary stoppage of data history will be
H0000 U0\G199 canceled for all the channels.
MOV P
T0
FNC 15 Channel-1 history data (100 data samples)
U0\G200 D100 K100 will be read out to D100 to D199.
BMOV
FNC 07 The watchdog timer will be refreshed.*3

WDT

BMOV

WDT

BMOV

WDT

BMOV

WDT
setting.
(T0 K50) again.
*2. The set input mode and the sampling time are retained in the 4AD EEPROM. Therefore, even if the
sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid.
*3. If a large amount of history data is read out, the scan time of the PLC will be become longer. If the
scan time exceeds 200 ms, the CPU error indicator lamp will illuminate, and the PLC will stop.
Insert WDT instruction (watchdog timer refresh) between BMOV instructions.
B-58
A
Common Items
Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 79 K0 K0 H3300 K1 Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be
TO P specified.*2
RUN monitor
M8000
T0 K50 *1 B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
T0
FNC 79 K0 K198 K100 K1 The sampling time will be set to 100 ms.*2
TO P
FNC 78 The digital values set for channels 1

K0 K10 D0 K4 to 4 will be read out to D0 to D3.
FROM P
Clear data
history C
X000
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FNC 79 K0 K199 H000F K1 Data history of all the channels will be
TO P erased.
Temporarily stop
data history
X001
FNC 79 K0 K199 H0F00 K1 Data history of all the channels will be
TO P temporarily stopped.
Temporarily stop
data history
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
X001
FNC 79 K199 H0000 K1 Temporary stoppage of data history will be
K0 canceled for all the channels.
TO P
T0
TO
K0 K200 D100 K100
will be read out to D100 to D199. E
FX3U-4DA
WDT

K0 K1900 D200 K100 will be read out to D200 to D299.
TO
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
WDT

K0 K3600 D300 K100 will be read out to D300 to D399.
TO
FNC 07
WDT
The watchdog timer will be refreshed.*3
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
FNC 79 K0 K5300 D400 K100 Channel-4 history data (100 data samples)
TO will be read out to D400 to D499.

WDT
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
setting.
(T0 K50) again.
*2. The set input mode and the sampling time are retained in the 4AD EEPROM. Therefore, even if the
sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid. I
*3. If a large amount of history data is read out, the scan time of the PLC will be become longer. If the
FX3U-4AD-PT
scan time exceeds 200 ms, the CPU error indicator lamp will illuminate, and the PLC will stop.
Insert WDT instruction (watchdog timer refresh) between BMOV instructions.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-59
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.4 Initialization Program for 4AD (Factory Default)
7.4 Initialization Program for 4AD (Factory Default)

Execution of the following program will reset the input mode (BFM#0), offset data (BFM#41 to #44), gain data
(BFM#51 to #54), etc. to the factory default status.
1. Conditions
The sequence program described in this section runs under the following conditions.
Device Description
X000 4AD initialization command

4AD initialization command
X000
FNC 12 K1 U0\G20 The 4AD will be initialized.
MOV P (BFM#0 to #6999 will be cleared.)
4AD initialization command

X000
FNC 79 K0 K20 K1 K1 The 4AD will be initialized.
TO P (BFM#0 to #6999 will be cleared.)
3. Cautions
• It takes approximately 5 seconds to complete initialization.
Do not write any data to the buffer memory in this time.
• When initialization is complete, the value of BFM#20 will be reset to "K0".
• Priority is given to the data change disable (BFM#19). To initialize, write K2080 to BFM#19.
B-60
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 8.1 PLC Version Number Check
Common Items
8. Troubleshooting
This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error codes. B
If the A/D conversion data is not input, or if the proper digital value is not input, check the following items:
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• PLC version number
• Wiring
• Program
• Error status
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
8.1 PLC Version Number Check
Verify that the PLC being used is of the following version or later.
FX3U-4AD
Compatible PLC Version number
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later
FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later
FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later
FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later
FX3UC-4AD
E
FX3U-4DA
Compatible PLC Version number
FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later
FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later
→ For a detailed description of version check method,

F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
8.2 Wiring Check
Check the wiring as follows:
1. Power G
FX3G-1DA-BD
The 4AD needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the 24
V indicator lamp of the 4AD is on.
2. Analog input line

Use the 2-core twisted shielded cable for the analog input line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog
input line from any other power lines or inductive lines. H
FX3U-3A-ADP
3. Use of current input mode

To use the current input mode for a channel, be sure to short-circuit the line between the V+ terminal and the
I+ terminal of the channel.
Without short circuiting the terminals, it is impossible to obtain the correctly converted digital values.
→ For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 4.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
8.3 Program Check

Check the program as follows:
-ADP
1. Storage devices
Check whether the device holding digital values contains any values written by other programs. J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
2. Setting of averaging time and digital filter function

Check if the averaging time or the digital filter function is set for the same channel. It is not possible to set both
-ADP
functions for the same channel.
B-61
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 8.4 Error Status Check
8.4 Error Status Check

If an error occurs in the 4AD, the corresponding bit of BFM#29 (error status buffer memory) will turn on. To
solve the problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below:
Bit No. Items Bit No. Items

b0 Error detection b8 Data setting error detection
b1 - b9 -
b2 Power supply error b10 Averaging time setting error
b3 Hardware error b11 Digital filter setting error
b4 A/D conversion error b12 Abrupt change detection value setting error
b5 - b13 Upper/lower limit detection setting error
b6 BFM reading/writing impossible b14 -
b7 - b15 Addition data setting error
1. Error detection (b0)

1) Description of error
If any bits from b2 to b4 are turned on, this bit (b0) will turn on.
2. Power supply error (b2)

The 24 V power is not being supplied properly.
2) Remedy
Check the wiring condition or the supplied voltage.
3. Hardware error (b3)

4AD may be defective.
2) Remedy
Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
4. A/D conversion error (b4)

The A/D conversion value is abnormal.
2) Remedy
Check the over-scale status data (BFM#28) to localize the error channel. After that, check to make sure
the input analog data is in the specified range.
5. BFM reading/writing impossible (b6)

While voltage input characteristics are being changed, this bit will turn on. If this bit (b6) is on, A/D
conversion data cannot be read out correctly or cannot be written to the BFM correctly.
2) Remedy
Check the sequence program and confirm that the input characteristics (BFM#21 b0 to b3) are not being
written continuously.
6. Data setting error detection (b8)

If any bits from b10 to b15 are turned on, this bit (b8) will turn on.
7. Averaging time setting error (b10)

The averaging time (BFM#2 to #5) is not set correctly.
2) Remedy
Set the averaging time again in the range from 1 to 4095.
B-62
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 8.5 4AD Initialization and Test Program
A
8. Digital filter setting error (b11)
Common Items
The digital filter value (BFM#6 to #9) is not set correctly.
2) Remedy
Set the digital filter value again in the range from 0 to 1600.
Also check that the averaging is not set for the selected channel. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
9. Abrupt change detection value setting error (b12)
The abrupt change detection value (BFM#91 to #94) is not set correctly.
2) Remedy
Check that the abrupt change detection value is in the range specified for the selected input mode. If the C
value is out of the range, correct it.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
10. Upper/lower limit detection setting error (b13)
The lower limit error detection value (BFM#71 to #74) or the upper limit error detection value (BFM#81 to
#84) is not set correctly. D
2) Remedy
FX3G-2AD-BD
Check that the upper/lower limit error detection value is in the range specified for the selected input
mode. If the value is out of the range, correct it.
11. Addition data setting error (b15)

1) Description of error E
The addition data (BFM#61 to #64) is not set correctly.
FX3U-4DA
2) Remedy
Set the addition data again in the range from -16000 to +16000.
8.5 4AD Initialization and Test Program F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
If the remedies above cannot solve the problem, initialize and then check the conditions of the 4AD using the
test program.
→ For a detailed description of 4AD initialization program, refer to Section 7.4.
→ For a detailed description of the test program, refer to Chapter 4.
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
B-63
FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 8.5 4AD Initialization and Test Program
MEMO
B-64
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input)
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
C. FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) D
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD-ADP special
adapter (4-channel analog input) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the I
unit.
FX3U-4AD-PT
it to the end user.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
C-1
C-2
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions
Common Items
1. Outline
This chapter outlines the FX3U-4AD-ADP (referred to as the 4AD-ADP). B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
The FX3U-4AD-ADP is an analog special adapter. Connect the FX3U-4AD-ADP to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to read 4 channels of voltage/current data.
1) Only 1 4AD-ADP unit can be connected to the FX3S Series PLC. C
Up to 2*1 4AD-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Up to 4 4AD-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
(including the other analog expansion boards, analog special adapters).
3) A/D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3S/
FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
System Point and section to be
referred to
FX3S Series PLC : Only 1
FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 2*1 maximum
Number of connectable
FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 4 maximum  units
including the other analog expansion
boards, analog special adapters
E
FX3U-4DA
Series PLC
To check the connectable
 PLC model number, refer
+ +
to Section 1.3.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
*2
4th 3rd 2nd 1st Expansion board
adapter adapter adapter adapter
For a detailed
Analog data  description of wiring,

refer to Chapter 3.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
For FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/
FX3UC Series PLC
Contents
Transfer direction
Special devices*3  For a detailed description
of special devices, refer to H
 Analog data 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269 Chapter 4.
FX3U-3A-ADP
2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279 For a detailed description

 Switching of input mode of a basic program, refer to
 Setting of averaging 3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289 Section 4.8.
time
4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299
Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of I
connectable units and to configure the entire system.
FX3U-4AD-PT
*2. The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3GC/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC.
-ADP
For the FX3S/FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used.

*3. FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs use the following special devices.
For FX3S Series PLC For FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
• 1st adapter: M/D8280 to M/D8289 • 1st adapter: M/D8280 to M/D8289

• 2nd, 3rd and 4th adapters: Cannot be connected • 2nd adapter: M/D8290 to M/D8299
• 3rd and 4th adapters: Cannot be connected
-ADP
C-3
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using the 4AD-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Refer to Chapter 1.

• Compatible PLC version number
• Compatible programming tool version number
Refer to Chapter 2.
Specifications check Specifications:

• Performance specifications
Refer to the • Input characteristics
common pages.

(Refer to the common pages for analog control.)
• Selection of units
Refer to Chapter 3.
Wiring Wiring:
• Selection of sensor cable
Refer to Chapter 4. • Analog input line
Programming Programming:
• Details of special devices
• Examples of basic programs
Refer to Chapter 5.
Changing of input characteristics Method of input characteristics change:

• How to use scaling instruction

C-4
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number
A
1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number
Common Items
The 4AD-ADP is compatible with the following PLCs.

FX3S Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later*1 After March 2013 (From first product) B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later*1 After June 2008 (From first product)
FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later*1 After January 2012 (From first product)
FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later*1 After May 2005 (From first product)
FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.20 or later*1 After April 2004
*1. The FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.70 or later and FX3S Series PLC supports the under-scale C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
detection. The FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC are not supported.
1. Version check
refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
product.
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-5
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

The following programming tools and versions are applicable for the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series.
1. English versions
FX3S PLC
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.492N or later
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3S PLC
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-J Ver. 1.492N or later
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-J Ver. 1.77F or later
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Point
• It is possible to create programs in FX3S PLC using programming tools of inapplicable versions by
selecting "FX3G" as the alternative model. However, memory capacity setting of the PLC parameter must
be set to 4000 steps or less.
C-6
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications
Common Items
2. Specifications
This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the 4AD-ADP. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Item Specifications C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Relative
humidity
Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude D
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
FX3G-2AD-BD
Tests 10 times in each
Vibration 10 to 57 - 0.035 direction (X-, Y-, and Z-
DIN Rail Mounting
resistance*1 57 to 150 4.9 - axis directions) (Total:
80 min, each)
10 to 57 − 0.075
Direct Mounting*2
−
Shock
57 to 150 9.8
E
m/s2
FX3U-4DA
147 Acceleration, Action time: 11 ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z
resistance*1
Dielectric
withstand
voltage
500 V AC, for 1 min F
Between all terminals and ground terminal
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Grounding
Working
Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts
G
environment
FX3G-1DA-BD
Working
altitude < 2000 m*4

*2. If 4AD-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible. H
*3.
FX3U-3A-ADP


→ For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.5.

I
FX3U-4AD-PT
*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the 4AD-ADP.
The 4AD-ADP may malfunction.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-7
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications
Item Specifications
A/D conversion circuit 24V DC +20%-15%, 40mA
driving power (It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block.)
5V DC, 15mA
Interface driving power (Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit, it is not
necessary to supply the power.)
Specifications
Item
Analog input 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC
range (Input resistance: 194 kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω)
Absolute input
-0.5V, +15V -2mA, +30mA
maximum
Resolution 2.5mV (10V/4000) 10μA (16mA/1600)
• ±0.5% (±50mV) for 10V full scale • ±0.5% (±80μA) for 16mA full scale
(when ambient temperature is 25°C ± 5°C) (when ambient temperature is 25°C ± 5°C)
Total accuracy
(when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55°C) (when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55°C)
• FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.)
A/D conversion
• FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.)
time
→ For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.4.
4080 1640
4000 1600
Input
Digital output
Digital output
characteristics
0 10V 10.2V 0 4mA 20mA 20.4mA

Number of I/O
0 point (This number is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)
points occupied
C-8
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time
A
2.4 A/D Conversion Time
Common Items
This section describes the A/D conversion time.
2.4.1 When connected to a FX3S PLC

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
1. A/D conversion and special data register update timing
A/D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC.
During execution of END instruction, the PLC performs A/D conversion, reads out the A/D converted data,
and then writes the data in the special data registers.
FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3S Series PLC C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Sequence
program
A/D conversion start
command
A/D
conversion D
Digital value reading END instruction
FX3G-2AD-BD
250 s/4ch
2. A/D conversion during PLC STOP E

Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated.
FX3U-4DA
3. A/D conversion speed (data update time)
During execution of the END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 250 μs,
and the data read out will be written to the special data registers.
END instruction execution time will be 250 μs.
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-9
2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G/FX3GC PLC

FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP
2nd 1st FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC
Sequence
program
A/D command
conversion
Digital value reading
250 s/4ch
A/D conversion start END instruction
A/D command
conversion
250 s/4ch
2. A/D conversion during PLC STOP

3. If two analog special adapters are connected

During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected adapters (in the order of
1st adapter → 2nd adapter).

END instruction execution time will be "250 μs × number of connected analog adapters."
C-10
A
2.4.3 When connected to a FX3U/FX3UC PLC
Common Items
and then writes the data in the special data registers. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP
n'th 1st FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC
Sequence

program C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
A/D command
conversion
200 s/4ch
A/D
conversion
command
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
200 s/4ch

Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated. E
FX3U-4DA
3. If two or more analog special adapters are connected
1st adapter → 2nd adapter... 4th adapter).

F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
END instruction execution time will be "200 μs × number of connected analog adapters."
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-11
3. Wiring
This chapter describes the 4AD-ADP wiring.
Observe the following caution to wire the 4AD-ADP.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
C-12
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout
A
3.1 Terminal Layout
Common Items
The terminals of the 4AD-ADP are arranged as follows:
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Signal Application
24+
24-
External power
C
Grounding terminal
FX3U-4AD-ADP
V1+
I1+ Channel 1 analog input
COM1
V2+
I2+
COM2
Channel 2 analog input
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
V3+
COM3
V4+
COM4 E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-13
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque
3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque

Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable ends as shown
below.
1. Cables
Termination
Single-wire and then twist the core before connection.
(AWG22 to 20)
• To connect a single-wire cable, just strip the cover off the
2-wire 0.3 mm2 (AWG22)×2 cable before connection.
insulation (Refer to the external view • Caulking tool
sleeve of ferrule shown in the
following figure.)


To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single-wire directly or use a ferrule with insulation sleeve.
• To directly terminate the end of a stranded/single-wire cable: • Stranded wire/solid wire
- Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the "barbed wires"
cannot protrude.
9mm
(0.35")
• To terminate cable end using a ferrule with insulation sleeve: • Ferrule with insulation sleeve
If the cable sheath is too thick, it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve Contact area
the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable while (Crimp area)
referring to the external view.
(0.1")

3. Tool
The head
straight.
Note:
<Reference>
Manufacturer Model
C-14
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 3.3 Power Supply Line
A
3.3 Power Supply Line
Common Items
Connect the 24 V DC power supply line of the 4AD-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.
3.3.1 To connect to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3U Series PLC

B
1. To use an External power supply 2. To use the 24V DC power of the PLC
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
4AD-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U 4AD-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U
Series Series
+15V +15V
PLC (Main unit) PLC (Main unit)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Terminal Terminal
block block
Fuse
Class-D Class-D
24V DC grounding grounding
Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: E
FX3U-4DA
• Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounded power supply line (100 Ω or less) together with the
grounding terminal of the PLC main unit.
• When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the
main unit. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of
the PLC (including special adapter) at the same time.
F
3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Example of wiring of FX3UC Series PLC
4AD-ADP FX3UC Series PLC
(Main unit)
+15V
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Power
connector H
FX3U-3A-ADP
24+ 24- 24+ 24-
Terminal Red Black Green

block
I
Fuse
FX3U-4AD-PT
Class-D
24V DC grounding
For example of wiring of FX3GC Series PLC, refer to the following manual.
-ADP

"Section 4.2 Example External Wiring".
Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line: J
• For the 24 V DC power supply line, be sure to use the same power as the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC.
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-15
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 3.4 Analog Input Line

For analog input, "voltage input" or "current input" can be selected for each channel.
If current input is selected: 4AD-ADP

Terminal
*1 block
147kΩ ch
V+
*2 250Ω
I+
47kΩ
COM
If voltage input is selected:
*1 147kΩ ch
V+
250Ω
I+
47kΩ
COM
Connection of external +15V

power supply line
24+
24V DC*3
24-
Class-D
grounding
V+, I+, ch : represents the channel number.
lines from other power lines or inductive lines.
*2. If "current input" is selected, be sure to short the line between the V+ terminal and the I+ terminal.
(: Channel number).
*3. For FX3S/FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (AC power type), the 24 V DC service power supply is also
available.
3.5 Grounding
figure.
→ For details, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC Series.


• The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 (0.3 to 0.5 mm2).

• The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.
C-16
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data
Common Items
4. Programming
This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the 4AD-ADP. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data
1) The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
C
2) If the data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the input mode can be
FX3U-4AD-ADP
specified.
3) Special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned automatically
starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit.
→ For a detailed description of special device assignment, refer to Section 4.2.
• FX3S Series PLC D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Communi-
cation
FX3U-4AD special FX3S-CNV
-ADP adapter -ADP FX3S Series PLC
Special devices
Special auxiliary relays: E
A/D M8280 to M8289 Sequence
FX3U-4DA
Special data registers: program
D8280 to D8289
• FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

Communi-
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
cation
FX3U-4AD special FX3U-4AD
-ADP adapter -ADP FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC*2
*1
2nd 1st
Special devices
A/D
Special auxiliary relays:
M8280 to M8289 G
Special data registers:
FX3G-1DA-BD
D8280 to D8289.
Sequence
program
M8290 to M8299
A/D Special data registers:
D8290 to D8299.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter, and the
next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter. However, in this case, do not include the connector
conversion adapter and the communication special adapter.
*1. The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
*2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-ADP to the FX3G Series PLC. I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-17
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices
• FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

Communi-
cation
FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD special FX3U-4AD
-ADP -ADP -ADP adapter -ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC*1
4th 3rd 2nd 1st Special devices

M8260 to M8269
D8260 to D8269

M8270 to M8279
D8270 to D8279
Sequence
program
M8280 to M8289
D8280 to D8289.

M8290 to M8299
D8290 to D8299
next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter, and so on. However, in this case, do not include the high-
speed input/output special adapter, communication special adapter, and the CF card special adapter.
*3. An expansion board is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.
4.2 List of Special Devices

If the 4AD-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table:
• FX3S Series PLC
R: Read / W: Write
Special
Device number Description Attribute Reference
device
M8280 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R/W
Special M8281 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R/W
Section 4.3
auxiliary M8282 Switches the input mode of channel 3 R/W
relay M8283 Switches the input mode of channel 4 R/W
M8284 to M8289 Unused (Do not use.) - -
D8280 Channel-1 input data R
Section 4.4
Averaging time for channel-1
D8284 R/W
(Setting range: 1 to 4095)
Special
data Averaging time for channel-2
D8285 R/W
register (Setting range: 1 to 4095)
Section 4.5
D8286 R/W
D8287 R/W
D8288 Error status R/W Section 4.6
D8289 Model code = 1 R Section 4.7
C-18
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices
A
Common Items
R: Read / W: Write
Special Device number
Description Attribute Reference
device 1st 2nd
M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R/W
B
Special Section 4.3
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
auxiliary
relay M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 R/W
M8284 to M8294 to
Unused (Do not use.) - -
M8289 M8299
D8280 D8290 Channel-1 input data R C
D8281 D8291 Channel-2 input data R
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Section 4.4
D8284 D8294 R/W
Special
data Averaging time for channel-2 D
D8285 D8295 R/W
FX3G-2AD-BD
register Section 4.5
D8286 D8296 R/W
D8287 D8297 R/W
D8288 D8298 Error status R/W Section 4.6 E
FX3U-4DA
D8289 D8299 Model code = 1 R Section 4.7

R: Read / W: Write
device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Switches the input mode of
M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 R/W
channel 1
M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 R/W
channel 2
Special Section 4.3
auxiliary
relay
M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292
channel 3
R/W G
FX3G-1DA-BD
M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 R/W
channel 4
M8264 to M8274 to M8284 to M8294 to
M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299
D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel-1 input data R
H
Section 4.4
FX3U-3A-ADP

D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W
Special
data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295
R/W I
register
FX3U-4AD-PT
Section 4.5
D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 R/W
-ADP
D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 R/W

D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W Section 4.6 J
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 1 R Section 4.7
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-19
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.3 Switching of Input Mode
4.3 Switching of Input Mode

Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the input mode of 4AD-ADP between the current input mode
and the voltage input mode.
To switch the input mode, use the following special auxiliary relays:
• FX3S Series PLC
Special auxiliary relay Description
M8280 Switches the input mode of channel 1
M8281 Switches the input mode of channel 2 OFF: Voltage input
M8282 Switches the input mode of channel 3 ON: Current input
M8283 Switches the input mode of channel 4

Special auxiliary relay
Description
1st 2nd
M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1
M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 OFF: Voltage input
M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 ON: Current input

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1
M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 OFF: Voltage input
M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 ON: Current input
1. Program Example (For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC)

To switch the channel input mode, create a sequence program as follows:
1) To switch the input mode of channel 1 2) To switch the input mode of channel 2
of the 1st analog special adapter to of the 1st analog special adapter to
the voltage input mode: the current input mode:
M8001 M8000
M8260 M8261
Normally OFF Normally ON
C-20
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.4 Input Data
A
4.4 Input Data
Common Items
The data converted by the 4AD-ADP will be stored in the special data registers.
The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table:
B
• FX3S Series PLC
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Special data register Description
D8280 Stores the channel-1 input data
D8282
D8283
Stores the channel-3 input data
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Special data register
Description
1st 2nd
D8280 D8290 Stores the channel-1 input data D
D8281 D8291 Stores the channel-2 input data
FX3G-2AD-BD

Description
E
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
FX3U-4DA
D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel-1 input data
D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel-4 input data F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
The converted A/D immediate data or averaged data (data average conforming to the specified averaging
time) will be stored in the above data registers as the input data.
→ For a detailed description of the averaging time, refer to Section 4.5.
1. Caution regarding input data

Input data is for reading only.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Do not change (rewrite) the input data using sequence program, indicator, or device monitor of the
programming tool.

M8000 Stores the channel-1 input data
H
FNC 12 D8260 D100
FX3U-3A-ADP
MOV of the 1st analog special

Normally adapter in the D100.
ON
FNC 12 Stores the channel-2 input data

D8261 D101 of the 1st analog special
MOV adapter in the D101.
Even if the input data is not stored in D100 or D101, data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
the timer/counter set value or in a PID instruction.

-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-21
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.5 Averaging Time
4.5 Averaging Time

Initial value: K1
If the averaging time is set for the 4AD-ADP, the average data will be stored as the input data. The averaging
time can be set for each channel.
Set the averaging time in the following special data registers:
• FX3S Series PLC
D8284 Averaging time for channel-1 data

Description
1st 2nd
D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data

• If the averaging time is set to "1", the immediate data is stored to the special data register.
• If the averaging time is set in the range from 2 to 4095, the average value will be calculated to conform to
the set averaging time, and the average value obtained will be stored in the special data register.
• After turning the PLC power on, the current data is stored to special data registers until the number of data
items reaches the set averaging time. After this, the average data will be stored.
• Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set value is outside the setting range, an error
signal will be output.
• If the averaging time is set to "0" or smaller, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "1".
If the averaging time is set to "4096" or larger, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "4096".
→ For a detailed description of the error status, refer to Section 6.5.

M8000 Sets the averaging time for
FNC 12 K1 D8264 channel-1 of the 1st analog
MOV special adapter to 1.
Normally
ON
Sets the averaging time for
C-22
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.6 Error Status
A
4.6 Error Status
Common Items
If an error is detected in the 4AD-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data
register.
The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data:
• FX3S Series PLC B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
D8288 Stores the error status data.

1st 2nd
Description C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

Description
1st
D8268
2nd
D8278
3rd
D8288
4th
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Check the ON/OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error.
Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table. Create a program to detect errors.
Bit Description Bit Description

E
FX3U-4DA
b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b7 4AD-ADP communication data error
b1 Channel-2 over-scale detection b8 Channel-1 under-scale detection*1
F
b4 EEPROM error b11 Channel-4 under-scale detection*1
FX3U-4DA-ADP
b5 Averaging time setting error b12 to b15 Unused
4AD-ADP hardware error
b6 - -
(Power supply error included)
*1. The FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.70 or later and FX3S Series PLC in applicable.
The under-scale detection function is valid only for current input mode. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
The FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC are not supported.
1. Caution regarding use of error status data

If a 4AD-ADP hardware error (b6) or 4AD-ADP communication data error (b7) is detected, it is necessary to
clear the error status with a program at the next power-on of the PLC.
For this reason, be sure to create the following program: H
• For FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC
FX3U-3A-ADP
M8000
FNC 12 D8288 K4M0
Normally ON MOV
M8002
RST M6
*2
Error status of 3rd analog special adapter
b6 = OFF (4AD-ADP hardware error)
I
Initial pulse
FX3U-4AD-PT
*2
RST M7 Error status of 3rd analog status register
b7 = OFF (4AD-ADP communication data error)
-ADP
FNC 12
K4M0 D8288
MOV
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
*2. "1st" for the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLC.

-ADP
C-23
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.6 Error Status
• For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

M8002
Error status of 1st analog special adapter
RST D8268.6 b6 = OFF (4AD-ADP hardware error)
Initial pulse
RST D8268.7 Error status of 1st analog status register

b7 = OFF (4AD-ADP communication data error)
1. Program Example 1 (For FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC)
M8000
FNC 12
D8288 K4M0
Normally ON MOV
M0
Y000 Detects over-scale in channel 1 of
the 3rd*1 adapter.
M1
the 3rd*1 adapter.
M2
the 3rd*1 adapter.
M3
the 3rd*1 adapter.
M4
Y004 EEPROM error in 3rd*1 adapter.
M5
Y005 Averaging time setting error in
3rd*1 adapter.
M6
Y006 4AD-ADP hardware error in
3rd*1 adapter.
M7
Y007 4AD-ADP communication data
error in 3rd*1 adapter.
2. Program Example 2 (For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC)

D8268.0
the 1st adapter.
D8268.1
the 1st adapter.
D8268.2
the 1st adapter.
D8268.3
the 1st adapter.
D8268.4
Y004 EEPROM error in 1st adapter.
D8268.5
1st adapter.
D8268.6
Y006 4AD-ADP hardware error in 1st adapter.
D8268.7
Y007 4AD-ADP communication data error
in 1st adapter.
C-24
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.7 Model Code
A
4.7 Model Code
Common Items
Initial value: K1
When the 4AD-ADP is connected, model code "1" is stored in the corresponding special data register.
The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code: B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• FX3S Series PLC
D8289 Model code
• FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC C

FX3U-4AD-ADP
Description
1st 2nd
D8289 D8299 Model code

Special data register D
Description
FX3G-2AD-BD
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code
Use the special data registers above to check whether a 4AD-ADP is connected or not.
E
FX3U-4DA
FNC224 D8269 K1 Y007 Checks the model code of the 1st
LD= analog special adapter
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-25
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.8 Basic Program Example
4.8 Basic Program Example

Create the following basic program example to read out analog conversion (A/D conversion) data.
The following program will set channel 1 of the 3rd*1 adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to
current input mode, and will store the converted A/D value of channel-1 data into D100 and that of channel-
2 data into D101.
M8001 Sets the input mode of channel
M8280 1 to the voltage input mode
Normally (0 V to 10 V).
OFF
M8281 2 to the current input mode
Normally (4 mA to 20 mA).
ON
M8000
FNC 12 D8288 K4M0
Normally MOV
ON
M8002
RST M6 Error status: b6 = OFF
Initial
pulse
FNC 12
K4M0 D8288
MOV
M8000
FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to "5"
K5 D8284 for channel-1 data.
Normally MOV
ON
MOV
M8000
FNC 12 D8280 D100 Stores the A/D converted
Normally MOV channel-1 digital data into D100.
ON
MOV channel-2 digital data into D101.
Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101, the data registers D8280 or D8281 can be directly
used in the timer/counter setting value or in a PID instruction.
C-26
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.8 Basic Program Example
A
Common Items
The following program will set channel 1 of the 1st adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current
input mode, and will store the converted A/D value of channel-1 data into D100 and that of channel-2 data
into D101.
Normally
M8260 1 to the voltage input mode
(0 V to 10 V).
B
OFF
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
M8261 2 to the current input mode
ON
M8002
RST D8268.6 Error status: b6 = OFF C
Initial
FX3U-4AD-ADP
pulse
RST D8268.7 Error status: b7 = OFF
M8000
MOV
Normally
ON
Sets the averaging time to "5"
D
FNC 12 K5 D8265
FX3G-2AD-BD
MOV for channel-2 data.
M8000
ON
FNC 12
MOV
D8261 D101 Stores the A/D converted
channel-2 digital data into D101. E
FX3U-4DA
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-27
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics
5. Changing of Input Characteristics

Use the scaling instruction (SCL/FNC259) for the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to change the input
characteristics. FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLCs do not support the scaling instruction. Use sequence
programs to change the input characteristics.
→ For a detailed description of scaling instruction, refer to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition.
5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics

In the example explained in this section, the voltage input data "1 to 5 V" (Digital output value: 400 to 2000) is
changed to the digital output value "0 to 10000".
1. Input characteristics
Voltage input characteristics Digital output value to be changed
(product specifications) Y-axis
Digital output
4000 10000
Digital output to
be calculated
(D110)
2000
400
0 X-axis
1V 5V 10V 0 400(1V) 2000(5V)
Analog input
Digital value actually obtained
by A/D conversion
C-28
A
2. Example of program 1 (For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC)
Common Items
For example, create the following program to change the digital input data of the 1st analog special adapter:
M8001
M8260 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode
Normally (0 V to 10 V)
OFF
M8002
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Initial
pulse
M8000
FNC 12
MOV
K1 D8264 Sets the averaging time to "1" for the channel-1 data C
Normally
FX3U-4AD-ADP
ON
M8002 FNC 12 K2 D50 Program for setting scaling instruction data table
Initial MOV
pulse Item Description Value Device
FNC 12
MOV
K400 D51 Number of points
X-
Sets the number of points
A/D converted digital value
2 D50
D
400 D51
FX3G-2AD-BD
Start coordinate start point data
FNC 12 K0 D52 point Y- Digital output value of changed
MOV coordinate X-axis value start point 0 D52
FNC 12 X- A/D converted digital value end 2000 D53

K2000 D53 End coordinate point data
MOV
point Y- Digital output value of changed 10000
FNC 12 K10000 D54
coordinate X-axis value end point D54
E
MOV
FX3U-4DA
M8000 FNC259
D8260 D50 D100 The scaling instruction operation results will be stored in D100.
Normally SCL
ON
F
Cautions regarding use of the SCL instruction
FX3U-4DA-ADP
If the A/D converted digital value is out of the data table range specified by the SCL instruction, the PLC will
detect an operation error (error code: K6706).
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-29
3. Example of program 2 (For FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC)

For example, create the following program to change the digital input data (D110) of the 1st analog special
adapter:
M8001
M8280 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the
Normally voltage input mode
OFF (0V to 10V).
M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0
Normally MOV
ON
M8002
Initial
pulse
FNC 12 K4M0 D8288

MOV
M8000 Sets the averaging scaling to "1"
FNC 12
K1 D8284 for the channel-1 data.
Normally MOV
ON
M8000
FNC 12 D8280 D110
Normally MOV
ON
FNC230 FNC237 Check to make sure the digital

D110 K400 D110 K2000 M10
LD>= AND<= value (D110) is in range.
M10 FNC 21 D110 K400 D111
SUB
Calculation for changing input
FNC 22 D111 K10000 D112 characteristics.
MUL
Stores the operation result in D100.
FNC 23 D112 K1600 D100
DDIV
C-30
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 6.1 PLC Version Number Check
Common Items
6. Troubleshooting
This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error statuses. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• Wiring
• Special devices
• Programs C
• Error status
FX3U-4AD-ADP
• Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3S Series are compatible. D
• Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3G Series are compatible.
FX3G-2AD-BD
• Any versions (from Ver. 1.40 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3GC Series are compatible.
• Any versions (from Ver. 2.20 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3U Series are compatible.
• Check the version number of the FX3UC Series PLC. The version number should be 1.20 or later.
→ For a detailed description of the version check method,
E
FX3U-4DA
6.2 Wiring Check
Check the following items for wiring:
F
1. Power
FX3U-4DA-ADP
The 4AD-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that
the POWER indicator lamp of the 4AD-ADP is on.

Use 2-core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog
input line from other power lines or inductive lines. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
To use the current input mode for a channel, be sure to shortcircuit the line between the V+ terminal and the
I+ terminal ( : channel number) of the channel. If the line is not shortcircuited, data will not be converted
into proper digital data.
→ For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-31
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 6.3 Special Device Check
6.3 Special Device Check

Check whether the special devices for the 4AD-ADP are being used correctly:
1. Input mode switching

Check that the special device for switching the input mode is set correctly.
Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode. Turn on the device to set the input mode
to the current input mode.
2. Input data
Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be
selected depending on the connecting position and the channel.
3. Averaging time
Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range
from 1 to 4095. If the set averaging time is outside the specified range, an error occurs.
4. Error status
Check that no error is detected in the 4AD-ADP.
If an error is detected, check the details of the error, and then check the wiring and programs.
→ For a detailed description of special devices, refer to Chapter 4.
6.4 Program Check

Check the following items for the program:
1. Clearing of error status at power on

When the power is turned off and then on again, the error status should be cleared (b6 and b7 should turn off)
using the program.
2. Check of storage devices

Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by other parts of the program.
C-32
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 6.5 Error Status Check
A
Common Items
If an error occurs in the 4AD-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn ON.
The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the
power is cycled. If b6 or b7 is turned ON, then it is necessary to clear the error status using the program the
next time the power of the PLC is cycled. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b7 4AD-ADP communication data error
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
b4 EEPROM error b11 Channel-4 under-scale detection*1
b5 Averaging time setting error b12 to b15 Unused
4AD-ADP hardware error
b6 - -
(Power supply error included)
*1. The FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.70 or later and FX3S Series PLC in applicable.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
The under-scale detection function is valid only for current input mode.
To solve the problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below:
1. Over-scale detection (b0 to b3) E

FX3U-4DA
The input analog value (voltage or current value) is outside the specified range.
Voltage input mode : The input voltage value is over the specified upper limit of 10.2 V.
Current input mode : The input current value is over the specified upper limit of 20.4 mA.
2) Remedy
Check that the input analog value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
2. EEPROM error (b4)
The adjustment data which was set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out
properly or has been destroyed.
2) Remedy G
FX3G-1DA-BD
The averaging time set for one of the channels (channels 1 to 4) is outside the specified range: 1 to 4095.
2) Remedy H
Check that the averaging time is set correctly for each channel.
FX3U-3A-ADP
4. 4AD-ADP hardware error (b6)

The 4AD-ADP is not operating properly.
2) Remedy I
Check that the 24 V DC power is properly supplied to the 4AD-ADP. Also check that the 4AD-ADP is
FX3U-4AD-PT
correctly connected to the PLC.

If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric
representative.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
C-33
FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 6.5 Error Status Check
5. 4AD-ADP communication error (b7)

A communication error is detected between the 4AD-ADP and the PLC.
2) Remedy
Check that the 4AD-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC.
representative.
6. Under-scale detection (b8 to b11)

The input analog value (current value) is below the specified lower limit.
This error is only detected for the current input mode, and indicates the input current is less than 2 mA.
2) Remedy
Check that the input analog value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring.
C-34
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input)
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
D. FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) D
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3G-2AD-BD analog input
expansion board (2-channel analog input) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or I
use the unit.
FX3U-4AD-PT
it to the end user.
-ADP
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
D-1
D-2
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions
Common Items
1. Outline
This chapter outlines the FX3G-2AD-BD (referred to as the 2AD-BD). B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
The FX3G-2AD-BD is an analog expansion board. Connect the FX3G-2AD-BD to the FX3S/FX3G Series PLC
to read 2 channels of voltage/current data.
C
1) Only 1 2AD-BD unit can be connected to the FX3S Series PLC.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Up to 2 2AD-BD units can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (40-point and 60-point type).
Only 1 2AD-BD unit can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
(including other analog expansion boards, analog special adapters)
3) A/D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3S/ D
FX3G Series PLC.
FX3G-2AD-BD
• FX3S Series PLC

referred to
Only 1
including other analog expansion boards,  Number of connectable
E
analog special adapters. FX3S Series PLC
FX3U-4DA
units

 PLC model number, refer
to Section 1.3.
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Connected to the option connector
Analog data
 For a detailed
description of wiring,

refer to Chapter 3.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Contents
Transfer direction For FX3S Series PLC
H
Analog data
FX3U-3A-ADP
Special devices  For a detailed description

of special devices, refer to
Switching of input mode M/D8260 to M/D8269 Chapter 4.
Setting of averaging
time For a detailed description
of a basic program, refer to
Section 4.8.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-3
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions
• FX3G Series PLC

referred to
2*1 maximum
including other analog expansion boards,  Number of connectable
analog special adapters. FX3G Series PLC units
Board B Board A
to Section 1.3.
Connected to the option connector 1

Analog data
 For a detailed
refer to Chapter 3.
For FX3G Series PLC

Contents  For a detailed description
Special devices of special devices, refer to
Transfer direction
Analog data Board A M/D8260 to M/D8269 Chapter 4.
Switching of input mode Board B M/D8270 to M/D8279 For a detailed description

Setting of averaging of a basic program, refer to
time Section 4.8.
*1. Only 1 analog board can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
D-4
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation
A
Common Items
Before starting analog input using the 2AD-BD, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3G-2AD-BD B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Refer to Chapter 1.

Refer to Chapter 2. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Refer to the • Input characteristics
common pages.
System configuration and selection System configuration: D

FX3G-2AD-BD
Refer to Chapter 3.
Wiring Wiring:
• Analog input line E
Refer to Chapter 4.
FX3U-4DA
Refer to Chapter 5.
Method of input characteristics change

F
Changing of input characteristics
FX3U-4DA-ADP
If the error status data or the input analog value is G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-5
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number

The 2AD-BD is compatible with the following PLC.

FX3S Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After March 2013 (From first product)
FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.10 or later After October 2008
1. Version check

product.

The following programming tools and versions are applicable for the FX3S/FX3G series.
1. English versions
FX3S PLC
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.492N or later -
FX-30P Ver. 1.50 or later -
FX3G PLC
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
Point
D-6
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications
Common Items
2. Specifications
This chapter describes the general and performance specifications for the 2AD-BD. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Relative
5 to 95%RH (no condensation) when operating
humidity
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
FX3G-2AD-BD
DIN Rail Mounting
80 min, each)
10 to 57 − 0.075
Direct Mounting
−
*1
57 to 150 9.8
E
Shock
m/s2
FX3U-4DA
resistance
Grounding
<Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed.>*2 F
Working
FX3U-4DA-ADP
environment
Working
altitude < 2000 m*3

G
*2.
FX3G-1DA-BD

→ For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.5. H

FX3U-3A-ADP
*3. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the 2AD-BD.
The 2AD-BD may malfunction.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-7
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 2.2 Performance Specifications
Specifications
Item
Analog input 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC
range (Input resistance: 198.7 kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω)
Absolute input
-0.5V, +15V -2mA, +30mA
maximum
Resolution 2.5mV (10V/4000) 8μA (16mA/2000)
(when ambient temperature is 25°C ± 5°C) (when ambient temperature is 25°C ± 5°C)
Total accuracy
(when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55°C) (when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55°C)
A/D conversion 180 μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.)
time → For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.3.
4080 2040
4000 2000
Input Digital output

Digital output
characteristics
0 10V 10.2V 0 4mA 20mA 20.32mA

• The analog input area is not insulated from the PLC.

Insulation method
Number of I/O
points occupied
D-8
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 2.3 A/D Conversion Time
A
Common Items
2.3.1 For FX3S Series PLC

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3S Series PLC C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Sequence Program
END instruction
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
A/D conversion Digital value
start command reading
E
FX3U-4DA
A/D
conversion
180 s
/2ch
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3G-2AD-BD

3. A/D conversion speed (data update time) G

During execution of END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 2 channels will be read out in 180 μs, and
FX3G-1DA-BD
the data read out will be written to the special data registers.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-9
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 2.3 A/D Conversion Time
2.3.2 For FX3G Series PLC

FX3G Series PLC
Sequence Program
END instruction
A/D conversion Digital value A/D conversion Digital value

start command reading start command reading
A/D A/D
conversion conversion
180 s 180 s
/2ch /2ch
FX3G-2AD-BD FX3G-2AD-BD
Board A Board B

3. If two analog expansion boards are connected

During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected boards (in the order of
board A → board B).

During execution of END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 2 channels will be read out in 180 μs, and
the data read out will be written to the special data registers.
END instruction execution time will be "180 μs × number of connected analog boards."
D-10
Common Items
3. Wiring
This chapter describes the 2AD-BD wiring. B
Observe the following caution to wire the 2AD-BD.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
FX3U-4AD-ADP
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3U-4DA
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-11
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout
3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the 2AD-BD are arranged as follows:
Signal V1+ I1+ V2+ I2+ VI-

Channel 1 Channel 2 COM
Application
analog input analog input terminal
D-12
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque
A
Common Items
below.
1. Cables B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Termination
(AWG22 to 20)
• To connect a single-wire cable, just strip the cover off the C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
following figure.)
D
FX3G-2AD-BD

To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single-wire directly or use a ferrule with insulation sleeve. E
FX3U-4DA
cannot protrude. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
9mm
(0.35")
the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable while (Crimp area) G
FX3G-1DA-BD
(0.1")
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
3. Tool
The head
straight.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
Note:
-ADP
<Reference> J
Manufacturer Model
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
D-13
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 3.3 Analog Input Line

If current input selected: 2AD-BD

Terminal
block
*1 110kΩ ch
V +
*2 250Ω
I +
88.7kΩ
Class-D
grounding
*1 110kΩ ch
V +
250Ω
I + 88.7kΩ
Class-D
grounding
VI-
*3
V +, I +, ch : represents the channel number.
*3. Make sure to short-circuit the "V+" and "VI-" terminals when ch is not used.
3.4 Grounding
figure.



D-14
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data
Common Items
4. Programming
This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the 2AD-BD. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3S/FX3G Series PLC.
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
specified.
3) In the FX3G Series PLC (40-point or 60-point type), special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data
registers (10 points) are assigned to each analog expansion board, board A and B connected to option
connector 1 and 2 respectively, in that order.
In the FX3G Series PLC (14-point or 24-point type) and FX3S Series PLC, special auxiliary relays (10
points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
• FX3S Series PLC
FX3S Series PLC
Sequence Program
E
FX3U-4DA
M8260 to M8269
Special data register:
D8260 to D8269
Option connector
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
A/D
FX3G-2AD-BD
• FX3G Series PLC G
FX3G-1DA-BD
FX3G Series PLC
Sequence Program
Special auxiliary relays: Special auxiliary relays:

H
FX3U-3A-ADP
M8260 to M8269 M8270 to M8279

Special data register: Special data register:
D8260 to D8269 D8270 to D8279
Option connector 1 Option connector 2
A/D
FX3G-2AD-BD
A/D
FX3G-2AD-BD
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
Board A Board B*1
The analog expansion board connected to option connector 1 is regarded as the "board A", and the analog
-ADP
expansion board connected to option connector 2 is regarded as the "board B".

*1. Board B is not available in the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-15
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices

If the 2AD-BD is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table:
• FX3S Series PLC
R: Read / W: Write
Special device Device number Description Attribute Reference
Special auxiliary Section 4.3
relay
Section 4.4
D8262
D8263
Averaging time for channel-1 (Setting
D8264 R/W
Special data range: 1 to 4095)
Section 4.5
register Averaging time for channel-2 (Setting
D8265 R/W
range: 1 to 4095)
D8266
D8267
• FX3G Series PLC

R: Read / W: Write
Device number
Special device Description Attribute Reference
Board A Board B
Section 4.3
Special auxiliary M8261 M8271 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R/W
relay M8262 to M8272 to
M8269 M8279
Section 4.4
D8262 D8272
D8263 D8273
Averaging time for channel-1 (Setting
D8264 D8274 R/W
Special data range: 1 to 4095)
Section 4.5
register Averaging time for channel-2 (Setting
D8265 D8275 R/W
range: 1 to 4095)
D8266 D8276
D8267 D8277
D8268 D8278 Error status R/W Section 4.6
D-16
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.3 Switching of Input Mode
A
Common Items
Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the input mode of 2AD-BD between the current input mode
and the voltage input mode. To switch the input mode, use the following special auxiliary relays:
• FX3S Series PLC
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
M8260 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF: Voltage input
M8261 Switches the input mode of channel 2 ON: Current input
• FX3G Series PLC

Board A Board B
Description C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
M8260 M8270 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF: Voltage input
M8261 M8271 Switches the input mode of channel 2 ON: Current input
1. Program Example (For FX3G Series PLC)

1) To switch the input mode of channel 1 2) To switch the input mode of channel 2 D
of the board A to the voltage input mode: of the board A to the current input mode:
FX3G-2AD-BD
M8001 M8000
M8260 M8261
E
4.4 Input Data
FX3U-4DA
The data converted by the 2AD-BD will be stored in the special data registers.
• FX3S Series PLC F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
• FX3G Series PLC

Special data register G
Description
FX3G-1DA-BD
Board A Board B
time) will be stored in the above data registers as the input data. H
FX3U-3A-ADP

programming tool.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
M8000
FNC 12 Stores the channel-1 input data
D8260 D100 of the board A in the D100.
Normally MOV
-ADP
ON
FNC 12
MOV
D8261 D101
of the board A in the D101. J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-17
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.5 Averaging Time
4.5 Averaging Time

Initial value: K1
If the averaging time is set for the 2AD-BD, the average data will be stored as the input data. The averaging
• FX3S Series PLC
• FX3G Series PLC

Description
Board A Board B


FNC 12 K1 D8264 channel-1 of the board A
MOV to 1.
Normally
ON
FNC 12 K5 D8265 channel-2 of the board A
MOV to 5.
D-18
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.6 Error Status
A
4.6 Error Status
Common Items
If an error is detected in the 2AD-BD, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data
register.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• FX3G Series PLC

Description C
Board A Board B
FX3U-4AD-ADP
→ For a detailed description of the error status, refer to Section 6.6. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b6 2AD-BD hardware error
b1 Channel-2 over-scale detection b7 2AD-BD communication data error
b2 Unused b8 Channel-1 under-scale detection*1
E
FX3U-4DA
b4 EEPROM error b10 to b15 Unused
b5 Averaging time setting error - -
*1. Only available for FX3S PLC.

The under-scale detection function is valid only for current input mode. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
If a 2AD-BD hardware error (b6) or 2AD-BD communication data error (b7) is detected, it is necessary to clear
the error status with a program at the next power-on of the PLC.
For this reason, be sure to create the following program:
• For FX3G Series PLC
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
M8000
FNC 12 D8268 K4M0
Normally ON MOV
M8002
Error status of board A
RST M6 b6 = OFF (2AD-BD hardware error)
Initial pulse H
FX3U-3A-ADP
RST M7 Error status of board A

b7 = OFF (2AD-BD communication data error)
FNC 12
K4M0 D8268
MOV
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-19
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.6 Error Status
M8000
FNC 12
D8268 K4M0
MOV
Normally
ON
M0
the board A.
M1
the board A.
M4
Y004 EEPROM error in board A.
M5
board A.
M6
Y006 2AD-BD hardware error in board A.
M7
Y007 2AD-BD communication data error in
board A.
D-20
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.7 Model Code
A
4.7 Model Code
Common Items
Initial value: K3
When the 2AD-BD is connected, model code "3" is stored in the corresponding special data register.
• FX3S Series PLC
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
D8269 Model code
• FX3G Series PLC

Description
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Board A Board B
Use the special data registers above to check whether a 2AD-BD is connected or not.
D
FNC224 Checks the model code of the
FX3G-2AD-BD
D8269 K3 Y007
LD= board A

Create the following basic program example to read out analog conversion (A/D conversion) data.
E
FX3U-4DA
The following program will set the board A to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode, and
will store the converted A/D value of channel-1 data into D100 and that of channel-2 data into D101.
M8001 Sets the input mode of the channel 1
M8260 to the voltage input mode
(0 V to 10 V).
F
Normally
FX3U-4DA-ADP
OFF
M8000 Sets the input mode of the channel 2
M8261 to the current input mode
ON
M8000 G
FNC 12 D8268 K4M0
FX3G-1DA-BD
Normally MOV
ON
M8002
Initial
pulse H
FX3U-3A-ADP
FNC 12 K4M0 D8268

MOV
M8000
K5 D8264
Normally MOV for channel-1 data.
I
ON
FX3U-4AD-PT

MOV
M8000
FNC 12 Stores the A/D converted
-ADP
D8260 D100
ON
FNC 12
MOV
D8261 D101 Stores the A/D converted J
channel-2 digital data into D101.
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-21
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics
5. Changing of Input Characteristics

The input characteristics can be changed using sequence programs in FX3S/FX3G Series PLCs.

This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital output range of 400 to 2000
(when the voltage input is 1 to 5 V) to the digital output range of 0 to 10000.
Digital output
4000 10000
Digital output to
be calculated
(D110)
2000
400
0 X-axis
1V 5V 10V 0 400(1V) 2000(5V)
Analog input
by A/D conversion
2. Example of program (For FX3G Series PLC)

For example, create the following program to change the digital input data of the board A:
M8001
Normally OFF voltage input mode (0 V to 10 V).
M8000 FNC 12 D8268 K4M0
Normally ON MOV
M8002
RST M6 Error status : b6=OFF
Initial pulse
RST M7 Error status : b7=OFF
FNC 12 K4M0 D8268

MOV
M8000
FNC 12 Sets the averaging scaling to "1" for
K1 D8264
Normally ON MOV the channel-1 data.
M8000 FNC 12
D8260 D110
Normally ON MOV

D110 K400 D110 K2000 M10
M10 FNC 21
D110 K400 D111
SUB
FNC 22 Calculation for changing input

D111 K10000 D112 characteristics.
MUL
FNC 23
D112 K1600 D100
DDIV
D-22
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 6.1 PLC Version Number Check
Common Items
6. Troubleshooting
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• Installation
• Wiring
• Special devices
• Programs C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
• Error status

• Any version (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3S Series are compatible. D
• Check the version number of the FX3G Series PLC. The version number should be 1.10 or later.
FX3G-2AD-BD
6.2 Checking Installation

E
Confirm that the 2AD-BD is attached correctly to the main unit. Confirm also that the POW indicator lamp of
FX3U-4DA
the 2AD-BD is lit correctly.
For installation details, refer to the following manual.
→ Refer to FX3S Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
→ Refer to FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
F
6.3 Wiring Check
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Use 2-core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog
input line from other power lines or inductive lines.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
I+terminal (: channel number) of the channel. If the line is not shortcircuited, data will not be converted
→ For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. H
FX3U-3A-ADP

Check whether the special devices for the 2AD-BD are being used correctly:
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode. Turn on the device to set the input mode
2. Input data
-ADP
selected depending on the connecting position and the channel. J
3. Averaging time
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-23
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 6.5 Program Check
4. Error status
Check that no error is detected in the 2AD-BD.
6.5 Program Check


using the program.


If an error occurs in the 2AD-BD, the corresponding bit will turn on.
next time the power of the PLC is cycled.

b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b6 2AD-BD hardware error
b1 Channel-2 over-scale detection b7 2AD-BD communication data error
*1. Only available for FX3S PLC.

1. Over-scale detection (b0, b1)

Voltage input mode: The input voltage value is over the specified upper limit of 10.2 V.
Current input mode: The input current value is over the specified upper limit of 20.32 mA.
2) Remedy

2) Remedy

2) Remedy
D-24
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 6.6 Error Status Check
A
4. 2AD-BD hardware error (b6)
Common Items
The 2AD-BD is not operating properly.
2) Remedy
Check that the 2AD-BD is correctly connected to the PLC.
If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric B
representative.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
5. 2AD-BD communication data error (b7)
A communication error is detected between the 2AD-BD and the PLC.
2) Remedy C
Check that the 2AD-BD is correctly connected to the PLC.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
representative.
6. Under-scale detection (b8, b9)

1) Description of error D
The input analog value (current value) is below the specified lower limit.
FX3G-2AD-BD
2) Remedy
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
D-25
FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 6.6 Error Status Check
MEMO
D-26
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output)
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
E. FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) D
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4DA special extension
block (4-channel analog output) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the I
FX3U-4AD-PT
unit.
it to the end user.
-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
E-1
E-2
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 1.1 Outline of Functions
Common Items
1. Outline
This chapter outlines the FX3U-4DA. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4DA is an analog special function block which is connectable to the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series
PLC to convert 4-channel digital signal from the PLC to analog signal (voltage/current).
C
1) Up to 8*1 units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
(including the other special function blocks).
2) Each channel has either voltage output or current output specification.
3) The block converts the digital values stored in the FX3U-4DA buffer memory (BFM) in FX3U-4DA to
analog signals (voltage/current).
4) A predetermined output pattern is set as data table, and analog signal can be output according to the
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
data table.
Point and section to be

System referred to
Up to 8*1 units connect to the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

(including other types of special function blocks)
 Number of connectable units
E
FX3U-4DA
To check the connectable PLC

  model number, refer to
FX3U -4DA
24V
FX3U -4DA
24V
Section 1.3. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
D/A D/A
FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC Analog data

Inverter etc.
 wiring, refer to Chapter 3.
FX3G-1DA-BD
 analog data output programs,
refer to Chapter 4, 7, and 8.
Program
Transmission direction Buffer memory  the buffer memory, refer to
Section 5.3, and Section 5.4.
 FROM (FNC 78)
 TO (FNC 79) BFM#0
To use FROM/TO instruction
H

 or to directly specify the BFM,

FX3U-3A-ADP
 BFM direct BFM#3098 refer to Section 5.2.

specification (U\G)*2
Refer to the system configuration shown in the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC User's Manual - Hardware Edition to
check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system.
*1. Up to 7 units can be connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC. I
FX3U-4AD-PT
*2. This function is only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-3
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting to use the FX3U-4DA, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3U-4DA
Refer to Chapter 1.

 Version number of compatible PLC
 Version number of compatible
programming tool
Refer to Chapter 2.
Check specifications Specifications:

 Operation environment
Refer to the common  Performance specifications
pages.  Output characteristics

(Refer to the analog control common
pages.)
Refer to Chapter 3.  Selection of units
Wiring Wiring:
 Power supply line
 Analog output line
Refer to Chapter 4.
Analog data output (test program) Output mode specification:

 Output mode specification program for
channel 1 to 4
Refer to Chapter 5.
Buffer memory (BFM) check Buffer memory:

 Buffer memory read/write method
 List of buffer memories
 Details of buffer memory
Refer to Chapter 6.
When the table output function is used Table output function:

 Preparation of data table
 Transfer of data table to buffer memory
 Execution of table output function
Refer to Chapter 7.
Adjustment of output characteristics Adjustment of output characteristics:

 Output characteristics change procedure
Refer to Chapter 8.
Program edit Program edit:

 Basic program
 Convenient function program
If the error status data or the output analog value

is abnormal, refer to Chapter 9 "Troubleshooting."
E-4
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number
A
Common Items
FX3U-4DA is compatible with the following PLC.
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
1. Version check
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001 or D8101. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP

product.
→ For a detailed description of how to check the manufacturer's serial number, D
FX3G-2AD-BD
The following programming tools and versions are applicable for the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series.
E
FX3U-4DA
1. English versions
FX3G PLC
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.08J or later G
FX3G-1DA-BD
FX3G PLC H
FX3U-3A-ADP

FX3GC PLC
- I
FX3U-4AD-PT
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

-ADP

J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
Point
-ADP
E-5
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 2.1 Generic Specifications
2. Specifications
This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the FX3U-4DA.
Item Specifications
Relative
humidity
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
DIN Rail Mounting
80 min, each)
10 to 57 - 0.075
Direct Mounting*2
57 to 150 9.8 -
Shock
resistance*1
Dielectric
withstand 500 V AC, for 1 min
voltage Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal
Grounding
Working
environment
Working
altitude < 2000 m*4

*2. When this block is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, the direct mounting method cannot be
used.
*3.

→ For a detailed description of grounding, refer to Section 3.5.

*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the FX3U-4DA, as it may
malfunction.
E-6
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications
A
Common Items
Item Specifications
D/A conversion 24 V DC ±10 %, 160 mA B
circuit drive power (It is necessary to supply 24 V DC from the terminal block.)
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
5 V DC, 120 mA
CPU drive power (Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit, it is not necessary to supply power
externally.)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Item
Specifications
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Analog output -10 V to +10 V DC 0 mA to 20 mA DC, 4 mA to 20 mA DC
range (External load: 1 kΩ to 1 MΩ) (External load: 500 Ω or less)
Offset*1 -10 V to +9 V*2 0 mA to 17 mA*3
Gain*1 -9 V to +10 V*2 3 mA to 30 mA*3
E
Digital input With sign, 16bits, binary 15bits, binary
FX3U-4DA
Resolution 0.32 mV (20 V / 64,000) 0.63 μA (20 mA / 32,000)
• Ambient temperature: 25 °C±5 °C • Ambient temperature: 25 °C±5 °C
±0.3 % (±60 mV) for 20 V full scale ±0.3 % (±60 μA) for 20 mA full scale
Overall accuracy*4
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 55 °C • Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 55 °C
±0.5 % (±100 mV) for 20 V full scale ±0.5 % (±100 μA) for 20 mA full scale F
Time required for
FX3U-4DA-ADP
1 ms (The number of selected channels will not affect this value.)
D/A conversion
Insulation method • The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the analog output area from the power supply unit.
Number of I/O
G
points occupied
FX3G-1DA-BD
*1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. In output mode 1 or 4, however, the
1 V ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 10 V
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
3 mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 30 mA
*4. When the external load is less than 30 kΩ, please use the output corrective function by load resistance.
→ For a detailed description of the output corrective function by load resistance,
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-7
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 2.4 Output Mode (Characteristics) BFM#0
2.4 Output Mode (Characteristics) BFM#0

For the FX3U-4DA, there are two types of output characteristics: voltage (-10 to +10 V) and current (0 to
20 mA, 4 to 20 mA) output characteristics. The output characteristics depend on the set output mode as
described below.
1. Voltage output characteristics [-10 to +10 V] (Output mode: 0, 1)

Set output mode: 1
Set output mode: 0
Output type: Voltage output
Output type: Voltage output
(Specification of analog value mV)
Analog output range: -10 to +10 V
Analog output range: -10 to +10 V
Digital input range: -32000 to +32000
Digital input range: -10000 to +10000
Offset/gain adjustment: Possible
Output voltage (V) Output voltage (V)

10.2 10.2
Digital 10 Digital 10
value value
32640
10200
-32000 0 -10000 0
-32640
-10200
32000 10000
-10 -10
-10.2 -10.2
2. Current output characteristics [0 to 20 mA] (Output mode: 2, 4)

Set output mode: 4
Set output mode: 2
Output type: Current output
(Specification of analog value μA)
Analog output range: 0 to 20 mA
Digital input range: 0 to 32000
Current Current
output (mA) output (mA)
20.4 20.4
20 20
0 32000 32640 0 20000 20400

Digital value Digital value
3. Current Output characteristics [4 to 20 mA] (Output mode: 3)

Set output mode: 3
Current
output (mA)
20.32
20
4
0 32000 32640
Digital value
E-8
Common Items
3. Wiring
This chapter describes wiring of the FX3U-4DA. B
Observe the following cautions wiring the FX3U-4DA.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
FX3U-4AD-ADP
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3U-4DA
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-9
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 3.1 Terminal Layout
3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of FX3U-4DA are arranged as follows:
Signal Application
24+
24 V DC power supply
24-
Ground terminal
V+
VI- Channel-1 analog output
I+
 Do not connect any lines.
V+
I+
V+
I+
V+
I+
3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque

The FX3U-4DA terminal block is designed for M3 screws.
The end disposal of the cable shown below.
Tighten the terminal to a torque of 0.5 to 0.8 N•m.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
• When one wire is connected to one terminal
φ3.2 (0.13") Terminal Crimp
6.2 mm (0.24") screw terminal
or less
φ3.2 (0.13")
or less
• When two wires are connected to one terminal

3.2 (0.13")
6.2 mm (0.24") Terminal Crimp
or less screw terminal
6.3 mm (0.25")
or more
3.2 (0.13")
or less
6.3 mm (0.25")
or more
E-10
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 3.3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals
A
3.3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals
Common Items
3.3.1 Examples of Power Supply Circuit
Below are examples of circuits for using the 24 V DC service power supply of the FX3G/FX3U Series PLC. B
1) Sink input [- common] wiring
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
AC power
100 to 240 V
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Class-D
grounding
L N S/S 0V 24V 24+ 24-
+15V
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
(main unit) -15V
FX3U-4DA
Connect the "S/S" terminal of the main unit to the "24V" terminal. E
FX3U-4DA
2) Source input [+ common] wiring
AC power
100 to 240 V F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Class-D
grounding
L N S/S 0V 24V 24+ 24-
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
+15V

(main unit) -15V H
FX3U-4DA
FX3U-3A-ADP
3.3.2 Cautions regarding wiring to the power supply terminals I

FX3U-4AD-PT
• Ground the " " terminal and " " terminal to the Class - D grounding line (100 Ω or less) together
with the ground terminal of the main unit.
-ADP
• For the timing of power-on/off when using an external power supply, see the following manual of the
connected PLC.
→ Refer to the FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
→ Refer to the FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.

-ADP
E-11
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 3.4 Analog Output Wiring
3.4 Analog Output Wiring

The analog output mode, "voltage output "or "current output", can be selected for each channel.
External power supply FX3U-4DA

wiring
24V DC 24+ +15V

*1 24- -15V
Class-D grounding
*2
If voltage output is
selected
ch
Shield *3
V+
I+ ch
Class-D VI-
*4 grounding *5
If current output is
selected ch
Shield *3 V+
I+ ch
VI-
Class-D
grounding *5
ch :  represents the channel number.
*1. For FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (AC power type), the 24 V DC service power supply is also available.
*2. Do not connect any wires to the " • " terminal.
*3. Use a 2-core twisted shield wire for analog output wire, and separate it from other power lines or
inductive lines.
*4. If there is ripple or noise in the output voltage, connect a capacitor of approximately 0.1 to 0.47 μF
25 V in the vicinity of the signal receiving side.
*5. Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side.
3.5 Grounding
figure.


• The grounding wire size should be AWG14 (2mm2).

E-12
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Output
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Analog Output Procedures
Common Items
4. Analog Output
This chapter describes the minimum programming necessary for analog output by the FX3U-4DA. B
Follow the procedure below to confirm that correct analog values can be output.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
4.1 Analog Output Procedures
1 Unit number check

C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units/blocks starting from the left.
When the units/blocks are connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC, the unit numbers from 1 to 7
are assigned. Check the unit number assigned to the FX3U-4DA.
Unit Unit Unit D

FX3G-2AD-BD
Main unit Input/output Special Special Input/output Special
(FX3U Series extension function block function block extension function unit
PLC) block block
E
FX3U-4DA
2 Output mode (BFM#0) setting
Depending on the analog signal generator to be connected, set the output mode (BFM#0) for each
channel.
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Use hexadecimal numbers for output mode setting. Set the corresponding channel digit to the
output mode setting value specified in the following table:
H G
ch4 ch1
FX3G-1DA-BD
ch3 ch2
Setting
Output mode Analog output range Digital input range
value
0 Voltage output mode -10 V to +10 V -32000 to +32000 H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Voltage output
1 -10 V to +10 V -10000 to +10000
analog value mV specification mode
2 Current output mode 0 mA to 20 mA 0 to 32000
4
Current output
0 mA to 20 mA 0 to 20000
I
analog value μA specification mode
FX3U-4AD-PT
F Channel not used

→ For a detailed description of the standard output characteristics, refer to Section 2.4.
-ADP
→ For a detailed description of the output mode (BFM#0), refer to Subsection 5.4.1.
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-13
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Output
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Analog Output Procedures
3 Creation of sequence program

Create the program as follows to output analog signals.
• While referring to step 2, set the output mode "H****".
• While referring to step 1, set the unit number in 
- Program Example (For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs)*1
Output mode (step 2)

Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 12 H**** U\G0 Specify the output mode (BFM#0) for channels
MOV P 1 to 4.
RUN monitor
M8000
T0 K50
Data to be output to channel 1 is written in D0.

Data to be output to channel 2 is written in D1. Data to be output to channels 1 to 4 are stored in
Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2. D0 to D3.
Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3.
T0
FNC 15 Data (BFM#1 to 4) to be output to channels 1
D0 U\G1 K4 to 4 are transferred from D0 to D3.
BMOV
*1. Use the FROM and TO instructions in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
4 Transfer of sequence program and analog output signal check

1) Transfer the sequence program, and start the PLC.
2) Check that analog signals appropriate to the set output data are output.
→ If analog signals are not output correctly, refer to Chapter 9 "Troubleshooting".
E-14
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory
Common Items
5. Buffer Memory (BFM)
This chapter describes the buffer memory incorporated in FX3U-4DA. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory
1. Assignment of unit numbers

Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units/blocks starting from the left one. C
When the units/blocks are connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC, unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
When connected to the FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC
Unit Unit Unit
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Input/output Special Special Input/output Special
Main unit extension function block function block extension function unit
block block
E
When connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC
FX3U-4DA
Unit number: 0
(Incorporated Unit Unit Unit
CC-Link/LT) number: 1 number: 2 number: 3
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
(FX3UC-32MT extension Special Special extension Special
-LT(-2)) block function block function block block function unit
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-15
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory
2. Outline of buffer memory

The digital values set in FX3U-4DA will be converted to analog signals.
To switch the output mode between voltage output and current output, or to adjust the offset or gain, numeric
data will be sent from the main unit and written/set in the FX3U-4DA buffer memory.
To read/write data from/into the buffer memory of FX3U-4DA, the buffer memory can be directly specified
using FROM/TO instructions or an applied instruction. Using this function, sequence programs can be easily
created.
Main unit FX3U-4DA  BFM direct FX3U-4DA

specification*1
 TO instruction
Buffer
memory
 BFM direct  BFM direct
specification*1
specification*1
 TO instruction  FROM instruction
Sequence Buffer
program memory
Digital
 BFM direct Digital value
specification*1 value
 FROM D/A D/A
instruction conversion conversion
Analog data Analog data
Inverter, DC motor, etc.
*1. Since buffer memory direct specification (U\G) can directly specify the buffer memory in the
source or destination area of an applied instruction, programs can be created efficiently. (This function
is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.)
→ For a detailed description of buffer memory reading/writing, refer to Section 5.2.
→ For a detailed description of the buffer memory, refer to Section 5.4.
E-16
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method
A
5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method
Common Items
To read or write the buffer memory of FX3U-4DA, use FROM/TO instructions or the buffer memory direct
specification function*1.
To use the buffer memory direct specification function*1, however, it is necessary to adopt the software
compatible with the PLC. B
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
→ For a detailed description of the software compatible with the PLC,
5.2.1 Buffer memory direct specification (FX3U/FX3UC PLC only)

When directly specifying the buffer memory, specify the following device in the source or destination area of C
the applied instruction as follows:
FX3U-4AD-ADP
U\G Enter a numeric value in 
Unit number (0 to 7) Buffer memory number (0 to 32766)
1. Example 1 D
If the following program is created, data in buffer memory (BFM#10) of unit 1 will be multiplied by the data
FX3G-2AD-BD
(K10), and then the multiplication result will be output to the data registers (D10, D11).
READ command
FNC 22 U1\G10 K10 D10
MUL
Unit number
Multiplication result E
FX3U-4DA
Buffer memory number Multiplier
2. Example 2
If the following program is created, the value in the data register (D20) is added to K10 and written to buffer
memory (BFM#6) of unit 1.
WRITE command
FNC 20
F
D20 K10 U1\G6
FX3U-4DA-ADP
ADD
Addition Unit number
result Buffer memory number
Augend Addend
5.2.2 FROM/TO instruction (FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC) G
FX3G-1DA-BD
1. FROM instruction (Reading out BFM data to PLC)
Use FROM instruction to read out the data from the buffer memory.
READ command
FNC 78 K1 K10 D10 K1 H
FROM
FX3U-3A-ADP
Number of transfer
Buffer memory number Transfer-to register
If the above program is created, 1 point of data will be read out from the buffer memory BFM#10 of unit No.1
to the data register (D10). I
2. TO instruction (Writing PLC data into BFM)
FX3U-4AD-PT
Use the TO instruction to write data to a buffer memory.

-ADP
WRITE command
FNC 79 K1 K0 H3300 K1
TO J
Number of transfer
FX3U-4AD-PTW

Buffer memory number Transfer source
If the above program is created, 1 point of data (H3300) will be written to buffer memory (BFM#0) of unit No.1.
-ADP
E-17
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM)
5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM)

FX3U-4DA incorporates the following buffer memories.
→ For a detailed description of the buffer memory, refer to Section 5.4 and subsequent sections.
#0*1 Output mode setting for channels 1 to 4 *2 H0000 at delivery
mal 5.4.1
#1 Channel 1 output data K0 Decimal
#2 Channel 2 output data Depending on the K0 Decimal Subsection
#3 Channel 3 output data mode used K0 Decimal 5.4.2
#4 Channel 4 output data K0 Decimal

#5*1 Output setting upon PLC stop *3 H0000
mal 5.4.3
#6 Output status - H0000
mal 5.4.4
#7, #8 Not used - - - -
Command to write offset/gain setting value of Hexadeci- Subsection
#9 *4 H0000
channels 1 to 4 mal 5.4.5
#10*1 Channel-1 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) Decimal
#11*1 Channel-2 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) Depending on the Depending on Decimal Subsection
mode used the mode used 5.4.6

*1 Channel-1 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) Decimal
#14
*1 Channel-2 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) Decimal
#15 Depending on the Depending on Subsection
*1 Channel-3 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) mode used the mode used Decimal 5.4.6
#16
#17*1 Channel-4 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) Decimal

#18 Not used - - - -
To permit data
change: K3030
Subsection
#19*1 Setting change prohibition To disable data K3030 at delivery Decimal
5.4.7
change: Value
other than K3030
Initialization function:
Set "K1" in this buffer memory to perform Subsection
#20 K0 or K1 K0 Decimal
initialization. At the completion of initialization, 5.4.8
the "K0" will be automatically set.
#21 to #27 Not used - - - -
Disconnection detection status (Valid only in Hexadeci- Subsection
#28 - H0000
current mode selection) mal 5.4.9
#29 Error status - H0000
mal 5.4.10
Subsection
#30 Model code K3030 - K3030 Decimal
5.4.11
#31 Not used - - - -
*1. If power failure occurs, the EEPROM will retain the data.
*2. Specify the output mode of each channel setting one of hex code 0 to 4 and F in each digit.
*3. Specify the data to be output from each channel upon PLC stop setting one of hex code 0 to 2 in each
digit.
*4. Use b0 to b3.
E-18
Common Items
Data to be output from channel 1 upon PLC stop Depending on the
#32*1 (Valid only if BFM#5 = H2) mode used
K0 Decimal
#33*1
K0 Decimal B
(Valid only if BFM#5 = H2) mode used Subsection
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Data to be output from channel 3 upon PLC stop Depending on the 5.4.12
#34*1 (Valid only if BFM#5 = H2) mode used
K0 Decimal

#35*1 (Valid only if BFM#5 = H2) mode used
K0 Decimal
#36, #37 Not used - - - -

C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
#38 Upper/lower limit function setting *2 H0000
mal 5.4.13
#39 Upper/lower limit function status - H0000
mal 5.4.14
#40 Clear of upper/lower limit function status *3 H0000
#41 Channel-1 lower limit of upper/lower limit function K-32640

mal
Decimal
5.4.15
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
#42 Channel-2 lower limit of upper/lower limit function Depending on the K-32640 Decimal Subsection
#43 Channel-3 lower limit of upper/lower limit function mode used K-32640 Decimal 5.4.16
#44 Channel-4 lower limit of upper/lower limit function K-32640 Decimal

#45 Channel-1 upper limit of upper/lower limit function K32640 Decimal
#46 Channel-2 upper limit of upper/lower limit function Depending on the K32640 Decimal Subsection
E
FX3U-4DA
#47 Channel-3 upper limit of upper/lower limit function mode used K32640 Decimal 5.4.16
#48 Channel-4 upper limit of upper/lower limit function K32640 Decimal
#49 Not used - - - -
Corrective function setting by load resistance Hexadeci- Subsection
#50*1 *4 H0000
(Valid only in voltage output mode) mal 5.4.17
F
#51*1 Load resistance value for channel 1 (Unit: Ω) K1000 to K30000 K30000 Decimal
FX3U-4DA-ADP
#52*1 Load resistance value for channel 2 (Unit: Ω) K1000 to K30000 K30000 Decimal Subsection
5.4.17
#55 to #59 Not used - - - - G
Subsection
FX3G-1DA-BD
#60*1 Status automatic transfer function setting *5 K0 Decimal
5.4.18
Error status data (BFM#29) automatic transfer-
Subsection
#61*1 to data register specification (Valid if b0 of K200 Decimal
5.4.19
K0 to 7999
#62 *1
Upper/lower limit function status data (BFM#39)
automatic transfer-to data register specification
(BFM#61, #62 and
K201 Decimal
Subsection H
#63 must have 5.4.20
FX3U-3A-ADP

different values.)
Disconnection detection status data (BFM#28)
Subsection
#63*1 automatic transfer-to data register specification K202 Decimal
5.4.21
#64 to #79 Not used - - - -
*1. If power failure occurs, the EEPROM will retain the data.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
*2. Specify the use of the upper/lower limit function for each channel setting one of hex code 0 to 2 in
each digit.
*3. Use b0 to b1.
-ADP
*4. Specify the use of the corrective function by load resistance for each channel setting a hex code 0 or
1 in each digit. J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
*5. Use b0 to b2.

-ADP
E-19
Hexadeci-
#80 Start/stop of table output function *1 H0000
mal
#81 Channel-1 output pattern K1 to K10 K1 Decimal
Number of times of output execution of table
#85 K0 to K32767 K0 Decimal
from channel 1
Number of times of output execution of table Chapter 6
from channel 2
from channel 3
from channel 4
Hexadeci-
#89 Output completion flag of table output function - H0000
mal
#90 Table output error code - K0 Decimal
#91 Table output error occurrence number - K0 Decimal
#92 to #97 Not used - - - -
#98 Head device number in data table K0 to K32767 K1000 Decimal
Hexadeci-
#99 Data table transfer command *2 H0000 Chapter 6
mal
#100 to #398 Data table in pattern 1 - K0 Decimal
#399 Not used - - - -
#400 to #698 Data table in pattern 2 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6
#699 Not used - - - -
#700 to #998 Data table in pattern 3 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6
#999 Not used - - - -
#1000 to
Data table in pattern 4 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6
#1298
#1299 Not used - - - -
#1300 to
#1598
#1599 Not used - - - -
#1600 to
#1898
#1899 Not used - - - -
#1900 to
#2198
#2199 Not used - - - -
#2200 to
#2498
#2499 Not used - - - -
#2500 to
#2798
#2799 Not used - - - -
#2800 to
#3098
*1. Specify whether to start or stop the table output function for each channel setting a hex code 0 or 1
in each digit.
*2. Specify the data table transfer command and the register type setting 0 or 1 in the last two digits of
the hex code.
E-20
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details
A
5.4 Buffer Memory Details
Common Items
5.4.1 BFM#0: Output mode specification
Initial value (at delivery): H0000 B

FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Specify the output modes of channel 1 to 4.
4 hexadecimal digits are assigned to specify the output modes of the 4 channels.
Change the value of each digit to change the output mode of each channel. 0 to 4 and F can be set for each
digit.
C
H
FX3U-4AD-ADP
ch4 ch1
ch3 ch2
The different types of output modes are shown in the following table:
→ For a detailed description of output characteristics, refer to Section 2.4. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Set value
Output mode Analog output range Digital input range
[HEX]
0 Voltage output mode -10 V to +10 V -32000 to +32000
Voltage output
1*1 -10 V to +10 V -10000 to +10000
analog value mV specification mode E
FX3U-4DA
Current output
4*1 analog value μA specification mode
0 mA to 20 mA 0 to 20000
5 to E
F
Invalid (setting values unchanged)
Channel not used
- -
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
*1. The offset/gain values cannot be changed.
1. Cautions regarding output mode setting
• While the output mode is being changed, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the
output status (BFM#6).
At the completion of change of the output mode, the output status (BFM#6) will automatically change to G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H1111, and the output is restarted.
• It takes approximately 5 seconds to determine the output mode.
For this reason, after changing the output mode, be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more, and then write the
other data.
• When the output mode is changed, the settings in the following buffer memory are initialized according to
the new output mode. H
- BFM#5 (output setting upon PLC stop)*2
FX3U-3A-ADP
- BFM#10 to #13 (offset data)*3

- BFM#14 to #17 (gain data)*3
- BFM#28 (disconnection detection status)*4
- BFM#32 to #35 (output data upon PLC stop)*3 I
- BFM#38 (upper/lower limit function setting)*2
FX3U-4AD-PT
- BFM#41 to #44 (lower limit values of upper/lower limit function)*3

- BFM#45 to #48 (upper limit values of upper/lower limit function)*3
-ADP
- BFM#50 (Setting of output corrective function by load resistance)*2

*2 FX3U-4DA initializes the corresponding bit to the channel where the user has changed the output mode.
*3 FX3U-4DA initializes the corresponding buffer memory to the channel where the user has changed the J
output mode.
FX3U-4AD-PTW
*4 These settings are initialized only when the output mode is changed from current output mode
(mode 2, 3 or 4) to voltage output mode (mode 0 or 1).
-ADP
• HFFFF (use of no channels) cannot be set.
E-21

If data is written to BFM#0, #5, #10 to #17, #19, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will also be
written to the FX3U-4DA EEPROM.
Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories.
The maximum number of EEPROM rewrites is 10,000 times. Therefore, when creating a program, do not
frequently write data to the above buffer memories (BFM).
5.4.2 BFM#1 to #4: Output data
Initial value: K0
Input the digital values corresponding to the analog signals to be output in BFM#1 to #4.
BFM number Description

#1 Data to be output from channel 1
5.4.3 BFM#5: Output setting upon PLC stop

It is possible to set the output conditions from channel 1 to 4 when the PLC is in the stopped state.
H
ch4 ch1
ch3 ch2
Set value (HEX) Output conditions

0 The final value during running is held.
1 The offset signal is output.*1
2 The output data set in BFM#32 to #35 are output.*1
3 to F Invalid (setting values unchanged)
*1. The output conditions depend on the output mode (BFM#0).
1. Cautions regarding output conditions setting upon PLC stop

• While changing the setting values, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output
status (BFM#6).
At the completion of change, the output status (BFM#6) will automatically change to H1111, and output will
be restarted.
If data is set in BFM#0, #5, #10 to #17, #19, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will be written in
the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA.
The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000 times. Therefore, when creating a program, do
not frequently write data to the above buffer memories (BFM).
E-22
A
5.4.4 BFM#6: Output status
Common Items
The output status information of channel 1 to 4 is stored.

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
H
ch4 ch1
ch3 ch2
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Value status (HEX) Description
0 Output updating is stopped.*1
1 Under output updating
*1. The output conditions conform to the output setting upon PLC stop (BFM#5). D
FX3G-2AD-BD
1. Cautions regarding use of output status
• The output status setting is valid only if the PLC is running.
When the PLC is stopped, H0000 is automatically written.
• When the setting in any of the following buffer memory areas is changed, output updating is stopped.
H0000 is automatically written in BFM#6. E
- BFM#0 (Output mode setting)
FX3U-4DA
- BFM#5 (Output setting upon PLC stop)
- BFM#9 (Offset/gain setting value write command)
- BFM#19 (Setting change prohibition)
- BFM#20 (Initialization function)
- BFM#32 to #35 (Data to be output from each channel upon PLC stop) F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
- BFM#50 (Corrective function setting by load resistance)
- BFM#51 to #54 (Load resistance for each channel)
- BFM#60 (Status automatic transfer function Setting)
- BFM#61 (Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification)
- BFM#62 (Upper/lower limit function status with automatic transfer to specified data register) G
- BFM#63 (Disconnection detection status with automatic transfer to data register specification)
FX3G-1DA-BD
- BFM#99 (Data table transfer command)
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-23
5.4.5 BFM#9: Offset/gain setting value write command

Channel numbers are assigned to 4 lower bits of BFM#9. If one of those bits is turned on, the offset data
(BFM#10 to #13) and the gain data (BFM#14 to #17) of the corresponding channel will be written in the
internal memory (EEPROM). When written in the internal memory, the data will be valid.
1. Channel number assignment to each bit of BFM#9
Bit No. Description

b4 to b15 Not used
The WRITE command can be given to two or more channels at the same time. (Set "H000F" to write the data
of all the channels in the EEPROM.)
On completion of writing, "H0000" (b0 to b3: OFF) will be set automatically.
2. Cautions regarding giving offset/gain setting value write command

• While changing the setting, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status
(BFM#6).
At the completion of writing, the output status (BFM#6) will automatically change to H1111, and output will
be restarted.
• If the analog value specification mode (mode 1 or 4) is used, the offset/gain cannot be changed.
When other output mode has been set, it is possible to change to same characteristics as those in the
output mode 1 or 4.
• If the write command is not executed, the offset and gain data will not be stored in the EEPROM.
• When b1 of the error status (BFM#29) is set to ON, the offset and gain data will not be stored in the
EEPROM.
→ For a detailed description of offset and gain setting, refer to Subsection 5.4.6.
E-24
A
5.4.6 BFM#10 to #13: Offset data/BFM#14 to #17: Gain data
Common Items
Setting range: See below
Initial value: See below
If the output mode is specified in BFM#0, the initial value of the offset data and gain data of each channel will
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
be automatically stored.
The initial offset data and the gain data are set for each mode as shown in the following table:
• Offset data: Analog output value when the output data in BFM#1 to #4 are 0 (reference offset value)
• Gain data: Analog output value when the output data in BFM#1 to #4 are the reference gain values (The
reference gain value depends on the set output mode.) C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
1. Reference offset/gain value and initial value set
Offset (channels 1 to 4: Gain (channels 1 to 4:
Output mode (BFM#0)
BFM#10 to #13) BFM#14 to #17)
Reference Reference
Set value Description Initial value Initial value
value value D
Voltage output
FX3G-2AD-BD
0 0 0 mV 16000 5000 mV
(-10 V to +10 V: -32000 to +32000)
Voltage output Analog value mV 0 0 mV 5000 5000 mV
1 specification mode (Data change (Data change (Data change (Data change
(-10 V to +10 V: -10000 to +10000) impossible) impossible) impossible) impossible)
2
Current output
0 0 μA 16000 10000 μA E
(0 mA to 20 mA: 0 to 32000)
FX3U-4DA
Current output
3 0 4000 μA 16000 12000 μA
(4 mA to 20 mA: 0 to 32000)
Current output Analog value μA 0 0 μA 10000 10000 μA
4 specification mode (Data change (Data change (Data change (Data change
(0 mA to 20 mA: 0 to 20000) impossible) impossible) impossible) impossible) F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
2. Offset/gain data change
Set offset data and gain data to change the output characteristics.
The offset and gain data can be set for each channel. If the voltage output mode is set, write the offset and
gain data in mV. If the current output mode is set, write the offset and gain data in μA.
To change the offset or gain data, execute the offset/gain setting value write command (BFM#9).
The setting range is shown in the following table. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Voltage output (mV) Current output (μA)
Offset data -10000 to +9000*1 0 to 17000*2
Gain data -9000 to +10000*1 3000 to 30000*2
*1. The offset and gain values should meet the following conditions:
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
1000 ≤ Gain value - Offset value ≤ 10000

*2. The offset and gain values should meet the following conditions:
3000 ≤ Gain value - Offset value ≤ 30000
3. Cautions regarding offset/gain data change

• If the analog value specification mode (mode 1 or 4) is used, the offset/gain cannot be changed.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
• The offset and gain data should be set before the value write command BFM#9 is executed.
• The resolution cannot be increased by changing the output characteristics.
-ADP
• When the value specified as the output mode (BFM#0) is changed, the initial value of offset and gain data
in each output mode will be automatically written.
• Even if the output characteristics are changed, the actual valid output range will not be changed:
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-10 V to +10 V for the voltage output mode, and 0 mA to 20 mA in the current output mode.
→ For a detailed description of output characteristics change, refer to Chapter 7.
-ADP
E-25
5.4.7 BFM#19: Data change prohibition of setting change
Setting range: K3030 or other than K3030

Initial value: K3030
Setting in the following buffer memory areas is prohibited.

• BFM#0 (output mode setting Output mode setting)
• BFM#5 (output setting upon PLC stop)
• BFM#9 (offset/gain setting value write command)
• BFM#10 to #13 (offset data)
• BFM#14 to #17 (gain data)
• BFM#20 (initialization function)
• BFM#32 to #35 (data to be output upon PLC stop)
• BFM#38 (upper/lower limit function setting)
• BFM#41 to #48 (upper and lower limit values of upper/lower limit function)
• BFM#50 (corrective function setting by load resistance)
• BFM#51 to #54 (load resistance values)
• BFM#60 (status automatic transfer function setting)
• BFM#61 (Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification)
• BFM#62 (Upper/lower limit function status with automatic transfer to specified register specification)
• BFM#63 (Disconnection detection status with automatic transfer to specified data register specification)
Specify the following value as the setting change prohibition mode (BFM#19).

K3030 permits data change
Other than K3030 disables data change
1. Cautions regarding setting of the setting change prohibition mode

• While changing the setting value, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output
status (BFM#6).
At the completion of writing, the output status (BFM#6) will automatically change to H1111, and the output
will be restarted.
2. Cautions regarding EEPROM writing

Do not turn off power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories
The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000. Therefore, when creating a program, do not
frequently write data in the above buffer memories (BFM).
E-26
A
5.4.8 BFM#20: Initialization function (resetting to factory default status)
Common Items
Setting range: K0 or K1
Initial value: K0
When K1 is set in BFM#20, all functions and all buffer memory (BFM#0 to #3098) will be initialized to the B
default status.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
When BFM#20 is not K0 or K1, this function is invalid. (The settings will not be changed, and the functions will
not be initialized.)
1. Cautions regarding initialization function

• During initialization, output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status (BFM#6).
At the completion of initialization, the output status (BFM#6) will automatically change to H1111, and
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
output will be restarted.
• It takes approximately 5 seconds to initialize all the data. Do not set (write) data in the buffer memory
during this period.
• Priority is given to the setting of the value change prohibition mode (BFM#19).
• At the completion of initialization, the value of BFM#20 will automatically change to K0. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
5.4.9 BFM#28: Disconnection detection status (only in current output mode)
Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) E
When a wire-break is detected, the bit corresponding to the relevant channel will turn on.
FX3U-4DA
1. Assignment to each bit of BFM#28
Bit No. Description

b0 Wire-break in channel 1 F
b1 Wire-break in channel 2
FX3U-4DA-ADP
b4 to b15 Not used
2. Cautions regarding use of disconnection detection status G
FX3G-1DA-BD
• When any of b0 to b3 is turned on, b11 of the error status (BFM#29) is turned on.
• The disconnection detection status is valid only if the output mode (BFM#0) is the current output mode
(mode 2 to 4). In other output modes, each corresponding bit of BFM#28 stays off.
• The disconnection detection status data automatic transfer function is not supported when connected and
used with the FX5U or FX5UC CPU module. H
FX3U-3A-ADP
3. Disconnection detection status automatic transfer function (b2 of BFM#60)

If the disconnection detection status with automatic transfer-to data register is specified in BFM#63, the data
in BFM#28 can be transferred to the specified data register.
Only when wire-break is detected, data will be automatically transferred from FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this
reason, the PLC does not need the program for reading data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened.
→ For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function, refer to Subsection 5.4.18. I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-27
5.4.10 BFM#29: Error status

Error data is assigned each bit of BFM#29.

Bit No. Item Description
b0 Error detection If one of b1 to b11 is turned on, b0 will turn on.
Gain setting error: error in offset gain data or in EEPROM offset gain
b1 O/G error
setting
24 V power is not supplied properly.
Check the wiring condition or the supplied voltage.
FX3U-4DA may be defective.
b3 Hardware error
b4 - -
Error setting function for
The setting value of the function for output setting upon PLC stop
b5 output setting upon PLC
(BFM#5) is not set correctly. Correctly set the value.
stop
Upper/lower limit function The setting value of the upper/lower limit function (BFM#41 to #48) is not
b6
setting error set correctly. Correctly reset the value.
Error in corrective function
The setting value of the corrective function by load resistance
setting by load resistance
b7 (BFM#51 to #54) is not set correctly.
(Valid only in voltage output
Correctly set the value.
mode)
Table output function The setting value of the table output function is not set correctly.
b8
setting error Correctly set the value.
The setting value of the status automatic transfer function
Status automatic transfer
b9 (BFM#61 to #63) is not set correctly.
setting error
Correctly set the value.
b10 Over-scale The analog output is out of the specified range.
Disconnection detection
Wire-break has occurred. (The details are indicated by BFM#28.)
b11 (Valid only in current output
* The bit is turned on when BFM#28 is not 0.)
mode)
Setting data change
b12 Setting change is prohibited.
prohibited
b13 to b15 - -
2. Caution regarding error status

If the error cause is eliminated, the error bit will turn off.
The error status data automatic transfer function is not supported when connected and used with the FX5U or
FX5UC CPU module.
3. Error status data automatic transfer function (b0 of BFM#60)

If the error status with automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM#61, the data in BFM#29 can be
transferred to a specified data register.
Only when an error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this
→ For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function, refer to Subsection 5.4.18.
E-28
A
5.4.11 BFM#30: Model code
Common Items
Initial value (at delivery): K3030
K3030 (fixed value) is stored as the model code.
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
5.4.12 BFM#32 to #35: Data to be output upon PLC stop
Initial value: K0
To enable the output data set when the PLC stops, Set "2" for any digit in the output data (H0000) at PLC's C
stop. Set the BFM values as follows.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
BFM number Description
#32 Data in channel 1
#34 Data in channel 3 D
FX3G-2AD-BD
The setting range depends on the output mode.
Output mode [BFM#0] Setting range

0 -32640 to +32640 E
1 -10200 to +10200
FX3U-4DA
2, 3 0 to 32640
4 0 to 20400
F
1. Cautions regarding data output setting when PLC is in stop
FX3U-4DA-ADP
• While changing the settings, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status
(BFM#6).
After the completion of writing, the output status (BFM#6) will automatically change to H1111, and output
will be restarted.
• The analog values to be output depend on the output mode. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
• When a value out of any of the above ranges is set, b5 of the error status (BFM#29) is turned on.

If data is set in BFM#0, #5, #10 to #17, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will be written in the
EEPROM of FX3U-4DA.
Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories. H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-29
5.4.13 BFM#38: Upper/lower limit function setting

When any of the output data (BFM#1 to #4) becomes less than the lower limit (BFM#41 to #44) or more than
the upper limit (BFM#45 to #48), the relevant bit of the upper/lower limit function status (BFM#39) is turned
on.
The upper/lower limit function can be set valid or made invalid by writing a 4-digit hexadecimal number,
H, in BFM#38.
H
ch4 ch1
ch3 ch2

0 The upper/lower limit function is invalid.
1 The upper/lower limit function without output limitation is valid.*1
2 The upper/lower limit function with output limitation is valid.*2
Other than above values Invalid (setting values unchanged)
*1. When any value becomes less than the lower limit (BFM#41 to #44) or more than the upper limit
(BFM#45 to #48), the relevant bit of the upper/lower limit function status is turned on.
The value is output even if it exceeds

Analog value the upper limit.
Upper limit
Lower limit
The value is output even if it is
below the lower limit.
*2. When any value becomes less than the lower limit (BFM#41 to #44) or more than the upper limit
(BFM#45 to #48), the relevant bit of the upper/lower limit function status is turned on.
In this setting, analog values more than the upper limit and less than the lower limit are not output.
Analog value Values more than the upper limit are not
output.
Upper limit
Lower limit
Values less than the lower limit are
not output.
E-30
A
5.4.14 BFM#39: Upper/lower limit function status
Common Items
When any of the output data (BFM#1 to #4) is out of range between the lower limit and the upper limit
(BFM#41 to #48), the relevant bit is turned on. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Bit Description
b0 Data output from channel 1 < Lower limit (BFM#41)
b1 Data output from channel 1 > Upper limit (BFM#45) C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
b3 Data output from channel 2 > Upper limit (BFM#46)
b6 Data output from channel 4 < Lower limit (BFM#44) D
FX3G-2AD-BD
b8 to b15 Not used
2. Cautions regarding use of the upper/lower limit function status

• The ON bits of the upper/lower limit function status are latched after the output data has returned to the
specified ranges between the upper and lower limits.
E
FX3U-4DA
• The upper/lower limit function status can be reset by the following methods.
- Use the upper/lower limit function status reset function (BFM#40).
- Turn the power supply off then on.
• The upper/lower limit value automatic transfer function is not supported when connected and used with the
FX5U or FX5UC CPU module. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
3. Upper/lower limit automatic transfer function (b1 of BFM#60)
If the upper/lower limit automatic transfer data register is specified in BFM#62, the data in BFM#39 can be
transferred to a specified data register.
Only when an error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this
→ For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function, refer to Subsection 5.4.18.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
5.4.15 BFM#40: Clearance of upper/lower limit function status
Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) H
The flags can be reset by turning on the following bits of BFM#40.
FX3U-3A-ADP
Bit Description
b0 Clearance of lower limit status I
b1 Clearance of upper limit status
FX3U-4AD-PT
b2 to b15 Invalid
-ADP
2. Operation to be performed after resetting

At the completion of status reset, the bits of BFM#40 will automatically turn off.
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-31
5.4.16 BFM#41 to #44: Lower limit values of upper/lower limit function

BFM#45 to #48: Upper limit values of upper/lower limit function
Initial value: See below

When the upper/lower limit function has been made valid by the setting of BFM#38, set the upper and lower
limit values to be used.
The setting range depends on the output mode.
1. Setting range of upper and lower limits and initial values

Initial value
Output mode
Setting range Lower limit value Upper limit value
[BFM#0]
[BFM#41 to #44] [BFM#45 to 48]
0 -32640 to +32640 -32640 +32640
1 -10200 to +10200 -10200 +10200
2, 3 0 to +32640 0 +32640
4 0 to +20400 0 +20400
2. Cautions regarding upper and lower limit values setting

Check that the lower limit value is not equal to or more than the upper limit value.
If the lower limit value is equal to or more than the upper limit value, b6 of the error status (BFM#29) is turned
on.
E-32
A
5.4.17 BFM#50: Setting of output corrective function by load resistance
Common Items
(only in voltage output mode)/BFM#51 to #54: Load resistance values
Initial value: BFM#50: H0000, BFM#51 to #54: K30000

Numeric data type: BFM#50: Hexadecimal (H), BFM#51 to #54: Decimal (K)
The output characteristics of FX3U-4DA have been adjusted at 30 kΩ load resistance as a factory default.
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
When the load resistance is 1 kΩ, the output deviation is approx. -4.3 % to 20 V in full scale, whereas the
output deviation is approx. 0.15 % to 20 V in full scale when the load resistance is 1 MΩ. When the load
resistance is 30 kΩ or less (1 kΩ to 30 kΩ), the deviation of the output characteristics can be corrected by
specifying the output corrective function (BFM#50) and the load resistance values (BFM#51 to #54).
Analog value C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
The deviation of output characteristics is
corrected by the corrective function by load
+10V resistance.
-32000 D
32000 Digital value
FX3G-2AD-BD
: Output characteristics after correction
-10V : Output characteristics before correction
FX3U-4DA
1. Setting of output corrective function (BFM#50)
The corrective function by load resistance is valid or invalid by writing a 4-digit hexadecimal number,
H, in the output corrective function setting (BFM#50).
F
H
FX3U-4DA-ADP
ch4 ch1
ch3 ch2
Set value Description G
FX3G-1DA-BD
0 Corrective function by load resistance is invalid.
1 Corrective function by load resistance is valid.
Other than above values Invalid (setting values unchanged)
2. Setting range and initial value of load resistance (BFM#51 to #54)

Set the load resistance value for each channel allocated to the following BFM.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
BFM
Description Setting range (Ω) Initial value (Ω)
number
#51 Load resistance value for channel 1
#52
#53
Load resistance value for channel 2
Load resistance value for channel 3
1000 to 30000 30000 I
FX3U-4AD-PT
#54 Load resistance value for channel 4

-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-33
3. Cautions regarding use of the output corrective function by load resistance

(BFM#6).
will be restarted.
• This function is valid only in the voltage output mode (mode 0 or 1).
• The corrective function by load resistance is valid only at a load resistance from 1 k to 30 kΩ.
• If a setting is out of the upper setting range, b7 of the error status BFM#29 is turned on.
• When not using this function, the output characteristics at a load resistance of 30 kΩ are applied.

5.4.18 BFM#60: Status automatic transfer function setting

When the bits, b0 to b2, of BFM#60 are turned on, the assigned functions (see the table below) are valid.
When the bits are turned off, the functions are invalid.
Bit No. Description Reference

When the value of the error status (BFM#29) changes,
Subsection 5.4.10
b0 the status value is transferred to the data register
Subsection 5.4.19
specified by BFM#61.
When the value of the upper/lower limit function status
Subsection 5.4.14
b1 (BFM#39) changes, the status value is transferred to the
Subsection 5.4.20
data register specified by BFM#62.
When the value of the disconnection detection status
Subsection 5.4.9
b2 (BFM#28) changes, the status value is transferred to the
Subsection 5.4.21
data register specified by BFM#63.
b3 to b15 Invalid (setting values unchanged) -
2. Cautions regarding the status automatic transfer function

(BFM#6).
will be restarted.
• When connected and used with the FX5U or FX5UC CPU module, do not use the status data automatic
transfer function.

If data is written to BFM#0, #5, #10 to #17, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will also be written
in the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA.
The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000. When creating a program, therefore, do not
E-34
A
5.4.19 BFM#61: Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification
Common Items
Initial value: K200
Use this function to automatically transfer the error status data (BFM#29) to the data register specified in
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
BFM#61.
When an error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this reason,
the PLC does not need a program for reading data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened.
→ For a detailed description of the error status (BFM#29), refer to Subsection 5.4.12.
1. If "BFM#61 = K200 (initial value)" C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Specified data
Description
register
D200 Value of error status (BFM#29)
2. Cautions regarding error status automatic transfer function setting

D
• If a data is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same data
FX3G-2AD-BD
register.
• This function is valid by turning on b0 of the status automatic transfer function setting (BFM#60).
• When a value out of the above setting range is set, b9 of the error status BFM#29 is turned on.
• The data set in BFM#61 will be retained in the EEPROM.
E
FX3U-4DA
If data is set in BFM#0, #5, #10 to #17, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will be written in the
EEPROM of FX3U-4DA.
frequently write data in the above buffer memories (BFM). F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-35
5.4.20 BFM#62: Upper/lower limit function status data automatic transfer-to data register
specification

Initial value: K201
Use this function to automatically transfer the upper/lower limit function status data (BFM#39) to the data
Only when the value becomes more than the upper limit or less than the lower limit, data will be automatically
transferred from FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need the program to read data, and
the scan time of the PLC can be shortened.
→ For a detailed description of the upper/lower limit function status (BFM#39),
Specified data
Description
register
D201 Value of upper/lower limit function status (BFM#39)
2. Cautions regarding upper/lower limit function status automatic transfer function setting
register.
• When a value out of the above setting range is set, b9 of the error status BFM#29 is turned on.

The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000. When creating a program, therefore, do not
E-36
A
5.4.21 BFM#63: Specification of data register for automatic transfer at disconnection
Common Items
detection

Initial value: K202
Numeric data type: Decimal (K) B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Use this function to automatically transfer the disconnection detection status data (BFM#28) to the data
Only when wire-break is detected, data will be automatically transferred from FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this
→ For a detailed description of the disconnection detection status (BFM#28),
refer to Subsection 5.4.9. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Specified data
Description
register
D202 Value of disconnection detection status (BFM#28)
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
2. Cautions regarding disconnection detection status automatic transfer function setting
register.
• When a value out of the above setting range is set, b9 of the error status BFM#29 is turned on. E
FX3U-4DA

Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
5.4.22 BFM#80 to #3098: Table output function

Related BFM:
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
BFM#80 (start/stop command of table output function)
BFM#81 to #84 (output pattern setting of channels)
BFM#85 to #88 (output execution cycle number of channels)
BFM#89 (completion flag of table output function)
BFM#90 (table output error code)
BFM#91 (table output error source number) H
BFM#98 (data table head device number)
FX3U-3A-ADP
BFM#99 (data table transfer command)

BFM#100 to #398, •••, #2800 to #3098 (data table in patterns)
Table output function:

Sets predetermined output patterns as data table, and outputs analog signals according to the data table.
→ For a detailed description of the table output function, refer to Chapter 6.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-37
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.1 Outline of Table Output Function
6. Table Output Function

This chapter describes the table output function of FX3U-4DA
6.1 Outline of Table Output Function
1. Explanation of the function

This function sets predetermined output patterns as data table and outputs analog signals according to the
data table.
2. Outline of procedures for table output function
Refer to Section 6.2

Data table is prepared in the data registers
Preparation of data table*1
(D1000 to 7999) or the expansion registers (R0
to R32767).
Transfer of data table*1 The data table is transferred from the PLC main
unit to the relevant buffer memory of FX3U-4DA.
Execution of output table Setting and execution

 Output patterns (BFM#81 to #84) of each
channel
 The numbers of table output execution cycle
number (BFM#85 to #88) of each channel
 Start/stop of table output function for each
channel command (BFM#80)
*1. It is possible to write the data table directly in FX3U-4DA using a program (TO instruction, etc.).
Caution:
The data table transfer command is not supported when connected and used with the FX5U or FX5UC CPU
module.
Directly write to the FX3U-4DA by the PLC program (TO instruction, etc.)
E-38
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.2 Preparation of data table
A
6.2 Preparation of data table
Common Items
1. Outline of data table
The data table to be prepared in the PLC consists of the following items.
(1) Number of patterns (1 to 10 patterns)
(2) Each pattern
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
(3) Number of points in each pattern (1 to 99 points)
(4) Condition after output at final point in each pattern
(5) Points in each pattern
(6) Data to be output at each point
(7) Output update time at each point
(8) Unit of output update time at each point, and point-to-point interpolation method C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
2. Preparation of data table
Prepare the data table consisting of the following items in the data registers (D1000 to D7999) in the PLC
main unit or the expansion registers (R0 to R32767).
It is convenient to prepare the data table on spreadsheet software and copy and paste the data to the device
memory of GX Works2 or GX Developer.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Setting item Device number in PLC assignment
(1) Number of patterns (x) Device number specified in BFM#98
(3) Number of points in pattern 1 (n) Device number+1 specified in BFM#98
(2) Pattern 1
(4) Condition after output at final point in pattern Device number+2 specified in BFM#98
(6) Output data Device number+3 specified in BFM#98 E
(7) Output update time Device number+4 specified in BFM#98
FX3U-4DA
(5) Point 1
(8) Unit of output update time at each point,
Device number+5 specified in BFM#98
and point-to-point interpolation method
. . .
. . .
. . . F
(6) Output data
FX3U-4DA-ADP
(7) Output update time
(5) Point n
. .
. . G
. .
FX3G-1DA-BD
(3) Number of points in pattern X (m)
(2) Pattern X
(4) Condition after output at final point in pattern

(6) Output data
(5) Point 1
H
FX3U-3A-ADP

. .
. .
. .
.
(6) Output data
.
.
I
(5) Point m
FX3U-4AD-PT
(8) Unit of output update time at each point, Device specified in BFM#98 + total number
and point-to-point interpolation method of data tables -1*1
-ADP
*1. The device number should not exceed D7999 or R32767.

For a detailed description of the data table items (1) to (8), refer to the following pages.
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-39
3. Details of data table

(1) Number of patterns (number of data items: 1)
Store the number of patterns at the top of the data table (device specified in BFM#98).
Up to 10 patterns can be prepared. The setting range of the number of patterns is 1 to 10.
When the number of patterns is out of the setting range, table output error code K111 is stored in
BFM#90, the device number in which the number of patterns is specified is stored in BFM#91, and b8 in
error status BFM#29 is turned on.
(2) Pattern (number of data items: 5 to 299)

A pattern refers to a predetermined flow of output. The contents of a pattern are defined by a combination
of points.
Prepare pattern data following the number of patterns to form the data table.
Up to 10 patterns can be prepared.
(3) Number of points (number of data items: 1)

Store the number of points to be used in each pattern at the top of the pattern.
Up to 99 points can be provided. The setting range of number of points is 1 to 99.
When the number of points is out of the setting range, the error code is stored in the table output error
code BFM#90, the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored
in BFM#91, and b8 of the error status BFM#29 is turned on.
(4) Condition after output at final point in pattern (number of data items: 1)
The condition after output at the final point in a pattern can be set to continue to output the output signal at
the final point or output the offset signal.
The setting is shown in the following table.
Set value Condition after output at final point

K0 Continuing to output the output signal at the final point
K1 Outputting the offset signal
Other than above values Invalid*1
*1. When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code is stored in the table output error code
BFM#90, the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored
(5) Point (number of data items: 3)

Data output point. The data indicating a point consist of output data, output update time, output update
time unit and point-to-point interpolation method.
Each pattern can have up to 99 points.
(6) Output data (number of data items: 1)

Digital value corresponding to the analog signal to be output at the point
The setting range depends on the output mode and offset/gain setting.
(7) Output update time (number of data items: 1)

Output time to the next point. The output update time for the n-th point is the output time between the n-th
point and the (n+1)-th point.
When the pattern is repeated, the output update time at the final point is used as the output time between
the final point and the first point.
When the pattern is not repeated, the output update time for the final point is ignored.
The setting range is 1 to 32767. For the unit, refer to Item (8).
When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code is stored in the table output error code
BFM#90, the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in
BFM#91, and b8 of the error status BFM#29 is turned on.
E-40
A
(8) Output update time unit and point-to-point interpolation method (number of data items: 1)
Common Items
Set the unit of the output update time and the point-to-point interpolation method for each point.
The output update time unit and the point-to-point interpolation method for the n-th point are applied
between the n-th point and the (n+1)-th point.
When the pattern is repeated, the output update time unit and the point-to-point interpolation method are
applied between the final point and the first point.
When the pattern is not repeated, the output update time unit and the point-to-point interpolation method
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
for the final point are ignored.
A 4-digit hexadecimal number, H, is allocated as shown below.
H
Invalid*1 Output updating time unit
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Invalid*1 Point-to-point interpolation method
• Setting of output update time unit
Set value Output update time unit

D
0 10 ms
FX3G-2AD-BD
1 100 ms
2 1s
3 1 min
E
FX3U-4DA
• Interpolation method
Data output between points are interpolated every 1 ms and automatically updated.
Set value Interpolation method

0 No interpolation (Output data is held to the next point.)
Linear interpolation (Data output between points are
F
1
FX3U-4DA-ADP
interpolated in the shape of a straight line.)
S-shaped interpolation (Data output between points are
2 interpolated in the shape of an S-shaped as shown
below.)
Invalid*1
Other than above values
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
• S-shaped interpolation
Output data
D/8
Point n+1
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
D/2 D/8
Point n
Time I
FX3U-4AD-PT
T/4 T/4 T/4 T/4
T
-ADP
BFM#90, the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
E-41
4. Example of data table

The following table shows an example of data table containing two patterns prepared in and after D5000.
Patterns 1 and 2 are in the output mode 1.
Data
register
D5000 K2 Number of patterns 2 patterns
D5001 K3 Number of points in pattern 1 3 points
Pattern 1
Holding of value
D5002 K0 Setting of condition after output at final point in pattern 1
output at final point
D5003 K3000 Data to be output at point 1 in pattern 1 3V
D5004 K18 Point 1 Output update time at point 1 in pattern 1 1800 ms
Output update time unit at point 1 in pattern 1 100 ms
D5005 H0021
Point-to-point interpolation method S-shaped interpolation
Point 2
D5007 K26 Output update time at point 2 in pattern 1 2600 ms

D5008 H0011
Point-to-point interpolation method Linear interpolation
Point 3

D5011 H0011
D5012 K4 Number of points in pattern 2 4 points
Pattern 2
D5013 K1 Setting of condition after output at final point in pattern 2 Output of offset value
Point 1
D5015 K6 Output update time at point 1 in pattern 2 6s

Output update time unit at point 1 in pattern 2 1s
D5016 H0022
D5017 K10000 Data to be output at point 2 in pattern 2 10 V
Point 2
D5018 K15 Output update time at point 2 in pattern 2 15 s

D5019 H0002
Point-to-point interpolation method No interpolation
D5020 K500 Data to be output at point 3 in pattern 2 0.5 V
Point 3

D5022 H0021
Point 4
D5024 K9 Output update time at point 4 in pattern 2 9s

D5025 H0012
E-42
A
5. Example of pattern output
Common Items
Data can be output in a predetermined pattern as shown below. (Example of pattern 1 in output mode 1
shown on the previous page)
When the pattern

is repeated
(BFM#85 to #88
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
are set to 0 or 2 or
Output higher.)
value
Point 2
8V
Linear
S-shaped
interpolation
C
interpolation
FX3U-4AD-ADP
5V
Point 3
Point 1
3V
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Time
Output update Output update Output update
time at point 1
(1800 ms)
time at point 2
(2600 ms)
time at point 3
(500 ms)
E
FX3U-4DA
6. Caution when preparing the data table
• Prepare the data table in continuous data registers in the PLC main unit or continuous expansion registers.
(Prepare data without spaces between patterns or points.)
If data has spaces, the data cannot be transferred normally to the buffer memory in FX3U-4DA. F
→ For a detailed description of data table errors, refer to Section 6.5.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-43
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory
6.3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory

The data table prepared in the data registers (D1000 to D7999) in the PLC or the expansion registers (R0 to
R32767) are transferred to the buffer memory in FX3U-4DA.
The transfer procedures are shown below.
1. Specify the head device number of the data table to be transferred. (BFM#98, initial value:
K1000)
Specify the head device number of the data table in BFM#98.
The setting range is K1000 to K7994 for the data registers (D1000 to D7999) (because at least six points are
occupied) or K0 to K32762 for the expansion registers (R0 to R32767) (because at least six points are
occupied).
Example) When the data table is set starting from D1000, set K1000 in BFM#98.
When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code K21 is stored in the table output error code
BFM#90, the number of the buffer memory, K98, that has developed the table output error is stored in
2. Start transferring the data table. (BFM#99, initial value: H0000)

Transfer the data table from the PLC to the FX3U-4DA using the data table transfer command (BFM#99).
H
Invalid*1 Data table transfer command
Invalid*1 Register type
• Data table transfer command
Set value Transfer command

0 No processing
1 Execution of transfer of data table
• Register type
Set value Register type

Transfer of data table from data registers
0
(D1000 to 7999)
Transfer of data table from expansion registers
1
(R0 to 32767)
BFM#90, the number of the buffer memory, K99, that has developed the table output error is stored in
Example) When K1000 is written in the head device number of data table (BFM#98) and H0001 is written in
the data table transfer command (BFM#99), the data table will be transferred from the data
register D1000.
Caution:
When connected and used with the FX5U or FX5UC CPU module, do not use the data table transfer
command.
E-44
A
3. Buffer memory contents in FX3U-4DA after transfer
Common Items
The transferred data table is stored in the following buffer memory areas.
BFM
Description
number
#100
Pattern 1
Number of points B
#101 Condition after output at final point in pattern
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
#102 Output data
#103 Output update time
Point 1
Unit of output update time at each point, and point-to-
#104
point interpolation method
. . . C
. . .
FX3U-4AD-ADP
. . .
#396 Output data
Point 99
#398
point interpolation method D
FX3G-2AD-BD
#399 Not used
. . .
. . .
. . .
#2800 Number of points
#2801 Condition after output at final point in pattern
E
FX3U-4DA
#2802 Output data
Point 1
#2804
Pattern 10
point interpolation method

.
.
.
.
.
.
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
. . .
#3096 Output data
Point 99
#3098
point interpolation method G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-45
4. Example of transfer of data table

The data table below shows the writing of K5000 to BFM#98 and H0001 to BFM#99. Data starting from
D5000 is transferred to the buffer memory in the FX3U-4DA.
PLC main unit FX3U-4DA

BFM Source data
Data register Set value Set value
number register
D5000 K2 #100 K3 D5001
D5001 K3 #101 K0 D5002
D5002 K0 #102 K3000 D5003
D5003 K3000 #103 K18 D5004
D5004 K18 #104 H0021 D5005
D5005 H0021 #105 K8000 D5006
D5006 K8000 #106 K26 D5007
D5007 K26 #107 H0011 D5008
D5008 H0011 #108 K5000 D5009
D5009 K5000 #109 K5 D5010
D5010 K5 #110 H0011 D5011
D5011 H0011 :
Transfer to buffer - -
D5012 K4 :
memory
D5013 K1 #400 K4 D5012
D5014 K2000 #401 K1 D5013
D5015 K6 #402 K2000 D5014
D5016 H0022 #403 K6 D5015
D5017 K10000 #404 H0022 D5016
D5018 K15 #405 K10000 D5017
D5019 H0002 #406 K15 D5018
D5020 K500 #407 H0002 D5019
D5021 K45 #408 K500 D5020
D5022 H0021 #409 K45 D5021
D5023 K4000 #410 H0021 D5022
D5024 K9 #411 K4000 D5023
D5025 H0012 #412 K9 D5024
#413 H0012 D5025
E-46
A
5. Cautions regarding data table transfer
Common Items
• While the table output function is executed, it is impossible to start transferring the data table.
• The number of patterns is not transferred to the buffer memory in FX3U-4DA.
• The transferred data table is stored in the buffer memory in FX3U-4DA. The data table stored in FX3U-4DA
will be erased when power is turned off. Therefore, it is necessary to transfer the data table after rebooting
the power.
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• At completion of transfer, BFM#99 will automatically change to H0000. Also when transfer is stopped due
to an error, BFM#99 will automatically change to H0000. When BFM#99 changes to H0000, check the
error flag.
→ For a detailed description of errors related to table output, refer to Section 6.5.
• If an error occurs during transfer of the data table, the data up to the error is transferred. Subsequent data C
is not transferred.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
• It is possible to write the data table directly in the buffer memory without using the data table transfer
command (BFM#99).
In this case, the correctness of the data table is not evaluated until the table is output by the table output
start/stop function (BFM#80).
If a data table with incorrect data is output, the data up to the point where incorrect data occurs is output.
At the point where incorrect data occurs, an error is registered and only the data output just before the
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
occurrence of the error is held.
• Execute the data table transfer command (BFM#99) as a pulse execution type instruction.
• During transfer of the data table, the scan time increases by up to about 10 ms.
• The standard data table transfer time is obtained by the following formula.
E
Number of *1
FX3U-4DA
data table items
Transfer time = (Scan time)   (number of FX3U-4DA units connected to main unit)
64
*1. Fractions omitted

Example) F
 Scan time: 50 ms (including increase in scan time caused by data table transfer)
FX3U-4DA-ADP
 Number of data table items to be transferred: 2991 items (when the number of patterns is 10
and the number of points in each pattern is 99)
 Number of units connected to FX3U-4DA: 8 units
2991
G
Transfer time = (50 ms)   (8 units)
FX3G-1DA-BD
64
= 18800 ms
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-47
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.4 Procedures for executing table output function
6.4 Procedures for executing table output function

After setting the output patterns for the channels (BFM#81 to #84) and the number outputs for the channels
(BFM#85 to #88), turn on the table output function start/stop command (BFM#80) to execute the table output
function.
1. Set the output patterns for the channels. (BFM#81 to #84, initial value: K1)
Set the output patterns for the channels in BFM#81 to #84.
The output pattern can be changed in the middle of outputting the table.
Setting range for BFM#81 to #84: 1 to 10
BFM#90, the number of the buffer memory (K81 to K84) that has developed the table output error is stored in
2. Set the number of table outputs for the channels. (BFM#85 to #88, initial value: K0)
Set the number of table outputs for the channels in BFM#85 to #88.
The number of outputs can be changed even during outputting the table.
Setting range for BFM#85 to #88: 0 to 32767
When 0 is set, output of the table will be repeated until the table output is stopped by BFM#80.
BFM#90, the number of the buffer memory (K85 to K88) that has developed the table output error is stored in
3. Table output start/stop (BFM#80, initial value: H0000)

Table output is started and stopped by setting BFM#80 as shown below.
H
ch4 ch1
ch3 ch2

0 The table output function of each channel is stopped.
The table output function of each channel is started.
1 After output of the final point in the last cycle, 0 will be
automatically written.
*1. When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code K33 is stored in the table output error code
BFM#90, the number of the buffer memory (K80) that has developed the table output error is stored in
E-48
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.4 Procedures for executing table output function
A
4. Cautions regarding table output
Common Items
• When BFM#99 (data table transfer command) is not H0000, the table output function cannot be started.
• When an error occurs during transfer of data table, start the table output after setting the correct data table.
• While the table output completion flag BFM#89 is ON, output of a new table cannot be started.
• The table output function is valid only while the PLC is in RUN mode. B
• While even a single channel is outputting data table (BFM#80 is not H0000), it is prohibited to change
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
BFM#0, #5, #9 to #17, #19, #20, #32 to #35, #38, #41 to 48, #50 to #54 and #60 to #63.
• The pattern can be changed during output as shown below. (The change is invalid while the table output
completion flag BFM#89 is ON.)
Output
value Pattern 5
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Pattern 1
The data output in pattern 1 is

ignored, and data is output at
point 1 in output pattern 5. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Time
Table output start Change from output pattern
1 to output pattern 5 E
FX3U-4DA
5. Check the table output completion flag. (BFM#89, initial value: H0000)
The value in BFM#89 indicates whether the table output from each channel has been completed.
After data is output at the final point in the last cycle of a pattern, the table output completion flag is turned on.
When the table output (BFM#80) is set to be stopped, the table output completion flag is turned off. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
H
ch4 ch1
ch3 ch2
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Value for each
Table output completion flag
channel
0 Table output uncompleted
1 Table output completed
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-49
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Details of table output error
6.5 Details of table output error

When an error related to the table output function occurs, the error code is stored in BFM#90, and the device
number or the buffer memory that has developed the error is stored in BFM#91.
1. Error code table and details of error source numbers
Error code Table output error source number

Details of error
(BFM#90) (BFM#91)
The number of patterns in the data table that is held in Device number where the number of
K111 the PLC does not meet the following requirement. patterns is specified (same as the head
1 ≤ Number of patterns ≤ 10 device number in the data table)
The number of points in the data table that is held in the
Device number where the number of
K121 PLC does not meet the following requirement.
patterns is specified
1 ≤ Number of patterns ≤ 99
The number of points in the data table that is held in the
Number of BFM where the number of
K122 buffer memory does not meet the following requirement.
points is specified
1 ≤ Number of points ≤ 99
"The condition after output at final point in pattern" Device number where "the condition after
K131 specified in the data table that is held in the PLC is not 0 the final point output point in pattern" is
or 1. specified
"The condition after output at final point in pattern"
Number of BFM where "the condition after
K132 specified in the data table that is held in the buffer
output point in the pattern" is specified
memory is not 0 or 1.
The output update time in the data table that is held in the
Device number where the output update
K151 PLC does not meet the following requirement.
time is specified
1 ≤ Output update time ≤ 32767
The output update time in the data table that is held in the
Number of BFM where the output update
K152 buffer memory does not meet the following requirement.
time is specified
1 ≤ Output update time ≤ 32767
The output update time unit in the data table that is held Device number where the output update
K161
in the PLC is not 0, 1, 2 or 3. time unit is specified
The output update time unit in the data table that is held Number of BFM where the output update
K162
in the buffer memory is not 0, 1, 2 or 3. time unit is specified
The interpolation method in the data table that is held in Device number where the interpolation
K171
the PLC is not 0, 1 or 2. method is specified
The interpolation method in the data table that is held in Number of BFM where the interpolation
K172
the buffer memory is not 0, 1 or 2. method is specified
The head device number BFM#98 in the data table to be
K21 K98
transferred is out of the setting range.
The value indicated by b0 to b3 of the transfer command
K22 K99
BFM#99 is not 0 or 1.
The value indicated by b4 to b7 of the source register
K23 K99
type in BFM#99 is not 0 or 1.
Any of the output patterns BFM#81 to #84 does not meet
K31 the following requirement. One of K81 to K84
1 ≤ Output pattern ≤ 10
The number of table outputs in BFM#85 to #88 does not
K32 meet the following requirement. One of K85 to K88
0 ≤ Number of repetitions of output ≤ 32767
The bit corresponding to each channel in the table output
K33 K80
start/stop command in BFM#80 is not 0 or 1.
E-50
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Details of table output error
A
2. Cautions regarding table output errors
Common Items
• Errors in data table
When the data table in the PLC contains an error, the error can be detected during transfer of the data to
the buffer memory in FX3U-4DA. In this case, the error code (BFM#90) is K11, and the device number is
written as the error source (BFM#91).
If an error is caused in the data table by directly rewriting the data in BFM after the data table is transferred, B
the error can be detected when the table is output using incorrect data. In this case, the error code
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
(BFM#90) is K12, and the BFM number is written as the error source (BFM#91).
• Error during transfer of the data table
While transferring of the data table, an error (error codes K31 to K33) does not occur even when the
BFM#80 (table output function start/stop) is set to a value out of the setting range. An error occurs after the
completion of the transfer of the data table. C
• Error during output of the table
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Even if the output value is scaled over during output of the table, the output of the table will not be stopped.
However, while the output value is scaled over, b10 (scale over) of the error status BFM#29 stays on.
When an error (error codes K122 to K172, K31 to K33) occurs during output of the table, the output of the
table is cancelled and the analog output value just before the occurrence of the error is retained.
• Table output errors (BFM#90) and table output error source numbers (BFM#91) are not retained. They will D
be cleared when the next data table transfer command is given or the table output start function is
FX3G-2AD-BD
executed.
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-51
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.6 Examples uses of table output function
6.6 Examples uses of table output function

[Uses of table output function]
• Inverter frequency setting, servo speed control, etc.
1. Inverter frequency setting

The output frequency can be controlled by inputting analog signals (e.g. voltage from 0 to 10 V and current
from 4 to 20 mA) to inverter frequency setting signals.
The analog signals and output signals have the following proportional relationship.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
60
30
0
5 10V
Analog signal
To control the frequency as shown below, where control the analog signal is proportional to the frequency use
the table output function.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
60
30
0
Time
Example of table output
Output
voltage (V)
Point 2 Point 3
10
No interpolation
S-shaped S-shaped
interpolation interpolation
5
Point 4
0 Point 1
Time
Output update Output update Output update
time at point 1 time at point 2 time at point 3
E-52
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Changing Output Characteristics
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 7.1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics
Common Items
7. Changing Output Characteristics
For FX3U-4DA, the standard output characteristics are provided for each output mode (BFM#0)at the time of B
factory shipment.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Changing the offset data (BFM#10 to #13) and gain data (BFM#14 to #17) can change the output
characteristics of each channel. This chapter describes how to change the output characteristics.
7.1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics

C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
1 Cancel the setting change prohibition mode.
If setting change is prohibited, write K3030 in BFM#19. The setting change prohibition mode will be
canceled.
D
2
FX3G-2AD-BD
Determine the output mode (BFM#0).
Determine the output mode (BFM#0) optimum for the selected channels and the voltage/current
specifications.
Set value (HEX) Output mode Analog output range Digital input range E
FX3U-4DA
0 Voltage output mode -10 V to +10 V -32000 to +32000
Voltage output analog value mV
1 The characteristic cannot be changed.
specification mode
3 Current output mode
Current output analog value μA
4 mA to 20 mA 0 to 32000
F
4 The characteristic cannot be changed.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
specification mode
5 to E Setting not allowed - -
F Channel not used - -
Example: Enter "HFF00" in BFM to set output mode 0 for channels 1 and 2 and prevent use chan- G
nels 3 and 4
FX3G-1DA-BD
Cautions regarding data setting
• If a value "1" or "4" is set for a channel, the output characteristics of the channel cannot be changed.
• Set the optimum output mode for the analog signal to be output.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-53
3 Determine the output characteristics to be changed.

Example: Change to output voltage of 1 to 5 V with digital values 0 to 32000
Output mode: 0
Output characteristics provided at the time Output characteristics newly provided
of factory shipment
Voltage output value Voltage output value
+10.2V
+10V 5V
Digital 1V Digital
-32000 0 value value
+32000 0 32000
-10V
-10.2V
4 Determine the offset data.

Determine the analog output value for the digital output value of 0.
Set the analog output value in mV for the voltage output mode, and the analog output value in μA
for the current output mode.
Example: To set the offset value of 1 V, set 1000 mV.
→ For a detailed description of the offset data, refer to Subsection 5.4.6.
5 Determine the gain data.

Determine the analog output value for the digital output value of 16000.
Set the analog output value in mV for the voltage output mode, and the analog output value in μA
for the current output mode.
Example: To set the gain value of 3 V, set 3000 mV.
(5-1)÷2+1 = 3 V (3000 mV)
→ For a detailed description of the gain data, refer to Subsection 5.4.6.
E-54
A
6
Common Items
Create a sequence program.
To change the output characteristics, write the offset data (BFM#10 to #13) and the gain data
(BFM#14 to #17) in the sequence program, and then turn on the corresponding bit of BFM#9 for
the corresponding channel.
B
Example: Program for changing the output characteristics of channels 1 and 2 (For FX3U/FX3UC Series
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
PLCs):
X000
FNC 12 Cancellation of setting change
K3030 U0\G19 prohibition mode
MOV P
Output mode specification for

C
FNC 12 HFF00 U0\G0
FX3U-4AD-ADP
MOV P channels 1 to 4
SET M0
M0
K50
T0
D
T0
FX3G-2AD-BD
FNC 16 K1000 U0\G10 K2 Setting of offset data (channels 1 and 2)
FMOV P
FNC 16 K3000 U0\G14 K2 Setting of gain data (channels 1 and 2)

FMOV P
FNC 12 H0003 U0\G9 Offset/gain setting value write command E

MOV P
FX3U-4DA
FNC224 FNC 12 K0 U0\G19 Setting change prohibition
K0 U0\G9
LD= MOV P
F
7 Transfer the sequence program to change the output characteristics.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Transfer the sequence program, and start the PLC.
After the PLC is started and the output characteristic write command (X000) is turned on, the offset
data and gain data will be written.
Since the offset data and gain data are stored in the EEPROM incorporated in FX3U-4DA, it is pos-
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
sible to delete the pre-written sequence program.
8 Check the analog output signals

Check that the output analog signals correspond to the set output data.
→ If analog signals are not correctly output, refer to Chapter 9 "Troubleshooting."
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-55
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation (Regular Operation)
8. Examples of Practical Programs
8.1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation (Regular Operation)

When you want to use the initial output characteristics but do not need to use the status information, you can
operate the PLC with a simple program as shown below.
1. Conditions
The sequence program described in this section is under the following conditions.
FX3U-4DA (unit No.0) should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC.
2) Output mode
Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 (voltage output, -10 V to +10 V).
Channel 3 should be set to mode 3 (current output, 4 mA to 20 mA).
- For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs
Initial pulse
Transfer H2300 to BFM#0 (output modes of
M8002 channels 1 to 4).
FNC 12 H2300 U0\G0 ch1 and ch2: Voltage output (-10 to +10 V),
MOV P output mode 0
RUN monitor ch3: Current output (4 mA to 20 mA), output
M8000 mode 3
K50 *1 ch4: Current output (0 mA to 20 mA), output
T0 mode 2
Data to be output to channel 1 is written in D0. Store the data to be output to channels 1 to 4
Data to be output to channel 2 is written in D1. in D0 to D3 in the following ranges.
Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2. D0 and D1: -32000 to +32000
Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3. D2 and D3: 0 to 32000
T0 D0BFM#1 (output to channel 1)

FNC 15 D0 U0\G1 K4 D1BFM#2 (output to channel 2)
BMOV D2BFM#3 (output to channel 3)
D3BFM#4 (output to channel 4)
*1. After setting the output mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each
setting. The specified output mode will be retained even if power failure occurs. After the output mode
is specified, if the same output mode is used, it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting
time (T0 K50).
- For FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs

Initial pulse
Transfer H2300 to BFM#0 (output modes of
M8002 channels 1 to 4).
FNC 79 K0 K0 H2300 K1 ch1 and ch2: Voltage output (-10 to +10 V),
TO P output mode 0
RUN monitor ch3: Current output (4 mA to 20 mA), output
M8000 mode 3
K50 *1 ch4: Current output (0 mA to 20 mA), output
T0 mode 2
Data to be output to channel 1 is written in D0. Store the data to be output to channels 1 to 4
Data to be output to channel 2 is written in D1. in D0 to D3 in the following ranges.
Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2. D0 and D1: -32000 to +32000
Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3. D2 and D3: 0 to 32000
T0 D0BFM#1 (output to channel 1)

FNC 79 K0 K1 D0 K4 D1BFM#2 (output to channel 2)
TO D2BFM#3 (output to channel 3)
D3BFM#4 (output to channel 4)
setting. The specified output mode will be retained even if power failure occurs. After the output mode
is specified, if the same output mode is used, it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting
time (T0 K50).
E-56
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.2 Example of Program using Useful Functions
A
8.2 Example of Program using Useful Functions
Common Items
This section describes a practical program that uses the disconnection detection function (BFM#28), upper/
lower limit function (BFM#38 to #48), corrective function by load resistance (BFM#50 to #54) and status
automatic transfer function (BFM#60 to #63) of FX3U-4DA.
1. Conditions
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
2) Output mode
Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 (voltage output, -10 V to +10 V). C
Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 2 (current output, 0 mA to 20 mA).
FX3U-4AD-ADP
3) Convenient functions
The disconnection detection function, upper/lower limit function, corrective function by load resistance
and status automatic transfer function are used.
Caution:
The status automatic transfer function is not supported when connected and used with the FX5U or D
FX5UC CPU module.
FX3G-2AD-BD
Device Description
X000 Clearance of upper/lower limit function status data
X001
D10
Clearance of disconnection detection status data
Data to be output from channel 1
E
FX3U-4DA
Input
D11 Data to be output from channel 2
Y001 Output of channel-1 upper limit error data F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Y006 Output of channel-4 lower limit error data G
Output Y007 Output of channel-4 upper limit error data
FX3G-1DA-BD
Y010 Output of disconnection detection signal
Y011 Output of error detection signal
D200 Data register at destination of automatic transfer of error status
D201
Data register at destination of automatic transfer of upper/lower limit
function error status
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Data register at destination of automatic transfer of disconnection detection

D202
error status
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-57

Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 12 H2200 U0\G0 Output modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified*1
RUN monitor MOV P
M8000
T0 K50*2
T0
FNC 12 H1122 U0\G38 Upper/lower limit function setting
MOV P
FNC 16 K-3200 U0\G41 K2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 1 and 2
FMOV P
FNC 16 K6400 U0\G43 K2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 3 and 4
FMOV P
FNC 16 K28800 U0\G45 K2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 1 and 2
FMOV P
FNC 16 K25600 U0\G47 K2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 3 and 4
FMOV P
FNC 12 H0011 U0\G50 Corrective function setting by load resistance*1

MOV P
FNC 16 K5000 U0\G51 K2 Setting of load resistance values for channels 1 and 2*1
FMOV P
FNC 12 Status automatic transfer function setting *1

H0007 U0\G60 (The initial setting of destination data registers is used,
MOV P and the sequence program for this function is omitted.)
X000
FNC 12 H0003 U0\G40 Clearance of upper/lower limit function status data
MOV P
X001
FNC 12 K0 U0\G28 Clearance of disconnection detection status data
MOV P
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 15 D10 U0\G1 K4 Transfer of data that will be output from channels 1 to 4
BMOV
FNC 12 D201 K2Y000 Output of upper/lower limit error status of channels to

MOV Y000 to Y007
D202.2
Disconnection detected in channels 3 and 4
Y010 Output to Y010
D202.3
D200.0
Y011 Error detected Output to Y011
*1. The output mode setting, setting of corrective function by load characteristics and status automatic
transfer function setting are retained in the EEPROM of FX 3U -4DA. For this reason, even if the
setting. After the output mode is specified, and the same output mode is used, it is not necessary to
set the output mode and the waiting time (T0 K50).
E-58
A
Common Items
Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 79 K0 K0 H2200 K1 Output modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified*1
RUN monitor TO P
M8000
K50*2
B
T0
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
T0
FNC 79 K0 K38 H1122 K1 Upper/lower limit function setting
TO P
FNC 79 K0 K41 K-3200 K2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 1 and 2
TO P C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FNC 79 K0 K43 K6400 K2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 3 and 4
TO P
FNC 79 K0 K45 K28800 K2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 1 and 2
TO P
FNC 79
TO P
K0 K47 K25600 K2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 3 and 4 D
FX3G-2AD-BD
FNC 79 K0 K50 H0011 K1 Corrective function setting by load resistance*1
TO P
FNC 79 K0 K51 K5000 K2 Setting of load resistance values for channels 1 and 2*1
TO P
FNC 79 Status automatic transfer function setting*1

E
K0 K60 H0007 K1 (The initial setting of destination data registers is used,
FX3U-4DA
TO P and the sequence program for this function is omitted.)
X000
FNC 79 K0 K40 H0003 K1 Clearance of upper/lower limit function status data
TO P
X001
FNC 79
TO P
K0 K29 K0 K1 Clearance of error status data
F
X002
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FNC 79 K0 K28 K0 K1 Clearance of disconnection detection status data
TO P
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 79 K0 K1 D10 K4 Transfer of data that will be output from channels 1 to 4
TO
FNC 12 D201 K2Y000 Output of upper/lower limit error status of channels to G

MOV Y000 to Y007
FX3G-1DA-BD
FNC 12 D200 K4M0
MOV
FNC 12 D202 K4M20

MOV
M22
H
Disconnection detected in channels 3 and 4
FX3U-3A-ADP
Y010 Output to Y010

M23
M0
Y011 Error detected Output to Y011
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
*1. The output mode setting, setting of corrective function by load characteristics and status automatic
transfer function setting are retained in the EEPROM of FX 3U -4DA. For this reason, even if the
-ADP
setting. After the output mode is specified, and the same output mode is used, it is not necessary to J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-59
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation (Pattern Output Operation)
8.3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation (Pattern Output

Operation)
This section describes a practical program that uses the table output function.
1. Conditions
2) Output mode
Channel 1 should be set to mode 0 (voltage output, -10 V to +10 V).
Channels 2 and 4 are out of use.
3) Convenient function
The table output function is used.
Device Description
X000 Start of table output function for channels 1 and 3
X001 Stop of table output function
X002 Restart of table output function for channel 3
Input
D5000 or more Data table*1
Y000 Completion of output of table from channel 1
Y001 Table output error
M0 Data table transfer complete
Output
M1 During output of table from channel 3
D100 Data table transfer command
D101 Table output completion flag
*1. It is necessary to separately create the data table.

→ For a detailed description of creation of the data table, refer to Section 6.2.

Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 12 HF2F0 U0\G0 Specification of output modes of channels 1 to 4*2
MOV P
RUN monitor
M8000
T0 K50*3
Continued
*2. The output mode setting is retained in the EEPROM of the FX3U-4DA. For this reason, even if the
E-60
Common Items
T0
FNC 12 K1 U0\G81 Channel-1 output pattern
MOV P
FNC 12 K2 U0\G83 Channel-3 output pattern

B
MOV P
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FNC 12 Number of repetitions of output of table
K5 U0\G85 from channel 1
MOV P

K0 U0\G87
MOV P from channel 3
C
FNC 12
FX3U-4AD-ADP
K5000 U0\G98 Number of head device in data table
MOV P
FNC 12 H0001 U0\G99 Data table transfer command*1

MOV P
FNC 78
FROM
K0 K99 D100 K1 Readout of data table transfer command D
FX3G-2AD-BD
D100.0
Turning-on of M0 At the completion of transfer
SET M0 of data table
X000
FNC 12 H0100 U0\G80 Start table output function (channel 3)
MOV P
Turning-on of M1 when table is output from E
SET M1 channel 3
FX3U-4DA
X000 M1
FNC 12 H0101 U0\G80 Start table output function (channel 1)
MOV P
X001 M1
FNC 12 H0000 U0\G80 Stop table output function
MOV P F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Turning-off of M1 when output of table from
RST M1 channel 3 is stopped
X002 M1
FNC 12 H0100 U0\G80 Restart of table output function (channel 3)
MOV P
SET M1 Turning-on of M1 when table is output from

channel 3
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
M1
FNC 78 K0 K89 D101 K2 Readout table output completion flag and table
FROM output error
D101.0
Y000 Completion of table output from channel 1
Output to Y000
FNC228
H
K0 D102 Y001 Output to Y001 when table output error occurs
FX3U-3A-ADP
LD<>
*1. Execute the data table transfer command as a pulse execution type instruction.
Caution: I
The data table transfer command is not supported when connected and used with the FX5U or FX5UC CPU
FX3U-4AD-PT
module.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-61
Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 79 K0 K0 HF2F0 K1 Specification of output modes of channels 1 to 4*1
TO P
RUN monitor
M8000
T0 K50*2
T0
FNC 79 K0 K81 K1 K1 Channel-1 output pattern
TO P
FNC 79 K0 K83 K2 K1 Channel-3 output pattern

TO P

K0 K85 K5 K1 from channel 1
TO P

K0 K87 K0 K1 from channel 3
TO P
FNC 79 K0 K98 K5000 K1 Number of head device in data table

TO P
FNC 79 K0 K99 H0001 K1 Data table transfer command*3

TO P
FNC 78 K0 K99 D100 K1 Readout of data table transfer command

FROM
FNC 12 D100 K4M10

MOV
M10
Turning-on of M0 At the completion of transfer
SET M0 of data table
X000
FNC 79 K0 K80 H0100 K1 Start table output function (channel 3)
TO P
Turning-on of M1 when table is output from

SET M1 channel 3
X000 M1
FNC 79 K0 K80 H0101 K1 Start table output function (channel 1)
TO P
X001 M1
FNC 79 K0 K80 H0000 K1 Stop table output function
TO P
Turning-off of M1 when output of table from

RST M1 channel 3 is stopped
X002 M1
FNC 79 K0 K80 H0100 K1 Restart of table output function (channel 3)
TO P
SET M1 Turning-on of M1 when table is output from

channel 3
Continued
*1. The output mode setting is retained in the EEPROM of the FX3U-4DA. For this reason, even if the
*3. Execute the data table transfer command as a pulse execution type instruction.
E-62
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.4 Program to Initialize FX3U-4DA (Factory Default)
Common Items
M1
FNC 78 K0 K89 D101 K2 Readout table output completion flag and table
FROM output error
FNC 12
MOV
D101 K4M30
B
M30
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Y000 Completion of table output from channel 1
Output to Y000
FNC228 K0 D102 Y001 Output to Y001 when table output error occurs
LD<>
FX3U-4AD-ADP
8.4 Program to Initialize FX3U-4DA (Factory Default)
To initialize FX3U-4DA, execute the following program.
This will return the output mode (BFM#0), the offset data (BFM#10 to #13) and the gain data (BFM#14 to #17)
will be to the factory default status state. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
1. Conditions
2) Device assignment E
Device Description
FX3U-4DA
X000 4DA initialization command

F
4DA initialization command
FX3U-4DA-ADP
X000
FNC 12 K1 U0\G20 The 4DA will be initialized.
MOV P (BFM#0 to #3098 will be cleared.)
• For FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs G
FX3G-1DA-BD
4DA initialization command
X000
FNC 79 K0 K20 K1 K1 The 4DA will be initialized.
TO P (BFM#0 to #3098 will be cleared.)
H
3. Cautions regarding initializing
FX3U-3A-ADP
• During initialization, output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status (BFM#6).
At the completion of initialization, the output status (BFM#6) will automatically change to H1111, and the
output will be restarted.
• It takes approximately 5 seconds to complete initialization. Do not set (write) data in the buffer memory
during the period. I
• Priority is given to the setting of the change prohibition mode (BFM#19).
FX3U-4AD-PT
• Once initialization is completed, the value in BFM#20 will automatically change to "K0".
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-63
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 9.1 PLC Version Number Check
9. Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error codes.
If the D/A conversion data is not output, or if the proper digital value is not output, check the following items:
• Wiring
• Program
• Error status

• Check the version number of FX3UC Series. The version number should be 1.30 or later.
9.2 Wiring Check

Check the wiring as follows:
1. Power
FX3U-4DA needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the
24 V indicator lamp of FX3U-4DA is on.
2. Analog output line

Use the 2-core twisted shielded cable for the analog output line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog
output line from the other motive power lines or inductive lines.
9.3 Program Check

Check the program as follows:
1. Check the output mode and output data.

Check that data has been set correctly in BFM#0 to #4.
2. Check the settings.

Check that the offset data (BFM#10 to #13), gain data (BFM#14 to #17), upper/lower limit function setting
(BFM#38) and table output function start/stop setting (BFM#80) are correct.
E-64
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 9.4 Error Status Check
A
Common Items
When an error occurs in FX3U-4DA, the bit appropriate to the error is turned on in the error status (BFM#29).
Take measures, referring to the following table.
Bit No. Items B

b0 Error detection
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
b1 O/G error
b3 Hardware error
b4 - C
b5 Error in setting of function for setting output upon PLC stop
FX3U-4AD-ADP
b6 Upper/lower limit function setting error
Error in corrective function setting by load resistance
b7
(Valid only in voltage output mode)
b8 Table output function setting error
b9 Status automatic transfer setting error
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
b10 Over-scale
b11 Disconnection detection (Valid only in current output mode)
b12 Setting data change prohibited
b13 to b15 -
E
1. Error detection (b0)
FX3U-4DA
If any of b1 is turned on, this bit (b11) will turn on.
2. O/G error (b1)

1) Description of error F
The bit is turned on when the offset or gain data (BFM#10 to #17) in the EEPROM has a setting error.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
2) Remedy
Check the output mode (BFM#0) and the offset and gain data (BFM#10 to #17).
3. Power supply error (b2)

1) Description of error G
FX3G-1DA-BD
24 V power is not correctly supplied.
2) Remedy
Check the wiring condition or the supply voltage.
4. Hardware error (b3)

1) Description of error H
FX3U-3A-ADP
FX3U-4DA may be defective.

2) Remedy
5. Error when setting the function for output upon PLC stop (b5)
1) Description of error I
FX3U-4AD-PT
The bit will turn on when the functions setting value for setting output upon PLC stop is not correctly set.
2) Remedy
Check the output mode (BFM#0) and the setting value of output data upon PLC stop (BFM#32 to #35).
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
E-65
FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 9.5 FX3U-4DA Initialization and Test Program
6. Upper/lower limit function value setting error (b6)

The bit will turn on when the setting value of the upper/lower limit function is not correctly set.
2) Remedy
Check the output mode (BFM#0) and the lower limit (BFM#41 to 44) and upper limit (BFM#45 to #48)
settings value of the upper/lower limit function.
7. Error in corrective function setting by load resistance (b7)

The bit will turn on when the setting value of the corrective function by load resistance is not correctly set.
2) Remedy
Check the output mode (BFM#0) and the load resistance values (BFM#51 to #54) for the channels.
8. Table output function setting error (b8)

The bit will turn on when the setting value of the table output function is not correctly set.
2) Remedy
Check the output mode (BFM#0) and the setting value of the table output function.
9. Status automatic transfer setting error (b9)

The bit will turn on when the setting value of the status automatic transfer function is not correctly set.
2) Remedy
Check the setting values in the automatic transfer destination data register specification field (BFM#61 to
#63).
10. Over-scale (b10)

This bit will turn on when analog output is out of the specified range.
2) Remedy
Check the output mode (BFM#0) setting value and the values in the output data (BFM#1 to #4).
11. Disconnection detection (b11)

The bit is turned on when a cable is disconnected.
2) Remedy
Check that no cables are disconnected or have contact failure.
12. Setting data change prohibited (b12)

The bit will turn on while the setting change is prohibited.
2) Remedy
To change any setting, set BFM#19 to K3030.
9.5 FX3U-4DA Initialization and Test Program

If the above-mentioned remedies cannot solve the problem, initialize FX3U-4DA and then check the
conditions of the FX3U-4DA using the test program.
→ For a detailed description of FX3U-4DA initialization program, refer to Section 8.4.
→ For a detailed description of the test program, refer to Chapter 4.
E-66
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output)
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
F. FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) D
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation method for the FX3U-4DA-ADP special
adapter (4-channel analog output) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the
unit.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
it to the end user.
-ADP
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual. J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
F-1
F-2
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 1.1 Outline of Functions
Common Items
1. Outline
This chapter outlines the FX3U-4DA-ADP (referred to as 4DA-ADP). B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
The FX3U-4DA-ADP is an analog special adapter. Which is connectable with the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/
FX3UC Series PLC to output the voltage/current data for up to 4 channels.
1) Only 1 4DA-ADP unit can be connected to the FX3S Series PLC. C
Up to 2*1 4DA-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Up to 4 4DA-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
(including the other analog expansion boards, analog special adapters)
2) Either "voltage output" or "current output" can be specified for each channel.
3) The D/A conversion results will be automatically output as the values to the special data register of the
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
referred to

FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 4 maximum
including the other analog expansion Number of connectable
 units E
FX3U-4DA
Series PLC
+ + to Section 1.3.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Expansion
4th 3rd 2nd 1st
adapter adapter adapter adapter board*2
For a detailed
 description of wiring,
Analog data refer to Chapter 3.
G
Inverter, etc.
For FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/ FX3G-1DA-BD

FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC For a detailed description
Contents Special devices *3 of special devices, refer to
 Chapter 4. H
1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269
FX3U-3A-ADP
Output mode Transfer direction

switching For a detailed description
2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279 of a basic program, refer to
Output setting data Section 4.8.
3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289
Error status 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299
Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of I
FX3U-4AD-PT
*2. The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3GC/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLC.
-ADP

For FX3S Series PLC For FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
F-3
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog output using the 4DA-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Refer to Chapter 1.

Refer to Chapter 2.

Refer to the common • Output characteristics
pages.

Refer to Chapter 3.
Wiring Wiring:
• Analog output line
Refer to Chapter 4.
Programming:
Programming
Refer to Chapter 5.
Changing of output characteristics Method of output characteristics change:

If the error status data or the output analog value

F-4
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number
A
Common Items
The 4DA-ADP is compatible with the following PLCs.

FX3S Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later *1 After March 2013 (From first product) B
FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later*1 After June 2008 (From first product)
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U Series PLC *1 After May 2005 (From first product)
Ver. 2.20 or later
FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.20 or later*1 After April 2004
*1. For versions that support 4DA-ADP hardware error status check, refer to Section 6.5. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
1. Version check
2. How to check the manufacturer's serial number D

FX3G-2AD-BD
product.
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-5
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

1. English versions
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Point
F-6
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 2.1 Generic Specifications
Common Items
2. Specifications
This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for 4DA-ADP. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Relative
humidity
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
FX3G-2AD-BD
DIN Rail Mounting
10 to 57 − 0.075
Direct Mounting*2
−
Shock
57 to 150 9.8
E
FX3U-4DA
resistance*1
Dielectric
withstand
voltage
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Grounding
Working
Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts G
environment
FX3G-1DA-BD
Working
< 2000 m*4
altitude

*2. If 4DA-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
*3. Other Other Other

PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Best condition Good condition Not allowed I
FX3U-4AD-PT
*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use 4DA-ADP.
The 4DA-ADP may malfunction.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-7
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications
Item Specifications
D/A conversion circuit 24 V DC +20 %-15 %, 150 mA
driving power (It is necessary to connect a 24 V DC power line to the terminal block.)
5 V DC, 15 mA
Interface driving power (Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit of the FX Series, it is not
Specifications
Item
Analog output 0 V to 10 V DC 4 mA to 20 mA DC
Digital input 12 bits, binary
Resolution 2.5 mV (10 V/4000) 4 μA (16 mA/4000)
• ±0.5 % (±50 mV) for 10 V full scale
(when ambient temperature is 25 °C±5 °C)
(when ambient temperature is 0 °C to 55
°C)
• ±0.5 % (±80 μA) for 16 mA full scale
If the external load resistance (Rs) is less than
Total accuracy • ±1.0 % (±160 μA) for 16 mA full scale
5 kΩ, the value calculated from the following
(when ambient temperature is 0 °C to 55
formula will be added:
°C)
(Addition will be 100 mV per 1%.)
47100
-0.9 %
Rs+47
for 10 V full scale
• FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200 μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.)
D/A conversion
• FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250 μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.)
time
10V 20mA
Analog output
Analog output
Output
characteristics
4mA
0 4000 4080 0 4000 4080

Insulation method • The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog output area.
Numbers of I/O
points occupied
F-8
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 2.4 D/A Conversion Time
A
2.4 D/A Conversion Time
Common Items
This section describes the D/A conversion time.

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
1. D/A conversion and special data register update timing
D/A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC.
During execution of the END instruction, the PLC writes the output setting data of the special data registers,
performs D/A conversion of the data, and updates the analog output data.
FX3U-4DA-ADP FX3S Series PLC C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Sequence
program
Digital value
D/A
conversion
writing
D
D/A conversion
FX3G-2AD-BD
250 s start command END instruction
/4ch
E
2. D/A conversion during PLC stop
FX3U-4DA
If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled by the special device, the offset value will be
output.
If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled, the output at switching from RUN to STOP will
be latched.
Just after power-on, however, the offset value will be output until operation begins.
F
3. D/A conversion speed (data update time)
FX3U-4DA-ADP
During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data per of 4 channel will be subject to D/A
conversion which takes 250 μs, after which the analog data will be output.
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-9

FX3U-4DA-ADP FX3U-4DA-ADP
Sequence
program
Digital value
D/A writing
conversion
D/A conversion
250 s start command
/4ch
END instruction
D/A Digital value writing
conversion
D/A conversion
250 s/4ch start command

output.
be latched.

During execution of the END instruction, data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D/A conversion
and then output (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter).

conversion which takes 250 μs, after which the analog data will be output.
END instruction execution time will be "250 μs × number of connected adapters".
F-10
A
Common Items
performs D/A conversion of the data, and updates the analog output data. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4DA-ADP FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC
n'th 1st
Sequence
program C
Digital value
FX3U-4AD-ADP
D/A writing
conversion
D/A conversion
200 s start command
/4ch
END instruction
D/A
conversion
Digital value writing D
D/A conversion
FX3G-2AD-BD
200 s/4ch start command
2. D/A conversion during PLC stop E

FX3U-4DA
output.
be latched.
3. If two or more analog special adapters are connected F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
During execution of the END instruction, data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D/A conversion
and then output (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter... 4th adapter).

conversion which takes 200 μs, after which the analog data will be output. G
END instruction execution time will be "200 μs × number of connected adapters".
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-11
3. Wiring
This chapter describes the 4DA-ADP wiring.
Observe the following caution to wire the 4DA-ADP.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
F-12
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 3.1 Terminal Layout
A
3.1 Terminal Layout
Common Items
The terminals of the 4DA-ADP are arranged as follows:
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Signal Application
24+
C
External power
FX3U-4AD-ADP
24-
Grounding terminal
V1+
I1+ Channel 1 analog output
COM1
V2+ D
FX3G-2AD-BD
COM2
V3+
COM3
V4+
I4+ Channel 4 analog output E
FX3U-4DA
COM4
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-13
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque

Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable end as shown below.
1. Cable
Termination
(AWG22 to 20)
• To connect a single-wire cable, just peel the cover off the


To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single wire directly or use a ferrule with insulation sleeve.
cannot protrude.
9mm
(0.35")
(0.1")

3. Tool
The head
straight.
Note:
<Reference>
Manufacturer Model
F-14
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 3.3 Power Supply Line
A
Common Items
Connect the 24 V DC power supply line of the 4DA-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

1. To use an External power supply 2. To use the 24V DC power of the PLC
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
4DA-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U 4DA-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U
Series Series
+15V PLC (Main unit) +15V PLC (Main unit)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
24+ 24- 24V 0V
24+ 24-
Terminal
D
Terminal
FX3G-2AD-BD
block block
Fuse
Class-D Class-D

" terminal to class-D grounded power supply line (100 Ω or less) together with the
FX3U-4DA
• Ground the "
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
4DA-ADP FX3UC Series PLC
(Main unit)
+15V
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Power
connector H
FX3U-3A-ADP
24+ 24- 24+ 24-

block
I
Fuse
FX3U-4AD-PT
Class-D
24V DC grounding
-ADP

Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-15
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 3.4 Analog Output Line
3.4 Analog Output Line

The analog output type, "voltage output" or "current output", can be selected for each channel.
If voltage output is selected: 4DA-ADP

Terminal
*1 Shielded block ch
V+
I+
Class-D COM
grounding *3
If current output is selected:

ch
V+
I+
Class-D COM
grounding *3
Connection of external power

supply line +15V
*2 24+
24V DC
24-
Class-D
grounding
V+, I+, ch:  represents the channel number.
*1. Use 2-core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog output lines, and separate the analog output
*2. For FX3S/FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (AC power type), the 24 V DC service power supply is also available.
3.5 Grounding
figure.
→ For details, refer to User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the each PLC Series.



F-16
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data
Common Items
4. Programming
This chapter describes how to create programs that can output the analog data using the 4DA-ADP. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data
1) The input digital data will be converted into analog data and then output to the terminals.
2) If data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the output mode can be C
specified.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
starting from the adapter nearest the main unit.
• FX3S Series PLC
Communi-
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
cation
FX3U-4DA special FX3S-CNV
Special devices
D/A
M8280 to M8289
Sequence E
Program
FX3U-4DA
D8280 to D8289

Communi- F
cation
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3U-4DA special FX3U-4DA
-ADP adapter -ADP FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC*2
2nd*1 1st
Special devices
D/A
M8280 to M8289 G
FX3G-1DA-BD
D8280 to D8289 Sequence
Program
M8290 to M8299
D/A Special data registers:
D8290 to D8299
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
*2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4DA-ADP to the FX3G Series PLC. I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-17
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data

Communi-
cation
FX3U-4DA FX3U-4DA FX3U-4DA special FX3U-4DA
-ADP -ADP -ADP adapter -ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC*1

M8260 to M8269
D8260 to D8269

M8270 to M8279
D8270 to D8279
Sequence
program
M8280 to M8289
D8280 to D8289

M8290 to M8299
D8290 to D8299
next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter, and so on. In this case, however, do not include the high-
*1. An expansion board is required to connect the FX3U-4DA-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.
F-18
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.2 List of Special Devices
A
Common Items
If 4DA-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table:
• FX3S Series PLC
R: Read / W: Write
Special
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
device
M8280 Switches the output mode of channel 1. R/W
M8281 Switches the output mode of channel 2. R/W Section
M8282 Switches the output mode of channel 3. R/W 4.3
Special M8283 Switches the output mode of channel 4. R/W C

auxiliary M8284 Sets the cancel of the channel-1 output holding function. R/W
FX3U-4AD-ADP
relay M8285 Sets the cancel of the channel-2 output holding function. R/W Section
M8286 Sets the cancel of the channel-3 output holding function. R/W 4.4
M8287 Sets the cancel of the channel-4 output holding function. R/W
M8288 to M8289
D8280
Unused (Do not use.)
Channel-1 output setting data
-
R/W
-
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
D8281 Channel-2 output setting data R/W Section
D8282 Channel-3 output setting data R/W 4.5
Special D8283 Channel-4 output setting data R/W
data D8284 to D8287 Unused (Do not use.) - -
register
Section E
D8288 Error status R/W
4.6
FX3U-4DA
Section
D8289 Model code = 2 R
4.7

R: Read / W: Write
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
device 1st 2nd
M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1. R/W
M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2. R/W Section
M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3. R/W 4.3
M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4. R/W
G
Special
FX3G-1DA-BD
M8284 M8294 Sets the cancel of the channel-1 output holding function. R/W
auxiliary
relay M8285 M8295 Sets the cancel of the channel-2 output holding function. R/W Section
M8286 M8296 Sets the cancel of the channel-3 output holding function. R/W 4.4
M8287 M8297 Sets the cancel of the channel-4 output holding function. R/W
M8288 to M8298 to
H
M8289 M8299
FX3U-3A-ADP
D8280 D8290 Channel-1 output setting data R/W

D8281 D8291 Channel-2 output setting data R/W Section
D8282 D8292 Channel-3 output setting data R/W 4.5
Special
D8283
D8284 to
D8293 Channel-4 output setting data
D8294 to
R/W
I
data Unused (Do not use.) - -
FX3U-4AD-PT
register D8287 D8297

Section
D8288 D8298 Error status R/W
4.6
-ADP
Section
D8289 D8299 Model code = 2 R
4.7
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-19
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.2 List of Special Devices

R: Read / W: Write
Switches the output mode of
M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 R/W
channel 1.
M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 R/W
channel 2. Section
Switches the output mode of 4.3
M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 R/W
channel 3.
M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 R/W
channel 4.
Special
Sets the cancel of the channel-1
auxiliary M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 R/W
output holding function.
relay
M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295 R/W
output holding function. Section
Sets the cancel of the channel-3 4.4
M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 R/W
M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 R/W
M8268 to M8278 to M8288 to M8298 to
M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299
D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel-1 output setting data R/W
D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel-2 output setting data R/W Section
D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel-3 output setting data R/W 4.5
D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel-4 output setting data R/W
Special
data D8264 to D8274 to D8284 to D8294 to
register D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297
Section
D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W
4.6
Section
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 2 R
4.7
F-20
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.3 Switching of Output Mode
A
4.3 Switching of Output Mode
Common Items
Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the output mode of 4DA-ADP between the current output
mode and the voltage output mode.
To switch the output mode, use the following special auxiliary relays:
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Special auxiliary
Description
relay
M8280 Switches the output mode of channel 1
M8281 Switches the output mode of channel 2 OFF:Voltage output
M8282 Switches the output mode of channel 3 ON :Current output C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
M8283 Switches the output mode of channel 4

Special auxiliary
relay
1st 2nd
Description
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1
M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 OFF:Voltage output
M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 ON :Current output
M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4

E
FX3U-4DA
Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1
M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 OFF:Voltage output
F
M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 ON :Current output
FX3U-4DA-ADP
M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4

To switch the output mode of a channel, create a sequence program as follows: G
FX3G-1DA-BD
1) To switch the channel output mode of 2) To switch the output mode of channel 2
channel 1 of the 1st analog special of the 1st analog special adapter to the
adapter to the voltage output mode: current output mode:
M8001 M8000
M8260 M8261
Normally OFF Normally ON H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-21
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting
4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting

This setting can hold the analog data output or to output the offset data (0V for voltage output mode, 4mA for
current output mode) when the PLC stops.
To cancel or set the output holding function, use the following special auxiliary relays:
• FX3S Series PLC
Special auxiliary
Description
relay
Cancel output holding function
M8284
setting for channel 1
M8285 OFF: Holds the analog data output just before stop of the
PLC.
Cancel output holding function ON : Outputs the offset data at stop of the PLC.
M8286
M8287

Special auxiliary
relay Description
1st 2nd
M8284 M8294
M8285 M8295 OFF: Holds the analog data output just before stop of the
PLC.
Cancel output holding function ON : Outputs the offset data at stop of the PLC.
M8286 M8296
M8287 M8297

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294
Cancel output holding function OFF: Holds the analog data output
M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295
setting for channel 2 just before stop of the PLC.
Cancel output holding function ON : Outputs the offset data at
M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 stop of the PLC.
M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297

To set or cancel the output holding function for a channel, create a sequence program as follows:
1) To set the output holding function for 2) To cancel the output holding function for
channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter: channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter:
M8001 M8000
M8264 M8265
F-22
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.5 Output Setting Data
A
4.5 Output Setting Data
Common Items
The 4DA-ADP performs D/A conversion on the output setting data (digital data) into analog data, and outputs
the analog data.
Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the output setting data: B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• FX3S Series PLC
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP

Description
1st 2nd D
D8280 D8290 Channel-1 output setting data
FX3G-2AD-BD
• FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC E
FX3U-4DA
Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel-1 output setting data
D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel-3 output setting data F
FX3U-4DA-ADP

M8000
FNC 12 D100 D8260
Performs D/A conversion using the digital
data stored in the D100 for channel 1 of
G
MOV
FX3G-1DA-BD
Normally ON the 1st analog special adapter.

FNC 12 D101 D8261 data stored in the D101 for channel 2 of
MOV the 1st analog special adapter.
H
Using the indicator or the sequence program, input the digital data to be subject to D/A conversion (to be
FX3U-3A-ADP
output as analog data) in D100 and D101.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-23
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.6 Error Status
4.6 Error Status
1. Description of setting
If an error is detected on 4DA-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data
register.
• FX3S Series PLC

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.
Bit Description
b0 Channel-1 output data setting error
b4 EEPROM error
b5 Unused
b6 4DA-ADP hardware error (Power supply error included)*1
b7 to b15 Unused
*1. The 4DA-ADP is supported from June, 2009 and later.

For using the 4DA-ADP, it is necessary to use a main unit whose version supports this function.
For the applicability of each combination of 4DA-ADP and main unit, refer to Section 6.5.
F-24
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.6 Error Status
A
Common Items
M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0
MOV
Normally
ON
M0
Y000 Channel-1 output data setting error in
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
3rd*1 adapter.
M1
3rd*1 adapter.
M2
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
3rd*1 adapter.
M3
3rd*1 adapter.
M4
Y004 EEPROM error in the 3rd*1 adapter. D
FX3G-2AD-BD

E
D8268.0
FX3U-4DA
1st adapter.
D8268.1
1st adapter.
F
D8268.2
FX3U-4DA-ADP
1st adapter.
D8268.3
1st adapter.
G
D8268.4
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-25
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.7 Model Code
4.7 Model Code
Initial value: K2
When the 4DA-ADP is connected, model code "2" is stored in the corresponding special data register.
The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code:
• FX3S Series PLC
D8289 Model code

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code
Use the special data registers above to check whether 4DA-ADP is connected or not.

Checks the model code
FNC224 D8269 K2 Y007 of the 1st analog special
LD= adapter.

Create the following basic program example to output D/A converted analog data.
The following program will set channel 1 of the 3rd*1 adapter to the voltage output mode and channel 2 to
current output mode, and will set digital data in D100 and D101 for D/A conversion.
M8001
M8280 Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage
output mode (0 V to 10 V).
Normally
OFF
M8284 Sets the output holding function for channel 1.
M8000
M8281 Sets the output mode of channel 2 to the current
output mode (4 mA to 20 mA).
Normally
ON
M8285 Cancels the output holding function for channel 2.
M8000
FNC 12 D100 D8280 Performs D/A conversion with the digital data stored
Normally MOV in D100 for channel 1.
ON
MOV in D101 for channel 2.
F-26
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Output Characteristics
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics
Common Items
5. Changing of Output Characteristics
Use the scaling instruction (SCL/FNC259) for the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to change the output B
characteristics.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLCs do not support the scaling instruction. Use sequence programs to change the
output characteristics.
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction.
5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital value range from 400 to 2000
(when analog output range is 1 to 5 V) to 0 to 10000.
A specified digital value is inputted into D100.
1. Output characteristics
Voltage output characteristics
D
subject to D/A conversion
Digital value characteristics
FX3G-2AD-BD
(product specifications) Specified digital output
to be changed
value to be actually
10V
Analog output
Y-axis
E
5V 2000
FX3U-4DA
(5V)
1V 400
(1V)
X-axis
0 400 2000 4000
Digital value input
0 10000
Desired digital value (D100)
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
2. Example of program 1 (For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC)
For example, create the following program to change the digital output of the 1st analog special adapter.
M8001
M8260 Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output
Normally
OFF
mode. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
M8002
FNC 12 Program for setting scaling instruction data table
K2 D50
Initial MOV
pulse
FNC 12
Item
Number of points
Description
Sets the number of points.
Value Device
2 D50
H
K0 D51
FX3U-3A-ADP
MOV X- Digital value of specified 0 D51

Start coordinate start point on X-axis
FNC 12 point Y- Digital value of desired D/A
K400 D52 400 D52
MOV coordinate conversion start point
X- Digital value of specified end 10000 D53
FNC 12 End coordinate point on X-axis
MOV
K10000 D53
point Y- Digital value of desired D/A 2000
D54
I
coordinate conversion end point
FX3U-4AD-PT
FNC 12 K2000 D54

MOV
M8000 The result of operation by scaling instruction will be stored
FNC259
-ADP
D100 D50 D8260 in the D8260.

Normally SCL
ON
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
If the input digital value for the D/A conversion is out of the data table range specified by the SCL instruction
the PLC will detect an operation error (error code: K6706).
-ADP
F-27
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics
3. Example of program 2 (For FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC)

For example, create the following program to change the digital output data (D100) of the 1st analog special
adapter.
M8001
Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the
M8280
Normally voltage output mode.
OFF
Sets the output holding function for
M8284
channel 1.
FNC230 D100 K0 FNC237 D100 K10000 M10 Check to make sure the digital
M10
FNC 22 D100 K1600 D101
MUL
FNC 23 D101 K10000 D103

DDIV Calculation for changing output
characteristics.
FNC 20 D103 K400 D107 Stores the operation result in D8280.
ADD
FNC 12 D107 D8280

MOV
F-28
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 6.1 PLC Version Number Check
Common Items
6. Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status. B
If analog data is not output, or if the proper analog value is not output, check the following items:
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• Version number of PLC
• Wiring
• Special devices
• Programs C
• Error status
FX3U-4AD-ADP
• Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3S Series are compatible. D
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
6.2 Wiring Check
F
1. Power
FX3U-4DA-ADP
The 4DA-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that
the POWER indicator lamp of the 4DA-ADP is on.

Use the 2-core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog output line. In addition, be sure to separate the
analog output line from other power lines or inductive lines. G
FX3G-1DA-BD

Check whether the special devices for the 4DA-ADP are being used correctly: H
FX3U-3A-ADP
1. Output mode switching

Verify that the special device for switching the output mode is correctly set.
Turn off the device to set the output mode to the voltage output mode. Turn on the device to set the output
mode to the current output mode.
2. Output setting data I

Check that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be
FX3U-4AD-PT
selected depending on the connected position and the channel.
3. Error status
-ADP
Check that no error is detected in the 4DA-ADP.

J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-29
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 6.4 Program Check
6.4 Program Check

1. Device for setting specified digital value

Check that different values are not written to this device using other programs.

If an error occurs in the 4DA-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn on.
power is cycled.
Bit Description
b4 EEPROM error
b5 Unused
b6 4DA-ADP hardware error (Power supply error included)*1
b7 to b15 Unused
*1. The 4DA-ADP is supported from June, 2009 and later.

For using the 4DA-ADP, it is necessary to use a main unit whose version supports this function.
For the applicability of each combination of 4DA-ADP and main unit, refer to the table below.
4DA-ADP FX3G Series PLC FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

FX3S FX3GC
year and month Former than Ver. 1.20 Former than Ver. 2.61 or
Series PLC Series PLC
of production Ver. 1.10 or later Ver. 2.60 later
Former than Not Not Not Not Not Not
2009 May applicable applicable applicable applicable applicable applicable
2009 June Not Not
Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable
or later applicable applicable
For confirmation of the version of the main unit and checking the 4DA-ADP serial number, refer to the
following.
→ For details of confirmation of the PLC main unit version,
→ For details of check of the 4DA-ADP serial number,
1. Output data setting error (b0 to b3)

The specified digital value is outside the specified range.
Analog data will not be correctly output.
2) Remedy
Check that the specified digital value is within the specified range.

The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or
is destroyed.
2) Remedy
F-30
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Error Status Check
A
3. 4DA-ADP hardware error (b6)
Common Items
The 4DA-ADP is not operating properly.
2) Remedy
Check that the 24 V DC power is properly supplied to the 4DA-ADP. Also check that the 4DA-ADP is
correctly connected to the PLC. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
representative.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
F-31
FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Error Status Check
MEMO
F-32
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output)
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
G. FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) D
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation method for the FX3G-1DA-BD analog output
expansion board (1-channel analog output) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or
use the unit.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
it to the end user.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
G-1
G-2
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 1.1 Outline of Functions
Common Items
1. Outline
This chapter outlines the FX3G-1DA-BD (referred to as 1DA-BD). B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
The FX3G-1DA-BD is an analog expansion board. Which is connectable with the FX3S/FX3G Series PLC to
output the voltage/current data for up to 1 channel.
C
1) Only 1 1DA-BD unit can be connected to the FX3S Series PLC.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Up to 2 1DA-BD units can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (40-point and 60-point type).
Only 1 1DA-BD unit can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
(Including other analog expansion boards, analog special adapters).
2) Either "voltage output" or "current output" can be specified.
3) The D/A conversion results will be automatically output as the values to the special data register of the D
FX3S/FX3G Series PLC.
FX3G-2AD-BD
• FX3S Series PLC

referred to
Only 1

Number of connectable E
including other analog expansion units
FX3U-4DA
boards, analog special adapters. FX3S Series PLC

to Section 1.3.
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Connected to the option connector
Analog data For a detailed

 description of wiring,
refer to Chapter 3.
G
Inverter, etc.
FX3G-1DA-BD
Contents H
Output mode Transfer direction
FX3U-3A-ADP
switching For FX3S Series PLC For a detailed description

Output setting data Special devices  of special devices, refer to
Chapter 4.
M/D8260 to M/D8269
Error status For a detailed description
of a basic program, refer to
Section 4.8.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
G-3
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 1.1 Outline of Functions
• FX3G Series PLC

referred to
2*1 maximum Number of connectable

including other analog expansion 
units
boards, analog special adapters. FX3G Series PLC
Board B Board A To check the connectable

to Section 1.3.
Analog data Connected to the option connector 2

For a detailed
 description of wiring,
refer to Chapter 3.
Inverter, etc.
Contents For FX3G Series PLC For a detailed description

Output mode Transfer direction Special devices  of special devices, refer to
Chapter 4.
switching Board A M/D8260 to M/D8269
Output setting data For a detailed description
Board B M/D8270 to M/D8279 of a basic program, refer to
Error status Section 4.8.
Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable
units and to configure the entire system.
*1. Only 1 analog board can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
G-4
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation
A
Common Items
Before starting analog output using the 1DA-BD, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3G-1DA-BD B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Refer to Chapter 1.

Refer to Chapter 2. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Refer to the common • Output characteristics
pages.
System configuration and selection

D
System configuration:
FX3G-2AD-BD
Refer to Chapter 3.
Wiring Wiring:
• Analog output line E
FX3U-4DA
Refer to Chapter 4.
Programming:
Programming
Refer to Chapter 5.
F
Changing of output characteristics Method of output characteristics change
FX3U-4DA-ADP
If the error status data or the output analog value G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
G-5
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number

The 1DA-BD is compatible with the following PLC.

FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.10 or later After October 2008
1. Version check

product.

The following programming tools and versions are applicable for the FX3S/FX3G series.
1. English versions
FX3S PLC
GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Ver. 1.492N or later -
FX-30P Ver. 1.50 or later -
FX3G PLC
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
Point
G-6
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 2.1 Generic Specifications
Common Items
2. Specifications
This chapter describes the general and performance specifications for 1DA-BD. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Relative
humidity
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
FX3G-2AD-BD
DIN Rail Mounting
10 to 57 − 0.075
Direct Mounting
−
Shock
57 to 150 9.8
E
m/s2
FX3U-4DA
resistance*1
Grounding
<Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed.>*2 F
Working
FX3U-4DA-ADP
environment
Working
altitude < 2000 m*3

G
*2.
FX3G-1DA-BD

→ For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.5. H

FX3U-3A-ADP
*3. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use 1DA-BD.
The 1DA-BD may malfunction.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
G-7
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 2.2 Performance Specifications
Specifications
Item
Analog output 0 V to 10 V DC 4 mA to 20 mA DC
Digital input 12 bits, binary 11 bits, binary
Resolution 2.5 mV (10 V/4000) 8 μA (16 mA/2000)
(when ambient temperature is 0 °C to 55 °C)
• ±0.5 % (±80 μA) for 16 mA full scale
Shipment adjustment is carried out by external (when ambient temperature is 25 °C±5 °C)
Total accuracy load resistance 2 kΩ. • ±1.0 % (±160 μA) for 16 mA full scale
If external load resistance becomes larger (when ambient temperature is 0 °C to 55
than 2 kΩ, the output voltage will increase °C)
slightly.
When the load is 1 MΩ, the output voltage
becomes about 2 % higher than the correct
value.
D/A conversion 60 μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.)
time → For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.3.
10V 20mA
Analog output
Analog output
Output
characteristics
4mA
0 4000 4080 0 2000 2040

Caution:
An area of dead band is located in the region
of 0 V. Therefore the output analog value may
not represent the digital value accurately.
Insulation method • The analog output area is not insulated from the PLC.
Numbers of I/O
points occupied
G-8
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 2.3 D/A Conversion Time
A
2.3 D/A Conversion Time
Common Items
This section describes the D/A conversion time.
2.3.1 For FX3S Series PLC

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3S Series PLC C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Sequence Program
D
END instruction
FX3G-2AD-BD
D/A conversion Digital value
start command writing E
FX3U-4DA
D/A
conversion
60 s
/1ch
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3G-1DA-BD

output. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
be latched.

During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data will be subject to D/A conversion which
takes 60 μs, after which the analog data will be output.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
G-9
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 2.3 D/A Conversion Time
2.3.2 For FX3G Series PLC

FX3G Series PLC
Sequence Program
END instruction
D/A conversion Digital value D/A conversion Digital value

start command writing start command writing
D/A D/A
conversion conversion
60 s 60 s
/1ch /1ch
FX3G-1DA-BD FX3G-1DA-BD
Board A Board B

output.
be latched.
3. If two analog expansion boards are connected

During execution of the END instruction, data in all the connected boards will be subject to D/A conversion
and then output (in the order of board A → board B).

During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data will be subject to D/A conversion which
takes 60 μs, after which the analog data will be output.
END instruction execution time will be "60 μs × number of connected board."
G-10
Common Items
3. Wiring
This chapter describes the 1DA-BD wiring. B
Observe the following caution to wire the 1DA-BD.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
FX3U-4AD-ADP
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3U-4DA
FX3U-4DA-ADP
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
G-11
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 3.1 Terminal Layout
3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the 1DA-BD are arranged as follows:
Signal • • V+ I+ VI-
Unused Output COM
Application
terminal terminal terminal
G-12
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque
A
Common Items
1. Cable
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Termination
(AWG22 to 20)
2-wire 0.3 mm2 (AWG22)×2
• To connect a single-wire cable, just peel the cover off the
cable before connection.
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact) D
FX3G-2AD-BD

E
FX3U-4DA
cannot protrude.
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
9mm
(0.35")
the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable while
(Crimp area)
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
(0.1")
*3. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 H

FX3U-3A-ADP
3. Tool
The head
straight. I
Note:
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP

<Reference>
J
Manufacturer Model
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
G-13
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 3.3 Analog Output Line
3.3 Analog Output Line
If voltage output is selected: 1DA-BD

Terminal
block
*1 Shield
V+
I+
*2 Class-D VI-
grounding
If current output is selected: 1DA-BD

Terminal
block
*1 Shield
V+
I+
*2 Class-D VI-
grounding
3.4 Grounding
figure.
→ For details, refer to User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the each PLC Series.



G-14
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data
Common Items
4. Programming
This chapter describes how to create programs that can output the analog data using the 1DA-BD. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data
2) If data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the output mode can be C
specified.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
3) In the FX3G Series PLC (40-point or 60-point type), special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data
registers (10 points) are assigned to each analog expansion board, board A and B connected to option
connector 1 and 2 respectively, in that order.
In the FX3G Series PLC (14-point or 24-point type) and FX3S Series PLC, special auxiliary relays (10
points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
• FX3S Series PLC
FX3S Series PLC
Sequence Program
E
FX3U-4DA
M8260 to M8269
Special data register:
D8260 to D8269
Option connector F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
D/A
FX3G-1DA-BD
• FX3G Series PLC
FX3G Series PLC

G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Sequence Program

M8260 to M8269
M8270 to M8279 H
Special data register: Special data register:
FX3U-3A-ADP
D8260 to D8269 D8270 to D8279
Option connector 1 Option connector 2

D/A D/A
FX3G-1DA-BD
Board A
FX3G-1DA-BD
Board B*1
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
The analog expansion board connected to option connector 1 is regarded as the "board A", and the analog
expansion board connected to option connector 2 is regarded as the "board B".
-ADP
*1. Board B is not available in the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
G-15
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 4.2 List of Special Devices

If 1DA-BD is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table:
• FX3S Series PLC
R: Read / W: Write
Special device Device number Description Attribute Reference
M8260 Switches the output mode. R/W Section 4.3
Special auxiliary M8261 to M8263 Unused (Do not use.) - -
relay M8264 Sets the cancel of output holding function. R/W Section 4.4
D8260 Output setting data R/W Section 4.5
Special data D8261 to D8267 Unused (Do not use.) - -
register D8268 Error status R/W Section 4.6
• FX3G Series PLC

R: Read / W: Write
Device number
Special device Description Attribute Reference
Board A Board B
M8260 M8270 Switches the output mode. R/W Section 4.3
M8261 to M8271 to
Special auxiliary M8263 M8273
relay M8264 M8274 Sets the cancel of output holding function. R/W Section 4.4
M8265 to M8275 to
M8269 M8279
D8260 D8270 Output setting data R/W Section 4.5
D8261 to D8271 to
Special data Unused (Do not use.) - -
D8267 D8277
register

Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the output mode of 1DA-BD between the current output mode
and the voltage output mode.
• FX3S Series PLC
OFF:Voltage output
M8260 Switches the output mode.
ON :Current output
• FX3G Series PLC

Description
Board A Board B
OFF:Voltage output
M8260 M8270 Switches the output mode.
ON :Current output

To switch the output mode, create a sequence program as follows:
To switch the channel output mode of the
board A to the voltage output mode:
M8001
M8260
Normally OFF
G-16
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting
A
Common Items
This setting can hold the analog data output or to output the offset data (0 V for voltage output mode, 4 mA for
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
OFF: Holds the analog data output just before
M8264 stop of the PLC.
setting.
ON : Outputs the offset data at stop of the PLC.
• FX3G Series PLC C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Description
Board A Board B
OFF: Holds the analog data output just before
M8264 M8274 stop of the PLC.
setting.
ON : Outputs the offset data at stop of the PLC.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
To set or cancel the output holding function, create a sequence program as follows:
To set the output holding function

for the board A:
M8001
M8264
E
FX3U-4DA
Normally OFF

F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
The 1DA-BD performs D/A conversion on the output setting data (digital data) into analog data, and outputs
the analog data.
Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the output setting data:
• FX3S Series PLC
Special data register Description G
FX3G-1DA-BD
D8260 Output setting data
• FX3G Series PLC

Description
Board A Board B
H
D8260 D8270 Output setting data
FX3U-3A-ADP
M8000 Performs D/A conversion using the digital

FNC 12 D100 D8260
Normally ON
MOV
data stored in the D100 for the board A.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT

FNC 12 D101 D8270 data stored in the D101 for the board B.
MOV
-ADP
output as analog data) in D100 and D101. J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
G-17
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 4.6 Error Status
4.6 Error Status
If an error is detected on 1DA-BD, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data
register.
• FX3S Series PLC
• FX3G Series PLC

Description
Board A Board B
Bit Description
b0 Output data setting error
b1 to b3 Unused
b4 EEPROM error
b5 to b15 Unused

M8000 FNC 12
D8268 K4M0
MOV
Normally
ON
M0
Y000 Output data setting error on
board A.
M4
Y004 EEPROM error on the board A.
4.7 Model Code
Initial value: K4
When the 1DA-BD is connected, model code "4" is stored in the corresponding special data register.
• FX3S Series PLC
D8269 Model code
• FX3G Series PLC

Description
Board A Board B
Use the special data registers above to check whether 1DA-BD is connected or not.
FNC224 Checks the model code

D8269 K4 Y007 of the board A.
LD=
G-18
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 4.8 Basic Program Example
A
Common Items
Create the following basic program example to output D/A converted analog data.
The following program will set the board A to the voltage output mode and board B to current output mode,
and will set digital data in D100 and D101 for D/A conversion. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
M8001
M8260 Sets the output mode of the board A to the voltage
Normally
OFF
M8264 Sets the output holding function for the board A.
M8000
Sets the output mode of the board B to the current
C
M8270
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Normally output mode (4 mA to 20 mA).
ON
M8274 Cancels the output holding function for the board B.
M8000
FNC 12 Performs D/A conversion with the digital data stored
Normally MOV
D100 D8260
in D100 for the board A. D
ON
FX3G-2AD-BD
MOV in D101 for the board B.
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
G-19
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics
5. Changing of Output Characteristics

The output characteristics can be changed using sequence programs in FX3S/FX3G Series PLCs.
5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics


(product specifications) to be changed
Specified digital output

10V
Analog output
Y-axis
5V 2000
(5V)
1V 400
(1V)
0 400 2000 4000 X-axis
0 10000
Digital value input
2. Example of program (For FX3G Series PLC)

For example, create the following program to change the digital output data (D100) of the board A.
M8001
M8260 Sets the output mode of 1st board
Normally to the voltage output mode (0 V to 10 V).
OFF
M8264 Sets the output mode to the

output holding mode.
M10
FNC 22
D100 K1600 D101
MUL
FNC 23
D101 K10000 D103
characteristics.
FNC 20 Stores the operation result in D8260.
D103 K400 D107
ADD
FNC 12 D107 D8260

MOV
G-20
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 6.1 PLC Version Number Check
Common Items
6. Troubleshooting
If analog data is not output, or if the proper analog value is not output, check the following items:
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• Version number of PLC
• Installation
• Wiring
• Special devices C
• Programs
FX3U-4AD-ADP
• Error status

D
• Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (Initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3S Series are compatible.
FX3G-2AD-BD
6.2 Checking installation

E
FX3U-4DA
Confirm that the 1DA-BD is attached correctly to the main unit. Confirm also that the POW indicator lamp of
the 1DA-BD is lit correctly.
For installation details, refer to the following manual.
→ Refer to FX3S User’s Manual-Hardware Edition.
→ Refer to FX3G User’s Manual-Hardware Edition. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
6.3 Wiring Check

G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Use the 2-core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog output line. In addition, be sure to separate the
analog output line from other power lines or inductive lines.
6.4 Special Device Check H

FX3U-3A-ADP
Check whether the special devices for the 1DA-BD are being used correctly:

I
FX3U-4AD-PT
2. Output setting data

Check that the special device is correctly selected. This special device should be selected depending on the
-ADP
connected position and the channel.
3. Error status J
Check that no error is detected in the 1DA-BD.
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
G-21
FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Program Check
6.5 Program Check



If an error occurs in the 1DA-BD, the corresponding bit will turn on.
power is cycled.
Bit Description
b0 Output data setting error
b1 to b3 Unused
b4 EEPROM error
b5 to b15 Unused
1. Output data setting error (b0)

2) Remedy

is destroyed.
2) Remedy
G-22
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output)
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
H. FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, D

1-channel Analog Output)
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-3A-ADP analog special
adapter (2-channel analog input, 1-channel analog output) and should be read and understood before I
attempting to install or use the unit.
FX3U-4AD-PT
it to the end user.
-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
H-1
H-2
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 1.1 Outline of Functions
Common Items
1. Outline
This chapter outlines the FX3U-3A-ADP (referred to as the 3A-ADP). B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
The analog special adapter FX3U-3A-ADP receives voltage/current data from 2 channels and outputs voltage/
current data from 1 channel when connected to a FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
1) Only 1 3A-ADP unit can be connected to the FX3S Series PLC.
Up to 2*1 3A-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC.
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Up to 4 3A-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
2) The 3A-ADP receives and outputs voltage/current data.
3) A/D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3S/
FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
4) D/A conversion results will be automatically output as the values to the special data register of the FX3S/
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
referred to
including the other analog expansion
Number of connectable E
 units
FX3U-4DA
Series PLC
+ +
to Section 1.3.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
*2
4th 3rd 2nd 1st Expansion board
adapter adapter adapter adapter
For a detailed
refer to Chapter 3. G
Flowmeter, Inverter, etc.
FX3G-1DA-BD
pressure sensor, etc
For FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
Contents
FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC
Special devices*3  For a detailed description
H
of special devices, refer to
FX3U-3A-ADP
 Analog data Transfer direction 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269 Chapter 4.

 Error status
 Switching of input mode 2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279 For a detailed description
 Setting of averaging time of a basic program, refer to
3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289 Section 4.12.
 Output mode switching
 Output setting data 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299
 Setting whether or not
a channel is used I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
*3. FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs use the following special devices. J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
H-3
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input / output using the 3A-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3U-3A-ADP
Refer to Chapter 1.

Refer to Chapter 2.

Refer to the • Input/output characteristics
common pages.

Refer to Chapter 3.
Wiring Wiring:
Refer to Chapter 4. • Analog input/output line
Refer to Chapter 5.
Changing of input/output characteristics Method of input/output characteristics change

If the error status data or the input/output analog

value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 6
"Troubleshooting."
H-4
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number
A
Common Items
The 3A-ADP is compatible with the following PLC.
FX3S Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later*1 After March 2013 (From first product) B
FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.20 or later*1 After June 2009
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.61 or later*1 After July 2009
FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.61 or later*1 After July 2009
*1. The FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.70 or later and FX3S Series PLC supports the under-scale C
detection. The FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC are not supported.
FX3U-4AD-ADP
1. Version check
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
product.
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-5
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

The following programming tools and versions are applicable for the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series
1. English versions
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Point
H-6
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 2.1 Generic Specifications
Common Items
2. Specifications
This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the 3A-ADP. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Relative humidity 5 to 95 %RH (no condensation) when operating
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
Vibration 10 to 57 - 0.035
direction (X-, Y-, and Z-
D
DIN Rail Mounting
FX3G-2AD-BD
80 min, each)
10 to 57 - 0.075
Direct Mounting*2
57 to 150 9.8 -
*1 2
Shock resistance 147 m/s Acceleration, Action time: 11 ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z
Using noise simulator of:
E
Noise resistance
FX3U-4DA
Noise voltage: 1,000 Vp-p / Noise width: 1 μs / Rise: 1 ns / Cycle: 30 to 100 Hz
Dielectric withstand
500 V AC, for 1 min
voltage
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Grounding
Working
environment
Working altitude < 2000 m*4
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
*2. If 3A-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible.
*3.

H
FX3U-3A-ADP

*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the 3A-ADP.
The 3A-ADP may malfunction.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
Item Specifications
Conversion circuit driving 24 V DC +20 %-15 %, 90 mA
power (It is necessary to connect a 24 V DC power line to the terminal block.) J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
5 V DC, 20 mA
Interface driving power (Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit of the FX Series, it is not
-ADP
H-7
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 2.3 Performance Specifications
Specifications
Item
Number of input/
2ch 1ch
output points
4 mA to 20 mA DC
Analog input/ 0 V to 10 V DC 4 mA to 20 mA DC 0 V to 10 V DC
(External load:
output range (Input resistance:198.7 kΩ) (Input resistance:250 Ω) (External load:5 k to 1 MΩ)
500 Ω or less)
Absolute -0.5 V, -2 mA,
- -
maximum input +15 V +30 mA
Digital input/
12 bits, binary
output
Resolution 2.5 mV (10 V × 1/4000) 5 μA (16 mA × 1/3200) 2.5 mV (10 V × 1/4000) 4 μA (16 mA × 1/4000)
Ambient
±0.5 % (±50 mV) ±0.5 % (±80 μA) ±0.5 % (±50 mV) ±0.5 % (±80 μA)
temperature:
for 10 V full scale for 16 mA full scale for 10 V full scale for 16 mA full scale
25±5 °C
Ambient
±1.0 % (±100 mV) ±1.0 % (±160 μA) ±1.0 % (±100 mV) ±1.0 % (±160 μA)
temperature:
for 10 V full scale for 16 mA full scale for 10 V full scale for 16 mA full scale
0 to 55 °C
Overall accuracy
If the external load

resistance (Rs) is less
than 5 kΩ, the accuracy
increases as shown in the
following formula:
Reference - - (Increase: 100 mV per -
1 %)
47100
-0.9 %
Rs+47
for 10 V full scale
• FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC :
80 μs for each selected input channel + 40 μs for each selected output channel
Time required for
• FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC :
conversion
90 μs for each selected input channel + 50 μs for each selected output channel
4080 3280
4000 3200 10V 20mA
Analog output
Analog output
Digital output
Digital output
I/O
characteristics
20.4mA
10.2V
4080
4080
4mA
0 10V 0 4mA 20mA 0 4000 0 4000
• The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC.
Insulation
• The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input and output area.
method
points occupied (This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)
H-8
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 2.4 Conversion Time
A
2.4 Conversion Time
Common Items
This section describes the conversion time.

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
1. Conversion and special data register update timing
A/D and D/A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC.
The PLC writes output setting data to special data registers, performs D/A conversion, and updates analog
output values. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3U-3A-ADP FX3S Series PLC
A/D conversion Sequence

90 s for each A/D,D/A conversion
start command program
selected input
channel D
+ Digital value writing
FX3G-2AD-BD
D/A conversion
50 s for each End instruction
selected output
channel
FX3U-4DA
2. Conversion during PLC STOP
1) A/D conversion
Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be
updated.
2) D/A conversion F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
output.
If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled, the output at switching from RUN to STOP
will be latched.
3. Conversion speed (data update time) G
FX3G-1DA-BD
1) A/D conversion
During execution of END instruction, the A/D converted data of "90 μs for each selected input channel",
END instruction execution time will be 90 μs for each selected input channel.
2) D/A conversion
During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data per of "50 μs for each selected output H
FX3U-3A-ADP
channel", after which the analog data will be output.

END instruction execution time will be 50 μs for each selected output channel.
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-9

output values.
FX3U-3A-ADP FX3U-3A-ADP
A/D conversion Sequence

90 s for each A/D,D/A conversion
selected input
channel
+ Digital value writing
D/A conversion
A/D conversion 50 s for each
90 s for each selected output
selected input channel A/D,D/A conversion End instruction
channel start command
+
D/A conversion Digital value writing
50 s for each
selected output Digital value reading
channel

1) A/D conversion
updated.
2) D/A conversion
output.
will be latched.

1) A/D conversion
During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected adapters (in the
order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter).
2) D/A conversion
During execution of the END instruction, data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D/A
conversion and then output (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter).
4. Conversion speed (data update time)

1) A/D conversion
END instruction execution time will be "90 μs for each selected input channel × number of connected
analog adapters."
2) D/A conversion
During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data per of "50 μs for each selected output
END instruction execution time will be "50 μs for each selected output channel × number of connected
adapters."
H-10
A
Common Items
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
output values.
FX3U-3A-ADP FX3U-3A-ADP
A/D conversion A/D,D/A conversion Sequence

C
80 s for each
FX3U-4AD-ADP
selected input
channel Digital value writing
+
D/A conversion
A/D conversion 40 s for each Digital value reading
80 s for each selected output
selected input channel A/D,D/A conversion
start command
End instruction D
channel
FX3G-2AD-BD
+
D/A conversion Digital value writing
40 s for each
selected output Digital value reading
channel

E
FX3U-4DA
1) A/D conversion
updated.
2) D/A conversion
If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled by the special device, the offset value will be F
output.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
will be latched.

1) A/D conversion
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected adapters (in the
order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter... 4th adapter).
2) D/A conversion
During execution of the END instruction, data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D/A
conversion and then output (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter... 4th adapter).
H
4. Conversion speed (data update time)
FX3U-3A-ADP
1) A/D conversion
END instruction execution time will be "80 μs for each selected input channel × number of connected
analog adapters." I
FX3U-4AD-PT
2) D/A conversion
During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data per of "40 μs for each selected output
-ADP
END instruction execution time will be "40 μs for each selected output channel × number of connected
adapters."
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-11
3. Wiring
This chapter describes the 3A-ADP wiring.
Observe the following caution to wire the 3A-ADP.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
H-12
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 3.1 Terminal Layout
A
3.1 Terminal Layout
Common Items
The terminals of the 3A-ADP are arranged as follows:
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Signal Application
24+
24-
External power
C
Grounding terminal
FX3U-4AD-ADP
• Do not connect any lines.
V1+
COM1
V2+
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
COM2
V0
I0 Analog output
COM
•
•
Do not connect any lines.
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-13
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque

below.
1. Cables
Termination
(AWG22 to 20)
following figure.)


To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single-wire directly or use a ferrule with insulation sleeve.
cannot protrude.
9mm
(0.35")
(0.1")

3. Tool
The head
straight.
Note:
If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque 0.4mm 2.5mm
shown in the table above, use the following screwdriver or an appropriate (0.01") (0.09")
<Reference>
Manufacturer Model
H-14
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 3.3 Power Supply Line
A
Common Items
Connect the 24 V DC power supply line of the 3A-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

1. To use an External power supply 2. To use the 24 V DC power of the PLC
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
3A-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U 3A-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U
+15V +15V
(Main unit) (Main unit)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V
D
Terminal Terminal
FX3G-2AD-BD
block block
Fuse
Class-D Class-D
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
3A-ADP FX3UC Series PLC
(Main unit)
+15V
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Power
connector
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
24+ 24- 24+ 24-

block
I
Fuse
FX3U-4AD-PT
Class-D
24V DC grounding
-ADP

Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line: J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-15
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 3.4 Analog Input / output Line
3.4 Analog Input / output Line
3.4.1 Analog Input Line

If current input is selected: 3A-ADP

Terminal
block
*1 110k ch
V +
*2 250
I +
COM
88.7k
*1 110k ch
V +
250
I +
COM
88.7k
Connection of external
power supply line +15V
24+
24V DC *3 24-
Class-D
grounding
V +,I +,ch : represents the channel number.
available.
3.4.2 Analog Output Line
If voltage output is selected: 3A-ADP

Terminal
block
V0
I0
COM
*2 Class-D grounding
If current output is selected: 3A-ADP

Terminal
*1 block
V0
I0
COM
*2 Class-D grounding
H-16
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 3.5 Grounding
A
3.5 Grounding
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
figure.
→ For details, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of the each PLC Series.


C
FX3U-4AD-ADP

FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-17
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Loading/Writing of Conversion Data
4. Programming
This chapter explains how to create programs for inputting and outputting analog data using the 3A-ADP.
4.1 Loading/Writing of Conversion Data
Loading of A/D Conversion Data

specified.
Writing of D/A Conversion Data

2) If data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the output mode can be
specified.
• FX3S Series PLC
Communi-
cation
FX3U-3A special FX3S-CNV
Special devices
A/D Special auxiliary relays:

M8280 to M8289 Sequence
or Special data registers: program
D/A D8280 to D8289
Communi-
cation
FX3U-3A special FX3U-3A
-ADP adapter -ADP FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC *2
*1
2nd 1st
Special devices
A/D M8280 to M8289
or Special data registers:
D/A D8280 to D8289.
Sequence
program
A/D M8290 to M8299
D/A D8290 to D8299.
next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter. However, in this case, do not include the connecter
*1. The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC (14-points and 24-points type).
*2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-3A-ADP to the FX3G Series PLC.
H-18
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.2 List of Special Devices
A
Common Items
Communic
FX3U-3A FX3U-3A FX3U-3A -ation FX3U-3A
-ADP -ADP -ADP special -ADP
adapter FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC*1
4th 3rd 2nd 1st Special devices B

FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
M8260 to M8269
D/A D8260 to D8269

M8270 to M8279
or
D/A
D8270 to D8279
C
Sequence
FX3U-4AD-ADP
program
M8280 to M8289
D/A D8280 to D8289.
A/D
M8290 to M8299
D
or
FX3G-2AD-BD
D/A D8290 to D8299
speed input/output special adapter, communication special adapter, and the CF card special adapter. E
*1. An expansion board is required to connect the FX3U-3A-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.
FX3U-4DA
If the 3A-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table:
F
• FX3S Series PLC
FX3U-4DA-ADP
R: Read / W: Write
Special
device
Section 4.3
M8281 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R/W G
M8282 Switches the output mode. R/W Section 4.4
FX3G-1DA-BD
Special M8286 Sets the cancel of output holding function. R/W Section 4.5
auxiliary Sets whether or not the input channel 1 is
relay M8287 R/W
used.
M8288
Sets whether or not the input channel 2 is
R/W Section 4.6
H
used.
FX3U-3A-ADP
Sets whether or not the output channel is

M8289 R/W
used.
Section 4.7
D8282 Output setting data R/W Section 4.8 I
FX3U-4AD-PT
D8283 Unused (Do not use.) - -

Special Averaging time for channel-1
D8284 R/W
data (Setting range: 1 to 4095)
-ADP
register Section 4.9

D8285 R/W
D8286 to D8287 Unused (Do not use.) - -
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
H-19
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.2 List of Special Devices

R: Read / W: Write
device 1st 2nd
Section 4.3
M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode. R/W Section 4.4
M8283 to M8293 to
M8285 M8296
Special
auxiliary M8286 M8296 Sets the cancel of output holding function. R/W Section 4.5
relay Sets whether or not the input channel 1 is
M8287 M8297 R/W
used.
Sets whether or not the input channel 2 is
M8288 M8298 R/W Section 4.6
used.
Sets whether or not the output channel is
M8289 M8299 R/W
used.
Section 4.7
D8282 D8292 Output setting data R/W Section 4.8
D8283 D8293 Unused (Do not use.) - -
Special D8284 D8294 R/W
data Section 4.9
register Averaging time for channel-2
D8285 D8295 R/W
D8286 D8296
D8287 D8297

R: Read / W: Write
M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R/W
Section 4.3
M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R/W
M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode. R/W Section 4.4
M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293
Special M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 Unused (Do not use.) - -
auxiliary
relay M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295
M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 Sets the cancel of output holding function. R/W Section 4.5
M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used. R/W
M8268 M8278 M8288 M8298 Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used. R/W Section 4.6
M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 Sets whether or not output channel is used. R/W
Section 4.7
D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Output setting data R/W Section 4.8
D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Unused (Do not use.) - -
Special D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W
data Section 4.9
register Averaging time for channel-2
D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 R/W
D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296
D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297
D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W Section 4.10
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 50 R Section 4.11
H-20
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.3 Switching of Input Mode
A
Common Items
Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the input mode of 3A-ADP between the current input mode
and the voltage input mode.
To switch the input mode, use the following special auxiliary relays:
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Special auxiliary
Description
relay
M8280 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF:Voltage input
M8281 Switches the input mode of channel 2 ON :Current input
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Special auxiliary
relay Description
1st 2nd
M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF:Voltage input
ON :Current input
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF:Voltage input
ON :Current input
E
FX3U-4DA
1) To switch the input mode of channel 1 2) To switch the input mode of channel 2
of the 1st analog special adapter to the of the 1st analog special adapter to the
voltage input mode: current input mode:
M8001
M8260
M8000
M8261
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP

Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the output mode of 3A-ADP between the current output mode G
and the voltage output mode.
FX3G-1DA-BD
• FX3S Series PLC
M8282 Switches the output mode

OFF:Voltage output
ON :Current output
H
FX3U-3A-ADP

Description
1st 2nd
M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode

OFF:Voltage output
ON :Current output
I
FX3U-4AD-PT

-ADP
Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode

OFF:Voltage output
ON :Current output
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-21
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.5 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting

To switch the output mode of a channel, create a sequence program as follows:
1) To switch the channel output mode of
channel 1 of the 1st analog special
adapter to the voltage output mode:
M8001
M8262
Normally OFF

This setting can hold the analog data output or to output the offset data (0V for voltage output mode, 4mA for
• FX3S Series PLC
Cancel output holding OFF: Holds the analog data output just before stop of the PLC.
M8286
function setting ON : Outputs the offset data at stop of the PLC.

Description
1st 2nd
Cancel output holding OFF: Holds the analog data output just before stop of the PLC.
M8286 M8296
function setting ON : Outputs the offset data at stop of the PLC.

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
OFF: Holds the analog data output
Cancel output holding just before stop of the PLC.
M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296
function setting ON : Outputs the offset data at stop
of the PLC.

To set or cancel the output holding function for a channel, create a sequence program as follows:
1) To set the output holding function for

channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter:
M8001
M8266
Normally OFF
H-22
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.6 Setting whether or not a channel is used
A
4.6 Setting whether or not a channel is used
Common Items
The 3A-ADP sets to ON or OFF special auxiliary relays to set whether or not each channel is used.
This setting can be used to disable or enable the input or output channels of the 3A-ADP.
• FX3S Series PLC
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Sets whether or not input
M8287
channel 1 is used.
Sets whether or not input OFF: Channel is used.
M8288
channel 2 is used. ON: Channel is not used.
M8289
Sets whether or not output
channel is used.
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Description
1st 2nd
M8287 M8297
channel 1 is used.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
M8288 M8298
channel 2 is used. ON: Channel is not used.
M8289 M8299
channel is used.
• FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs E

FX3U-4DA
Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297
channel 1 is used.
M8268 M8278 M8288 M8298
channel 2 is used. ON: Channel is not used. F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299
channel is used.
POINT
When the setting whether or not the output channel is used is changed from "Used (OFF)" to "Not used (ON)",
the last output before the change is held. G
FX3G-1DA-BD
1. Program Example (For FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs)
Set whether or not each channel is used in a sequence program.
1) To set that input channel 2 in the 1st unit
is not used:
M8000
M8268 H
Normally ON
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-23
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.7 Input Data
4.7 Input Data

The data converted by the 3A-ADP will be stored in the special data registers.
• FX3S Series PLC

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
time) will be stored in the above data registers as the input data.
When the channel is not used, "0" will be stored.

programming tool.

M8000 Stores the channel-1 input data
FNC 12 D8260 D100 of the 1st analog special adapter
MOV in the D100.
Normally
ON
FNC 12 D8261 D101 of the 1st analog special adapter
MOV in the D101.
H-24
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.8 Output Setting Data
A
Common Items
The 3A-ADP performs D/A conversion on the output setting data (digital data) into analog data, and outputs
the analog data.
Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the output setting data: B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• FX3S Series PLC
D8282 Output setting data

FX3U-4AD-ADP
Description
1st 2nd
D8282 D8292 Output setting data

Special data register D
Description
FX3G-2AD-BD
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Output setting data

M8000
FNC 12 D102 D8262
data stored in the D102 of the 1st analog
E
MOV
FX3U-4DA
Normally ON special adapter.
output as analog data) in D102.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-25
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.9 Averaging Time
4.9 Averaging Time

Initial value: K1
If the averaging time is set for the 3A-ADP, the average data will be stored as the input data. The averaging
• FX3S Series PLC

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th


Normally
ON
H-26
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.10 Error Status
A
4.10 Error Status
Common Items
If an error is detected in the 3A-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data
register.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD

1st 2nd
Description C
FX3U-4AD-ADP

Description
1st
D8268
2nd
D8278
3rd
D8288
4th
D
FX3G-2AD-BD

E
FX3U-4DA
3A-ADP hardware error
b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b6
(Power supply error included)*1
b1 Channel-2 over-scale detection b7 3A-ADP communication data error*2
b2
b3
Output data setting error
Unused
b8
b9
Channel-1 under-scale detection*3
F
Channel-2 under-scale detection*3
FX3U-4DA-ADP
*1. A 3A-ADP hardware error (b6) is valid only when the use of analog input is set.
Detection of power supply error is valid only when the use of analog input channel 2 is set.
*2. A 3A-ADP communication data error (b7) is valid only when the use of analog input is set.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
*3. Applicable for FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.70 or later and FX3S Series PLC.
If a 3A-ADP hardware error (b6) or 3A-ADP communication data error (b7) is detected, it is necessary to clear H
FX3U-3A-ADP

M8000
FNC 12
Normally ON MOV
D8288 K4M0
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
M8002 *1
Error status of 3rd analog special adapter
RST M6 b6 = OFF (3A-ADP hardware error)
Initial pulse
-ADP
*1
RST M7 Error status of 3rd analog status register
b7 = OFF (3A-ADP communication data error)
FNC 12 J
K4M0 D8288
FX3U-4AD-PTW
MOV

-ADP
H-27
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.10 Error Status

M8002
Error status of 1st analog special adapter
RST D8268.6 b6 = OFF (3A-ADP hardware error)
Initial pulse
RST D8268.7 Error status of 1st analog status register

b7 = OFF (3A-ADP communication data error)
2. Program Example 1 (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000
FNC 12 D8288 K4M0
Normally ON MOV
M0
the 3rd*1 adapter.
M1
the 3rd*1 adapter.
M2
Y002 Output data setting error of the 3rd*1
adapter.
M4
M5
3rd*1 adapter.
M6
Y006 3A-ADP hardware error in 3rd*1 adapter.
M7
Y007 3A-ADP communication data error in 3rd*1 adapter.
3. Program Example 2 (FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC)

D8268.0
the 1st adapter.
D8268.1
the 1st adapter.
D8268.2
Y002 Output data setting error of the 1st
adapter.
D8268.4
D8268.5
1st adapter.
D8268.6
Y006 3A-ADP hardware error in 1st adapter.
D8268.7
Y007 3A-ADP communication data error in 1st adapter.
H-28
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.11 Model Code
A
4.11 Model Code
Common Items
Initial value: K50
When the 3A-ADP is connected, model code "50" is stored in the corresponding special data register.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
• FX3S Series PLC
D8289 Model code

C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Description
1st 2nd

Description
D
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
FX3G-2AD-BD
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code
Use the special data registers above to check whether a 3A-ADP is connected or not.
E
FX3U-4DA
1. Program Example (FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC)
LD= analog special adapter.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-29
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.12 Basic Program Example

Create the following basic program example to input/output analog conversion data.
The following program will set channel 1 of the 3rd*1 adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to
current input mode, and will store the converted A/D value of channel-1 data into D100 and that of channel-
2 data into D101. The program also sets "voltage output" for output channels, and sets the D/A conversion
output to D102.
M8001 Set the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage
M8280
Normally OFF input mode (0 V to 10 V).
M8000 Set the input mode of channel 2 to the current
M8281
Normally ON input mode (4 mA to 20 mA).
M8001 Set the output mode to the voltage output mode
M8282
Normally (0 V to 10 V).
OFF
M8286 Set the output holding function.
M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0

Normally ON MOV
M8002
Initial
pulse
FNC 12 K4M0 D8288

MOV
M8000
FNC 12 K5 D8284 Set the averaging time to "5" for channel-1 data.
Normally MOV
ON
MOV
M8000
FNC 12 Stores the A/D converted channel-1 digital data
D8280 D100
Normally MOV into D100.
ON
FNC 12 D8281 D101 Stores the A/D converted channel-2 digital data
MOV into D101.
M8000
FNC 12 D102 D8282 Performs D/A conversion with the digital data
Normally MOV stored in D102.
ON
H-30
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.12 Basic Program Example
A
Common Items
The following program will set channel 1 of the 1st adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current
input mode, and will store the converted A/D value of channel-1 data into D100 and that of channel-2 data
into D101. The program will also set "voltage output" for output channels, and set the digital D/A
conversion output to D102.
M8001
M8260 Set the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Normally OFF input mode (0 V to 10 V).
M8000
M8261 Set the input mode of channel 2 to the current
Normally ON input mode (4 mA to 20 mA).
M8001
M8262 Set the output mode to the voltage output mode
Normally
OFF
(0 V to 10 V). C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
M8266 Set the output holding function.
M8002
Initial
pulse
RST D8268.7 Error status: b7 = OFF D
FX3G-2AD-BD
M8000
Normally MOV
ON
MOV
M8000
FNC 12 Stores the A/D converted channel-1 digital data
E
D8260 D100
FX3U-4DA
Normally MOV into D100.
ON
FNC 12 D8261 D101 Stores the A/D converted channel-2 digital data
MOV into D101.
M8000
FNC 12 Performs D/A conversion with the digital data
Normally MOV
D102 D8262
stored in D102. F
ON
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-31
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input/output Characteristics
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics
5. Changing of Input/output Characteristics

Use the scaling instruction (SCL/FNC259) for the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to change the input/output
characteristics. FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLCs do not support the scaling instruction. Use sequence
programs to change the input/output characteristics.
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition.

This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital output range of 400 to 2000
(when the voltage input is 1 to 5 V) to the digital output range of 0 to 10000.
Digital output
4000 10000
Digital output to
be calculated
(D110)
2000
400
0 X-axis
1V 5V 10V 0 400 (1V) 2000 (5V)
Analog input
by A/D conversion
H-32
A
2. Example of program 1 (FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC)
Common Items
For example, create the following program to change the digital input data of the 1st analog special adapter:
M8001
M8260 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode
Normally OFF (0 V to 10 V)
M8002
RST D8268.6 Error status: b6 = OFF B
Initial
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
pulse
M8000
FNC 12 K1 D8264 Sets the averaging time to "1" for the channel-1 data
Normally ON MOV
C
M8002 FNC 12
FX3U-4AD-ADP
K2 D50 Program for setting scaling instruction data table
Initial MOV
pulse Item Description Value Device
FNC 12 K400 D51 Number of points Sets the number of points 2 D50
MOV X- A/D converted digital value 400 D51
Start coordinate start point data
FNC 12
MOV
K0 D52 point Y- Digital output value of changed
0 D52
D
coordinate X-axis value start point
FX3G-2AD-BD
FNC 12 X- A/D converted digital value end 2000 D53
K2000 D53 End coordinate point data
MOV
point Y- Digital output value of changed 10000
coordinate X-axis value end point D54
FNC 12 K10000 D54
MOV
M8000 FNC259
E
D8260 D50 D100 The scaling instruction operation results will be stored in D100.
FX3U-4DA
Normally SCL
ON

If the A/D converted digital value is out of the data table range specified by the SCL instruction, the PLC will
detect an operation error (error code: K6706). F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-33
3. Example of program 2 (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC)

For example, create the following program to change the digital input data (D110) of the 1st analog special
adapter:
M8001
Normally OFF voltage input mode
M8000 (0 V to 10 V).
FNC 12 D8288 K4M0
Normally ON MOV
M8002
Initial
pulse
FNC 12 K4M0 D8288

MOV
M8000 Sets the averaging scaling to "1"
FNC 12
K1 D8284 for the channel-1 data.
Normally ON MOV
M8000 FNC 12 D8280 D110
Normally ON MOV

D110 K400 D110 K2000 M10
M10 FNC 21 D110 K400 D111
SUB
Calculation for changing input
FNC 22 D111 K10000 D112 characteristics.
MUL
FNC 23 D112 K1600 D100
DDIV
H-34
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 5.2 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics
A
5.2 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD

(product specifications) to be changed
Specified digital output

10V
Analog output
Y-axis
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
5V 2000
(5V)
1V 400
0 400
(1V)
X-axis
D
2000 4000 0 10000
FX3G-2AD-BD
Digital value input
2. Example of program 1 (FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC)

For example, create the following program to change the digital output of the 1st analog special adapter.
M8001 E
M8262 Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output
FX3U-4DA
Normally mode.
OFF
M8002
FNC 12 K2 D50
Program for setting scaling instruction data table F
MOV
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Initial Item Description Value Device
pulse Number of points Sets the number of points. 2 D50
FNC 12 K0 D51
MOV X- Digital value of specified 0 D51
Start coordinate start point on X-axis
FNC 12 point Y- Digital value of desired D/A
K400 D52 400 D52
MOV coordinate
X-
conversion start point
Digital value of specified end 10000
G
FNC 12 D53
End coordinate point on X-axis
FX3G-1DA-BD
K10000 D53
MOV point Y- Digital value of desired D/A 2000
coordinate conversion end point D54
FNC 12 K2000 D54
MOV
M8000
Normally
FNC259
SCL
D120 D50 D8262
The result of operation by scaling instruction will be stored
in the D8262. H
FX3U-3A-ADP
ON

If the input digital value for the D/A conversion is out of the data table range specified by the SCL instruction,
the PLC will detect an operation error (error code: K6706).
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-35
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 5.2 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics
3. Example of program 2 (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC)

For example, create the following program to change the digital output data (D120) of the 1st analog special
adapter.
M8001
Sets the output mode to the voltage
M8282
Normally
OFF
M8286 Sets the output holding function.
M20
FNC 22 D120 K1600 D121
MUL
FNC 23 D121 K10000 D123

characteristics.
FNC 20 D123 K400 D127 Stores the operation result in D8282.
ADD
FNC 12 D127 D8282

MOV
H-36
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 6.1 PLC Version Number Check
Common Items
6. Troubleshooting
Refer to the following items when conversion data is not input or output, or when proper digital values are not
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
input or output.
• Installation
• Wiring
• Special devices C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
• Programs
• Error status

D
• Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3S Series are compatible.
FX3G-2AD-BD
• Check the version number of the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. The version number should be 2.61 or later.
refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2. E
FX3U-4DA
6.2 Wiring Check
1. Power F
The 3A-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the
FX3U-4DA-ADP
POWER indicator lamp of the 3A-ADP is on.
2. Analog input/output line
Use 2-core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input/output line. In addition, be sure to separate the
analog input line from other power lines or inductive lines.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
I+terminal (: channel number) of the channel. If the line is not shortcircuited, data will not be converted
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Check whether the special devices for the 3A-ADP are being used correctly:
Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode. Turn on the device to set the input mode I
FX3U-4AD-PT

-ADP
J
3. Input data
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-37
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 6.4 Program Check
4. Output setting data

Check that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be
selected depending on the connected position and the channel.
5. Averaging time
6. Setting whether or not each channel is used

Check whether each channel is set correctly.
Set a channel to OFF when using it. Set a channel to ON when not using it.
7. Error status
Check that no error is detected in the 3A-ADP.
6.4 Program Check


using the program.



If an error occurs in the 3A-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn ON.

3A-ADP hardware error
b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b6
(Power supply error included)*1
b1 Channel-2 over-scale detection b7 3A-ADP communication data error*2
b2 Output data setting error b8 Channel-1 under-scale detection*3
*1. A 3A-ADP hardware error (b6) is valid only when use of analog input is set.
Detection of power supply error is valid only when use of the analog input channel 2 is set.
*2. A 3A-ADP communication data error (b7) is valid only when use of analog input is set.
*3. Applicable for FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.70 or later and FX3S Series PLC.
H-38
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Error Status Check
A
Common Items
1. Over-scale detection (b0, b1)
Voltage input mode : The input voltage value is over the specified upper limit of 10.2 V.
Current input mode : The input current value is over the specified upper limit of 20.4 mA.
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
2) Remedy
2. Output data setting error (b2)

C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
2) Remedy

D
FX3G-2AD-BD
2) Remedy
4. Averaging time setting error (b5) E
FX3U-4DA
2) Remedy
5. 3A-ADP hardware error (b6) F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
The 3A-ADP is not operating properly.
2) Remedy
Check that the 3A-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC.
representative.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
6. 3A-ADP communication data error (b7)
A communication error is detected between the 3A-ADP and the PLC.
2) Remedy
Check that the 3A-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC.
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
representative.
7. Under-scale detection (b8, b9)

The input analog value (current value) is below the specified lower limit. I
FX3U-4AD-PT
2) Remedy
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
H-39
FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Error Status Check
MEMO
H-40
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input)
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
I. FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance D

Thermometer Data Input)
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP special
adapter (4-channel platinum resistance thermometer input) and should be read and understood before I
FX3U-4AD-PT
it to the end user.
-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
I-1
I-2
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions
Common Items
1. Outline
This chapter describes the outline of FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (referred to as PT-ADP). B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
The FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP is an analog special adapter. Connect the FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP to the FX3S/FX3G/
FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to read the temperature data from the 4-channel platinum resistance
thermometers.
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
1) Only 1 PT-ADP unit can be connected to the FX3S Series PLC.
Up to 2*1 PT-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC.
Up to 4 PT-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
2) After connection of the platinum resistance thermometer (Pt100), measurement of temperature will be
possible. D
3) The temperature measurement data will be automatically written to the special data registers of the FX3S/
FX3G-2AD-BD

referred to
FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 2*1 maximum E
FX3U-4DA
Series PLC

F
+ + to Section 1.3.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Expansion
4th 3rd 2nd 1st
board*2
adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed
 description of wiring, G
Analog data refer to Chapter 3.
FX3G-1DA-BD
Platinum resistance thermometer
sensor (Pt100)
H
 of special devices, refer to
FX3U-3A-ADP
Description Special devices*3 Chapter 4.

Measurement 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269
temperature Transfer direction
For a detailed description
Setting of temperature Section 4.8.
unit 3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289
Setting of averaging time 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299 I
FX3U-4AD-PT

-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
I-3
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using the PT-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
Refer to Chapter 1.

•Compatible PLC version number
•Compatible programming tool version
Refer to Chapter 2. number
•Operation environment
•Performance specifications
Refer to the common
•Input characteristics
pages.

(Refer to the common pages for analog
control.)
Refer to Chapter 3.
•Selection of units
Wiring Wiring:
•Power supply line
•Platinum resistance thermometer
Refer to Chapter 4. sensor line
•Details of special devices
•Examples of basic programs
If the error status data or the input digital value is

I-4
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number
A
1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number
Common Items
PT-ADP is compatible with the following PLC.
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
1. Version check C
FX3U-4AD-ADP

product.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-5
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

1. English versions
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Point
I-6
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications
Common Items
2. Specifications
This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the PT-ADP. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Relative
humidity
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
FX3G-2AD-BD
Tested 10 times in each
DIN Rail Mounting
80 min, each)
10 to 57 − 0.075
Direct Mounting*2
−
Shock
57 to 150 9.8
E
m/s2
FX3U-4DA
resistance*1
Dielectric
withstand
voltage
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Grounding
Working
G
environment
FX3G-1DA-BD
Working
altitude < 2000 m*4

*2. If PT-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible. H
*3.
FX3U-3A-ADP



I
FX3U-4AD-PT
*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the PT-ADP.
The PT-ADP may malfunction.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-7
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications
Items Specification
A/D conversion circuit 24 V DC +20 % -15 %, 50 mA
driving power (It is necessary to connect a 24 V DC power supply to the terminal block.)
5 V DC, 15 mA
Interface driving power (Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit, it is not necessary
to supply the power.)
Specifications
Items
3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor
Input signal
Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997
Rated temperature
-50 °C to +250 °C -58 °F to +482 °F
range
Resolution 0.1 °C 0.18 °F
• ±0.5 % for full scale (when ambient temperature is 25 °C±5 °C)
Total accuracy
• ±1.0 % for full scale (when ambient temperature is in the range from 0 to 55 °C)
A/D conversion
time
→For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.4.
+2550 +4910
+2500 +4820
+255°C
+491°F
Input
characteristics -50°C 0 -58°F 0
+250°C +482°F
-55°C
-67°F
-500 -580
-550 -670
points occupied (This number is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)
I-8
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time
A
Common Items

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP FX3S Series PLC C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Sequence
program
command
A/D
conversion D
FX3G-2AD-BD
250 s/4ch
2. A/D conversion during PLC stop E

FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-9
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time

FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
Sequence
program
A/D command
conversion
250 s/4ch
A/D command
conversion
250 s/4ch
2. A/D conversion during PLC stop



END instruction execution time will be "250 μs × number of connected adapters."
I-10
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.5 Temperature Measurement
A
Common Items
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
Sequence

program C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
A/D command
conversion
200 s/4ch
A/D
conversion
command
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
200 s/4ch

FX3U-4DA
1st adapter → 2nd adapter … 4th adapter).

During execution of the END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200 μs, F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
2.5 Temperature Measurement

To stabilize the temperature measurement, warm-up the system for 30 minutes or more after power-on.
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-11
3. Wiring
This chapter describes the PT-ADP wiring.
Observe the following caution to wire the PT-ADP.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
I-12
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout
A
3.1 Terminal Layout
Common Items
The terminals of the PT-ADP are arranged as follows:
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Signal Application
C
24+ External power
FX3U-4AD-ADP
24-
Ground terminal
L1+ Channel-1 platinum
L1- resistance thermometer
I1- sensor input
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
L2-
I2- sensor input
I3- sensor input
L4+
L4-
Channel-4 platinum
E
FX3U-4DA
I4- sensor input
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-13
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque
3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque

To connect the platinum resistance thermometer sensor, use the cable supplied with the Pt100 platinum
resistance thermometer or a twisted pair shielded cable.
1. Cables
Termination
2 2 • To connect a stranded cable, peel the cover off the cable
Single-wire 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm and then twist the core before connection.
(AWG22 to 20)

cannot protrude.
9mm
(0.35")
(0.1")
3. Tool
The head
straight.
Note:
<Reference>
Manufacturer Type
Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4 × 2.5
I-14
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.3 Power Supply Line
A
Common Items
Connect the 24 V DC power supply line of the PT-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

1. To use an external power 2. To use the 24 V DC power of the PLC
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
PT-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U PT-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U
+5V +5V (Main unit)
(Main unit)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V
D
Terminal Terminal
FX3G-2AD-BD
block block
Fuse
Class-D Class-D
• Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounding power supply line (100 Ω or less) together with the
FX3U-4DA
ground terminal of the PLC main unit.
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
PT-ADP FX3UC Series PLC
(Main unit)
+5V
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Power
connector H
FX3U-3A-ADP
24+ 24- 24+ 24-

block
Fuse
I
Class-D
FX3U-4AD-PT
24V DC grounding
-ADP

Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-15
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor
3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor

Select the Pt100 3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor.
This thermometer will not be affected by voltage drop in the wiring area, and will ensure accurate
measurement.
3.5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor
PT-ADP
+5V
Twisted shielded Terminal 4.7k 4.7k

Pt100 cable*1 block
100k ch
L+
L-
I- 100k
Shield +5V
Twisted shielded 4.7k 4.7k

Pt100 cable*1
100k ch
L+
L-
100k
I-
+5V
24+
24V DC*2
24-
Class-D grounding
L+, L-, I-, ch:  represents the channel number.
*1. Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer sensor from the other power cables or
areas easily affected by inductive noise (of the commercial power, etc.).
available.
3.6 Grounding
figure.
→ For details, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the each PLC Series.



I-16
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data
Common Items
4. Programming
This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the PT-ADP. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
C
2) If data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the input mode can be
FX3U-4AD-ADP
specified.
FX3G-2AD-BD
Communi-
cation
-PT-ADP adapter -ADP FX3S Series PLC
Special devices
FX3U-4DA
D8280 to D8289

Communi-
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
cation
FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD
special
-PT-ADP -PT-ADP FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC*2
adapter
2nd*1 1st
Special devices
M8280 to M8289 G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Program
M8290 to M8299
D8290 to D8299
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
*2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP to the FX3G Series I
PLC.
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-17
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices

Communi-
cation
-PT-ADP -PT-ADP -PT-ADP adapter -PT-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC*1

A/D M8260 to M8269
D8260 to D8269

M8270 to M8279
program
A/D M8280 to M8289
D8280 to D8289

M8290 to M8299
D8290 to D8299
*1. An expansion board is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
PLC.

If the PT-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table:
• FX3S Series PLC
R: Read / W: Write
Special
device
Special Section
M8280 Selects the temperature unit. R/W
auxiliary 4.3
relay M8281 to M8289 Unused (Do not use.) - -
D8280 Channel-1 temperature measurement data R
D8281 Channel-2 temperature measurement data R Section
D8282 Channel-3 temperature measurement data R 4.4
D8284 Averaging time for channel 1 (Setting range: 1 to 4095) R/W
Special
data D8285 Averaging time for channel 2 (Setting range: 1 to 4095) R/W Section
register D8286 Averaging time for channel 3 (Setting range: 1 to 4095) R/W 4.5
Section
4.6
Section
4.7
I-18
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices
A
Common Items
R: Read / W: Write
device 1st 2nd
Section
Special M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit. R/W
4.3 B
auxiliary
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
M8289 M8299
D8280 D8290 Channel-1 temperature measurement data R
D8281 D8291 Channel-2 temperature measurement data R Section
4.4
D8282
D8283
D8292
D8293
Channel-3 temperature measurement data
R
R
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 (Setting range: 1 to 4095) R/W
Special
data D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 (Setting range: 1 to 4095) R/W Section
register D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 (Setting range: 1 to 4095) R/W 4.5
Section D
4.6
FX3G-2AD-BD
Section
4.7
• FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC E

R: Read / W: Write
FX3U-4DA
Section
Special M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit. R/W
4.3
auxiliary
relay M8261 to M8271 to M8281 to M8291 to F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299
Channel-1 temperature
D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 R
measurement data
D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 R
measurement data Section
Channel-3 temperature 4.4 G
D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 R
FX3G-1DA-BD
measurement data
D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 R
measurement data
Averaging time for channel 1
Special D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W
data
register Averaging time for channel 2 H
D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 R/W
FX3U-3A-ADP
Section
Averaging time for channel 3 4.5
D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 R/W
D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 R/W
Section I
4.6
FX3U-4AD-PT
Section
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 20 R
4.7
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-19
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit
4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit

To switch the temperature unit of the PT-ADP turn the special auxiliary relay ON for Fahrenheit (°F) or OFF
for Centigrade (°C).
To switch the temperature unit, use the following special auxiliary relays:
• FX3S Series PLC
Selection of temperature unit:
M8280 OFF: Centigrade (°C)
ON: Fahrenheit (°F)

Description
1st 2nd
M8280 M8290 OFF: Centigrade (°C)

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF: Centigrade (°C)

1) To switch the temperature unit to centigrade (C) 2) To switch the temperature unit to Fahrenheit (F)
for the 1st adapter: for the 2nd adapter:
M8001 M8000
M8260 M8270
I-20
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.4 Temperature Measurement
A
Common Items
The temperature data input in the PT-ADP will be stored in the special data registers.
The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table:
• FX3S Series PLC
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
D8280 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement data.
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Description
1st 2nd
D8280
D8281
D8290
D8291
Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement data.
Stores the channel-2 temperature measurement data.
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
D8282 D8292 Stores the channel-3 temperature measurement data.

E
FX3U-4DA
Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement data.
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
The immediate data or the average data (data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time) will
be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data.
1. Caution regarding temperature measurement G
FX3G-1DA-BD
The special data registers for temperature measurement data are for reading only.
Do not change (rewrite) the current data using the sequence program, indicator, or device monitor of the
programming tool.

M8000 H
FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement
FX3U-3A-ADP
MOV data of the 1st analog special adapter in D100.

Normally
ON

I
Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in the D100 or the D101, the D8260 or the D8261
FX3U-4AD-PT
can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.

-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-21
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.5 Averaging Time
4.5 Averaging Time

Initial value: K1
If the averaging time is set for the PT-ADP, the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in the
D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293. The averaging time can be set for
each channel.
• FX3S Series PLC

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

• If the averaging time is set to "1", the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement
special data register.
• If the averaging time is set to "2" or more, the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set
averaging time, and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special
data register.
• After turning the PLC power on, the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special
data registers (D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293) until the number
of data items is increased to the set averaging time.
• Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set value is outside the setting range, the error
→ For a detailed description of error status, refer to Section 5.5.

M8000 Sets the averaging time to "1" for the channel-1
FNC 12 K1 D8264 data of the 1st analog special adapter.
MOV
Normally
ON
FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to "5" for the channel-2

K5 D8265 data of the 1st analog special adapter.
MOV
I-22
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Error Status
A
4.6 Error Status
Common Items
If an error is detected in the PT-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data
register.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD

1st 2nd
Description C
FX3U-4AD-ADP

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Check the ON/OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error. Errors are
assigned to the bits as shown in the following table. Create a program to detect errors.
b0
The temperature measurement data
of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error
E
FX3U-4DA
range, or disconnection is detected.
b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PT-ADP hardware error
b2
of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PT-ADP communication data error F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused
b4 EEPROM error - -
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
If a PT-ADP hardware error (b6) or PT-ADP communication data error (b7) is detected, it is necessary to clear
H
M8000
FX3U-3A-ADP
FNC 12
D8288 K4M0
MOV
Normally
ON
M8002
RST M6 Error status of 3rd*1 analog special adapter
Initial pulse
b6 = OFF (PT-ADP hardware error)
I
FX3U-4AD-PT

b7 = OFF (PT-ADP communication data error)
-ADP
FNC 12
K4M0 D8288
MOV J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
I-23
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Error Status
M8002
RST D8268.6 Error status of 1st analog special adapter
b6 = OFF (PT-ADP hardware error)
Initial pulse

M8000
FNC 12
D8288 K4M0
Normally ON MOV
M0
Y000 The temperature measurement data
of channel 1 is outside the specified
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Y005 Averaging time setting error in 3rd*1
adapter.
M6
Y006 PT-ADP hardware error in 3rd*1
adapter.
M7
Y007 PT-ADP communication data error in
3rd*1 adapter.
I-24
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.7 Model Code
A
Common Items
D8268.0
D8268.1
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
D8268.2
D8268.3
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
D8268.4
D8268.5
D
Averaging time setting error in 1st
FX3G-2AD-BD
Y005
adapter.
D8268.6
Y006 PT-ADP hardware error in 1st
adapter.
D8268.7 E
Y007 PT-ADP communication data error in
FX3U-4DA
1st adapter.
4.7 Model Code

F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Initial value: K20
When the PT-ADP is connected, model code "20" will be stored in the corresponding special data register.
• FX3S Series PLC G
FX3G-1DA-BD
D8289 Model code

1st 2nd
Description
H
FX3U-3A-ADP

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code I
FX3U-4AD-PT
Use the special data registers above to check whether PT-ADP is connected or not.
-ADP

FNC224
LD=
D8269 K20 Y010 Checks the model code of the 1st
analog special adapter.
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-25
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.8 Basic Program Example

Create the following basic program example to read out the temperature measurement data.
The following program will store the temperature measurement data (°C) from channels 1 and 2 of the
3rd*1 adapter to D100 and D101, respectively. The averaging time is set to "1" (immediate data) for
channel 1, and "5" for channel 2.
M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0

Normally ON MOV
M8002 Error status of 3rd*1 analog special
RST M6 adapter
Initial b6 = OFF (PT-ADP hardware error)
pulse
RST M7 Error status of 3rd*1 analog special
adapter
FNC 12
K4M0 D8288
MOV
M8001 Sets the temperature unit to centigrade
M8280 (C).
Normally OFF
M8002 FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to "1" for
K1 D8284 channel-1 data.
Initial MOV
pulse
FNC 12 K5 D8285 Sets the averaging time to "5" for
MOV channel-2 data.
M8000
FNC 12 D8280 D100 Stores the current value of the channel-1
Normally MOV temperature measurement data in the D100.
ON
FNC 12 D8281 D101 Stores the average value of the channel-2
MOV temperature measurement data in the D101.
Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101, data register D8280 or D8281
The following program will store the temperature measurement data (°C) from channels 1 and 2 of the 1st
adapter to D100 and D101, respectively. The averaging time is set to "1" (immediate data) for channel 1,
and "5" for channel 2.
M8002 Error status of 1st analog special

RST D8268.6 adapter
Initial b6 = OFF (PT-ADP hardware error)
pulse
RST D8268.7 Error status of 1st analog special
adapter
M8260 (C).
Normally OFF
M8002 FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to "1" for
Initial MOV
pulse
MOV channel-2 data.
M8000
ON
I-26
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.1 PLC Version Number Check
Common Items
5. Troubleshooting
If the temperature measurement data is not input, or if the proper digital value is not input, check the following
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
items:
• Version number of the PLC
• Wiring
• Special devices
C
• Programs
FX3U-4AD-ADP
• Error status

D
FX3G-2AD-BD
• Check the version number of the FX3UC Series. The version number should be 1.30 or later.
E
FX3U-4DA
5.2 Wiring Check

Check the following items for wiring: F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
1. Power
The PT-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the
POWER indicator lamp of the PT-ADP is on.
2. Platinum resistance thermometer sensor cable

Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer from other power cables or inductive cables. G
FX3G-1DA-BD

Check whether the special devices for the PT-ADP are correctly used: H
FX3U-3A-ADP
1. Temperature measurement
Verify that the special device for the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be
2. Averaging time
Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range I
FX3U-4AD-PT
3. Error status
Check that no error is detected in the PT-ADP.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-27
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.4 Program Check
5.4 Program Check

1. Cancellation of error status at power-on

using the program.

Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs.

If an error occurs in the PT-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn on.

The temperature measurement data of
b0 channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error
b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PT-ADP hardware error
b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PT-ADP communication data error
b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to 15 Unused
b4 EEPROM error - -
To solve a problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below:
1. Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line (b0 to b3)

The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range.
The temperature measurement value is not in the range between -55 °C to 255 °C.
Or the line between PT-ADP and the platinum resistance thermometer sensor is disconnected.
2) Remedy
Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring
condition.

is destroyed.
2) Remedy

The averaging time set for one of the channels (channels 1 to 4) is outside the specified
range: 1 to 4095.
2) Remedy
Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel.
I-28
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check
A
4. PT-ADP hardware error (b6)
Common Items
The PT-ADP does not operate properly.
2) Remedy
Check that the 24 V DC power is properly supplied to the PT-ADP. Also check that the PT-ADP is
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
representative.
5. PT-ADP communication data error (b7)

A communication error is detected between the PT-ADP and the PLC. C
2) Remedy
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Check that the PT-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC.
representative.
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
I-29
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check
MEMO
I-30
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input)
Common Items
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
J. FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP D
(4-channel Platinum Resistance
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP special I
adapter (4-channel platinum resistance thermometer input) and should be read and understood before
FX3U-4AD-PT

it to the end user.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
J-1
J-2
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions
Common Items
1. Outline
This chapter describes the outline of FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (referred to as PTW-ADP). B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
The FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP is an analog special adapter. Connect the FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP to the FX3S/FX3G/
FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to read the temperature data from the 4-channel platinum resistance
thermometers. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
1) Only 1 PTW-ADP unit can be connected to the FX3S Series PLC.
Up to 2*1 PTW-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC.
Up to 4 PTW-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
2) After connection of the platinum resistance thermometer (Pt100), measurement of temperature will be
possible. D
3) The temperature measurement data will be automatically written to the special data registers of the FX3S/
FX3G-2AD-BD

referred to

FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 2*1 maximum E
FX3U-4DA
boards, analog special adapters FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC

F
+ + to Section 1.3.
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Expansion
4th 3rd 2nd 1st
board*2
adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed
 description of wiring,
G
Analog data
FX3G-1DA-BD
refer to Chapter 3.
Platinum resistance thermometer

sensor (Pt100)
H
 of special devices, refer to
FX3U-3A-ADP
Description Special devices*3 Chapter 4.

Measurement 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269
temperature Transfer direction
Setting of temperature Section 4.8.
unit 3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289
Setting of averaging time 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299 I
FX3U-4AD-PT

-ADP
*3. FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs use the following special devices. J
FX3U-4AD-PTW

-ADP
J-3
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using the PTW-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
Refer to Chapter 1.

•Compatible programming tool version
Refer to Chapter 2. number
Refer to the common
•Input characteristics
pages.

(Refer to the common pages for analog
control.)
Refer to Chapter 3.
Wiring Wiring:
•Platinum resistance thermometer
Refer to Chapter 4. sensor line
If the error status data or the input digital value is

J-4
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number
A
Common Items
PTW-ADP is compatible with the following PLC.

FX3S Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After March 2013 (From first product) B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
C
1. Version check
FX3U-4AD-ADP

The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate, and on the front of the D
product.
FX3G-2AD-BD
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-5
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

1. English versions
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Point
J-6
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications
Common Items
2. Specifications
This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the PTW-ADP. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Relative
humidity
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
FX3G-2AD-BD
Tested 10 times in each
DIN Rail Mounting
80 min, each)
10 to 57 − 0.075
Direct Mounting*2
−
Shock
57 to 150 9.8
E
m/s2
FX3U-4DA
resistance*1
Dielectric
withstand
voltage
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Grounding
Working
G
environment
FX3G-1DA-BD
Working
altitude < 2000 m*4

*2. If PTW-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible. H
*3.
FX3U-3A-ADP



I
FX3U-4AD-PT
*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the PTW-ADP.
The PTW-ADP may malfunction.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-7
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications
Items Specification
5 V DC, 15 mA
Interface driving power (Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit, it is not necessary
to supply the power.)
Specifications
Items
3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor
Input signal
Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997
Rated temperature
-100 °C to +600 °C -148 °F to +1112 °F
range
Resolution 0.2 °C to 0.3 °C 0.4 °F to 0.5 °F
• ±0.5 % for full scale (when ambient temperature is 25 °C±5 °C)
Total accuracy
• ±1.0 % for full scale (when ambient temperature is in the range from 0 to 55 °C)
A/D conversion
time
→For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.4.
+6150 +11390
+6000 +11120
+1139°F
+615°C
Input
characteristics -100°C 0 -148°F 0
-115°C
+600°C +1112°F
-175°F
-1000 -1480
-1150 -1750
J-8
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time
A
Common Items

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX3S Series PLC C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Sequence
program
command
A/D
conversion D
END instruction
FX3G-2AD-BD
250 s/4ch
2. A/D conversion during PLC stop E

FX3U-4DA
END instruction execution time will be 250 μs
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-9
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time

FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
Sequence
program
A/D command
conversion
250 s/4ch
A/D command
conversion
250 s/4ch



J-10
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.5 Temperature Measurement
A
Common Items
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP
Sequence

program C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
A/D command
conversion
200 s/4ch
A/D
conversion
command
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
200 s/4ch

FX3U-4DA
1st adapter → 2nd adapter … 4th adapter).

During execution of the END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200 μs, F
FX3U-4DA-ADP

G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-11
3. Wiring
This chapter describes the PTW-ADP wiring.
Observe the following caution to wire the PTW-ADP.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
J-12
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout
A
3.1 Terminal Layout
Common Items
The terminals of the PTW-ADP are arranged as follows:
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
Signal Application
C
24+ External power
FX3U-4AD-ADP
24-
Ground terminal
I1- sensor input
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
L2-
I2- sensor input
I3- sensor input
L4+
L4-
Channel-4 platinum
E
FX3U-4DA
I4- sensor input
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-13
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque
3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque

To connect the platinum resistance thermometer sensor, use the cable supplied with the Pt100 platinum
resistance thermometer or a twisted pair shielded cable.
1. Cables
Termination
2 2 • To connect a stranded cable, peel the cover off the cable
Single-wire 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm and then twist the core before connection.
(AWG22 to 20)


cannot protrude.
9mm
(0.35")
(0.1")

3. Tool
The head
straight.
Note:
<Reference>
Manufacturer Type
Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4 × 2.5
J-14
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.3 Power Supply Line
A
Common Items
Connect the 24 V DC power supply line of the PTW-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
PTW-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U PTW-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U
+5V (Main unit) +5V (Main unit)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
24+ 24- 24V 0V
24+ 24-
D
Terminal Terminal
FX3G-2AD-BD
block block
Fuse
Class-D Class-D
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
PTW-ADP FX3UC Series PLC
(Main unit)
+5V
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
Power
connector H
FX3U-3A-ADP
24+ 24- 24+ 24-

block
Fuse
I
Class-D
FX3U-4AD-PT
24V DC grounding
-ADP

Caution regarding connection of the power supply line:
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-15
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor
3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor

Select the Pt100 3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor.
This thermometer will not be affected by voltage drop in the wiring area, and will ensure accurate
measurement.
3.5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor
PTW-ADP
+5V
Twisted shielded Terminal 4.7k 4.7k

Pt100 cable*1 block
100k ch
L+
L-
I- 100k
Shield +5V
Twisted shielded 4.7k 4.7k

Pt100 cable*1
100k ch
L+
L-
100k
I-
+5V
24+
24V DC*2
24-
Class-D grounding
available.
3.6 Grounding
figure.



J-16
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data
Common Items
4. Programming
This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the PTW-ADP. B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
specified.
FX3G-2AD-BD
Communi-
cation
-PTW-ADP adapter -ADP FX3S Series PLC
Special devices
FX3U-4DA
D8280 to D8289
• FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Communi-
cation
FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD
special
-PTW-ADP -PTW-ADP FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC*2
adapter
2nd*1 1st
Special devices
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
M8280 to M8289
Program
M8290 to M8299
D8290 to D8299 H
FX3U-3A-ADP
*2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP to the FX3G Series
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
PLC.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-17
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices

Communi
-cation
-PTW-ADP -PTW-ADP -PTW-ADP adapter -PTW-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC *1

A/D M8260 to M8269
D8260 to D8269

M8270 to M8279
program
A/D M8280 to M8289
D8280 to D8289

M8290 to M8299
D8290 to D8299
*1. An expansion board is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
PLC.

If the PTW-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table:
• FX3S Series PLC
R: Read / W: Write
Special
device
Special Section
M8280 Selects the temperature unit. R/W
auxiliary 4.3
relay M8281 to M8289 Unused (Do not use.) - -
Special
Section
4.6
Section
4.7
J-18
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices
A
Common Items
R: Read / W: Write
device 1st 2nd
Section
Special M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit. R/W
4.3 B
auxiliary
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
M8289 M8299
4.4
D8282
D8283
D8292
D8293
R
R
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Special
Section D
4.6
FX3G-2AD-BD
Section
4.7

R: Read / W: Write
E
FX3U-4DA
Section
Special M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit. R/W
4.3
auxiliary
relay M8261 to M8271 to M8281 to M8291 to
M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 R
measurement data
D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 R
Channel-3 temperature 4.4
D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292
measurement data
R
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 R
measurement data
Special D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W
data
register Averaging time for channel 2
D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295
R/W
Section H
FX3U-3A-ADP
D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 R/W

D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 R/W
Section
4.6 I
Section
FX3U-4AD-PT
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 21 R

4.7
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-19
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit

To switch the temperature unit of the PTW-ADP turn the special auxiliary relay ON for Fahrenheit (°F) or OFF
for Centigrade (°C).
• FX3S Series PLC

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

1) To switch the temperature unit to centigrade (C) 2) To switch the temperature unit to Fahrenheit (F)
for the 1st adapter: for the 2nd adapter:
M8001 M8000
M8260 M8270
J-20
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.4 Temperature Measurement
A
Common Items
The temperature data input in the PTW-ADP will be stored in the special data registers.
• FX3S Series PLC
B
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Description
1st 2nd
D
FX3G-2AD-BD

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
1. Caution regarding temperature measurement

The special data registers for temperature measurement data are for reading only.
Do not change (rewrite) the current data using the sequence program, indicator, or device monitor of the G
programming tool.
FX3G-1DA-BD
M8000
Normally
ON H
FX3U-3A-ADP

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in the D100 or the D101, the D8260 or the D8261
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-21
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.5 Averaging Time
4.5 Averaging Time

Initial value: K1
If the averaging time is set for the PTW-ADP, the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in
the D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293. The averaging time can be set
for each channel.
• FX3S Series PLC

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

data register.

M8000 Sets the averaging time to "1" for the channel-1
FNC 12 K1 D8264 data of the 1st analog special adapter.
MOV
Normally
ON
FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to "5" for the channel-2

K5 D8265 data of the 1st analog special adapter.
MOV
J-22
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Error Status
A
4.6 Error Status
Common Items
If an error is detected in the PTW-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data
register.
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD

1st 2nd
Description C
FX3U-4AD-ADP

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D
FX3G-2AD-BD

E
FX3U-4DA
b0 of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error
b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PTW-ADP hardware error
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PTW-ADP communication data error
b4 EEPROM error - - G
FX3G-1DA-BD
If a PTW-ADP hardware error (b6) or PTW-ADP communication data error (b7) is detected, it is necessary to
clear the error status with a program at the next power-on of the PLC.
• For FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC H
FX3U-3A-ADP
M8000 FNC 12
D8288 K4M0
MOV
Normally
ON
M8002
Initial pulse
b6 = OFF (PTW-ADP hardware error) I
FX3U-4AD-PT

b7 = OFF (PTW-ADP communication data error)
-ADP
FNC 12
K4M0 D8288 J
MOV
FX3U-4AD-PTW
*1. "1st " for the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLC.

-ADP
J-23
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Error Status
M8002
b6 = OFF (PTW-ADP hardware error)
Initial pulse

M8000
FNC 12
D8288 K4M0
Normally ON MOV
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
adapter.
M6
Y006 PTW-ADP hardware error in 3rd*1
adapter.
M7
Y007 PTW-ADP communication data error
in 3rd*1 adapter.
J-24
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.7 Model Code
A
Common Items
D8268.0
D8268.1
range, or disconnection is detected. B
Y001
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
D8268.2
D8268.3
range, or disconnection is detected. C
FX3U-4AD-ADP
D8268.4
D8268.5
D
FX3G-2AD-BD
Y005 Averaging time setting error in 1st
adapter.
D8268.6
Y006 PTW-ADP hardware error in 1st
adapter.
D8268.7
E
PTW-ADP communication data error
FX3U-4DA
Y007
in 1st adapter.
4.7 Model Code F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
Initial value: K21
When the PTW-ADP is connected, model code "21" will be stored in the corresponding special data register.
• FX3S Series PLC
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
D8289 Model code

1st 2nd
Description H
FX3U-3A-ADP

Description
1st
D8269
2nd
D8279
3rd
D8289
4th
D8299 Model code
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
Use the special data registers above to check whether PTW-ADP is connected or not.
-ADP

FNC224 D8269 K21 Y010 Checks the model code of the 1st J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-25
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.8 Basic Program Example

Create the following basic program example to read out the temperature measurement data.
The following program will store the temperature measurement data (°C) from channels 1 and 2 of the
3rd*1 adapter to D100 and D101, respectively. The averaging time is set to "1" (immediate data) for
channel 1, and "5" for channel 2.
M8000
FNC 12 D8288 K4M0
Normally MOV
ON
RST M6 adapter
Initial b6 = OFF (PTW-ADP hardware error)
pulse Error status of 3rd*1 analog special
RST M7 adapter
FNC 12
K4M0 D8288
MOV
M8001
Sets the temperature unit to centigrade
M8280 (C).
Normally OFF
M8002
FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to "1" for
Initial MOV
pulse
MOV channel-2 data.
M8000
ON
The following program will store the temperature measurement data (°C) from channels 1 and 2 of the 1st
adapter to D100 and D101, respectively. The averaging time is set to "1" (immediate data) for channel 1,
and "5" for channel 2.
RST D8268.6 adapter
Initial b6 = OFF (PTW-ADP hardware error)
pulse
adapter
M8260 (C).
Normally OFF
M8002 Sets the averaging time to "1" for
FNC 12 K1 D8264
MOV channel-1 data.
Initial
pulse
MOV channel-2 data.
M8000
ON
J-26
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.1 PLC Version Number Check
Common Items
5. Troubleshooting
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
items:
• Wiring
• Special devices
C
• Programs
FX3U-4AD-ADP
• Error status

D
FX3G-2AD-BD
• Check the version number of the FX3UC Series. The version number should be 1.30 or later.
E
FX3U-4DA
5.2 Wiring Check

Check the following items for wiring: F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
1. Power
The PTW-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that
the POWER indicator lamp of the PTW-ADP is on.
2. Platinum resistance thermometer sensor cable

Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer from other power cables or inductive cables. G
FX3G-1DA-BD

Check whether the special devices for the PTW-ADP are correctly used: H
FX3U-3A-ADP
Verify that the special device for the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be
2. Averaging time
Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range I
FX3U-4AD-PT
3. Error status
Check that no error is detected in the PTW-ADP.
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-27
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.4 Program Check
5.4 Program Check


using the program.


If an error occurs in the PTW-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn on.

b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PTW-ADP hardware error
b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PTW-ADP communication data error
b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to 15 Unused
b4 EEPROM error - -

The temperature measurement value is not in the range between -115 °C to 615 °C.
Or the line between PTW-ADP and the platinum resistance thermometer sensor is disconnected.
2) Remedy
Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring
condition.

is destroyed.
2) Remedy

The averaging time set for one of the channels (channels 1 to 4) is outside the specified
range: 1 to 4095.
2) Remedy
J-28
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check
A
4. PTW-ADP hardware error (b6)
Common Items
The PTW-ADP does not operate properly.
2) Remedy
Check that the 24 V DC power is properly supplied to the PTW-ADP. Also check that the PTW-ADP is
FX3UC-4AD
FX3U-4AD
representative.
5. PTW-ADP communication data error (b7)

A communication error is detected between the PTW-ADP and the PLC. C
2) Remedy
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Check that the PTW-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC.
representative.
FX3G-2AD-BD
E
FX3U-4DA
F
FX3U-4DA-ADP
G
FX3G-1DA-BD
H
FX3U-3A-ADP
I
FX3U-4AD-PT
-ADP
J
FX3U-4AD-PTW
-ADP
J-29
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check
MEMO
J-30
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input)
FX3U-4AD-PNK
-ADP
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
Programmable Controllers M
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
K. FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP special
adapter (4-channel resistance thermometer data input) and should be read and understood before attempting
to install or use the unit.
it to the end user.
K-1
K-2
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions
FX3U-4AD-PNK
1. Outline
-ADP
This chapter describes the outline of FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (referred to as PNK-ADP). L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
The FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP is an analog special adapter. Connect the FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP to the FX3S/FX3G/
FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to read the data from the 4-channel resistance thermometer.
1) Only 1 PNK-ADP unit can be connected to the FX3S Series PLC.
M
PID Instruction
Up to 2*1 PNK-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC.
Up to 4 PNK-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
(FNC 88)
2) Thermometer types Pt1000 and Ni1000 can be connected. (However, it's impossible to use both types
Pt1000 and Ni1000 with 1 adapter.)
3) The temperature data will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
System Point and section to be referred to

boards, analog special adapters  units
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/ FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC
+ + to Section 1.3.
Expansion
4th 3rd 2nd 1st
For a detailed
Analog data  refer to Chapter 3.
Resistance thermometer sensor type

Pt1000 and Ni1000
Description of special devices, refer to
Transfer direction Special devices*3  Chapter 4.
Temperature measurement 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269
Setting of temperature unit 2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279 of a basic program, refer to
Switching of types between Section 4.9.
type Pt1000 and Ni1000
Setting of averaging time 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299
K-3
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using PNK-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
Refer to Chapter 1.

•Compatible programming tool version number
Refer to Chapter 2.

Refer to the common •Input characteristics
pages.

Refer to Chapter 3.
Wiring Wiring:
•Selection of sensor cable
Refer to Chapter 4. •Analog input line

K-4
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
PNK-ADP is compatible with the following PLC.
-ADP
FX3S Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After March 2013 (From first product) L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
M
1. Version check
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)

product.
K-5
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

1. English versions
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Point
K-6
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications
FX3U-4AD-PNK
2. Specifications
-ADP
This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the PNK-ADP. L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
Item Specifications
Ambient temperature
0 to 55 °C (32 to 131 °F) when operating M
-25 to 75 °C (-13 to 167 °F) when stored
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
Tested 10 times in
DIN Rail Mounting
10 to 57 − 0.075
Direct Mounting*2
57 to 150 9.8 −
147 m/s2 Acceleration, Action time: 11 ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y,
Shock resistance*1
and Z
Noise resistance
500 V AC, for 1 min
voltage
Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal
5 MΩ or more using 500 V DC
Insulation resistance
insulation resistance meter
Grounding
Working
environment

*2. If PNK-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible.


*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the PNK-ADP.
The PNK-ADP may malfunction.
Item Specifications
5 V DC, 15 mA
K-7
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.3 Performance Specifications
Specifications
Item
Platinum resistance thermometer sensor (2-wire or 3-wire) Pt1000
JIS C 1604-1997
Input signal
Nickel resistance thermometer sensor (2-wire or 3-wire) Ni1000
DIN 43760-1987
Rated temperature Pt1000 -50 °C to +250 °C Pt1000 -58 °F to +482 °F

range Ni1000 -40 °C to +110 °C Ni1000 -40 °F to +230 °F
Pt1000 -500 to +2500 Pt1000 -580 to +4820
Digital output
Ni1000 -400 to +1100 Ni1000 -400 to +2300
Pt1000 Pt1000
Resolution 0.1 °C 0.2 °F
Ni1000 Ni1000
±0.5 % for full scale (when ambient temperature is 25 °C±5 °C)
Total accuracy
±1.0 % for full scale (when ambient temperature is in the range of 0 to 55 °C)
A/D conversion
time
→For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section2.4.
-Pt1000 -Pt1000
+2560 +4920
+2500 +4820
+492.8°F
Approx.
+256°C
Approx.
-50°C 0 -58°F 0
Approx.
Approx.
+250°C +482°F
-55°C
-67°F
-500 -580
Input -550 -670
characteristics
-Ni1000 -Ni1000
+1150 +2390
+1100 +2300
Approx.
Approx.
+115°C
+239°F
-40°C 0 -40°F 0
Approx.
Approx.
+110°C +230°F
-45°C
-49°F
-400 -400
-450 -490
K-8
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
-ADP
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP FX3S Series PLC M
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
Sequence
program
A/D command
conversion
250 s/4ch


K-9
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time

FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
Sequence
program
A/D command
conversion
250 μs/4ch
A/D command
conversion
250 μs/4ch



K-10
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.5 Temperature Measurement
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
-ADP
A/D conversion is performed at every arithmetic operation of the PLC.
and then writes the data in the special data registers. L
FX3U-4AD-TC
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
-ADP
Sequence
program M
PID Instruction
A/D command
conversion
(FNC 88)
200 μs/4ch
A/D command
conversion
200 μs/4ch


1st adapter → 2nd adapter…4th adapter).


K-11
3. Wiring
This chapter describes the PNK-ADP wiring.
Observe the following caution to wire the PNK-ADP.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
K-12
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout
K
3.1 Terminal Layout
FX3U-4AD-PNK
The terminals of the PNK-ADP are arranged as follows:
-ADP
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
Signal Application M
PID Instruction
24+ External power
24-
(FNC 88)
Ground terminal
L1+
Channel-1 Pt1000/Ni1000
L1-
sensor input
l1-
L2+
L2- sensor input
l2-
L3+
L3-
sensor input
l3-
L4+
L4-
sensor input
l4-
K-13
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque

1. Cables
Termination
(AWG22 to 20)
2-wire 0.3 mm2(AWG22)×2 cable before connection.
0.22 to 0.25 • Ferrule with insulation sleeve
0.3 mm2 to 0.5 mm2 N•m (recommended terminal)
Ferrule with (AWG22-20) AI 0.5-8WH : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact
following figure.)


cannot protrude.
9mm
(0.35")
(0.1")

3. Tool
The head
straight.
Note:
<Reference>
Manufacturer Model
K-14
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.3 Power Supply Line
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
Connect the 24 V DC power supply line of the PNK-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.
-ADP
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
PNK-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U PNK-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U
+5V +5V
-ADP
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V
Terminal Terminal
block block
Fuse
Class-D Class-D


PNK-ADP FX3UC Series PLC
(Main unit)
+5V
Power
connector
24+ 24- 24+ 24-
block
Fuse
Class-D
24V DC grounding
Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line:
K-15
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.4 Selection of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor
3.4 Selection of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor

Select the Pt1000/Ni1000 (2-wire or 3-wire sensors) resistance thermometer sensor.
3.5 Wiring of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor

Wiring depends on the resistance thermometer sensor type selected. Refer to the following wiring diagrams:
Resistance thermometer PNK-ADP

wiring
+5V
3-wire
sensors Terminal 47k 47k
type Shield wire*3 block
1M ch
L+
L-
I- 1M
+5V
2-wire
sensors 47k 47k
type
1M ch
L+
L-
*2 1M
I-
External power supply

wiring +5V
24+
24V DC*1
24-
Class-D grounding
available.
*2. When using a 2-wire temperature sensor type, short-circuit the [L -] terminal and the [I -] terminal.
For the lead wire use a 10 Ω resistance or less per line.
3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring

• It is not possible to connect different types of resistance thermometer to 4 channels of PNK-ADP. Be sure
to use the same type of resistance thermometer for all the channels.
3.7 Grounding
figure.



K-16
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data
FX3U-4AD-PNK
4. Programming
-ADP
This chapter describes how to create programs that can read out the analog data using the PNK-ADP. L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
M
PID Instruction
specified.
(FNC 88)
• FX3S Series PLC
Communi-
cation
-PNK-ADP adapter -ADP FX3S Series PLC
Special devices
D8280 to D8289

Communi-
cation
FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD
special
-PNK-ADP -PNK-ADP FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC *2
adapter
2nd*1 1st
Special devices
M8280 to M8289
Program
M8290 to M8299
D8290 to D8299
*2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP to the FX3G Series
PLC.
K-17
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices

Communi-
cation
-PNK-ADP -PNK-ADP -PNK-ADP adapter -PNK-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC*1

M8260 to M8269
D8260 to D8269

M8270 to M8279
D8270 to D8279
Sequence
program
M8280 to M8289
D8280 to D8289

M8290 to M8299
D8290 to D8299
*1. An expansion board is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
PLC.

If PNK-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table:
• FX3S Series PLC
R: Read / W: Write
Special
device
Section
M8280 Selects the temperature unit R/W
Special 4.3
auxiliary Section
M8281 Input sensor selection R/W
relay 4.4
Special
Section
4.7
Section
4.8
K-18
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
R: Read / W: Write
-ADP
device 1st 2nd
Section
M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R/W
4.3 L
Special
FX3U-4AD-TC
Section
auxiliary M8281 M8291 Input sensor selection R/W
4.4
relay
M8282 to M8292 to
-ADP
M8289 M8299
M
PID Instruction
D8282 D8292 Channel-3 temperature measurement data R 4.5
(FNC 88)
Special
Section
4.7
Section
4.8

R: Read / W: Write
Section
M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R/W
4.3
Special
Section
auxiliary M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Input sensor selection R/W
4.4
relay
M8262 to M8272 to M8282 to M8292 to
M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299
D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 R
measurement data
D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 R
D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 R
measurement data
D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 R
measurement data
Special D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W
data
D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 R/W
(Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section
D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 R/W
D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 R/W
Section
4.7
Section
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 11 R
4.8
K-19
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit

The state of special auxiliary relays decides the PNK-ADP's temperature unit as shown in the table below.
• FX3S Series PLC

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

1)To switch the temperature unit to 2) To switch the temperature unit to
centigrade (C) for the 1st adapter: Fahrenheit (F) for the 2nd adapter:
M8001 M8000
M8260 M8270
K-20
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.4 Input sensor selection
K
4.4 Input sensor selection
FX3U-4AD-PNK
Turn on the Pt1000 type or off the Ni1000 type selection special auxiliary relay to select the Pt1000 or Ni1000
-ADP
for PNK-ADP.
The input sensor type will be selected for all the channels at the same time.
To select the input sensor type, use the following special auxiliary relays: L
• FX3S Series PLC
FX3U-4AD-TC
Input sensor selection:
-ADP
M8281 OFF: Pt1000
ON: Ni1000

M
PID Instruction
Description
1st 2nd
(FNC 88)
M8281 M8291 OFF: Pt1000
ON: Ni1000

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 OFF: Pt1000
ON: Ni1000

1) To select Pt1000 for the 1st adapter: 2)To select Ni1000 for the 2nd adapter :
M8001 M8000
M8261 M8271
K-21
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.5 Temperature Measurement

The temperature data input in the PNK-ADP will be stored in the special data registers.
• FX3S Series PLC

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

The temperature measurement data are for reading only.
programming tool.

M8000
FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement data
MOV of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100.
Normally
ON
FNC 12 Stores the channel-2 temperature measurement data

D8261 D101 of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101.
MOV
Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101, data registers D8260 or D8261 can
be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.
K-22
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Averaging Time
K
4.6 Averaging Time
FX3U-4AD-PNK
-ADP
Initial value: K64
If the averaging time is set for the PNK-ADP, the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in L
FX3U-4AD-TC
the D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293. The averaging time can be set
for each channel.
-ADP
• FX3S Series PLC
Special data register Description M
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

data register.

M8000
FNC 12 K32 D8264 Sets the averaging time to "32" for the channel-1
MOV data of the 1st analog special adapter.
Normally
ON
K-23
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.7 Error Status
4.7 Error Status

If an error is detected on PNK-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data
register.
• FX3S Series PLC

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PNK-ADP hardware error
b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PNK-ADP communication data error
b4 EEPROM error - -

If a PNK-ADP hardware error (b6) or PNK-ADP communication data error (b7) is once detected, it is
necessary to clear the error status with a program at next power-on of the PLC.
M8000
FNC 12
D8288 K4M0
MOV
Normally
ON
M8002 Error status in the 3rd*1 analog special adapter
RST M6 b6 = OFF (PNK-ADP hardware error)
Initial pulse
RST M7 Error status in the 3rd*1 analog special adapter

b7 = OFF (PNK-ADP communication data error)
FNC 12
K4M0 D8288
MOV
K-24
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.7 Error Status
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
M8002 Error status in the 1st analog special adapter
RST D8268.6 b6 = OFF (PNK-ADP hardware error)
-ADP
Initial pulse
RST D8268.7 Error status in the 1st analog special adapter L

FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
M8000 FNC 12
D8288 K4M0 M
MOV
PID Instruction
Normally ON
M0
(FNC 88)
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
adapter.
M6
Y006 PNK-ADP hardware error in 3rd*1
adapter.
M7
Y007 PNK-ADP communication data error
in the 3rd*1 adapter.
K-25
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.8 Model Code
D8268.0
D8268.1
D8268.2
D8268.3
D8268.4
D8268.5
adapter.
D8268.6
Y006 PNK-ADP hardware error in 1st
adapter.
D8268.7
Y007 PNK-ADP communication data error
in the 1st adapter.
4.8 Model Code

Initial value: K11
When the PNK-ADP is connected, model code "11" will be stored in the special data register.
• FX3S Series PLC
D8289 Model code

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code
Use the above special data registers to check whether PNK-ADP is connected or not.

K-26
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.9 Basic Program Example
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
Create the following basic program to read out the temperature measurement data.
-ADP
The following program will select Pt1000 and will store the temperature measurement data (°C) of
channels 1 and 2 of the 3rd*1 adapter in the D100 and the D101, respectively. The averaging time will be
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
set to "32" for channel 1, and "128" for channel 2.
M8000 FNC 12
-ADP
D8288 K4M0
Normally MOV
ON
M
adapter
PID Instruction
RST M6
b6 = OFF (PNK-ADP hardware error)
Initial
(FNC 88)
RST M7 adapter
FNC 12
K4M0 D8288
MOV
M8001
M8280 Sets the temperature unit to
centigrade (C)
Normally
OFF
M8281 Selects Pt1000
M8002
MOV channel-1 data.
Initial
pulse
MOV channel-2 data.
M8000 Stores the current value of the
FNC 12 D8280 D100 channel-1 measurement
Normally MOV temperature data to D100.
ON Stores the current value of the
MOV temperature data to D101.
Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored to D100 or D101, data registers D8280 or D8281
K-27
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.9 Basic Program Example

The following program will select Pt1000 and will store the temperature measurement data (°C) of
channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter in the D100 and the D101, respectively. The averaging time will be set
to "32" for channel 1, and "128" for channel 2.

RST D8268.6 adapter
Initial b6 = OFF (PNK-ADP hardware error)
pulse
adapter
M8001
centigrade (C)
Normally
OFF
M8261 Selects Pt1000
M8002
MOV channel-1 data.
Initial
pulse
MOV channel-2 data.
K-28
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.1 PLC Version Number Check
FX3U-4AD-PNK
5. Troubleshooting
-ADP
This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status. L
FX3U-4AD-TC
items:
-ADP
• Wiring
• Special devices
• Programs M
PID Instruction
• Error status
(FNC 88)
5.2 Wiring Check

1. Power
The PNK-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that
the POWER indicator lamp of the PNK-ADP is on.
2. Resistance thermometer sensor cable

When using a 2-wire temperature sensor type, short-circuit the [L-] terminal and the [I-] terminal.
Separate the cable of the resistance thermometer sensor from the other power cables or areas easily affected
by inductive noise (of the commercial power, etc.).

Check whether the special devices for the PNK-ADP are correctly used:
1. Input sensor selection

Check if the special device for type Pt1000/Ni1000 selection is correctly set.
Turn off the device to select Pt1000. Turn on the device to select Ni1000.
Check if the special device of the selected channel is correctly set.
This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel.
3. Averaging time
Verify if the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range
4. Error status
Check that no error is detected in the PNK-ADP.
K-29
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.4 Program Check
5.4 Program Check


using the program.


If an error occurs in the PNK-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn on.

b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PNK-ADP hardware error
b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PNK-ADP communication data error
b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 Unused
b4 EEPROM error - -

The temperature measurement value of Pt1000 is not in the range between -55 °C to +256 °C, or the
temperature measurement value of Ni1000 is not in the range between -45 °C to +115 °C.
Alternatively, wiring with Pt1000 and Ni1000 is disconnected.
2) Remedy
Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range.
Also check the wiring condition.

The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory is unreadable or is destroyed.
2) Remedy

2) Remedy
K-30
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check
K
4. PNK-ADP hardware error (b6)
FX3U-4AD-PNK
The PNK-ADP does not operate properly.
-ADP
2) Remedy
Check that the 24 V DC power is properly supplied to the PNK-ADP.
Also check that the PNK-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. L
FX3U-4AD-TC
representative.
5. PNK-ADP communication data error (b7)
-ADP
A communication error is detected between the PNK-ADP and the PLC. M
2) Remedy
PID Instruction
Check that the PNK-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC.
(FNC 88)
representative.
K-31
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check
MEMO
K-32
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input)
FX3U-4AD-PNK
-ADP
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
L. FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple
Data Input)
Foreword
This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP special
adapter (4-channel thermocouple input) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or
use the unit.
it to the end user.
L-1
L-2
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions
FX3U-4AD-PNK
1. Outline
-ADP
This chapter describes the outline of FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (referred to as TC-ADP). L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
The FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP is an analog special adapter. Connect the FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP to the FX3S/FX3G/
FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to read the data from the 4-channel thermocouple.
1) Only 1 TC-ADP unit can be connected to the FX3S Series PLC.
M
PID Instruction
Up to 2*1 TC-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC.
Up to 4 TC-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
(FNC 88)
2) Thermocouple types K and J can be connected. (However, it's impossible to use both types K and J with
1 adapter.)
3) A/D conversion data will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
System Point and section to be referred to

boards, analog special adapters  units
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/ FX3U/FX3UC
Series PLC
+ + to Section 1.3.
Expansion
4th 3rd 2nd 1st
For a detailed

refer to Chapter 3.
Thermocouple temperature sensor type K or J
Description Transfer direction Special devices*3  of special devices, refer to
Chapter 4.
Temperature measurement 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269
Setting of temperature unit 2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279 of a basic program, refer to
Switching of types between Section 4.9.
type K and type J
Setting of averaging time 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299
L-3
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using TC-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
Refer to Chapter 1.

•Compatible programming tool version number
Refer to Chapter 2.

Refer to the common •Input characteristics
pages.

Refer to Chapter 3.
Wiring Wiring:
•Selection of sensor cable
Refer to Chapter 4. •Analog input line

L-4
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
TC-ADP is compatible with the following PLC.
-ADP
FX3S Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After March 2013 (From first product) L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
M
1. Version check
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)

product.
L-5
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

1. English versions
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3S PLC
-
FX3G PLC
FX3GC PLC
-
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Point
L-6
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications
FX3U-4AD-PNK
2. Specifications
-ADP
This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the TC-ADP. L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
Item Specifications
Ambient temperature
0 to 55 °C (32 to 131 °F) when operating M
-25 to 75 °C (-13 to 167 °F) when stored
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
Tested 10 times in
DIN Rail Mounting
10 to 57 − 0.075
Direct Mounting*2
57 to 150 9.8 −
147 m/s2 Acceleration, Action time: 11 ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y,
Shock resistance*1
and Z
Noise resistance
500 V AC, for 1 min
voltage
Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal
5 MΩ or more using 500 V DC
Insulation resistance
insulation resistance meter
Grounding
Working
environment

*2. If TC-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible.


*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the TC-ADP.
The TC-ADP may malfunction.
Item Specifications
5 V DC, 15 mA
L-7
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 2.3 Performance Specifications
Specifications
Item
Input signal
JIS C 1602-1995
Rated temperature Type K -100 °C to +1000 °C Type K -148 °F to +1832 °F

range Type J -100 °C to +600 °C Type J -148 °F to +1112 °F
Type K -1000 to +10000 Type K -1480 to +18320
Digital output
Type J -1000 to +6000 Type J -1480 to +11120
Type K 0.4 °C Type K 0.72 °F
Resolution
Type J 0.3 °C Type J 0.54 °F
Total accuracy ± (0.5 % full scale +1 °C)
A/D conversion
time
→For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section2.4.
• Type K •Type K
+10100 +18500
+10000 +18320
+1010°C
+1850° F
-100°C 0 -148° F 0
+1000°C +1832° F
-110°C
-166° F
-1000 -1480
-1100 -1660
Input
characteristics
•Type J •Type J
+6100 +11300
+6000 +11120
+1130°F
+610°C
-100°C 0 -148°F 0
+600°C +1112°F
-110°C
-166°F
-1000 -1480
-1100 -1660
L-8
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
-ADP
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP FX3S Series PLC

M
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
Sequence
program
A/D command
conversion
250 s/4ch


L-9
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time

FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
Sequence
program
A/D command
conversion
250 μs/4ch
A/D command
conversion
250 μs/4ch



L-10
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 2.5 Temperature Measurement
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
-ADP
and then writes the data in the special data registers. L
FX3U-4AD-TC
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
-ADP
Sequence
program M
PID Instruction
A/D command
conversion
(FNC 88)
200 μs/4ch
A/D command
conversion
200 μs/4ch


1st adapter → 2nd adapter…4th adapter).


L-11
3. Wiring
This chapter describes the TC-ADP wiring.
Observe the following caution to wire the TC-ADP.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
out.
L-12
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout
K
3.1 Terminal Layout
FX3U-4AD-PNK
The terminals of the TC-ADP are arranged as follows:
-ADP
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
Signal Application M
PID Instruction
24+ External power
24-
(FNC 88)
Ground terminal
• Unused
• (Do not connect any lines.)
J-type Switches the type between
J-type type K and type J.
L1+ Channel-1 thermocouple
L1- sensor input
L2- sensor input
L3- sensor input
L4- sensor input
L-13
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque

1. Cables
Termination
(AWG22 to 20)
2-wire 0.3 mm2(AWG22)×2 cable before connection.
0.22 to 0.25 • Ferrule with insulation sleeve
0.3 mm2 to 0.5 mm2 N•m (recommended terminal)
Ferrule with (AWG22-20) AI 0.5-8WH : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact
following figure.)


cannot protrude.
9mm
(0.35")
(0.1")

3. Tool
The head
straight.
Note:
<Reference>
Manufacturer Model
L-14
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 3.3 Power Supply Line
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
Connect the 24 V DC power supply line of the TC-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.
-ADP
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
TC-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U TC-ADP FX3S/FX3G/FX3U
+5V +5V
-ADP
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V
Terminal Terminal
block block
Fuse
Class-D Class-D


TC-ADP FX3UC Series
PLC (Main unit)
+5V
Power
connector
24+ 24- 24+ 24-
block
Fuse
Class-D
24V DC grounding
Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line:
L-15
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 3.4 Selection of the Thermocouple
3.4 Selection of the Thermocouple
3.4.1 Thermocouple type
• There are 2 types of thermocouples: K type and J type. When selecting the thermocouple type, make sure
that the same type of thermocouple is connection to all the channels.
• Be sure to use a non-grounded thermocouple type.
3.4.2 Compensating lead wire

To connect the thermocouple, use one of the following types of compensating lead wires:
Thermocouple Type of compensating lead wire

Type K KX,KCA,KCB,KCC
Type J JX
• The compensating lead wire indicates a temperature value of approximately 0.12 °C higher than that of the
wire resistor (10 Ω). Use the appropriate compensating lead wire when considering this difference.
• If the compensating lead wire is very long, the wire may be easily affected by noise, etc. It is, therefore,
recommended for the length of the compensating lead wire to be 100 m or less.
3.5 Wiring of Thermocouple

Wiring depends on the thermocouple type selected. Refer to the following wiring diagrams:
3.5.1 Wiring of thermocouple type K
Terminal block TC-ADP

*1 Type J
OPEN
Type J
Temperature
compensating circuit
Thermocouple Compensating
type K*2 lead wire
3k
L+ ch
L-
Shield
Temperature
compensating circuit
3k ch
L+
L-
+5V
24+
24V DC*3
24-
Class-D
grounding
L+, L-, ch: represents the channel number.
*1. It is not necessary to connect lines to the J-type terminals. Leave these terminals disconnected.
*2. Keep the thermocouple away from inductive noise (commercial power, etc.).
available.
L-16
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring
K
3.5.2 Wiring of the thermocouple type J
FX3U-4AD-PNK
Terminal block
-ADP
TC-ADP
type J
*1
Thermocouple Compensating
type J Temperature
compensating circuit L
type J*2 lead wire
FX3U-4AD-TC
3k ch
L+
L-
-ADP
Shield
Temperature
compensating circuit M
3k
ch
PID Instruction
L+
L-
(FNC 88)
+5V
24+
24V DC*3
24-
Class-D
grounding
L+, L-, ch: represents the channel number.
*1. To use a J thermocouple type, be sure to connect the thermocouple to these terminals. In addition,
select J type by turning on the type K/J selection special auxiliary relay.
*2. Keep the thermocouple away from inductive noise (commercial power, etc.).
available.
3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring

• It is not possible to connect different types of thermocouples to 4 channels of TC-ADP. Be sure to use the
same type of thermocouple for all the channels.
• TC-ADP is not insulated between the channels. For this reason, be sure to use a non-grounded type
thermocouple.
• Be sure not to connect to the terminal "•".
3.7 Grounding
figure.



L-17
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data
4. Programming
This chapter describes how to create programs that can read out the analog data using the TC-ADP.

specified.
• FX3S Series PLC
Communi-
cation
-TC-ADP adapter -ADP FX3S Series PLC
Special devices
D8280 to D8289

Communi-
cation
FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD
special
-TC-ADP -TC-ADP FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC*2
adapter
2nd*1 1st
Special devices
M8280 to M8289
Program
M8290 to M8299
D8290 to D8299
*2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP to the FX3G Series
PLC.
L-18
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
Communi-
cation
-TC-ADP -TC-ADP -TC-ADP -TC-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC*1
-ADP
adapter

L
FX3U-4AD-TC
M8260 to M8269
D8260 to D8269
-ADP
M8270 to M8279
D8270 to D8279 M
Sequence
PID Instruction
program
(FNC 88)
M8280 to M8289
D8280 to D8289

M8290 to M8299
D8290 to D8299
*1. An expansion board is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
PLC.

If TC-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table:
• FX3S Series PLC
R: Read / W: Write
Special
device
Section
M8280 Selects the temperature unit R/W
Special 4.3
auxiliary Switches the thermocouple type between type K and Section
M8281 R/W
relay type J 4.4
Special
Section
4.7
Section
4.8
L-19
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices

R: Read / W: Write
device 1st 2nd
Section
M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R/W
4.3
Special
Switches the thermocouple type between type K and Section
auxiliary M8281 M8291 R/W
type J 4.4
relay
M8282 to M8292 to
M8289 M8299
D8282 D8292 Channel-3 temperature measurement data R 4.5
Special
Section
4.7
Section
4.8

R: Read / W: Write
Section
M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R/W
4.3
Special
Switches the thermocouple type Section
auxiliary M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 R/W
between type K and type J 4.4
relay
M8262 to M8272 to M8282 to M8292 to
M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299
D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 R
measurement data
D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 R
D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 R
measurement data
D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 R
measurement data
Special D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W
data
D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 R/W
(Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section
D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 R/W
D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 R/W
Section
4.7
Section
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 10 R
4.8
L-20
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
The state of special auxiliary relays decides the TC-ADP's temperature unit as shown in the table below.
-ADP
• FX3S Series PLC
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
M
PID Instruction
Description
1st 2nd
(FNC 88)

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

1)To switch the temperature unit to 2) To switch the temperature unit to
centigrade (C) for the 1st adapter: Fahrenheit (F) for the 2nd adapter:
M8001 M8000
M8260 M8270
L-21
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.4 Selection of Type K or J
4.4 Selection of Type K or J

Turn on the J type or off the K type selection special auxiliary relay to select the thermocouple type J or K for
TC-ADP.
The thermocouple type will be selected for all the channels at the same time.
To select the thermocouple type, use the following special auxiliary relays:
• FX3S Series PLC
Selection of type K or J:
M8281 OFF: Type K
ON: Type J

Description
1st 2nd
M8281 M8291 OFF: Type K
ON: Type J

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 OFF: Type K
ON: Type J

1) To select thermocouple type K for the 2)To select thermocouple type J for the
1st adapter: 2nd adapter :
M8001 M8000
M8261 M8271
L-22
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.5 Temperature Measurement
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
The temperature data input in the TC-ADP will be stored in the special data registers.
-ADP
• FX3S Series PLC
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
M
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

The temperature measurement data are for reading only.
programming tool.

M8000
FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement data
MOV of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100.
Normally
ON
FNC 12 Stores the channel-2 temperature measurement data

D8261 D101 of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101.
MOV
Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101, data registers D8260 or D8261 can
be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.
L-23
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.6 Averaging Time
4.6 Averaging Time

Initial value: K64
If the averaging time is set for the TC-ADP, the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in the
D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293. The averaging time can be set for
each channel.
• FX3S Series PLC

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

data register.

M8000
Normally
ON
L-24
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.7 Error Status
K
4.7 Error Status
FX3U-4AD-PNK
If an error is detected on TC-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data
-ADP
register.
• FX3S Series PLC L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
Description M
1st 2nd
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 TC-ADP hardware error
b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 TC-ADP communication data error
b4 EEPROM error - -

If a TC-ADP hardware error (b6) or TC-ADP communication data error (b7) is once detected, it is necessary
to clear the error status with a program at next power-on of the PLC.
M8000
FNC 12 D8288 K4M0
MOV
Normally
ON
M8002 Error status in the 3rd*1 analog special adapter
RST M6 b6 = OFF (TC-ADP hardware error)
Initial pulse
RST M7 Error status in the 3rd*1 analog special adapter

b7 = OFF (TC-ADP communication data error)
FNC 12
K4M0 D8288
MOV
L-25
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.7 Error Status
M8002 Error status in the 1st analog special adapter

RST D8268.6 b6 = OFF (TC-ADP hardware error)
Initial pulse
RST D8268.7 Error status in the 1st analog special adapter

M8000 FNC 12
D8288 K4M0
Normally ON MOV
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
adapter.
M6
Y006 TC-ADP hardware error in 3rd*1
adapter.
M7
Y007 TC-ADP communication data error
in the 3rd*1 adapter.
L-26
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.8 Model Code
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
D8268.0
-ADP
D8268.1
range, or disconnection is detected. L
FX3U-4AD-TC
D8268.2
-ADP
D8268.3
range, or disconnection is detected. M
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
D8268.4
D8268.5
adapter.
D8268.6
Y006 TC-ADP hardware error in 1st
adapter.
D8268.7
Y007 TC-ADP communication data error
in the 1st adapter.
4.8 Model Code

Initial value: K10
When the TC-ADP is connected, model code "10" will be stored in the special data register.
• FX3S Series PLC
D8289 Model code

Description
1st 2nd

Description
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code
Use the above special data registers to check whether TC-ADP is connected or not.

L-27
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.9 Basic Program Example

Create the following basic program to read out the temperature measurement data.
• For FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs
The following program will select thermocouple type K and will store the temperature measurement data
(°C) of channels 1 and 2 of the 3rd*1 adapter in the D100 and the D101, respectively. The averaging time
will be set to "32" for channel 1, and "128" for channel 2.
M8000
FNC 12 D8288 K4M0
Normally MOV
ON
RST M6 adapter
b6 = OFF (TC-ADP hardware error)
Initial
RST M7 adapter
FNC 12 K4M0 D8288
MOV
M8001
centigrade (C)
Normally
OFF
M8281 Selects thermocouple type K
M8002
MOV channel-1 data.
Initial
pulse
MOV channel-2 data.
L-28
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.9 Basic Program Example
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
The following program will select thermocouple type K and will store the temperature measurement data
(°C) of channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter in the D100 and the D101, respectively. The averaging time will
be set to "32" for channel 1, and "128" for channel 2.
-ADP
M8002
RST D8268.6
Error status of 1st analog special
adapter
b6 = OFF (TC-ADP hardware error)
L
Initial
FX3U-4AD-TC
pulse
adapter
M8001
-ADP
centigrade (C)
Normally
OFF M
M8261 Selects thermocouple type K
PID Instruction
M8002
(FNC 88)
MOV channel-1 data.
Initial
pulse
MOV channel-2 data.
L-29
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 5.1 PLC Version Number Check
5. Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status.
items:
• Wiring
• Special devices
• Programs
• Error status

5.2 Wiring Check

1. Power
The TC-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the
POWER indicator lamp of the TC-ADP is on.
2. Thermocouple cable
Use a non-grounded type thermocouple and connect the thermocouple using the compensating lead wire.
In addition, separate the cable of the thermocouple from the other power cables or inductive cables.
3. To use thermocouple type J
To use thermocouple type J, shortcircuit the J-type terminals. If these terminals are not shortcircuited, the
temperature measurement data cannot be read out correctly.

Check whether the special devices for the TC-ADP are correctly used:
1. Selection of type K or J
Check if the special device for type K/J selection is correctly set.
Turn off the device to select thermocouple type K. Turn on the device to select thermocouple type J.
Check if the special device of the selected channel is correctly set.
This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel.
3. Averaging time
Verify if the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range
4. Error status
Check that no error is detected in the TC-ADP.
L-30
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 5.4 Program Check
K
5.4 Program Check
FX3U-4AD-PNK
-ADP
When the power is turned off and then on again, the error status should be cleared (the b6 and the b7 should L
turn off) using the program.
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
5.5 Error Status Check M
PID Instruction
If an error occurs in the TC-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn on.
(FNC 88)

b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 TC-ADP hardware error
b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 TC-ADP communication data error
b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused
b4 EEPROM error - -

The temperature measurement value of thermocouple type K is not in the range between -110 °C to
+1010 °C, or the temperature measurement value of thermocouple type J is not in the range between
-110 °C to +610 °C.
Or the line between TC-ADP and the thermocouple is disconnected.
2) Remedy
Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range.
Also check the wiring condition.

The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory is unreadable or is destroyed.
2) Remedy

2) Remedy
L-31
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check
4. TC-ADP hardware error (b6)

The TC-ADP does not operate properly.
2) Remedy
Check that the 24 V DC power is properly supplied to the TC-ADP.
Also check that the TC-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC.
representative.
5. TC-ADP communication data error (b7)

A communication error is detected between the TC-ADP and the PLC.
2) Remedy
Check that the TC-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC.
representative.
L-32
PID Instruction (FNC 88)
FX3U-4AD-PNK
-ADP
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
M. PID Instruction (FNC 88)
Foreword
This manual describes the control methods for using the PID instruction in combination with analog products
and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
it to the end user.
M-1
PID Instruction (FNC 88)
M-2
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 1.1 Outline of function
FX3U-4AD-PNK
1. Outline
-ADP
This chapter describes the outline of PID instruction (FNC88) for the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series
PLC.
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
1.1 Outline of function
-ADP
The PID instruction requires the system to calculate the output (MV) value from the measured (PV) value.
Through combining the P (proportional) action, I (integral) action, and D (derivative) action the target (SV) M
value can be obtained. See diagram below.
PID Instruction
1) Alarm output function
(FNC 88)
The alarm function can be set for input variation (measured value) or output variation (value).
2) Setting limit values
The upper limit and lower limit can be set for the output value.
3) Auto-tuning function
The proportional gain (KP), integral time (TI) and differential time (TD) can be set automatically for both
the limit cycle method and step response method.
4) Operation method of the PID instruction
Both PID speed type operation and measured value differential type operation are executed.
Measured value (PV)
Target value
(SV)
Controlled
PID Instruction object
Output value (MV)
M-3
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 1.2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction (Reference)
1.2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction (Reference)

The PID instruction executes using the speed type or measured value differential type operation expression.
According to the contents of S3 +1, bit 0 (operation setting (ACT)) specified by S3 in the PID control,
either for forward operation or backward operation is executed.
Each value required in the operation is specified by a corresponding parameter S3 or later.
1. Basic operation expression for PID control

Operation
direction (ACT) PID operation expression
S3 +1, b0
TS
ΔMV = KP{(EVn − EVn-1) + EVn + Dn}
TI
Forward operation EVn = PVnf-SV
(OFF) TD KDTD
Dn = (−2PVnf−1 + PVnf + PVnf−2) +  Dn-1
TS + KDTD TS + KDTD
MVn = ΣΔMV
TS
ΔMV = KP{(EVn − EVn−1) + EVn + Dn}
TI
Backward EVn = SV − PVnf
operation (ON) TD KDTD
Dn = (2PVnf−1 − PVnf − PVnf−2) + Dn-1
TS + KDTD TS + KDTD
MVn = ΣΔMV
1) Symbols
EVn : Deviation in sampling at this time Dn : Differential term at this time
EVn-1 : Deviation in previous cycle Dn-1 : Differential term in previous cycle
SV : Target value KP : Proportional gain
PVnf : Measured value in sampling at this time (after filter) TS : Sampling cycle
PVnf-1 : Measured value in previous cycle (after filter) TI : Integral constant
PVnf-2 : Measured value in two cycles before (after filter) TD : Differential constant
ΔMV : Output variation KD : Differential gain
MVn : Operation quantity at this time
2) Expression for calculating the measured value (after the filter) in sampling at this time (PVnf)
The value "PVnf" is obtained from the following expression based on the read measured value.
Measured value after filter: PVnf = PVn+L(PVnf-1-PVn)
PVn : Measured value in sampling at this time

L : Filter coefficient
PVnf-1 : Measured value in previous cycle (after filter)
M-4
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 How to Use PID Instruction
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 2.1 Explanation of function and operation
FX3U-4AD-PNK
2. How to Use PID Instruction
-ADP
1. Instruction format L
FX3U-4AD-TC
16-bit Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Mnemonic Operation Condition
FNC 88 Instruction Instruction
PID 9 steps PID Continuous ⎯
PID
Operation
-ADP
2. Set data M
PID Instruction
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Data register storing the target value (SV) Binary 16-bit
(FNC 88)
S2 Data register storing the measured value (PV) Binary 16-bit
S3 Data register storing PID parameters Binary 16-bit
D Data register storing the output value (MV) Binary 16-bit
3. Target devices
Bit devices Word devices Others
Special Con- Real Char- Poin-

Operand System User Digit Specification System User Index Num- acter
Unit stant ter
type ber String
Mod-
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G V Z K H E "" P
ify
S1  1 2
S2  1 2
S3  1
D  1 2
1 : Only available for FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

2 : Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
2.1 Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit PID operation

Once the target value S1 , measured value S2 and PID parameters S3 to S3 + 6 are set and the
program is executed, the operation result (MV) is transferred to the output value D at every sampling
time. The sampling time is specified by S3
Command
input
FNC 88 S1 S2 S3 D
PID
Target Measured PID Output
value value Parameters value
(SV) (PV) (MV)
M-5
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 How to Use PID Instruction
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 2.2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto-Tuning
Explanation of set items

Occupied
Set item Description
points
• The target value (SV) is set.
• The PID instruction does not change the settings.
Target value • Caution on using the auto-tuning (limit cycle method)
S1 1
(SV) If the target value for auto-tuning is different from the target value in the PID
control, it is necessary to set a value to which a bias value is added, and then
store the actual target value when the auto-tuning flag turns OFF.
Measured
S2 This is the input value of the PID operation. 1
value (PV)
1) Auto-tuning (in the limit cycle)
Twenty-nine devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 29
2) Auto-tuning (in the step response method)
S3 Parameter*1 a) Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 15 are something other than "0"
Twenty-five devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 25
b) Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 15 are "0"
Twenty devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 20
1) PID control (normal processing)
The user sets the initial output value before driving the instruction.
After that, the operation result is stored.
2) Auto-tuning (in the limit cycle method)
Output value The Upper Limit Value (ULV) or Lower Limit Value (LLV) value is automatically
D 1
(MV) output during auto-tuning. The specified MV value is output when auto-tuning is
finished.
3) Auto-tuning (in the step response method)
The user sets the step output value before driving the instruction.
The MV value is not changed by PID instruction during auto-tuning.
*1. When auto-tuning is not executed for the limit cycle method, the same number of devices as those
occupied in the step response method become occupied.
2.2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto-Tuning
1. When auto-tuning is not executed (parameter setting)

It is necessary to write the set value of the parameters S3 to S3 +6 using MOV instruction in advance,
etc. before starting the PID operation when auto-tuning is not executed.
When data registers in the latch area are backed up against power failure, the setting data is held even after
the power of the PLC is turned OFF. Therefore, writing is not necessary when the power is turned back ON.
2. When auto-tuning is executed

The proportional gain ( S3 +3), integral time ( S3 +4) and differential time ( S3 +6) are important
constants for executing the auto-tuning function described later and for optimizing the PID control. These
constants can be set automatically.
→ For a detailed description of auto-tuning (limit cycle method), refer to Section. 4.1.
→ For a detailed description of auto-tuning (step response method), refer to Section. 4.2.
M-6
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.1 Parameter List: (S3) to (S3) + 28
FX3U-4AD-PNK
3. Parameter
-ADP
This chapter describes various parameters of PID instruction. L
FX3U-4AD-TC
3.1 Parameter List: (S3) to (S3) + 28
-ADP
Set item Setting Remarks Reference
It cannot be shorter than operation Subsection
M
Sampling time (TS) 1 to 32767 (ms)
PID Instruction
S3
cycle of the PLC. 3.2.1
0: Forward operation
(FNC 88)
bit0 Operation direction
1: Backward operation
0: Input variation alarm is invalid.
bit1
1: Input variation alarm is valid.
0: Output variation alarm is invalid. Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at
bit2
1: Output variation alarm is valid. same time.
bit3 Not available
Operation 0: Auto-tuning is not executed. Subsection
S3 +1 bit4
setting (ACT) 1: Auto-tuning is executed. 3.2.2
0: Upper and lower limits of output
value are not valid. Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at
bit5
1: Upper and lower limits of output same time.
value are valid.
0: Step response method
bit6 Select auto-tuning mode.
1: Limit cycle method
bit7 to bit15 Not available
When "0" is set, input filter is not Subsection
S3 +2 Input filter constant (α) 0 to 99 (%)
provided. 3.2.3
Subsection
S3 +3 Proportional gain (KP) 1 to 32767 (%)
3.2.4
When "0" is set, it is handled as "∞" Subsection
S3 +4 Integral time (TI) 0 to 32767 (× 100 ms)
(no integration). 3.2.5
When "0" is set, differential gain is Subsection
S3 +5 Differential gain (KD) 0 to 100 (%)
not provided. 3.2.6
When "0" is set, differential is not Subsection
S3 +6 Differential time (TD) 0 to 32767 (× 10 ms)
executed. 3.2.7
S3 +7
: These devices are occupied for internal processing of PID operation. Do not change data. -
S3 +19
M-7
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.1 Parameter List: (S3) to (S3) + 28
Set item Setting Remarks Reference

Input variation (incremental) It is valid when operation direction
S3 +20*1 alarm set value 0 to 32767
(ACT) (bit 1 of S3 +1) is "1".
Input variation (decremental) It is valid when operation direction
S3 +21*1 alarm set value 0 to 32767
(ACT) (bit 1 of S3 +1) is "1".
It is valid when operation direction
Output variation S3
0 to 32767 (ACT) (bit 2 of +1) is "1"
(incremental) alarm set value
or (ACT) (bit 5 of S3 +1) is "0".
S3 +22*1
It is valid when operation direction Subsection
Output upper limit set value −32768 to 32767 (ACT) (bit 2 of S3 +1) is "0" 3.2.2
or (ACT) (bit 5 of S3 +1) is "1"
Output variation S3
0 to 32767 (ACT) (bit 2 of +1) is "1"
(decremental) alarm set value
S3 +23*1
Output lower limit set value −32768 to 32767 (ACT) (bit 2 of S3 +1) is "0"
0: Input variation (incremental) is not
exceeded.
bit0
1: Input variation (incremental) is
exceeded.
0: Input variation (decremental) is
not exceeded.
bit1
1: Input variation (decremental) is
exceeded. Subsection
S3 +24*1 Alarm output (ACT) (bit 1 or bit 2 of S3 +1) is 3.2.8
0: Output variation (incremental) is
"1".
not exceeded.
bit2
1: Output variation (incremental) is
exceeded.
0: Output variation (decremental) is
not exceeded.
bit3
1: Output variation (decremental) is
exceeded.
The setting below is required when the limit cycle method is used (when the operation direction (ACT) b6 is set to ON).
PV value threshold Set it according to measured value
S3 +25 (hysteresis) width (SHPV) (PV) fluctuation.
Output value upper limit Set maximum value (ULV) of output
S3 +26 (ULV) value (MV). They are occupied when operation
Output value lower limit Set minimum value (LLV) of output direction (ACT) (bit 6) is "ON (limit Chapter 4
S3 +27 cycle method)."
(LLV) value (MV).
Wait setting from end of tuning
S3 +28 cycle to start of PID control −50 to 32717 %
(KW)
*1. S3 +20 to +24 become occupied only if bits 1, 2, or 5 are set to "1" to determine the action (ACT) of
S3 +1.
M-8
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.2 Details of Parameters
3.2 Details of Parameters

K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
3.2.1 Sampling time (TS): (S3)
-ADP
Setting range: 1 to 32767 [ms]
Set the cycle time (ms) for the PID operation.
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
• In PID control and auto-tuning (Limit cycle method)
Set the sampling time longer than the operation cycle of the PLC.
• In auto-tuning (Step response method)
-ADP
Set the sampling time to 1,000 ms (= 1 second) or more.
1. Maximum error
M
PID Instruction
The maximum error of the sampling time (TS) is from "-(one operation cycle + 1 ms)" to "+(one operation
cycle)."
(FNC 88)
1) When the sampling time (TS) is a small value
Fluctuation of the maximum error described above may cause a problem.
In such a case, execute the PID instruction in the constant scan mode, or program it in a timer interrupt
routine.
2) When the sampling time (TS) is shorter than one operation cycle of the PLC
A PID operation error (K6740) occurs, however when PID operation is executed, the sampling time (TS) is
equal to the operation cycle of the PLC.
In such a case, use the PID instruction in a timer interrupt (I6 to I8), and clear S3 +7 just before
executing the PID instruction.
→ For a detailed description, refer to FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual
- Basic & Applied Instruction Edition
S3 +7 is reset.
X000 (When the interrupt routine is executed for the
FNC 12 K 0 D107
I610 first time, the register for internal processing is
MOVP
cleared by the pulse generation command.)
FNC 88 D 0 D 1 D100 D150 The PID operation is

PID executed.
M-9
3.2.2 Operation setting (ACT):(S3)+1
Setting range: OFF = forward operation, ON = backward operation
1. Forward operation or backward operation: S3 +1, bit 0

Select the PID control direction (forward or backward).
• During auto-tuning for the limit cycle method
It is necessary to set the PID control direction (forward or backward) for auto-tuning.
• During auto-tuning for the step response method
The PID control direction (forward or backward) is not required as, the direction is automatically set when
auto-tuning is complete.
Forward operation: S3 +1, bit 0 = 0

As the measured value (PV) becomes larger than the target value (SV), the output (MV) increases.
For example, cooling is a forward operation.
<Cooling>
Temperature
Measured value (PV)
Target value (SV)
Time
Backward operation: S3 +1, bit 0 = 1

As the measured value (PV) becomes smaller than the target value (SV), the output (MV) increases.
For example, heating is a backward operation.
<Heating>
Target value (SV)

Temperature
Measured value (PV)
Time
Relationship between the forward/backward operation and the output (MV), measured value (PV) and
target value (SV)
The relationship is as follows.
Target value (SV)
Output (MV)
Backward Forward
operation operation
Measured value (PV)
M-10
2. Alarm setting (for input variation and output variation): S3 +1, bit 1 and bit 2
K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
Setting range: OFF, ON
The input variation and output variation can be checked arbitrarily.
These parameters can be set in S3 +24.
-ADP
→ For the operation of upper/lower limit alarm output for the input and output values,
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
Input variation: S3 +1, bit 1
When using the input variation alarm, it is necessary to set to ON the following bits and set the values to be
checked.
-ADP
Set item Setting (setting range)
Operation setting
(ACT)
S3 +1 bit1 Input variation alarm
ON: Used
OFF: Not used
M
PID Instruction
Input variation S3 +20 Input variation (incremental) alarm set value 0 to 32767
alarm set value
(FNC 88)
S3 +21 Input variation (decremental) alarm set value 0 to 32767
Output variation: S3 +1, bit 2

When using the output variation alarm, it is necessary to set the following bits to ON and set the values to be
checked.
ON: Used
Operation setting bit2 Output variation alarm
S3 +1 OFF: Not used
(ACT)
bit5 Output value upper/lower limit setting Make sure to set it to OFF
Output variation S3 +22 Output variation (incremental) alarm set value 0 to 32767
alarm set value S3 Output variation (decremental) alarm set value 0 to 32767
+23
Variation means (Previous value) - (Current value)
3. Upper and lower limits for output value: S3 +1, bit 5

Setting range: OFF = Setting is not provided., ON = Setting is provided.
The upper limit and lower limit of the output value work as shown in the graph below.
The upper limit and lower limit of the output value can moderate the increase of the integral item in the PID
control.
When using the upper limit and lower limit of the output value, make sure to set S3 +1, bit 2 is set to OFF.
bit2 Output variation alarm Make sure to set it to OFF
Operation setting
S3 +1(ACT) ON: Used
(ACT) bit5 Output value upper/lower limit setting
OFF: Not used
Output value
When the upper limit and lower These values
limit of output value are not set are not output.
S3 +22
Output value
upper limit
S3 +23
Output value
lower limit These values
are not output.
When the upper limit and lower
limit of output value are set
Time
M-11
3.2.3 Input filter (α): (S3)+2
Setting range: 0 to 99[%]

PID control: Proportional operation, integral operation and differential operation
The input filter (α) is a software filter to reduce the fluctuation of the measured value (PV) caused by noise.
By setting this time constant of the filter according to the control target characteristics and noise level, the
effect of noise can be reduced.
• If the input filter value is too small, the filter effect is small.
• If the input filter value is too large, the input response is bad.
Because the input filter (α) is effective to the target value (SV), all of the proportional operation, integral
operation and differential operation are affected.
Pulse input by noise

Actual
measured
value (PV)
Input amplitude
Measured Input amplitude
value (PV) processed by input filter
processed by
input filter
M-12
3.2.4 Proportional gain (KP): (S3)+3

K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
PID control: Proportional operation
-ADP
During the proportional operation, the output (MV) increases in proportion to the deviation (difference
between the target value (SV) and the measured value (PV)).
This deviation is called proportional gain (Kp), and expressed in the following relational expression: L
FX3U-4AD-TC
Output (MV) = Proportional gain (KP) × Deviation (EV)
The reciprocal of the proportional gain (KP) is called proportional band.
As the proportional gain (KP) is larger (as shown in the example below), the motion to let the measured value
-ADP
(PV) be nearer to the target value (SV) becomes stronger.
Example 1: Proportional operation (P operation) in heating (backward operation)

M
PID Instruction
Target value (SV)
(FNC 88)
Temperature
Measured value (PV)

KP3 Remaining deviation
Proportional gain
KP2 KP3 > KP2 > KP1
KP1
Time
Output (MV)
Proportional gain
KP3 KP3 > KP2 > KP1
KP2 KP1
Time
Example 2: Proportional operation (P operation) in cooling (forward operation)

Temperature
Proportional gain
KP3 KP2 KP1 KP3 > KP2 > KP1
Measured value (PV)
Target value (SV)

Remaining deviation
Time
Output (MV)
Proportional gain
KP3 KP2 KP1 KP3 > KP2 > KP1
Time
3.2.5 Integral time (TI): (S3)+4
Setting range: 0 to 32767 [ × 100 ms] "0" is handled as "∞" (no integration).
PID operation: Integral operation
During the integral operation, the time after deviation is generated until the integral operation output becomes
the proportional operation output. This is called integral time and is expressed as "TI".
As TI becomes smaller, the integral operation becomes stronger.
M-13
Example 1: PI operation in heating (backward operation)

TI3
Measured value in PI operation
Temperature
Target Measured value in proportional operation

TI2 TI1
value (SV) Integral time (TI)
0 < TI3 < TI2 < TI1
Time
Integral time (TI)

Output (MV)
TI3 0 < TI3 < TI2 < TI1

Output in PI operation
TI2 TI1
Output in proportional operation
Time
Example 2: Proportional operation (P operation) in cooling (forward operation)

Integral time (TI)
0 < TI3 < TI2 < TI1
Temperature
TI3 TI2
Target TI1
Measured value in proportional operation
value(SV)
Measured value in PI operation
Time
Integral time (TI)

Output (MV)
0 < TI3 < TI2 < TI1

TI3
Output in PI operation
TI2 TI1
Output in proportional operation
Time
Important point
The integral operation changes the output so that the continuously generated deviation is eliminated.
As a result, the remaining deviation generated in the proportional operation can be eliminated.
Deviation
Deviation (EV)
Time
Output of
"proportional operation + integral operation"
Output of integral operation

Output
Output of proportional operation
Proportional gain (KP) × Deviation (E)
Time
Integral time (TI)
M-14
3.2.6 Differential gain (KD): (S3)+5

K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
PID control: Differential operation
-ADP
The filter is applied to the output at the differential operation.
Only the differential operation is affected by the differential gain (KD).
• When the differential gain (KD) is small, the output is immediately given with regard to changes in the
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
measured value (PV) caused by disturbance, etc.
• When the differential gain (KD) is large, the output is given after a long time with respect to changes in the
measured value (PV) caused by disturbance, etc.
-ADP
Important points
Set the differential gain (KD) to "0", and then adjust the operation using the input filter (α). M
If the output response is too close to the disturbance, increase the differential gain (KD).
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
3.2.7 Differential time (TD): (S3)+6
Setting range: 0 to 32767 [× 10 ms]

PID control: Differential operation
Use the differential time (TD) to respond sensitively to fluctuations in the measured value (PV) caused by
disturbance, etc. and to minimize the fluctuations.
• When the differential time (TD) is large, it becomes to prevent large fluctuation in the control target caused
by disturbance, etc.
• It is not always necessary to use the differential time (when disturbance is small, for example).
TD3 (PID operation)

Deviation
Disturbance
TD1 (PID operation) Deviation (EV)
TD2 (PID operation)
Time
TD3 (PID operation)

Output (MV)
TD3 > TD2 > TD1

TD2 (PID operation)
TD1 (PID operation)
Time
M-15
Example 1: PID operation in heating (backward operation)

Changes caused by disturbance
TD3 (PID operation)
Target value (SV)
Temperature
PI operation (without differential operation)

TD2 (PID operation)
TD1 (PID operation)
TD3 > TD2 > TD1
Time
Output (MV)
Changes in output caused by disturbance
TD3 (PID operation)

TD3 > TD2 > TD1
TD1 (PID operation)
TD2 (PID operation)
Time
Example 2: PID operation in cooling (forward operation)
TD3 > TD2 > TD1

Temperature
Changes caused by disturbance

TD1 (PID operation)
TD2 (PID operation)
Target value (SV)

TD3 (PID operation)
Time
TD3 > TD2 > TD1

Output (MV)
Changes in output caused by disturbance
TD2 (PI operation)

TD1 (PID operation)
TD3 (PID operation)
Time
M-16
3.2.8 Alarm output flag: (S3)+24

K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
When the input variation [ S3 +1, bit 1] is set to 1
-ADP
Variation
L
Measured value (PV)
FX3U-4AD-TC
-ADP
M
PID Instruction
(FNC 88)
Time
Sampling time (TS)
Alarm flag
ON
S3 +24
bit0
ON
S3 +24
bit1
When the output variation [ S3 +1, bit 2] is set to 1
Variation
Output (MV)
Variation
Time
Sampling time (TS)
Alarm flag
ON
S3 +24
bit2
ON
S3 +24
bit3
- When the preset input/output variation is exceeded:

Each bit of S3 +24 (alarm flags) turns ON immediately after PID instruction execution.
M-17
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Auto-Tuning
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 4.1 Limit Cycle Method
4. Auto-Tuning
This chapter describes the auto-tuning function of PID instruction.
The auto-tuning function will automatically set the important constants, such as the proportional gain and the
integral time, to ensure optimum PID control.
There are two auto-tuning methods: limit cycle method and step response method.
4.1 Limit Cycle Method
4.1.1 Parameters set in auto-tuning (of limit cycle method)
Parameter Setting position

Proportional gain (KP) S3 +3
Integral time (TI) S3 +4
Differential time (TD) S3 +6
M-18
4.1.2 Auto-tuning procedure

K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
1 Set the forward or backward operation
-ADP
Set the operation direction flag (bit 0) in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +1.
L
2 Select the auto-tuning method (limit cycle method)
FX3U-4AD-TC
Set the auto-tuning method to ON (bit 6) in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +1.
(When bit 6 is set to OFF, the step response method is selected.)
-ADP
3 Set the auto-tuning execution flag to ON M
PID Instruction
Set the auto-tuning execution flag to ON (bit 4) in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +1.
(FNC 88)
Set the input filter
Set the input filter in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +2.
5 Set the sampling time

Set the sampling time S3 .
6 Set the Upper Limit Value (ULV)

Set the Upper Limit Value (ULV) of the output value (MV) in the operation setting parameter (ACT)
S3 +26.
7 Set the Lower Limit Value (LLV)

Set the Lower Limit Value (LLV) of the output value (MV) in the operation setting parameter (ACT)
S3 +27.
8 Set the threshold (hysteresis) (SHPV)

Set the threshold (hysteresis) width (SHPV) in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +25.
9 Set the target value (SV)

Set the target value (SV) to S1 in PID instruction.
10 Set the ON PID instruction command input to start auto-tuning

Auto-tuning is executed according to the measured value (PV).
↓
When auto-tuning is completed, the auto-tuning flag (bit 4 and bit 6) turns OFF in the operation set-
ting parameter (ACT) S3 +1.
M-19
4.1.3 Reference: How to obtain three constants in PID control (limit cycle method)
For acquiring satisfactory control results in PID control, it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each
constant (parameter) suitable to the control target.
This paragraph explains the limit cycle method to obtain the amplitude (a) and vibration cycle (τ, τon) of the
input value, and then calculate the proportional gain (KP), integral time (TI) and differential time (TD) based on
the expressions shown in the table below.
What is the limit cycle method

Changes in the input value in two-position control (in which the output Upper Limit Value (ULV) and output
Lower Limit Value (LLV) are switched according to the deviation) are measured, and then three constants in
the PID control are obtained.
Operation characteristics (in an example of backward operation)

During the "τw" period after the tuning cycle is finished, the output value is held at the output Lower Limit
Value (LLV), and then normal PID control is started.
The value "τw" can be obtained by the expression "τw = (50 + Kw)/100 × (τ-τon)", and the wait setting
parameter "Kw" can be set in the parameter S3 +28.
(Setting range: Kw = −50 to +32717[%])
(When the abnormal range is specified, "τw" is handled as "0")
Output value
ULV
(Output upper
limit value)
LLV
(Output lower
limit value)
Time
Input value
SV+SHPV
SV(target value) a
SV-SHPV
τ
τ on τw
τ0 τ1 τ2 Time(s)
SHPV: PV input threshold (hysteresis)
Operation characteristics and three constants

Control type Proportional gain (KP) [%] Integral time (TI) [×100ms] Differential time (TD) [×10ms]
Only proportional 1
(ULV - LLV ) ×100 ⎯ ⎯
control (P operation) a
PI control 0.9 (
ULV - LLV) ×100 τ on
(PI operation) a
33 × τ on 1 - ⎯
τ
PID control 1.2 (
ULV - LLV) ×100 τon τon
(PID operation) a 20 × τ on 1 - 50 × τ on 1 -
τ τ
M-20
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 4.2 Step Response Method
4.2 Step Response Method

K
FX3U-4AD-PNK
4.2.1 Parameters to be set by auto-tuning (step response method)
-ADP
Parameter
Operation setting (ACT)
Setting position Parameter
Integral time (TI)
Setting position
L
S3 +1, bit 0 (operation direction) S3 +4
FX3U-4AD-TC
Proportional gain (KP) S3 +3 Differential time (TD) S3 +6
-ADP
4.2.2 Auto-tuning procedure
M
1 Transferring the output value for auto-tuning to the output value D
PID Instruction
Set the output value for auto-tuning to the maximum available output value multiplied by 0.5 to 1 for
(FNC 88)
the output equipment.
2 Setting the parameter S3 , target value (SV), etc. that cannot be set in auto-
tuning according to the system
Note that auto-tuning may not be executed normally if the cautions described below are not fol-
lowed
1. Set items
Set item and parameter Remarks
The difference from the measured value (PV) should be 150 or more.
Target value (SV) S1
(For the details, refer to "2. Cautions on setting" below.)
Sampling time (TS) S3 1,000 ms or more (For the details, refer to "2. Cautions on setting" below.)
Input filter (α) S3 +2
Differential gain (KD) S3 +5 When setting the input filter, set the differential gain to "0" usually.
Others Set other items, as necessary.
2. Cautions on setting
1) Difference between the target value (SV) and the measured value (PV)
If the difference between the target value (SV) and the measured value (PV) is less than 150 when auto-
tuning is started, auto-tuning is not executed normally.
Accordingly, if the difference is less than 150, set the target value for auto-tuning.
Set the target value again when auto-tuning is completed.
Set item Setting in PID instruction
Make sure that the difference from the measured value is 150 or
Target value (SV) S1
more when auto-tuning is started.
2) Sampling time (TS) S3

Make sure the sampling time is set for auto-tuning to 1 second (1000 ms) or more.
It is recommended that the sampling time is set to that it is considerably longer than the output change
cycle.
3 Setting to ON bit 4 of S3 +1 (operation setting ACT) to start auto-tuning

When the variation from the measured value at the start of auto-tuning to the target value reaches
1/3 or more, auto-tuning is completed. And bit 4 of S3 +1 (operation setting ACT) is
automatically set to OFF.
1. Important point
Start auto-tuning while the system is stable.
If the system is unstable when auto-tuning is started, auto-tuning may not be executed normally.
M-21
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 4.3 Cautions on Auto-Tuning Execution
4.2.3 Reference: How to obtain three constants in PID control (step response method)
For acquiring satisfactory control results during PID control, it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each
constant (parameter) suitable for the control target.
This paragraph explains the step response method to obtain three constants in the PID control (proportional
gain (KP), integral time (TI) and differential time (TD)).
What is the step response method

In this method, by giving stepped output from 0 to 100%*1 to the control system, three constants in the PID
control are obtained from the operation characteristics (maximum ramp (R) and dead time (L)) and the input
value variation.
*1. The stepped output may be obtained from 0 to 75% or from 0 to 50%.
Operation characteristics
100%
Output value Output value (MV)
0%
Time
Input value
variation Maximum ramp (R)
Time (s)
Dead time (L) 1 (s)
[s]
Operation characteristics and three constants

Control type Proportional gain (KP) [%] Integral time (TI) [×100ms] Differential time (TD) [×10ms]
Only proportional 1 × Output value ×100
⎯ ⎯
control (P operation) RL (MV)
PI control 0.9 × Output value ×100

33 L ⎯
(PI operation) RL (MV)
PID control 1.2 × Output value ×100

20 L 50 L
(PID operation) RL (MV)
4.3 Cautions on Auto-Tuning Execution
1. Countermeasures with in the program when the input value (PV) does not change
When the input value (PV) does not change normally due to factors such as wire breakage in an analog input
line, auto-tuning is not finished.
Detect and avoid such occurrences by introducing a sequence to monitor the input value or the elapsed time
from the start of auto-tuning.
M-22
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs (for Step Response Method)
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 5.1 Example: System and operation
FX3U-4AD-PNK
5. Example of Practical Programs (for Step Response Method)
-ADP
The following is an example of a program for the operation application system shown below. L
FX3U-4AD-TC
5.1 Example: System and operation
System configuration
-ADP
Temperature sensor Shielded compensating
(Thermocouple) conductor
M
PID Instruction
X10 X11
ch2
(FNC 88)
FX3U-32MR/ FX2N-16EYT- FX2N-4AD-
ES ESS/UL*1
TC
COM Y20 Y21
Temperature Error indication
chamber
Electric heater X010: Auto-tuning command

*1: Since turning on/off is frequently carried out, be sure to use the X011: PID control command
transistor outputs.
Setting contents
During auto- During PID
Item
tuning control
Target value S1 500 (+50 °C) 500 (+50 °C)
Sampling time (TS) S3 3000 ms 500 ms
Input filter (α) S3 +2 70 % 70 %
Differential gain (KD) S3 +5 0% 0%

Parameters
2000
Output value upper limit S3 +22 2000
(2 seconds)
Output value lower limit S3 +23 0 0
Input variation alarm bit 1 of S3 +1 Not provided Not provided

Operation direction
Output variation alarm bit 2 of S3 +1 Not provided Not provided
(ACT)
Output value upper/lower limit setting bit 5 of S3 +1 Provided Provided
According to
Output value D 1800
operation
1. Operation of the electric heater

1) During PID control
D502 × 1 ms <ON duration>
OFF ON ON ON ON ON
2 sec (2000 ms) 2 sec (2000 ms) 2 sec (2000 ms)

<cycle>
2) During auto-tuning: When the output is 90 % of the maximum output
1.8 sec (1800 ms) 1.8 sec (1800 ms) 1.8 sec (1800 ms)
2 sec (2000 ms) 2 sec (2000 ms) 2 sec (2000 ms)
M-23
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 5.2 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method) and PID control
5.2 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method) and PID control
Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 12 K500 D500 The target value is set (to 50 °C).
MOV
FNC 12 K 70 D512 The input filter constant () is set

MOV (to 70 %).
FNC 12 K0 D515 The differential gain (KD) is set

MOV (to 0 %).
FNC 12 K2000 D532 The output value upper limit is set

MOV (to ON for 2 sec).
FNC 12 K0 D533 The output value lower limit is set

MOV (to ON for 0 sec).
PID control is started
after auto-tuning
X010
PLS M0 The auto-tuning setting is started.
(without auto-tuning) Auto-tuning setting flag
X011 M0
SET M1 Auto-tuning ON flag
FNC 12 The sampling time (Ts) for auto-

K3000 D510 tuning is set (to 3 sec).
MOV
FNC 12 Operation setting (ACT)

H0031 D511 Auto-tuning is started.
MOV
FNC 12 The output value for auto-tuning is

K1800 D502 set (to ON for 1.8 sec).
Auto-tuning ON flag MOV
M1 The sampling time (Ts) for normal
FNC 12 K500 D510
MOVP operation is set (to 500 ms).
Initial pulse
M8002 The mode of FX2N-4AD-TC is set.
FNC 79 K0 K0 H3303 K1 Ch 1: Unused Ch 3: Unused
TO Ch 2: K type Ch 4: Unused
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 78 K0 K 10 D501 K1 Data is read from the channel 2 in
FROM FX2N-4AD-TC.
Initial pulse
M8002
RST D502 The PID operation is initialized.
PID control is
started after PID control is started
auto-tuning (without auto-tuning)
X010 X011

(without auto-tuning)
X11
FNC 88 D500 D501 D510 D502 PID instruction is driven.
PID control is PID
started after
auto-tuning
X10
M3 The PID operation is executed.
M-24
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 5.2 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method) and PID control
FX3U-4AD-PNK
Auto-tuning ON flag
M1
-ADP
FNC 12 Auto-tuning operation is
D511 K2M10 confirmed.
MOV
Auto-tuning ON flag L
M14
FX3U-4AD-TC
PLF M2 Auto-tuning is finished.
Auto-tuning is finished
-ADP
M2
RST M1 The normal operation is started.
M
PID operation is executed.
PID Instruction
M3
T246 Heater operation cycle
(FNC 88)
K2000
Heater operation cycle
T246
[ RST T246 ] Preset
PID operation
is executed.
M3
T246 < D502 PID operation is executed.

M3
FNC226 T246 D502 Y021 Heater output
LD <
Error flag
M8067
Y020 Error occurs.
END
M-25
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 5.3 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method)
5.3 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method)
Auto-tuning is started.
X010
FNC 12 K500 D500 The target value is set (to 50°C).
MOVP
FNC 12 The output value for auto-tuning is

K1800 D502 set (to ON for 1.8 sec).
MOV
FNC 12 The sampling time (Ts) is set

K3000 D510 (to 3 sec).
MOVP
FNC 12 H0031 D511 Operation setting (ACT)

MOVP Auto-tuning is started.
FNC 12 K 70 D512 The input filter constant (α) is set

MOVP (to 70%).
FNC 12 The differential gain (KD) is set

K0 D515 (to 0%).
MOVP
FNC 12 K2000 D532 The output value upper limit is set

MOVP (to ON for 2 sec).
FNC 12 K0 D533 The output value lower limit is set

MOVP (to ON for 0 sec).
PLS M0 Auto-tuning is started.
M0
SET M1 PID instruction operation
Initial pulse
M8002 The mode of FX2N-4AD-TC is set.
FNC 79 K0 K0 H3303 K1 Ch 1: Unused Ch 3: Unused
TO Ch 2: K type Ch 4: Unused
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 78 K0 K 10 D501 K1 Data is read from the channel 2
FROM in FX2N-4AD-TC.
X010
RST D502 The PID output is initialized.
PID
operation
M1
PID
operation
M1
FNC 88 D500 D501 D510 D502 PID instruction
PID
FNC 12 Auto-tuning operation is

D511 K2M10 confirmed.
MOV
Auto-tuning ON flag
M14
PLF M2 Auto-tuning is finished.
Auto-tuning is finished.
M2
RST M1 Auto-tuning is completed.
M-26
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 5.3 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method)
FX3U-4AD-PNK
PID operation
M1
Heater operation cycle timer
-ADP
T246 (2 sec)
K2000
L
T246
The heater operation cycle timer
FX3U-4AD-TC
RST T246 is preset.
PID
operation
M1
-ADP
PID operation
M1
M
FNC226
PID Instruction
T246 D502 Y021 Heater output
LD <
(FNC 88)
Error flag
M8067
Y020 Error occurs.
END
M-27
PID Instruction (FNC 88) 6.1 Error Codes
6. Troubleshooting
6.1 Error Codes

When an error occurs in the set value of a control parameter or the data acquired during the PID operation,
the operation error flag M8067 turns ON, and a corresponding error code is stored in D8067.
Error
Error description Action
code
6730 Incorrect sampling time (TS) (TS ≤ 0)
Incorrect input filter constant (α)
6732
(α < 0 or 100 ≤ α)
<PID operation is stopped.>
6733 Incorrect proportional gain (KP) (KP < 0) A data error has occurred in the set value in a control parameter
6734 Incorrect integral time (TI) (TI < 0) or in the middle of PID operation.
Check the parameters.
Incorrect derivative gain (KD)
6735
(KD < 0 or 201 ≤ KD)
6736 Incorrect derivative time (TD) (TD < 0)
<Auto-tuning is continued.>
6740 Sampling time (TS) ≤ Operation cycle The operation is continued in the condition "sampling time (TS)
= cyclic time (operation cycle)."
Variation of measured value exceeds limit.
6742
(PV < −32768 or +32767 < PV)
Deviation exceeds limit.
6743
(EV < −32768 or +32767 < EV)
Integral result exceeds limit.
6744 <PID operation is continued.>
(Out of range from −32768 to +32767)
The operation is continued with each parameter set to the
Derivative value exceeds limit due to derivative gain maximum or minimum value.
6745
(KD).
Derivative result exceeds limit.
6746
PID operation result exceeds limit.
6747
<Output upper limit value and output lower limit value are
PID output upper limit set value < PID output lower limit
6748 exchanged for each other. → PID operation is continued.>
set value
Check whether the target settings are correct.
Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output <Alarm output is not given. → PID operation is continued.>
6749
variation alarm set value (Set value < 0) Check whether the target settings are correct.
<Auto-tuning is finished. → PID operation is started.>
• The deviation at start of auto-tuning is 150 or less.
<Step response method> • The deviation at end of auto-tuning is 1/3 or more of the
6750
Improper auto-tuning result deviation at start of auto-tuning.
Confirm the measured value and target value, and then execute
auto-tuning again.
<Auto-tuning is forced to finish. → PID operation does not
started.>
The operation direction estimated from the measured value at
<Step response method> the start of auto-tuning was different from the actual operation
6751
Auto-tuning operation direction mismatch direction of the output during auto-tuning.
Correct the relationship among the target value, output value
for auto-tuning and measured value, and then execute auto-
tuning again.
M-28
Error
K
Error description Action
FX3U-4AD-PNK
code
<Auto-tuning is finished. → PID operation is not started.>
Because the set value fluctuated during auto-tuning, auto-
-ADP
<Step response method> tuning was not executed correctly.
6752
Improper auto-tuning operation Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change
cycle, or set a larger value to the input filter constant.
After changing the setting, execute auto-tuning again.
L
FX3U-4AD-TC
<Limit cycle method>
6753 Abnormal output set value for auto-tuning
[ULV (upper limit) ≤ LLV (lower limit)] <Auto-tuning is forcibly finished. → PID operation is not
-ADP
started.>
<Limit cycle method> Check whether the target settings are correct.
6754 Abnormal PV threshold (hysteresis) set value for auto-
tuning (SHPV < 0) M
PID Instruction
<Limit cycle method> <Auto-tuning is forcibly finished. → PID operation is not
Abnormal auto-tuning transfer status started.>
6755
(FNC 88)
(Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally Verify that devices occupied by PID instruction are not
overwritten.) overwritten in the program.
<Auto-tuning is forcibly finished. → PID operation is not
started.>
The auto-tuning time is too long.
Increase the difference (ULV - LLV) between the upper limit and
6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto-tuning
the lower limit of the output value for auto-tuning, set a smaller
measurement time (τon > τ, τon < 0, τ < 0)
value to the input filter constant (α), or set a smaller value to the
PV threshold (SHPV) for auto-tuning, and then check whether
the result is improved.
<Auto-tuning is finished (KP = 32767). → PID operation is
started.>
The variation of the measured value (PV) is small compared
6757 Auto-tuning result exceeds proportional gain. (KP = Out
with the output value. Multiply the measured value (PV) by "10"
of range from 0 to 32767)
so that the variation of the measured value will increase during
auto-tuning.
<Limit cycle method> <Auto-tuning is finished (KP = 32767). → PID operation is
6758 Auto-tuning result exceeds integral time. started.>
(TI = Out of range from 0 to 32767) The auto-tuning time is too long.
Increase the difference (ULV - LLV) between the upper limit and
<Limit cycle method> the lower limit of the output value for auto-tuning, set a smaller
6759 Auto-tuning result exceeds derivative time. value to the input filter constant (α), or set a smaller value to the
(TD = Out of range from 0 to 32767) PV threshold (SHPV) for auto-tuning, and then check whether
the result is improved.
Caution
With regard to the measured value (PV) in PID, normal measurement data should be read before PID
operation begins.
Especially when the PID operation is executed to the input value in an analog input block, pay attention to the
conversion time.
M-29
MEMO
M-30
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Warranty
Warranty
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range 2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be production
the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the (1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be seven (7) years after production of the product is
repaired at no cost via the sales representative or discontinued.
Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are Discontinuation of production shall be notified with
required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's (2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available
discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any after production is discontinued.
re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that 3. Overseas service
involves replacement of the failed module. Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local
overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
[Gratis Warranty Term]
each FA Center may differ.
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one
year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated 4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary
place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from loss from warranty liability
Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not
months, and the longest gratis warranty term after be liable for compensation to:
manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis (1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the
warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis responsibility of Mitsubishi.
warranty term before repairs. (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by
Failures of Mitsubishi products.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and
usage state, usage methods and usage environment, compensation for damages to products other than
etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., Mitsubishi products.
given in the instruction manual, user's manual and (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site
caution labels on the product. equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be 5. Changes in product specifications
charged for in the following cases. The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or technical documents are subject to change without prior
handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. notice.
Failure caused by the user's hardware or software 6. Product application
design. (1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., controller, the usage conditions shall be that the
to the product by the user. application will not lead to a major accident even if any
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a problem or fault should occur in the programmable
user's device, Failure that could have been logic controller device, and that backup and fail-safe
avoided if functions or structures, judged as functions are systematically provided outside of the
necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device for any problem or fault.
device is subject to or as necessary by industry (2) The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been
standards, had been provided. designed and manufactured for applications in general
4. Failure that could have been avoided if industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public
consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and
designated in the instruction manual had been other power plants operated by respective power
correctly serviced or replaced. companies, and applications in which a special quality
5. Relay failure or output contact failure caused by assurance system is required, such as for Railway
usage beyond the specified Life of contact companies or Public service purposes shall be
(cycles). excluded from the programmable logic controller
6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such applications.
as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused In addition, applications in which human life or property
by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft,
wind and water damage. medical applications, incineration and fuel devices,
7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by manned transportation, equipment for recreation and
scientific technology standards at time of shipment amusement, and safety devices, shall also be
from Mitsubishi. excluded from the programmable logic controller range
8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of applications.
of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the However, in certain cases, some applications may be
user. possible, providing the user consults their local
Mitsubishi representative outlining the special
requirements of the project, and providing that all
parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at the users discretion.
i
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Revised History
Revised History
Date Revision Description
7/2005 A First Edition
2/2006 B • FX3U-4AD is added to B.
• FX3U-4DA is inserted to D.
• Adding and revising the other descriptions.
3/2006 C • B-8 page, 2.2 The Power Supply Specification for the FX3U-4AD, regarding the
A/D conversion circuit drive power:
Revised from [24V DC ±10%, 80mA] to [24VDC ±10%, 90mA]
3/2007 D • JIS (Japanese Industrial Standards) for temperature sensors are added
• Clerical error correction
12/2007 E • FX3UC (D, DSS) Series PLC added
• FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP is inserted to G
11/2008 F • FX3G Series PLC added
• FX3G-2AD-BD is added to D.
• FX3G-1DA-BD is added to G.
• FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP is added to H.
6/2009 G • FX3U-3A-ADP is added to H.
• The hardware error function of FX3U-4DA-ADP is added.
• Explanation corrections for manufacture's serial number.
8/2010 H • Supports the under-scale detection function of the FX3U-4AD-ADP and
FX3U-3A-ADP.
• FX3U-4LC is added.
• Explanation corrections for the manufacture's serial number.
• Addition and revision of other descriptions.
2/2012 J • FX3GC Series PLC added.
• Clerical error correction.
5/2013 K • FX3S Series PLC added.
8/2014 L • "Self-made power cable" is deleted from B.
4/2015 M • A part of the cover design is changed.
3/2016 N • Clerical error correction.
8/2016 P • Precautions for connecting the FX5U/FX5UC CPU module and FX3U-4AD/FX3U-
4DA are added.
ii
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
USER'S MANUAL
Analog Control Edition
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
MODEL FX3U-U-ANALOG-E
MODEL CODE 09R619
JY997D16701P Effective August 2016

(MEE) Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Manual Mitsubishi fx3g

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Mitsubishi fx3g

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Mitsubishi fx3g

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

Analog Control Edition

Voltage / Current Input

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

3. STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

• Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.

• Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.

Manual number JY997D16701

© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

1.1 Outline and Features of Analog Control.......................................................................................A-1

2. Description of Analog Products A-5

2.1 Types of Analog Products ............................................................................................................A-5

3. System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products A-15

3.1 FX3S Series PLC .......................................................................................................................A-15

4. Comparison of Performance Specifications A-27

4.1 Analog Input ...............................................................................................................................A-27

4.2.6 FX3G-1DA-BD ............................................................................................................................A-40

5. Version Number A-54

5.1 PLC Main Unit ............................................................................................................................A-54

6. Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment) A-57

6.1 How to Use the Manuals ............................................................................................................A-57

7. Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual A-62

B. FX3U-4AD (4-channel Analog Input)

1.1 Outline of Functions .....................................................................................................................B-3

2.1 Generic Specifications .................................................................................................................B-6

3.1 Terminal Layout .........................................................................................................................B-10

4. Analog Input B-17

4.1 Analog Input Procedures............................................................................................................B-17

5. Buffer Memory (BFM) B-19

5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory .....................................................B-19

5.4.11 BFM#28: Over-scale status ......................................................................................................B-35

6. Changing Input Characteristics B-49

6.1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics ...........................................................................B-49

7. Examples of Practical Programs B-52

7.1 Program That Uses Averaging Time..........................................................................................B-52

8.1 PLC Version Number Check ......................................................................................................B-61

C. FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input)

1.1 Outline of Functions .................................................................................................................... C-3

2.1 Generic Specifications ................................................................................................................ C-7

3.1 Terminal Layout ........................................................................................................................ C-13

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data............................................................................................... C-17

5. Changing of Input Characteristics C-28

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics................................................................ C-28

6.1 PLC Version Number Check ..................................................................................................... C-31

D. FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input)

1.1 Outline of Functions .................................................................................................................... D-3

2.1 Generic Specifications ................................................................................................................ D-7

3.1 Terminal Layout ........................................................................................................................ D-12

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data............................................................................................... D-15

5. Changing of Input Characteristics D-22

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics................................................................ D-22

6.1 PLC Version Number Check ..................................................................................................... D-23

E. FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output)

1.1 Outline of Functions .....................................................................................................................E-3

2.1 Generic Specifications .................................................................................................................E-6

3.1 Terminal Layout .........................................................................................................................E-10

4. Analog Output E-13

4.1 Analog Output Procedures.........................................................................................................E-13